POSTALE 2008 Proceedings

Policies, Statutes &
Legislation in Mines
National Seminar on Policies, Statutes & Legislation in Mines
POSTALE 2008
POSTALE 2008
Editors
Achyuta Krishna Ghosh
Santosh Kumar Ray
Aditya Kumar Patra
POSTALE 2008
Proceedings of the NATIONAL SEMINAR held on Dec 20-21 2008

at Central Institute of Mining and Fuel Research, Dhanbad, India
POLICIES, STATUTES &

LEGISLATION IN MINES
POSTALE 2008
Organised by
CENTRAL INSTITUTE OF MINING & FUEL RESEARCH
DIRECTORATE GENERAL OF MINES SAFETY
NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF SMALL MINES
Edited by
ACHYUTA KRISHNA GHOSH
SANTOSH KUMAR RAY
ADITYA KUMAR PATRA
CENTRAL INSTITUTE OF MINING & FUEL RESEARCH

Dhanbad, Jharkhand, INDIA
POSTALE 2008
Organising Committee
Mr. M. M. Sharma, Chairman

Director General of Mines Safety, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Dr. Amalendu Sinha

Director, Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Chairman, Core Committee, POSTALE 2008
Mr. S. J. Sibbal
Deputy Director General of Mines Safety, Directorate General of Mines Safety, HQ,
Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Mr. Achyuta Krishna Ghosh

Senior Deputy Director, Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Convener, POSTALE 2008
Mr. B. P. Singh
Director of Mines Safety (S&T), Directorate General of Mines Safety, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Coordinator, POSTALE 2008
Mr. D. K. Das
Member, Executive Committee, National Institute of Small Mines, Kolkata (W.B.)
Dr. (Mrs.) Arati Nandi

Head (R&D), National Institute of Small Mines, Kolkata (W.B.)
Co-Convener, POSTALE 2008
Dr. Mohan Prasad

Mr. Santosh Kumar Ray

Scientist, Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Dr. Aditya Kumar Patra

Advisory Committee
Mr. S. L. Chakraborty, Chairman

Former Managing Director, West Bengal Mineral Development & Trading Corp. Ltd.
Founder, National Institute of Small Mines, Kolkata (W.B.)
Prof. A. K. Ghose
Former Director, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad, (Jharkhand)
Founder Member, National Institute of Small Mines, Kolkata (W.B.)
Prof. S. P. Banerjee
Former Director, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Prof. B. B. Dhar
Former Director, Central Mining Research Institute, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Former President, National Institute of Small Mines, Kolkata (W.B.)
Mr. S. N. Padhi
Former Director General of Mines Safety, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Mr. N. C. Saxena
Former Deputy Director, Central Mining Research Institute, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Retd. Professor, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
POSTALE 2008
Dr. S. K. Sarkar
Former Deputy Director, Central Mining Research Institute, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Secretary General, Society for Mining Research, Sustainable Development & Environment,
Kolkata (W.B.)
Prof. D. D. Misra
Former Director, Central Mining Research Institute, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Mr. P. R. Mondal
Adviser (Project), Ministry of Coal, Govt. of India, New Delhi
Mr. N. L. Rungta
Director, Rungta Mines Private Ltd., Chaibasa, (Jharkhand)
Mr. Ch. Divaker

General Manager (Jharia Collieries), Tata Steel Ltd., Jamadoba, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Mr. P. Prasad
General Manager (Chasnalla Collieries), Steel Authority of India Ltd., Chasnalla, (Jharkhand)
Mr. D. S. Nigam
General Manager (R), ISP, Steel Authority of India Ltd., Kulti, (W.B.)
Prof. D. C. Panigrahi
Head, Department of Mining Engineering, Indian School of Mines University, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Prof. J. Bhattacharya
Head, Department of Mining Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur (W.B.)
Prof. U. K. Dey
Head, Department of Mining Engineering, Bihar Institute of Technology, Sindri (Jharkhand)
Patrons
Mr. Arun Kumar

Executive Director, Petroleum Conservation Research Association, New Delhi
Secretary, Oil Industry Development Board, New Delhi
Mr. S. Das
CEO, Mining & Allied Machinery Enterprises, Sanctoria, (W.B.)
Mr. S. Chakraborty
Chairman cum Managing Director, Eastern Coalfields Ltd., Sanctoria (W.B.)
Mr. T. K. Lahiri
Chairman cum Managing Director, Bharat Coking Coal Ltd., Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Mr. R. Saha
Chairman cum Managing Director, Central Coalfields Ltd., Ranchi (Jharkhand)
Mr. S. Narasing Rao, IAS

Chairman cum Managing Director, Singareni Collieries Co. Ltd., Kothagudem (A.P.)
Core Committee
Dr. Amalendu Sinha

Director, Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Chairman, Core Committee, POSTALE 2008
Mr. Achyuta Krishna Ghosh

Convenor, POSTALE 2008
POSTALE 2008
Mr. B. P. Singh
Director of Mines Safety (S&T), Directorate General of Mines Safety, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Coordinator, POSTALE 2008
Dr. (Mrs.) Arati Nandi

Head (R&D), National Institute of Small Mines, Kolkata (W.B.)
Co-Convenor, POSTALE 2008
Dr. Mohan Prasad

Treasurer, POSTALE 2008
Dr. Pramod Kumar Arya

Deputy Director, Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Mr. Santosh Kumar Singh

Dr. M. S. Alam
Mr. Subhasis Biswas

Scientist, Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research, Digwadih, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Mr. Santosh Kumar Ray
Dr. Aditya Kumar Patra

Dr. G. M. Prasad
Dr. A. K. Singh
Mr. Dilip Kumbhakar

Mr. Prabhat Kumar Mondal

Mr. Ashis De
Exec. Engineer, Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research, Digwadih, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Mr. D. Rath
Purchase Officer, Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research, Digwadih, Dhanbad (Jharkhand)
Volunteers
Ms. Sneha Rai1
Ms. Joyitta Banerjee1
Mr. Vikas Kumar Sinha1
Mr. Vivek Kumar1
Mr. Kumar Kunal Nanbetiya1
Mrs. Twisha Adhikary**
Mr. Ranjit Chaurasia1
Mr. Debjit Pal**
Mr. Anand Prakash1
Ms. Anjali Kumari**
Research Fellow, CIMFR, Dhanbad
** Research Fellow, NISM, Dhanbad
POSTALE 2008
FOREWORD
Mining, the only basic industry beyond agriculture and the mother of all other industries as well,
comprises the extraction of non-renewable natural resources of ores, minerals and fossil fuels from
their natural abodes in the crust of Mother Earth. As a result, the damage of nature is an inevitable
and very often a discernible consequence of any mining activity. In addition, even a little carelessness in it in any way, aggravates the damage by many folds. Moreover, mining is commonly perceived as a hazardous business as its accidents often cost lives and assets.
At the same time, today human civilization cannot survive without mining. Kautilya (also known as
Chanakya & Vishnugupta, c. 340-293 BC), the father of modern economics and political science who
first laid down the basic rules of governance and fiscal management of a state in his ARTHASHASTRA,
highlighted the significance of mining in a society and stated, Mines are the source of treasury, from
treasury comes the power of Government. This paradox has been nicely described by Joseph
Wood Krutch (1893-1970) a noted American literary naturalist, a teacher, a critic, a biographer, an
editor, a journalist, and a public speaker, as, If people destroy something replaceable made by
mankind, they are called vandals; if they destroy something irreplaceable made by nature, they are
called developers.
To waste, to destroy, our natural resources, to skin and exhaust the land instead of using it so as to
increase its usefulness, will result in undermining in the days of our children the very prosperity
which we ought by right to hand down to them [Theodore Roosevelt, Message to Congress on 3rd
December, 1907]. Thus, to control the wastage of mineral resources confirming their appropriate
conservation, to ensure safety in mines and their surroundings, to minimise and mitigate the mutilation and pollution of nature caused by mining and mineral processing, as well as to meet the social
demands with fulfillment of economic boundary conditions, we formulate and put into practice different policies and statutes that call for reviews, amendments and reforms from time to time in tune
with the new scientific and technological discoveries, inventions and innovations, and the changes in
economic and social scenario through elaborate and open discussions and debates among the
stakeholders of mining industry covering all the sections of mining society.
Mining stands apart from any other industries not alone for its seemingly damaging look, but also for
several other aspects, and thus needs a special attention on this issue. Thus, to provide a common
platform for Indian mining community for this discourse, CENTRAL INSTITUTE OF MINING & FUEL
RESEARCH (CIMFR), [formerly Central Mining Research Institute (CMRI)], with DIRECTORATE
GENERAL OF MINES SAFETY (DGMS) and NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF SMALL MINES (NISM), held a National
Seminars on Policies, Statutes and Legislation in Small and Medium Mines in 2002 [POSTALE
2002], and again on Policies, Statutes and Legislation in Mines in 2005 [POSTALE 2005].
In the current milieu, when several states have drawn up their mineral policies, major changes in
mining statutes are in the offing, prominent modifications have been made in the principle and procedure of appraisal of environmental impacts, National R&R Policy (NRRP 2007), Jharkhand R&R
Policy (JRRP-08) and R&R Policy of Coal India Ltd. have been announced, Hazardous Materials
(Management, Handling & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2007 is coming up, and several old
controversies and conflicts on various policies, statutes and practices are still left unresolved, we feel
that the time is now ripe enough to hold a third such seminar in 2008.
Therefore, CIMFR, DGMS and NISM have now come together again to organise the NATIONAL
SEMINAR ON POLICIES, STATUTES & LEGISLATION IN MINES 2008 [POSTALE 2008], the third one in
the series, at CIMFR in Dhanbad on December 20-21, 2008.
The organisation and success of this seminar is due mainly to the valuable contributions from the
authors, the efforts of the organising institutes and the members of different committees and many
other individuals. On behalf of the POSTALE 2008 Core Committee I am thankful to every individual who has contributed in some form or other in materialization of this seminar.
CIMFR, Dhanbad
December 12, 2008
AMALENDU SINHA
DIRECTOR, CIMFR
CHAIRMAN, CORE COMMITTEE
POSTALE 2008
POSTALE 2008
FROM
THE
CONVENORS DESK
PROLOGUE
Mining is the only basic industry other than agriculture and farming that provides natural resources to mankind
for its survival and development, but unlike the latter its reserves are non-replenishable. In consequence of a
few unique virtues and vices, mining stands apart from all other industries. Although it has some strong negative attributes, it can never be substituted as it supplies the basic raw materials for all other industries that in
turn meet our day-to-day needs. This single reason is good enough to establish the claim of this industry for a
very special attention and specific treatment in all aspects in general, and on the policies, statutes and legislation in particular, as they provide the prime guidelines for modus operandi for this industry.
Let us have a glance at those distinctive features to set the milieu for further deliberations.
MAN & MINE
As every mine has a limited non-renewable geological reserve, whether large or small, unlike any
other industry, the life of a mine bears striking resemblances to human life. A mine is conceived
through the process of discovery an ore or mineral deposit, its exploration, feasibility evaluation
and finally long-term planning of working.
It is followed by a period of gestation. An entry is made to the deposit by making a box cut, or
sinking shafts, or driving inclines/declines/adits. The deposit is developed by excavating roadways
and simultaneously building up other infrastructures to strengthen it to comfortably handle its business with techno-economic sustainability while it would come in production. It is like a foetus
growing to a baby in its mothers womb.
In time, a baby is born after its adequate growth in mothers womb. Likewise, a mining project,
being suitably equipped and sufficiently developed, starts producing and thus turns into a fullfledged mine. In other words, a new mine is born.
With time it gradually grows with its production and productivity steadily improving with expansion and improvement of infrastructures, as a baby grows through childhood and adolescence
with proper care, education and training. Finally, the mine attains its peak performance level and
enjoys its youthful run over a period.
Then comes its middle age with its yield and efficiency slowly declining and its maintenance
and overhead costs gradually rising, just like the expenses on family maintenance and medical
bills go up for a man in his middle age. In the process, both, man and a mine, survive a few
small and big techno-economic jolts by virtue of its long experience.
Just as old age creeps in a mans life and finally ends at death, with the passage of
time, depending on its geological reserve and technoeconomic boundary conditions,
a mine gets old and starts shrinking, initially little by little but gradually at a faster
rate, till the last bit of reserve is mined when it breathes its last.
Statutorily speaking, the last rites of a mine are performed by closing it. In case of
human being, this is done following some predefined traditional norms and legal
procedures. For mines, it should be done following scientific and systematic methods of mine closure.
A few weeks ago I had an opportunity to visit the iron ore mining belt in ChaibasaBarbil region. The broken, dusty roads of that area, which used to be overcrowded
round the clock and often jammed with dumpers and trucks plying with overloads of
iron ore, were lying empty with little traffic movement. Many small and medium
quarries were out of operation with their machines and equipment standing still and silent. Harsh
impacts of global fiscal meltdown, leading to drastic drop of mineral price and sudden fall of demand
in market, were obvious all over the place.
The techno-economically strongest mines have largely absorbed this shock but their
yield has gone down; the medium ones are palpitating for the lack of nourishment;
POSTALE 2008
and the weakest ones have already slipped into coma. In course of time, as the period of economic
recession will be over, some of the mines currently out of operation will come back to life, but many
of the smallest and weakest ones may not ever operate again. Does it not resemble what we are
likely to see in a society having people from wide economic cross-section if it be hit by a wide-spread
epidemic or famine?
Likewise, if we delve deeper into it, we may perhaps find that each and every major event or phase
in the life of any mine has a parallel in human life.
MINING & OTHER INDUSTRIES
At this juncture one may ask how the cessation of operation in those mines, whether for the time being or forever, is different from the so-called temporary closure of the Dunlop, the recently-reopened once-renowned
tyre manufacturing company in West Bengal, owing to the same economic slump. In fact, during my abovementioned visit, as I expressed the resemblance of the current status of iron ore mining of that region with society, someone raised this point.
It is right that many industries all over the world have recently been closed down due to the collapse of global
market, and so have these mines as well. And, like these mines here, some of those industries will also spring
back to life once the dark days are over, but some will be lost permanently.
When an industry, whether mining or non-mining, loses its economic viability and lacks appropriate technoeconomic backup to update its state of art, it is shut down. Of course, this supposition does not hold good for
the Indian public sector industries including the nationalised mining industries, many of which continue to run
even after incurring continuous loss.
Nevertheless, there is a basic difference in the revival of those non-mining industries with that of a mine even
in the situation of an economic setback. For a non-mining industry the revival would solely depend on the
availability of economic support for the maintenance of the existing system in the lean period, and/or for the
technical up-gradation of the system in the post-recession period as and when needed. If this backing is available, that industry may run again for years to come, provided its products have not become obsolete.
On the other hand, for a mine that has now gone out of production because of non-profitability, the availability
of fund will not be the only criterion for its revival as the market would shoot up in future. The mineable reserve the then available in that given leasehold would play the key role.
The art and science of mining has developed over ages from mans repetitive adventurous quests to unveil the
secrets of nature below ground, and to unearth and acquire what he thought useful and valuable. At times these
attempts have been proved to be fatal, either because of our ignorance, or due to our callousness or carelessness. Moreover, mining unquestionably has degenerative effects on geological, geographical, environmental,
ecological and socioeconomic setup of the site and its surroundings. As a result, mining is popularly known as
an unsafe, highly accident-prone industry that degrades nature. Though these accusations do not appear to be
untrue, but can we do without mining? Certainly, it is not. Then we should not overlook a few vital points
about mining as well.
Mining is perhaps the only industry that yields some production even during its construction and development.
A mine, even without its machineries and equipment, has a value much beyond the price of the land as long as
it has enough mineable resource. While, a non-mining industry, which is not running and has no machinery
and equipment in it, is simply evaluated in terms of the costs of the industrial land it covers.
A land deployed for any other industry barring agriculture and farming, is lost forever until and unless the sustainability of that system is totally upset by natural catastrophe, radical economic downfall or technological
revolution. Otherwise, a non-mining industry can be run for an indefinite period by upgrading, modifying or
changing the technology from time to time to maintain economic feasibility, and thus may retain a land for a
long time that cannot be estimated. In case a technology or a product becomes obsolete, the whole industry
may be replaced by a new and/or different one. An engineering workshop may well be substituted by a chemical factory, or vice versa, on the same piece of land. That is why a land once marked for industrial purpose is
practically lost forever for any other use. Lands used for urban habitation meets with the same fate and get
detached from its original natural setting once for all.
POSTALE 2008
For mining, it is definitely not so. Like any other industry, a mine also holds certain amount of land as long as
it runs; but contrary to them, a mine cannot be operated once its reserve is exhausted even with the best technoeconomic support. Thus mining does not retain its land perpetually. Ultimately it gives the land back; but
how, and to whom?
MINING VIS--VIS POLICIES, STATUTES & LEGISLATION
To take care of mined out land, preparation of closure plan has been made an obligatory part of mining and
environment management plans, but have we really developed any machinery to monitor whether it is being
rightly followed? Though theoretically the reply is yes, practically it is a big no in general, and for our biggest mining industry the coal mining industry, in particular.
The people in coal industry, especially those in public sector companies, still opine that a mine is not opened
for closing it. As a result, we have many underground coal mines which are in dormant state, and millions of
tonnes of coal are locked up in thousands of coal pillars in these mines. Ironically, many of them are developed
in such fashions that they can never be recovered. To add to the misery, many of such temporarily closed or
abandoned mines are waterlogged or in fire. They increase the risk of accident to their adjacent mine workings
and will remain so if scientific policies are not honestly framed and devotedly executed to eradicate them.
Ironically, while mining adjacent to a temporarily closed or abandoned working with high danger potential, we
try to take precautionary measures in the running working to avoid accidents, but we hardly take any timely
step to eliminate the possible causes of danger from the grassroots. There is no clear cut guideline for temporary closure or abandonment, nor any statutory directive to prevent such things.
The fallacy lies in the fact that an underground mine operator needs statutory permission for opening a mine as
well as for extraction of the deposit, but no permission is required to develop the mine. As a result, once
opened an underground mine operator may develop his mine at his whim, without caring for the future scope
of conservation of the resource. There are many subsurface mines that have been developed without having
any clear idea of how to work it later for extraction.
Unfortunately, our policies and their practices are often governed by short-term political effects rather than by
long-term scientific factors such as mineral conservation, economics of the state and the nation, socioeconomic
development, environmental protection etc.
Illegal mining is another basic problem in several mining belts in the country. It is unsafe not only for its practitioners, but also for the locality where it is practised. In addition, it causes considerable loss of income to
government, and being irregular and unsystematic, it wastes a lot of minerals. While in every area where illegal
mining is practised, it is known to the mine operators, concerned statutory bodies and local administration, no
one takes any initiative to prevent it. Everyone has his own alibi to evade the responsibility, though the real
reason may be different. It may be noted that though illegal mining is done in very small scale at scattered,
isolated spots in an area, it is generally remotely coordinated to unify the productions from various sites to
finally make a single business involving considerable amount of money. The patrons and sponsors of illegal
mining are usually people with social recognition for their money power and sometimes for political clout as
well.
Many amendments in Mines Act 1952 have recently been proposed for the final approval of the Parliament.
Much emphasis has been given to rationalise the penalties and procedure in tune with the present norms and
economic standards. However, not a single word has been spelt about the crime and punishment for totally
illegal mining activities that flout all laws.
Obtaining a mining lease and subsequently to have the right to open a mine are still time taking and tedious
processes though some sporadic attempts have been made by the departments of mines of a few states and centre to simplify them. But, no guideline is available at all to a mine operator for what to do with the land once a
mine is exhausted and systematically closed. There are some models available that have been published in
various papers. Some of them have been established abroad through successful implementation. However, no
sincere attempt has so far been made in India to develop any such model that may suit our system. Although, in
our country, for the wide range of minerals in different geographical and social settings with variety of mining
systems prevailing, one single model may not fit everywhere, we need to make beginning somewhere.
POSTALE 2008
A mine operator with leasehold in a forest land normally finds it difficult to get land for compensatory forestation. On the other hand, there are plenty of old, abandoned, orphan mines that lie uncared for, which can well
be used for that afforestaion. This would largely help in regain the ecological balance of the area that has been
missing so far for these abandoned, orphan mines. Unfortunately, complicacy in our present statutory system
does not allow this to happen if the ownership of the running and the abandoned mines are different.
According to the capability and suitability of land, reclamation and closure of a mine should be planned keeping in view post-mining land use to provide livelihood for local people, especially for those who might lose
their earning while the mine is closed. Duly reclaimed land of a closed mine can be used for many purposes
like agriculture, farming, pisciculture, horticulture, cultivation of medicinal plants and/or plants for bio-fuel,
wide spread market complexes and/or business centres, rural habitation or urban colonies with buildings limited to two stories, places of tourists attraction like botanical and/or zoo gardens, entertainment parks, playgrounds and stadiums etc. Baseline data for this should be generated during pre-mining planning and relevant
parameters may be periodically monitored.
Consequently, a system and culture also needs to be developed for transfer of mined out land to the people,
either through government or directly, after systematic closure. Otherwise the fundamental objective of mine
closure will be largely defeated.
Socioeconomic impact assessment (SIA) is now a statutory necessity for planning any new industrial project
including mining. It is definitely a positive and progressive move. However, the assessment procedure needs to
be tuned and modified for mining. Similarly, uniqueness of this industry calls for specific Resettlement & Rehabilitation (R&R) policy within the broad framework of National Resettlement & Rehabilitation Policy
(NRRP) 2007.
Safety economics is an ignored issue in mine management. If one asks a mine management about this, one may
get the whole account of how and how much money is being spent for safety in that mine. Management of few
mines will only tell about the economic benefit effectively enjoyed them by safety practices. There is an urgent
need of making every mine management aware of it. Preferably, every mine worker should also be made to
understand the economic benefits of safety.
Small scale mining is another area that needs specific attention of the policy makers. Small scale mining should
be categorically officially defined in with respect to Indian perspective. We cannot forget that many of the 70odd minerals produced in India are obtained exclusively from small mines. Even artisanal mining is practised
at places. Community coal mining in Meghalaya, marble mining in Makrana, Rajasthan are some of the many
small scale mining belts where lack of safety is the prime problem. Definite R&D and HRD policies should be
contrived and adopted for development of scientific and economically viable mining systems to improve
safety, production and productivity of such mines, and to educate people in small scale mining business. Financial support in form of soft loans from banks at easy terms and certain tax rebates/exemptions may be made
available to small scale mines as it is done in case of small scale industries.
There are many more areas which needs definite considerations from the standpoint of policies and statutes.
However, a major area where we have essentially failed is to make the mining community aware of the concerned policies and statutes with proper interpretations and implications. At this juncture it sounds startling that
Mines Act was first enacted in India more than a century ago in 1901.
MINING AND SOCIETY
However, despite much apathy from society, mining industry runs widely in all forms and scales in India providing strong support to the national technoeconomic development within the framework of different statutes.
It notably contributes to the economy of several states like Andhra Pradesh, Assam, Chhattisgarh, Goa, Gujarat, Jharkhand, Karnataka, Maharashtra, Madhya Pradesh, Orissa, Rajasthan, Tamil Nadu, West Bengal etc.,
and will continue to do so for decades to come.
Any achievement of mining industry hardly ever finds a place beyond the corner in business and economics
pages in a newspaper, that too in fine prints. But anything going wrong with a mine, whether an accident or a
Supreme Court verdict to close it down due to environmental reasons, often makes a front page news in bold.
How many common people really care to know about how the phenomenal rise in production of coal and iron
ore in the country in this millennium has helped in the overall national growth? How many of us have bothered
POSTALE 2008
to take note of the fact that what role this industry plays in the fiscal stability to the country in these hours of
global economic meltdown that has already put the advanced, rich and developed countries in back foot? Our
journalists do not focus on it, but they never forget to mention the loss of revenue being incurred due to the
collapse of mineral export market.
Notwithstanding its shortcomings and demerits, it is obvious that mining is an inseparable part of Indian industry for ages to come. Coal will remain the main source of energy for some more decades in future. Iron ore and
limestone will continue to provide the basic raw materials for development and construction projects. Other
mining industries will also provide vital mineral backup to the industries. Hence, with technologies improving
and changing day by day, policies, statutes and legislation in Indian mines will always have scopes to improve
through open discussion of all the stakeholders of this industry on a common platform of POSTALE.
POSTALE 2008
We started our journey in 2002, the centenary year of Directorate General of Mines Safety when we kept our
area limited to small and medium mines. In 2005 the platform was made open for all the mines irrespective of
their scale of operation. Today, in the last fortnight of 2008, we have gathered again to deliberate, discuss and
debate on the same issues with a hope to come out with some new ideas and thoughts that may help the policy
makers, the statutory bodies, the mine operators, the mine planners and designers, the researchers, the academicians, and other stakeholders of this industry in future to improve upon the existing systems.
We are thankful to all our delegates, guests, authors, sponsors and well wishers for their support in different
forms. We are grateful to all those who have directly or indirectly supported the organisation of POSTALE
2008. We beg to be excused for any slippage in its proceedings as it had to be edited a bit hurriedly due to
shortage time.
Lastly, we look forward to meet again in 2011.
CIMFR, Dhanbad
December 12, 2008
CONVENOR, POSTALE 2008
SENIOR DEPUTY DIRECTOR, CIMFR
SECRETARY GENERAL, NISM
POSTALE 2008
CONTENTS
Sl. No.
Title
Page No.
INAUGURAL ADDRESS
1
POLICIES, STATUTES & LEGISLATION IN MINES SOME POINTS TO

PONDER
M. M. Sharma
ISSUES OF SAFETY IN OPEN-PIT MINES - QUO VADIS?

A. K. Ghose
SAFETY STATUTE FOR EXPANDING MINING INDUSTRY OF INDIA

S. N. Padhi
R&R FOR MINING INDUSTRY NEEDS A SEPARATE NATIONAL POLICY

N. C. Saxena
14
IMPACT OF CHANGING SOCIO-LEGAL SCENARIO ON LAND

ACQUISITION FOR COAL MINING PROJECTS
S. K. Sarkar
23
LEGISLATION & PROCEDURE FOR THE COMMENCEMENT OF A CAPTIVE

COAL BLOCK
H. L. Gupta
29
KEYNOTE ADDRESSES
TECHNICAL PAPERS
1
POLICIES, LEGISLATIONS AND STATUTES FOR OPENCAST MINES OF

NEYVELI LIGNITE CORPORATION LTD, NEYVELI, TAMIL NADU
A. R. Ansari
43
INNOVATIVE CONCEPT OF ENERGY SAVING BY USING FRP BLADES IN

AXIAL FLOW FANS : A JOINT STUDY OF ISMU, TATA STEEL AND ENCON
D. C. Panigrahi and D. P. Misra
55
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT STRATEGY

S. K. Das
60
ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MINES CASE STUDY OF MALANJKHAND

COPPER PROJECT
G. K. Pradhan and S. Jayanthu
68
FORMULATION OF GUIDELINES ON INSTUMENTATION VIS--VIS

STRATA CONTROL CELL FOR UNDERGROUND COAL MINES
S. Jayanthu , P. Parida, A. Bhagel and G. Sreenivasa Rao
78
THROTTLES TO SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT OF SMALL-SCALE

MINING IN INDIA
S. K. Mukhopadhyay
92
RESETTLEMENT AND REHABILITATION A SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY

A. Nandi
96
MINERALOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PARTICULATE MATTER A

LEGAL REQUIREMENT FOR AIR QUALITY IN OPENCAST MINE
A. Jamal and W. N. Kumar
103
LEGISLATIVE STATUS FOR VIABLE AND EQUITABLE BALANCE

BETWEEN ENVIRONMENT AND DEVELOPMENT
C. Chandna
106
10
DUST MANAGEMENT PLAN IN MINES

V. Kumar
112
POSTALE 2008
11
REMOTE SENSING A REVIEW OF ITS APPLICATION IN MINING AND

ALLIED INDUSTRIES
A. Gaurav, and K. Dey
120
12
POLICY REQUIREMENTS FOR CLOSURE OF (ABANDONED) MINES

R. Sundar Singh, V. M. S. R. Murthy, G. Singh, P. Natesan
127
13
CLOSURE PLANNING FOR MINES -- AN APPRAISAL

D. K. Khanda and B. K. Pal
131
14
DESIGN OF LIGHTING SYSTEM IN SURFACE MINES A NEW STRATEGY

M. Aruna, Y. V. Rao and N. C. Karmakar
136
15
MINE SAFETY MEASURES IN INDIA WITH SPECIFIC REFERENCE TO

INFORMAL COAL MINING
M. K. Ghose
145
16
LEADERSHIP AND CULTURE THE KEY TO SAFETY PERFORMANCE

T. K. Jena
154
17
A PROACTIVE MASTER PLAN FOR SUSTAINABLE AND ECO-FRIENDLY

ENERGY SECURITY
S. Sen and N. Moitra
156
18
AN INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

A. K. Patra, S. K. Ray, A. Kumari, M. Prasad, M. S. Alam and A. K. Ghosh
165
19
NEED FOR SEPARATE LEGISLATION AND INVESTMENT FRINDLY

APROACH FOR UCG
S. K. Ray, D. C. Panigrahi and A. K. Ghosh
176
20
OBJECTIVE OF NO SUBSIDENCE DAMAGE TO FOREST AREAS: MULTISEAM COAL EXTRACTION STRATEGIES AND A CASE-STUDY
APPLICATION
S. K. Singh, R. Bhattacharjee, A. Kushwaha, A. K. Singh and R. Singh
182
21
EXPERIENCE OF AN ATTEMPT OF DEPILLARING OF A COAL SEAM

STANDING ON PILLARS BELOW AND ABOVE CAVED GOAVES OF TWO
DEPILLARED COAL SEAMS
A. K. Singh, A. K. Sur, A. K. Singh and S. Ram
193
22
A PROGRESSIVE MINE CLOSURE PLAN FOR AN OPENCAST LIME STONE

MINE
R. Trivedi, M .K. Chakraborty, A. G. Sangode and B. K. Tewary
202
23
SUPPORT GUIDELINES FOR DEPILLARING CAVING FACES IN INDIAN

COAL MINES
A. Kushwaha, S. Tewari and S. K. Singh
209
24
STRATA MONITORING IN LONGWALL MINES STATUTORY

PROVISIONS AND TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE
G. Banerjee, D. Kumbhakar and K. P. Yadava
219
25
ROCK MASS CLASSIFICATION APPLIED IN INDIAN UNDERGROUND

COAL MINES A LEGISLATIVE NEED AND SCOPE FOR UP-GRADATION
N. Kumar, P. Kumar, A. Paul, A. K. Singh and A. Sinha
228
26
DESIGN AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS OF FLAMEPROOF ELECTRICAL

EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN COALMINES OF INDIA
R. K. Vishwakarma, A. K. Singh, B. Ahirwal , A. Kumar, N. Kumar and H.K. Mondal
232
27
EVALUATION OF MINE WINDING ROPES AND THEIR SAFETY USING

NDT : A CASE STUDY
D. Basak
238
28
PERFORMANCE OF RFID DEVICES IN UNDERGROUND MINES

S. Kumari, V. Jha, B. Mahato, B. Kumar, L. K. Bandyopdhyay, S. K. Chaulya and
244
POSTALE 2008
P.K. Mishra
29
MINE CLOSURE OPERATION AND THE STATUTORY REQUIREMENT FOR

PREPARING A MINE PLAN
P. K. Arya, A. K. Ghosh and A. Sinha
254
30
TECHNOLOGY DRIVEN CHANGE IN SUPERIMPOSED DEVELOPMENT OF

CONTIGUOUS SECTIONS OF A THICK SEAM FOR SINGLE LIFT WORKING
OF ITS TOTAL THICKNESS
R. Singh, P. K. Mandal, A. K. Singh and R. Kumar
258
31
TESTING OF PERMITTED EXPLOSIVES SOME UNRESOLVED ISSUES

S. K. Roy, R. R. Singh and R. Kumar
266
32
POST-MINING SUBSIDENCE IMPACTS SOIL FERTILITY IN DRY

DECIDUOUS TROPICAL FOREST, INDIA
N. Tripathi, R. S. Singh, K. B. Singh and B. K. Tewary
273
33
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT AN INTEGRATIVE

APPROACH TOWARDS CONSERVATION OF BIODIVERSITY
R. S. Singh, D. Pal, M. K. Chakraborty and B. K. Tewary
280
34
PROBLEMS ON VARIOUS ASPECTS OF PLACER MINING IN INDIA AND

SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT STRATEGIES TO OVERCOME
V. Jha and M. Sundararajan
291
POSTALE 2008
INAUGURAL ADDRESS
POLICIES, STATUTES & LEGISLATION IN MINES

SOME POINTS TO PONDER
M. M. SHARMA
Director General of Mines Safety, Dhanbad
Dignitaries on the dais and sitting in the audience, the distinguished delegates, members of the
press, electronic and print media, ladies and gentlemen present in this auditorium,
At the outset, on behalf of all the organisers, I take the privilege to cordially welcome you all in this
Inauguration Ceremony of National Seminar on Policies, Statutes & Legislation, POSTALE 2008. I
express my sincere gratitude to all of you for your response to our sincere effort to organise this National Seminar, the third in its series, with the express aim of providing a forum to all the stakeholders of mining industry to share their experiences and work towards finding out practicable solutions to lessen the disputes and controversies on policies & statutes and their implementations. I am
really very glad to be here today amongst the doyens of the mining industry and to share my
thoughts with the august gathering.
It is a fact that the country as well as the mineral industry is poised for a big jump for" its growth in
the years to come. With the liberalization of Indian economy, the whole industrial society is facing
certain challenges and mining industry is no exception. The growth in the mining industry is envisaged to be manifolds. This is going to create a more complex situation as far as mine safety and
health issues are concerned. This will call for qualitative and quantitative change in formulation as
well as enforcement of mine safety management system.
New Mass production technologies are being introduced on a large scale and alternative mining
technologies like CBM, CMM, AMM or Underground coal gasification etc. are also coming up. In
metalliferous mining sector, Beach sand and Deep Sea Mining is also emerging as new field. These
new mining technologies are adding some newer dimensions of occupational safety and health problems in such mines. Existing Legislative provisions do not match with the newer technology. Standard or safe operating procedures for the new methods or equipments are yet to be developed in
certain cases, leading to unsafe operations. The existing safety management system must address
these issues so that the challenges of these new dimensions of safety with introduction of new technologies are dealt effectively
Mining industry has been opened to the private entrepreneurs and lot of mines are being opened
and operated by private operators. Lot of multinational companies are also entering' the Indian mining industry for extraction of mineral. Out sourcing of certain operations and equipment is also becoming quite common in the large Public Sector or Private 'mines. But this is also adding some new
dimension to the health and safety aspects of mining industry. Privatization and outsourcing can not
be overruled in today's context. But these issues need special attention and a suitable well defined &
structured interface is to be established between the principal employer and the contractor, defining
the responsibility in terms of maintaining safety and occupational health of the contractor's workers.
Environmental impact due to mining is a major issue today in the whole world because the impacts
are quite significant and revealing. Awareness of the general mass against damage to environment
has been increased and mining industry is under critical scanning. The Environment laws have become very stringent and the captains of the mining and mineral industry do not have any alternative
than to go for eco-friendly mining. Mine closure plan, Rehabilitation and Resettlement policies are
gaining significant importance. None the less the awareness about safety and health of mine workers has also increased and introduction of the concept of safety and disaster management by risk
assessment is a need of the hour.
POSTALE 2008
Development of a more flexible regulation with a simple and easy process for amendment will be
required to keep the regulation updated and keep pace with the changing need of the industry. In
this direction, a gradual shift from the highly prescriptive legislation of the present to a goal setting
legislation with built in mechanism for risk assessment and' formulation of Safety, Health and Environment Management Plan would serve the purpose better. I am happy to share with you that we
are currently already in the advanced stage of the process for bringing about the necessary amendments to take care of some major contemporary realities of the mining industry.
Existing safety management practices shall be supplemented by applying risk assessment techniques for hazard identification and corrective actions and also for monitoring it at regular interval.
This approach will integrate safety with the primary objectives of .the organization. Introduction of
risk management as a tool for development of a good health and safety management system is a
break through in the- traditional strategy. The system is an effective tool for improvement of health
and safety scenario. This needs to be introduced at levels of operation, maintenance and other allied
activities. To provide the legislative backing to this important concept of risk assessment & safety
management, we are in process of incorporating this in the newly proposed Coal Mines Regulations
which are currently under active consideration of the Government.
I will not take much of your time at this moment as lot of speakers will deliberate on these issues. I
sincerely hope that this national seminar will address the emerging issues and trends in the mineral
industry in the coming years. The sub-themes of this national seminar are rightly focused to these
emerging trends. Further, I hope that with your active participation this seminar will be able to draw a
meaningful conclusion while addressing the contemporary OSH issues facing the mining industry.
Even if a single recommendation sees the day of light and really makes some positive contribution to
the mineral industry, it will be a great job done.
At the end I once more welcome you all and ask for making the proceedings of the Seminar a great
success.
POSTALE 2008
KEYNOTE ADDRESS
ISSUES OF SAFETY IN OPEN-PIT MINES - QUO VADIS?

PROF. AJOY K. GHOSE, FNAE
Former Director, ISM, Dhanbad
INTRODUCTION
With global mineral production scaling new heights, thanks to the spurt in global demand for raw
materials with escalating minerals hunger of a burgeoning global population, the aggregate production volume touched nearly 24 billion tonnes in 2007 with sands, gravel, crushed rock and dimension
stones contributing to the largest share. Of this, some 70% was contributed by open pits which are
becoming larger, deeper and increasingly more mechanized and automated. The new-era open pit
mines represent today gigantic materials handling operations with large-scale environmental impacts, calling for a new order of safety culture.
The dimensions of safety in open pit mines are, by and large, a miniscule vis--vis underground mining and yet workplacerelated injury and death contribute to lost production and impact on employee
morale and productivity. The number of fatal injuries per one million man hours worked(FIFR) in
open pit mines has registered some new highs and in Indian mining sector in the recent past surprisingly the rate of fatal accidents in surface coal mines has almost become the same as belowground
operations hovering around 0.4 fatalities per 1000 persons employed. In the United States, during
2006, open pit coal mines accounted for 6 fatalities, metal mines 1, stone, sand and gravel operations had 10 fatalities and non metal open pit operations reported no fatalities (U.S.Department of
Labour, 2006).
In general, safety issues in open pit mines centre around stability of slopes, accidents due to blasting
and handling of explosives and those attributed to vehicular movement and falling objects. Even if
the problem dimension is not significant, it calls for a close look to help avoid any injury to workmen
or destruction of equipment which could bring the mining activity to a standstill.
Analysis of accidents in open pit mines in India reveal that dumpers/trucks contribute to over 70% of
fatal accidents, with some 40% attributable to negligent and/or unauthorized driving. Likewise, reversal without spotter and non-provision of audio-visual alarm and crossing haul roads contribute to
some 10-15% of fatalities. In terms of percentage of accidents at different sites, haul roads and associated roads account for nearly 60% of all open pit mine accidents. Managing tyre-related accidents is yet another area of concern as they can affect the maneuverability of trucks and dumpers
and in extreme cases explosion of tyres while being inflated have also been responsible for fatalities.
All work environments do have an inherent risk and open pit mine environments are no exception.
Accidents in open pit mines, in general, conform to Du Ponts accident analysis statistics where
some 96 per cent accidents could be attributed to unsafe acts. Unsafe acts are the proximate cause
for blasting and vehicular accidents, while unsafe conditions underlie the hazards of slope failure,
often attributable to systemic design failure.
We shall examine in this presentation the broad gamut of issues of safety in open pit mines in general with focus on emerging techniques for upgrading safety.
SAFETY MANAGEMENT IN OPEN PIT MINES
The first step in safety management chain in open pit mines is hazard identification, followed by
quantification. In open pit mines, the hierarchy of safety initiatives could rely on Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP) and Hazard Analysis (HAZAN). For quantifying the risks, a wide array of techniques including Fault Tree Analysis, Risk Ranking Matrix and Consequence Analysis are standard
available tools that are made use of in many industries, but there is a dearth of reported studies in
POSTALE 2008
open pit mines using these techniques. Fig.1 shows the conceptual stages of a risk analysis algorithm. Both consequences and failure probability estimates are involved and these are each subject
to uncertainty and they are combined to estimate risk.
The critical step in the process flow chart is the hazard scenario anlaysis which raises the triplet of
questions posed by Kaplan and Garrick:
What can go wrong ?
How likely it is ?
What are the consequences?
More recently, Kaplan has suggested yet another model to begin the analysis by using Anticipatory
Failure Determination Approach. If I wanted to make something go wrong, how would I do it ? A
fault tree provides an overview of the connectivity of the causes of failure. It indicates how the events
contribute to system failure.
Safety of tailings impoundments in open pit mines or the failure of dumps has also raised serious
concerns as catastrophic failures have occurred with serious consequences.
ADDRESSING BLASTING RELATED ACCIDENTS
Blasting is one of the most potentially hazardous operations in open pit mines. Most of the accidents
are due to flyrock and an inadequate blast exclusion zone. A major share, if not the leading cause of
fatalities in open pit mines, could be ascribed to flyrock which could result in extensive and expensive damage to equipment and plant and stoppages in production. Rock thrown over an excessive
distance from a blast is a hazard to equipment tyres and can cause unnecessary delays related to
cleanup of the flyrock.
Apart from flyrock, other blasting related incidents include truck explosion while transporting explosives( Hunter Valley,Australia,2003), lightning initiated explosion (in Australia), drilling into a charged
hole, premature explosion of a detonating cord reel and all these have been critically reviewed(Sen
and Downs,2008).Ground vibrations or air blast per se have not been identified so far as the proximate cause of any accident in open pit mines.
Major causative factors of flyrock events are insufficient burden, insufficient stemming and weak layers or seams. Other contributory factors include poor blast design, and insufficient delays between
rows besides use of secondary blasting such as pop shooting, which could be fully obviated by resorting to secondary rock fragmentation techniques with rock breakers.
Powerful rock breakers, such as those from Fractum Technology (of Switzerland) with energy levels
of 200,000 joules per stroke with a hammerhead impact frequency of 7 blows per minute, can handle
effectively 20 tonne size rock boulders. Insufficient burden is the primary cause of flyrock out from
the face, and there are several instances where rocks of very large size have been projected as far
as 1 km or even longer distances, leading to fatalities. As flyrock can never be completely eliminated, a risk based approach to flyrock mitigation ensures that flyrock danger zone distances can be
based on acceptable risk levels rather than the potential consequences of infrequent events.
STABILITY OF OPEN PIT SLOPES- SAFETY DIMENSIONS
Unexpected slope instabilities may impair the safety of personnel or impose the danger of burying
mining equipment and resulting loss of production. Steeper slopes result in higher ore to overburden
contributing to higher profitability. However, the steeper slopes may also contribute to risks of instability which surface the dilemma to designers striving for steepest pit slopes consistent with stability.
The design of a spoil bank for an open pit mine, likewise, must be based on such parameters of its
elements, which allow following the accurate profile of the slope admissible in terms of stability for a
specified depth.
POSTALE 2008
The criticality of slope design has called for a whole host of monitoring and surveillance techniques
so that the onset of failures can be detected and personnel and equipment can be moved to safe
zones before they get buried under a failing slope. Some remarkable case studies on the prediction
of slope failure are available, including Bruce Kennedys near astrological prediction of the timing of
slope failure at Chuquicamata! ( Hoek ands Bray, 1981).
In general, open pit mines exhibit an assortment of slopes from soil slopes near the surface, rock
slopes, bench slopes, highwall slopes each one of which needs to be analyzed by well-recognized
techniques(CANMET,1977; Singh and Ghose,2006) and appropriate factors of safety used to prevent failures. Major geotechnical parameters which enter into such analysis include material properties, rock structure, groundwater regime and external factors such as the effect of seismic shock.
If stability analysis reveals that a given slope is potentially unstable and could damage plant, equipment or machinery or bury the ore reserves, it is prudent to take the following steps:
Monitor the stability of slopes
Identify the causes of instability
Redesign the slope to improve the factor of safety, if feasible.

Use of supports to reinforce a slope for long term stability is rarely adopted, primarily on economic
grounds.
Monitoring of slopes has been honed into a state-of-the-art technology deploying total stations and
GPS which offer excellent opportunities for detecting incipient slope movements so that appropriate
steps for safe and timely withdrawal of men and equipment are possible. With the GPS-NAVSTAR,
GLONASS and GALILEO satellite positioning systems, displacements of the order of sub-centimeter
accuracy are within the realms of possibility.
Addressing Miscellaneous Safety Issues
For mitigating problems of fires, their detection and suppression on equipment, a host of products
are commercially available, such as Kidde plc., and Ansul. The use of such vehicle-fire suppression
system is mandatory in most countries. The planning of haul roads, their design and safety are also
issue of high criticality. The machine-stopping distances
for the fleet of vehicles is a primary consideration in road design and each vehicle in the fleet should
be evaluated and road alignment adjusted to the machine with the longest stopping distance. Sight
distance is another key element in the determination it must be sufficient to allow the machine to
safely stop before encountering obstructions or hazards.
Minimum road width is also an important design issue as road width affects safe operating speeds
and can help minimize tyre contact with safety berms and spilled rocks. Haul road safety provisions
may include the addition of median or collision berms, escape lanes and dedicated small-vehicle
roads. Appropriate signage on haul roads should be mandatory too.
Reducing tyre wear through proper design and construction of haul roads at optimal grade, crossslopes and super-elevation of corners maintains the proper weight distribution of the load and minimizes the lateral forces on truck tyres. Avoiding spillage is of paramount importance as about 75% of
tyre failures are estimated to be caused by cuts from rocks and impacts with rocks.Use of mobile
tyre handlers is yet another option for avoiding risks in handling large tyres. Of late, the acute shortage of tyres in the market has led to the adoption of best practices for tyre maintenance which also
contribute in a large measure to safety. Innovative tyre monitoring systems show great promise for
helping to improve tyre life. The technology involves the placement of a computer chip in the tyre
that monitors the heat and pressure data as in Michelin MEMS tyre chip system. The data can be
supplied to the truck operator or central monitoring system and can trigger action to reduce the temperature or provide adequate inflation. To improve tyre efficiency, inflation with nitrogen has been
POSTALE 2008
suggested. Use of nitrogen helps tyres to stay at a constant inflation pressure, thus increasing the
tyres performance and decreasing the likelihood of tyre fires and flat tyres.
In response to industrys requirement for a safer, more productive and less stressful environment
when using heavy vehicles and large mobile equipment, the deployment of Collision Avoidance
System has become inescapable. This is especially relevant in hilly terrains, and during monsoons,
when visibility becomes poor. Using rfid tagging, two way alarm systems have been evolved with
colour video cameras and LCD display units which give both visual and audible warning.
Reducing human error in driving heavy dump trucks, training on simulators is being recommended.
Simulated training allows operators to be fully experienced and knowledgeable to the best effects.
Immersive
Technologies from Australia and Throughbred Technologies (Pty)Ltd. from South Africa provide a
range of simulators to instill safety in operators.
WHERE DO WE GO FROM HERE ?
Managing safety in open pit mines and coping with the challenges ahead call for focused and concerted efforts. Within the framework of an organizational vision, an integrated safety management
approach has to be devised for all the safety issues enumerated above. As open pit mines become
larger, deeper and increasingly more mechanized, the complexion and priority of safety issues are
likely to change and new issues might emerge. Human factor analysis, for a given open pit mine design configuration, assumes a new role and importance with new initiatives in operator task analysis,
error analysis and preparedness for emergencies. Much however remains to be done vis--vis identification of hazards, assessment of the risk and its ranking, controls and action plans, training and
continuous improvement and finally auditing and review.
As the open pit environment presents a kaleidoscope of dynamic changes, hazard elimination will
have to focus on key result areas. New technological innovations may provide some powerful tools
for hazard detection , but in the ultimate analysis, the goal of zero accident could be reached only
through eternal vigilance.
REFERENCES
Anon., Mine Injury and Worktime, Quarterly, U.S.Department of Labour, Jan-Dec.2006.
Sen,G.C., and Downs, G., 2008., An approach to addressing explosive related accidents by implementing strategic training, 2008
Coal Operators
Conference, University of Wollongong, pp.251-259.
CANMET, Pit Slope Manual, 1977, Canadian Center for Minerals & Energy Technology, Report No.77-13.
Singh,R.N., and Ghose, A.K., 2006, Engineered Rock Structures in Mining and Civil Construction, Taylor & Francis, London.
Li,A.J., et al.,2008, Stability charts for rock slopes based on the Hoek-Brown failure crierion, Int. Jl.of Rock Mechanics & Mining
Sciences,45,pp.689-700.
POSTALE 2008
KEYNOTE ADDRESS
SAFETY STATUTE FOR EXPANDING MINING INDUSTRY OF INDIA

SURENDRA NATH PADHI
Former Director General, DGMS, Dhanbad
INTRODUCTION
The earliest reference to Mines Safety in India is found in Yajur Veda (3000 B.C). It is stated there
in that human beings should exploit the interiors of earth to take out Gold and other metals. However, the persons engaged should be adequately educated in mining technology and mines safety.
Kautilya (250 BC) had mentioned in his treatise Arthasastra that mining operation should be carried
out under the supervision of a qualified and competent Mines Superintendent. However, in the modern age, first safety statute was enacted under the British Rule and has gradually developed in Independent India. The Statute was reactive (based on experience) but the time has come to make it
Proactive based on Risk Assessment and Safety Management Plan which will be essentially a goal
setting performance based legislation with preventive and protective safeguards.
HISTORY OF MINES SAFETY LEGISLATION OF INDIA
Welfare and health of workers employed in mines are the concern of the Central Government (Entry
55, Union List Article 246). Occupational Safety & Health Legislation of the country has been enacted in consistent with this constitutional obligation as well as the National Mineral Policy, 1993.
One of the objectives of which is to ensure conduct of mining operations with due regard to safety
and health of all concerned. Mines Act,1952 and Rules & Regulations framed there under have the
basic objective of reducing risk of occupational diseases, casualty to persons employed & providing
a better & safer working environment in mines.
The first Mines Act was enacted in 1901 i.e. more than a century back. The past century may be
conveniently divided into 3 parts, the first part is the half century up to 1950 i.e. till India attained independence and became a republic. The second part i.e. the quarter; century from 1951 to 1975
witnessed the emergence of public sector. By 1975 Nationalization of major part of the mining including coal had been completed. The last quarter century, within a short span of 25 years has seen the
excellent as well as the dismal performance by public sector and the emergence of the philosophy of
LPG (Liberalization, Privatization and Globalization) towards the end of this quarter. Beginning of this
century has started witnessing beginning of the process of disinvestment of public sector companies.
LEGISLATION IN BRITISH INDIA
The first Mines Act of 1901 was superseded by a new Indian Mines Act, 1923 and was finally replaced by the Mines Act, 1952. Major changes were incorporated in this Act by amendments in the
year 1959 & 1983.
The first piece of safety legislation enacted a Century back was scanty compared to the size of the
mining industry. The enforcement strategy has been also developed on the legislation structure. The
main thrust was on Policing i.e. enforcement through legal sanction. The approach paid rich dividends in the initial period when there was a need to enforce the basic minimum safety legislation in a
mining environment which was essentially small in magnitude and manual in process. The rate of
accidents came down substantially as a result of enforcements mechanism. Further in view of limited
scope of legislation and relative small magnitude of mining industry, it was possible for a small band
of inspectors to enforce the same effectively.
POSTALE 2008
LEGISLATION IN INDEPENDENT INDIA EARLY YEARS

After India became a republic in 1950 and after Industrial resolution of 1956, demand for minerals
increased and the magnitude of mining also increased at a rapid rate. Mining entered into deeper
horizons and complex geomining locales. Mechanization slowly replaced manual operations which in
turn increased the speed of operation. The industry oriented itself towards labour welfare and concern about mines safety attained new heights. Several committees were set up by the government to
recommend necessary changes. Conservation of minerals became important. Health and Safety of
workers started getting attention as never before and thus there were major shifts in policy and practices. There was a galaxy of subordinate legislation like Mines Rules, 1955, Coal Mines Regulations,
1957, Metalliferous Mines Regulations, 1961 and Mines Vocational Training Rules, 1966 etc. In 1958
a major explosion at Chinakuri Colliery claiming 175 victims rocked the whole country when it was
realized that the workers should be shifted from a position of an object to that of a subject and this
paved the way for the first ever-Tripartite conference on Mines Safety on National Level. Thus
started the era of safety conferences where major changes in mining statutes were mooted.
LEGISATION IN INDEPENDENT INDIA LATER YEARS
The third stage of evolution of safety legislation came after the process of nationalization of major
portion of mining i.e. coal mines were completed by 1975 and far reaching amendments were made
in legislation. In fact, the Indian mining legislation started coming out of its infancy to attain adulthood. In 1976, the conference on Organizational Aspects of Safety in Mines mooted the idea of
workers participation in safety management through the twin instruments of safety committees and
appointment of workmen Inspectors. The concept of Internal Safety Organization started receiving
serious thought from this point of time. The slow transition from policing by mine inspectors to the
era of self regulation started. Under the International Programme for Improvements of working conditions and environments (PIACT) of the ILO, a multi disciplinary team of safety experts visited the
Indian mines in 1978-79. The recommendations of this team which became the background of fifth
Conference on Safety in Mines (1980). This conference was another milestone in the history of
mines safety in India. Among other things, safety policy for mining companies, adoption of improved
technology, training and retraining of workers, internal safety organization, workers participation of
safety management foundation for all these major cultural changes were laid in this conference.
The concept of self regulation had been strengthened in the subsequent safety conferences. The
basic impact in formalizing the safety legislation was experience within the industry, directions given
in national and international conventions, findings from research and development initiatives, recommendations of the courts of enquiry, national safety conferences, reports of committees of expert
groups appointed by the government & other agencies from time to time etc.
A CRITICAL ANALYSIS
The present legislation is alleged to be highly prescriptive as it lays down methodology of mining and
permissions / relaxations / approvals are mandatory. The prescribed methodology may be out of
synchronization with the emerging challenges and there is no flexibility. Interference and heavy dependence on the enforcing authority on safety decisions dilutes the responsibilities of the local management which develops an attitude that compliance of legislation is the end by itself and does not
thrive for continued improvement and best practice.
Essentially, the mining safety legislation had been evolved based on the needs determined through
experience and practice. In the future mining scenario, the demand for fossil fuel (solid, liquid, gaseous) will continue to increase considering the increasing demand for energy. Similarly, mining of iron
ore, bauxite and other minerals which are available in abundant in the country will likely to increase
Globalization will continue and therefore there will be fierce competition between different players.
Entry of multi-national will be accompanied with import of technology & mining operations will be
highly specialized and flexible. The work force has to be highly skilled. The operations have to be
highly productive with thrust on efficiency and cost benefit. There will be increasing deployment of
POSTALE 2008
contractors for carrying out non-routine as well as routine & regular operations. Small scale mining of
minor minerals etc. will continue to remain traditional. A legislative structure of such type also can
not effectively foresee the safety legislative requirements of the future.
LEGISLATION VISION FOR EXPANDING MINING INDUSTRY
Future Requirement
Any legislation mining or otherwise, has to be investor friendly in the context of breakage of global
trade barriers. Mines Safety Legislation has to follow suit without sacrificing the interest of the work
force. The legislation also needs to be broad based to cover high technology as well as small scale
and traditional mining sector.
Framing a Safety Legislation which will adequately meet the future safety requirement will call for a
change from the traditional reactive approach of learning through experience to proactive approach
through foresight. However, the future legislation also need to fit into the constitutional obligation and
legal frame work of the country as well as the requirements of national and international conventions.
International Guide Lines
I.L.O convention No.176 and recommendation No.183 Safety and Health in Mines (1995) which
came into force in 1998 are the latest guide lines on the object the minimum safety requirement
against which all changes in the mine operations should be measured. The earlier guide lines I.L.O
convention No.153 and recommendation No.164 on occupational Safety and Health and the working
Environment (1981) & I.L.O convention No.161 & recommendation No.171 on occupational Health
Services are also to be suitably followed. The convention advocates for hazard assessment, risk
analysis and development & implementation of system to manage the risk. The convention also advocates measures to encourage research and exchange of information on Safety & Health in mines,
consultation between employers and workmen & rehabilitation and reintegration of workers who
have sustained occupational injuries and illness. The convention also requires that suppliers of
equipments, appliances and hazardous substances should ensure compliance with national standards.
National Guidelines
Guide lines may have to be also taken from national conventions. Ninth and tenth Conferences on
Safety in Mines (Feb 2000 and November 2007) are the latest national guidelines, which advocates
Risk Management as a tool for development of appropriate Health and Safety Management System,
quality control (of equipments, appliances and materials) for improving safety, occupational Health
surveillance, increasing effectiveness of workers participation in Safety Management, safety of contractor workers and in unorganized sector etc.
The draft National Policy on OSH and proposal for framing an Umbrella Legislation on OHS are recent initiatives taken by Govt. of India in this direction for all occupations including mining.
Emerging Legislation - An Outline
Taking into consideration the fast changing, technology as well as entry of multinationals with thrust
on competition the future legislation should be flexible to absorb the changing environment and keep
pace with the fast changes that are sweeping the globe. This calls for proactive legislative provisions
which is essentially a goal setting performance based legislation with preventive and protective safeguards.
POSTALE 2008
PERFORMANCE BASED REGULATIONS

Concept
Performance based regulation is based on the concept of DUTY OF CARE which had its seeds in
the Lord Robens Committee Report (UK-1970) on Safety and Health at work. In this report it was
stated Our present system encourages rather too much reliance on state regulation, and rather too
little on personal responsibility and voluntary, self generating effort. This imbalance must be redressed. Reducing the sheer weight of the legislation should make a start. There is a role in this field
for regulatory law and a role for government action. But these roles should be predominantly concerned not with detailed prescriptions for innumerable day-to-day circumstances but with influencing
attitudes and with creating a framework for better safety and health organization and action by industry itself.
The report went on to say The most fundamental conclusion to which our investigations have led us
is this. There are severe practical limits on the extent to which progressively better standards of
safety and health at work can be brought about through negative regulation by external agencies.
We need a more effectively self-regulating system. This calls for the acceptance and exercise of appropriate responsibilities at all levels within industry and commerce. It calls for better systems of
safety organizations, for more management initiatives, and for more involvement of work people
themselves. The objectives of future policy must therefore include not only increasing the effectiveness of the States contribution to safety and health at work but also, and more importantly, creating
the conditions for more effective self-regulation.
Thus the idea of general duty of care was born. Duty of care is a generic phrase used to describe the
obligation of one party to be responsible for the safety and well being of another party due to the
nature of the relationship that exists between the parties.
Need
Performance based regulation is to ensure that relevant legislation is in place to address the specific
issues that will lay the foundation for a significantly improved work place environment on mine site
e.g.
Specific training needs

A site specific safety policy
Site based programmes
The identification of particular national standards and the need for a systems approach
Objectives
The three key objectives are
1. To provide the necessary flexibility for operators to develop site-specific solutions to safety issues: and
2. To create a Framework for Best Practice in Occupational Safety and Health
Four major elements have been identified which characterize the occupational safety and health systems of successful workplaces. All four elements are necessary to ensure that continuous improvement in occupational safety and health performance is achieved in the medium to long term. Those
elements can be described in the following way.
(a) The culture of a successful workplace (or organization) at all levels is one of commitment to occupational safety and health, of care for the well-being of everybody who works in the organization, and of a belief that workplace injury and disease can be prevented. The culture emphasizes
quality in all aspects of the organizations operations, including occupational safety and health
(i.e. doing the job properly and avoiding superficially easy solutions to problems which do not
rectify systemic deficiencies). The crucial factor in creating an occupational safety and health
culture is the commitment of senior management, and communication of this commitment to all
levels in the organization.
10
POSTALE 2008
(b) A successful workplace (or organization) has management systems geared to the practical and
systematic implementation and maintenance of the occupational safety and health culture. The
organizations policies, working standards, procedures, training systems, level and types of supervision, purchasing decisions, maintenance schedules, communications systems and regular
review mechanisms form part of the management system. The occupational safety and health
management system is subject to regular and rigorous audits. Employees and all levels of management are involved in the planning, development, implementation and review of the occupational safety and health management system.
(c) The physical component of a successful workplace (or organization) has a working environment, the hardware, purchased and installed with occupational safety and health considerations
in mind. Hardware is operated and used according to the manufacturer / supplier instructions,
and is regularly maintained as prescribed by them. Ongoing suitability for the task is regularly reviewed in the light of occupational safety and health requirements, and hardware is replaced as
necessary. The hardware includes plant, equipment, substances, materials and working conditions. Finance devoted to the purchase, maintenance and replacement of hardware is also a
critical factor.
(d) The occupational safety and health culture of successful workplaces has a determining influence
on decisions made regarding the organizations hardware, particularly financial decisions. This
culture exerts great influence on staff attitudes to co-operation and basic on- the - job (workplace
level) decision-making and sets the tone of communication within the organization at its most
basic level. The respect of the workforce can be so easily lost through a poorly developed culture where the organizations most precious asset is lost in the bottom line.
Thus the occupational safety and health culture in the workplace is clearly the most important element.
3. Encourage Mine Site Ownership of Safety:
The legislation is designed to modify attitudes to safety by imposing behavioral requirements on
mine operators that legislation is designed to encourage involvement at all levels of the organization.
(a) It requires that an occupational safety and health policy be prepared and regularly reviewed in
consultation with the persons working at the mine.
(b) That appropriately competent supervision is provided.
(c) That appropriate training for all personnel is provided that everyone understands their duties and
that those working in the mine have the necessary skills and competence to carry out their duties.
(d) That the safety and occupational health needs of all persons are appropriately monitored.
Key Features
The key features of performance based regulation are
Ownership - By encouraging personnel to be involved in the process, whether it be developing a
mine site policy or documenting work procedures, those involved take ownership of the process and
become involved and committed to its successful outcome.
Best Practice - Best Practice embodies the notion that there are always better ways of doing
things that there is room for continual improvements. This concept overcomes the limitations of
minimum standards which engender the Ive done enough attitude.
Management Systems - The concepts of management systems, site safety policies, programmes
and procedures, and their inter-relationship is shown below.
The Safety System Site Policy: The work environment in which all persons strive to work
Programme: Establish the framework for achieving the environment
11
POSTALE 2008
Procedure: The way to do things

Verification Process: Ensuring the system is working and improving
Documented Safety Plan
Duty of care on the Inspectorate - There is an implied need to ensure that a mine operator, in the
absence of specific legislative requirements being identified, is provided with adequate information
and counseling with regard to what is considered to be best industry standards in particular circumstances.
Risk Assessment - As the legislation is formulated on the premise that decisions on how to operate
a safe mine rest at the mine site, it is apparent that a risk assessment approach needs to be adopted
when examining and developing work procedures. Each operation will no doubt develop its own
method of analyzing the risks involved but all will need to be systematic and to be effective, involve
the personnel actually responsible for carrying out the task.
Review Mechanisms - The manager of a mine should appropriately monitor the safety and occupational health needs of persons working at the mine.
This will require the introduction of regular audit, or review, procedures.
Audits / reviews will be initiated
by the mine and / or
by the Inspectorate
The Chief Inspector of Mines (Director General of Mines Safety) has interpreted an appropriate level
of monitoring as a process of self auditing or reviews that seek to verify the systems are in place and
operating. In addition it will be appropriate that the Inspectorate initiate its own review procedures for
operating mines.
Removal of the Approval Process - There are no formal approvals required under the Mines
Regulations as opposed to the many approvals by Inspectors required presently. The onus is on the
manager to ensure that particular operating aspects are carried out safely.
Complementary Information and Guidance : The Industry Standard - In seeking to fulfill their
obligations and duty of care responsibilities, mine operators obviously require some guidance as to
what issues should be addressed in relation to particular operating aspects.
This guidance will be found by reference to one or all of the following:
relevant National Standards:
the National Guidelines for Safe Mining; and
the Industry / Safe Mining handbooks
It is unlikely that operations conducted at variance with the relevant information supplied in the
above documents or a recognized industry code of practice would be deemed to be operating safely.
The Guidelines for Safe Mining and the handbooks are likely to be subject to a consultative review
process between industry and the Inspectorate to reflect ongoing improvements in the industry standard for particular activities. Subsequent editions of the Guidelines should be planned to incorporate
feedback from interested parties.
ROLE OF THE INSPECTORATE
The removal of prescriptive regulations, and with them the notion of minimum standards, will change
the role of the Inspectorate. The emphasis will now be on the management systems in place at a
mine site and the Inspectorate will, if it is to demonstrate any leadership, need to provide information
and guidance on the manner in which whole aspects of operations need to be systematically examined and procedures adopted. There will be a greater need for discussion with operators to lead
them to provide a satisfactory solution to a problem rather than a simple reference to a stated re-
12
POSTALE 2008
quirement. A partnership across the various sectors of the mining industry will develop. The Inspectorate must provide leadership and direction while the mine operators must produce and implement
the programs to achieve an improved safety environment at the workplace.
The industry standard will be driven by the Inspectorate employing its skills and experience in judging the appropriateness of the innovations that should flow from a more flexible legislation. Enforcement action will remain a very real and appropriate process where operators are not able to demonstrate that the necessary systems are in place. The Inspectorates over-riding responsibility will be to
ensure that mine operators understand and are fully informed about the expectations of improvements that the new legislation implies.
CONCLUSION
The so-called prescriptive legislation had done its excellent work for almost a century. However, a
need has arisen now for a set of legislation which will have a delicate balance between self Regulation, external inspection and policing inspection. This calls for a paradigm shift in the very safety culture. However, the core legislative structure should remain intact within the frame work of the national legal needs & should not be swayed by varying international standards and practices which
may be brought in through entry of international players.
Occupational Health & environment will come to the forefront. The role of enforcement agency will
gradually shift from policing to that of administration of safety legislation. The enforcement agency
will be a specialist body with a repository of information and a system to disseminate safety information, designing standard code of practices and developing standards for mining equipments and materials.
Because of the global need, development of a goal setting legislation is inevitable. However, the
transition period from prescriptive to goal setting legislation need be delicately balanced with a positive mind-set of all concerned.
REFERENCES
Padhi S. N : 19th World Mining Congress (2003): Mines Safety in India Control of Accidents and Disasters in 21st Century.
Padhi S. N : Mines Safety Legislation in India in the context of International Scenario (2005)
Padhi S. N : International Conference on Safety in Mines, Romania (1999) Mines Safety in India, A perspective.
Padhi S.N and Mishra N Mining Laws Safety Aspects (1996)
Govt. of New South Wales (Australia): Department of Mineral Resources Mine Safe (1996)
Govt. of India : Ministry of Labour : Proceeding of Ninth Conference on Safety Mines (2000)
International Labour Organisation Convention No.176 and Recommendation No.183 on Safety
and Health in Mines (1995)
Padhi S.N : Development of Mine Safety Legislation in India: Role of DGMS (1998)
Denton Steve The Effective Management of Health and Safety in deep Coal Mines of Great Britain (2001)
Hermanus Mavin Ann Trends in occupational Health and Safety Policy and Regulations Issues & Challenges in South Africa
(1999)
13
POSTALE 2008
KEYNOTE ADDRESS
R&R FOR MINING INDUSTRY NEEDS

A SEPARATE NATIONAL POLICY
N. C. SAXENA
Former Head, CME, ISMU, Dhanbad
PROLOGUE
The establishment of developmental and industrial activities for overall development of the regions
and hence the nations calls for acquisition of land. The people living and sustaining their livelihood
on such land areas are displaced and the people dependent on the land loose their livelihood. For
taking care of such people rehabilitation and resettlement (R&R) packages are developed. These
packages are a part of the Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) of the mining companies. The provisions in these packages are as per the guidelines in the chosen R&R Policy.
In the mining industry the R&R packages are developed as per the guidelines of the R&R Policies of
the nation/state governments/mining companies. Some Policies have specific provisions for mining
areas.
Mining is different in many ways from the other industrial and development activities and the typicalities of the mining areas invariably are not taken into consideration in most of the Policies. Even the
Policy of Coal India Limited (CIL), the largest coal mining company in the country, is inadequate.
The author opines that the uniqueness of the mining activities and requirements of these areas at
various stages of mining call for a National R&R Policy specifically dedicated to the mining sector.
Brief outlines of such a policy are outlined hereunder.
A CRITICAL ASSESMENT OF EXISTING R&R POLICIES
From the point of view of suitability of the R&R Policies of Government of India, Orissa, Madhya
Pradesh and Coal India Limited, for the mining sector as a whole it is necessary to assess all the
Policies in the light of the typical characteristics of the mining industry, which are as presented below.
1. Mining is a site specific activity as the minerals and fossil fuels are to be mined at the locations
of their existence.
2. Mining is only an intermediate use of land, because before mining and after the mineral/fossil
fuel resource is exhausted the land is of no use to the mining companies.
3. The people living in the mineral/fossil fuel bearing areas have no stake in the minerals and fossil
fuels.
4. The minerals and fossil fuels generally exist in forest and agricultural areas having a low level of
economy based mainly on the primary activities, i.e., forestry and agriculture.
5. The mineral and fossil fuel bearing areas in India are mostly in remote locations away from urban localities and are inhabited by the people mostly from scheduled tribes, schedules castes
and other backward classes. The life style, traditions, culture and habits of these people vary
from place to place and group to group.
6. The society of the mineral bearing areas may be facing various problems associated with low
level of economy, e.g., poverty, malnutrition, etc.
7. Invariably all the labour force necessary for mining and associated activities is brought from outside the mineral and fossil fuel bearing areas.
8. The infrastructure and civic facilities available in the mineral and fossil fuel bearing areas need
quantum upgradation to facilitate mining and associated activities.
POSTALE 2008
9. Mining and associated activities are very high level economic activities compared to the level of
the original activities in the mineral and fossil fuel bearing areas. When mining activities come to
an end the level of the economic activities come down to near original level as the post mining
activities are to be supported by the resources available after mining.
10. Mining and associated activities impact all the components of environment. Some of the impacts
are beneficial to the society and some are harmful.
11. Both underground and opencast mines can be planned with proper concurrent or, if necessary,
post mining reclamation of the land affected by the mining and associated activities. Such a
practice has not been followed till now in the country.
12. In most mining situations the entire mineral/fossil fuel bearing land is never utilized at a time, i.e.,
simultaneously.
13. Mining is the only activity in which temporary displacement of the PAFs can be planned with the
land taken being returned back with proper reclamation in an improved condition. Even the habitats of the people can be immensely improved with proper planning. During reclamation the land
can be prepared for well defined uses, i.e., agriculture, forestry, building construction, making
surface and underground water bodies, etc.
The above characteristics have not been taken into consideration in formulating the presently available R&R Policies. These Policies have some shortcomings from the point of view of effectiveness in
the mining areas. In fact the experience of CIL in the implementation of R&R in their mining areas
can be taken as an indicator of these shortcomings.
Coal Indias Experience
CIL has been implementing R&R packages of PAFs for many decades. The company has a wealth
of experience in this field. In order to fine tune its R&R efforts the company has been remodeling its
R&R Policy with the experiences gained. For optimizing their R&R efforts CIL implemented a World
Bank assisted Project, namely, Coal Sector Environment & Social Mitigation Project (CSESMP) in its
25 mining projects. The salient features of the implementation of this Project are outlined hereunder.
(Bhattacharya 2003)
The objective of the Project was to strengthen CILs capacity to deal more effectively with the environmental and social issues through implementation of Environmental Action Plans (EAPs), Rehabilitation Action Plans (RAPs) and Indigenous People Development Plans (IPDPs) to make coal production environmentally and socially sustainable. The implementation of the project was adopted
through a three pronged approach consisting of Policy Support, Institutional Building and Implementation.
Policy Support Although CIL had an R&R Policy, which was facing many issues while implementing in the subsidiary companies, the Company after the inception of the Project adopted a comprehensive Corporate Resettlement and Rehabilitation Policy under the guidance of the World Bank.
This Policy was reviewed from time to time and changes were brought in with the experience gained.
The company adopted a participatory approach towards implementation of the R&R for the PAFs. It
was accepted that the PAFs are not only to be informed but also are to be consulted on matters of
importance to the project and their entitlement or compensation and choice of R&R options.
Institution Building With the R&R Policy in place the company needed to have a dedicated group of
executives for implementing the project through formulation of RAPs. Hence, an organization was
established covering the entire decision making and implementing issues.
Implementation - The first step towards implementation of the project was social impact assessment.
This was done by assessing the socio-economic conditions of the PAFs and the impacts of land acquisition on them. The study of socio-economic conditions brought out details of social and economic
status of the families who were to loose their means of livelihood and/or homestead. The data generated were reviewed yearly to update them and make them more realistic.
15
POSTALE 2008
The second step consisted of the issue of photo identity cards to the PAPs/PAFs to facilitate implementation and monitoring of the R&R assistance being given to them.
The third step was the development of RAPs with focus on resettlement of the displaced PAFs and
economic rehabilitation of the PAPs through income generating activities as pr income restoration
plans to restore their income.
The fourth step was the implementation of resettlement as per RAPs. The total number of PAFs displaced as a result of land acquisition due to mine expansion was 2,129. All these families were provided with entitled resettlement benefits.
The fifth step consisted of implementation of the income generation plan. The total number of PAPs
eligible for this purpose was 10,214. Attempts were made to rehabilitate them economically by employing them in the following activities. The reported monthly income of the PAPs in 2003 was about
Rs 900-1,000/-.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mine jobs
Jobs with contractors
Offering small contractual assignments after necessary training
Self employment through training
Arranging earning through land based income generation schemes
Social Benefits Achieved - The following benefits were achieved by the implementation of the Project. (Bhattacharya 2003)
1. Modified R&R policy brought a unified approach across the subsidiaries. It reduced the employment offer by the company to the land losers.
2. Skill training and subsequent self-employment reduced the social crimes and coal pilferage, etc.
Hostile nature of the host community was also reduced.
3. Offer of monitory compensation for resettlement became a popular package. It reduced the time
for resettlement and evacuation.
4. The IPDP approach helped developing the neighboring community and brought a cordial relation with the community. It minimized the interruption of normal mine operation by the host community. The principle of IPDP reduced the burden of the project towards the operation and maintenance of the infrastructure provided to the host community by the project. It helped the host
community to own the infrastructure as these were constructed and maintained by them.
5. Settled OB dumps and unused mine land could be utilized for vegetation, plantation, etc.
through Land Based Income Generation Schemes. This helped the host community to earn livelihood and at the same time helped the project to maintain a good environment and social relation.
6. Maintaining the social database helped to accurately quantify the total commitment of the project towards social mitigation. Continuous follow up was easier with up dated database.
7. Annual IPDP and RAP helped to mitigate the social problems in a more systematic way.
Lessons Learnt - The following lessons were learnt from the implementation of the project. (Bhattacharya 2003)
1. Resettlement and rehabilitation of the PAPs have to be done keeping in view the customs, habits and culture of the people.
2. It has been found that PAPs are more interested in getting the lump sum monetary compensation payment in lieu of plots in the resettlement sites. However, it is worthwhile to conduct a
study to find out the ultimate plight of the PAPs who left the site after availing monetary compensation against land, against plot in the relocation site and employment in mines.
16
POSTALE 2008
3. Technical assistance by NGOs greatly helped in formulating and implementing the RAPs. It
would not have been possible by the CD/RR officers of the company to do the job as desired.
4. Transparency regarding the mining project construction to the PAPs is very much necessary for
getting full cooperation for physical acquisition of legally acquired land.
5. The PAPs, being mainly agricultural workers, proved to be vry difficult to train them in other
trades and then develop entrepreneurship to make them capable of self-earning, particularly
when they always dream of comparatively high salaried mine job. Thus, it was not possible to
address the vast and complicated issues on social mitigation with complete success in the 25
geographically scattered opencast mines in such a short project implementation time. However,
it was a good objective start in a planned manner.
6. While organizing training for the PAPs on skill development, the PAPs should be prioritized, so
that only potential self employment interested persons are trained and not the persons who are
interested only for the stipend during the training days.
7. The resettlement sites need to be identified with participation of the PAPs. Participatory method
of dealing with the R&R issues is the best way to proceed with such projects.
8. Success of self-employment schemes depends highly on arranging seed money for the people
from banks, funding through government schemes, or other philanthropic organizations, etc.
9. There is ample scope of implementing Land Based Income generation Schemes for the PAPs in
the mining areas by utilizing the empty mine lands, reclaimed mine lands, and the discharges
from the mines as well as sewage treatment plants fo irrigating the plots identified for the
schemes.
10. Certain aspects like mine closure planning and social impact assessment should be properly
built in the Environmental Management Plan itself, including the cost estimates.
A Case Discussion
The mining complexes in the country in general are seen to be having four distinct types of settlements. All of them develop in accordance with the level of economic assistance they receive from
the mining companies.
1. Colonies Officers, staff and workers colonies made by the mining companies with all the facilities provided by the mining companies.
2. R&R villages The villages developed by the mining companies jointly with the PAFs with facilities as per the provisions in the rehabilitation and resettlement packages.
3. IPDP villages These are the villages within one kilometer of the mines with some facilities, e.g.,
water supply, roads, etc. being provided by the mining companies.
4. Native villages These are other nearby villages which do no receive practically any facility from
the mining companies.
A study of the level of satisfaction of the emotional, mental and physical needs of the people residing
in the four types of locations in two major coal mining complexes in the country revealed that it was
different in these locations (Tripathi 2000). A general overview of the level of development of the
mining complexes as a whole and the four types of locations in particular indicates that the areas do
not represent the nature of development they should have with the level of economic activities taking
place. Out of eleven coal mining areas studied by the Center of Mining Environment (CME), Indian
School of Mines University (ISMU), Dhanbad in the country the overall quality of life of nine of them
was poor and only two had fair quality of life. None of the areas had good overall quality of life.
Another study of the community development, by Tripathi 2004, at two of the largest opencast coal
mines in the country, namely, Gevra and Kusmunda, both in Korba coalfield and having received
assistance under CSESMP, revealed the following. Before mining the area had mainly forest land
and rain fed agriculture.
17
POSTALE 2008
1. The mining and associated activities had brought about a marked change in the level of economic activities. But the benefits of the increase in the level of economic activities had not accrued to the entire cross section of the society.
2. The four types of localities in the two complexes developed differently in accordance with the
magnitude of assistance they received from the mining company.
3. Only the colonies of the mining company had an overall fair quality of life of the families while the
other three locations, namely, R&R villages, IPDP villages and native villages had overall poor
quality of life. The percentage of poor families was 6 in the colonies, >12 in R&R villages, 84.7 in
IPDP villages and 86 in native villages.
4. The colonies and the R&R villages had >70% nuclear families while the IPDP and native villages
had 80% combined families.
5. More then 60% of the people in the colonies and R&R villages were engaged in the works of
mining and related activities. In the IPDP and native villages this percentage was 50-60.
6. The literacy level in the four locations, i.e., colonies, R&R villages, IPDP villages and native villages was 93.5, 64.6, 41.9 and 33.5 percent respectively with the percentage of non-matriculates
being 2, 21.0, 39.4 and 79 respectively. This indicated that even with all the assistance from the
company the R&R villages had poor literacy and education.
7. The percentage of families having per capita income less then Rs 1,000/- per month was 15,
60.4, 83.8 and 87 in the colonies, R&R villages, IPDP villages and native villages respectively.
Thus, the economic status of R&R villages, IPDP villages and native villages was no where near
the level of the economic activities taking place in the complexes.
8. In the colonies all the families were using LPG as cooking fuel as this was being supplied by the
company. In the other three locations more than 75% families were using coal, wood, and cow
dung for cooking.
Critical Review
The above studies and a general overview of the mining complexes indicate that the coal mining
complexes have not developed commensurate with the level of the economic activities despite implementation of the provisions in the R&R Policies and other measures for community development.
Detailed consolidated data base for the overall community development in the mining complexes in
the country are not available readily. The author while moving around in many mining complexes has
come across situations where the status of community development desires a critical assessment
and urgent necessary actions.
1. The National R&R Policy 2007 has no specific provision of measures for the mining areas. It
seeks displacement on the land for land and also seeks jobs for the displaced people.
2. The R&R Policies in general are not suitable for the mining areas. They do no take into account
the typical characteristics of the mineral bearing areas.
3. The R&R Policies do not address the social problems of low level economy of the mineral bearing areas, e.g., poverty, malnutrition, etc.
4. The Policies tend to restore the economic level of the PAFs. This is not justified in the nature of
the changes that take place in the level of the economic activities from predominantly agriculture/forestry to mining.
5. The Policies though seek public consultation and some participation do not aim at taking the
PAFs in confidence and ensuring their participation right from the beginning of project planning.
6. The R&R of the PAFs should not be looked in isolation as is indicated in most Policies. It should
be an integral part of the overall community development and CSR of the companies.
7. The community development and hence the R&R planning should be done to achieve the quality
of life of the mining complexes commensurate with the level of the economic activities.
8. The provision of jobs to the eligible local people on their merits should be independent of the
provision of giving jobs in lieu of acquisition of land and loss of livelihood. The local people capable of taking up jobs in the mining and associated activities on their own merits and skills
should be employed irrespective of their nature of displacement/entitlement. This is not indicated
in any Policy.
18
POSTALE 2008
9. The Policies do not aim at utilization of the local resources other then minerals and fossil fuels
for the development of the society in the complexes. In fact besides the utilization of local resources the impacts of mining, wherever possible, should be converted into resources.
10. The CIL Policy aims at optimizing the land requirement for mining and associated activities. The
other policies are silent on this account. In fact the impacts on the land use should also be minimized.
11. None of the Policies direct planning of the mines for temporary displacement of the people,
which is possible in many mining situations. Temporary displacement of the PAFs can be
planned only when the mines are planned with concurrent reclamation and proper mine closure.
The temporary displacement has many advantages.
12. Each mineral bearing area has its typical characteristics and resource base. Hence, the R&R
packages should be developed in a site specific manner with active participation of the local
people.
13. Like other localities the population of the PAFs also increases with time and with this the requirements of civic facilities and infrastructure also increase. The packages should be developed
while accounting for these requirements.
14. At many places the PAFs as well as local people are not happy with the treatment they have got
and hence are not readily agreeing to part with their land for the expansion of the mining projects. There should be a system to assess the level of satisfaction of the emotional, mental and
physical needs of the people.
15. Failure of the mining companies in timely implementation of the R&R packages and community
development programs should call for punitive actions and a good work should attract rewards.
16. The Policies do not provide for a separate fund for R&R implementation at the national/state
level to take care of the failure of the mining companies.
Keeping the above discussions in view the author opines that there should be a separate R&R Policy
at the National Level outlining the directives for planning, design and implementation of mining and
associated activities while taking care of the PAFs and the community as a whole with the roles of
the different stakeholders defined properly. The National R&R Policy for mining should also indicate
that for each coalfield/minerals bearing area site specific R&R package should be developed. The
suggested objectives, directive principles, etc. of the Policy are as given below.
SUGGESTED NATIONAL POLICY FOR R&R IN MINING AREAS
Objectives
The National Policy for R&R in Mining Areas should have the following objectives.
1. To effectively take care of the needs of the Project Affected People (PAPs) and Project Affected
Families (PAFs) and improving their quality of life (QoL) with appropriate integration in the society for overall community development commensurate with the level of economic activities.
2. To take care of the social problems of the underdeveloped areas, e.g., poverty, malnutrition, etc.
3. To minimize social impacts of mining and associated activities and developing action plans for
mitigating these impacts.
4. To facilitate development of skills in the PAPs so as to enable them to earn their livelihood.
5. To utilize local resources, natural and manmade, and develop the most appropriate land uses
not only after the mine closure but also during the period of mining.
Directive Principles
The suggested National Policy for R&R in Mining Areas should have the following as directive principles to be taken into consideration while planning the mines and other activities. The basic premise
of the directive principles is that the mining companies exploiting minerals have moral and legal responsibility for suitably looking after the people affected by their activities.
19
POSTALE 2008
1. Treat the local people with dignity and honor, and respect them and their virtues.
2. Gain the confidence of the local people and ensure their active participation in the process of
planning, design and implementation of mining and associated activities.
3. Optimize the land requirement for mining and associated activities for both opencast and underground mines to optimize displacement of people.
4. Select the land for associated activities to cause minimum possible disturbances in the land use
of the mineral and fossil fuel bearing and surrounding areas.
5. Plan the mines with concurrent reclamation and proper mine closure so that the displacement of
the PAFs is temporary and the land used for mining and associated activities is brought back to
proper economic land uses.
6. Integrate R&R and mine closure with the mine plan so as to achieve overall development of the
mineral bearing areas.
7. R&R should not be looked in isolation. It should be a part of overall community development of
the areas commensurate with the level of economic activities. The R&R package should also
address the problems associated with the under developed areas, i.e., poverty, malnutrition, etc.
8. The development of a well defined time bound RAP and its implementation should be done with
active participation of the PAFs and PAPs. Any deviation from the planned path should invite a
thorough assessment and should only be done for the betterment of the overall status.
9. The policy should direct the concerned State and Central Government Departments to effectively
conduct their roles in facilitating the people, acquisition of land, development of infrastructure,
provision of civic facilities, etc.
10. Make a provision of development of an R&R fund for taking care of the PAFs in the situations
where the mining companies have failed to fulfill their obligations.
11. Provide for punishment of the companies and people responsible for shortcomings/failure of implementation of the R&R packages. The good work should attract rewards.
12. Define the obligations and duties of the various stakeholders. Some suggestions in this respect
are given later.
Development of R&R Packages
There is a need for the development of separate R&R packages for each mining complex, which
should be based on the local geo-political situation and resource base, with overall guidance from
the Policy. The guiding principles are given hereunder.
1. R&R should not be looked in isolation. It should be part of overall community development of the
complexes.
2. The planning for overall community development of the areas should be done not only taking
into consideration the resources to be generated by mining and associated activities but also
with adequate utilization of non-mineral/fossil fuel resources of the areas.
3. All the PAFs should be identified and their comprehensive socio-economic data base should be
developed. An accurate assessment of the families living below poverty line, status of nutrition,
child mortality rate, etc. should be done.
4. It is important to make a proper assessment and valuation of the immoveable assets of the
PAFs.
5. For the development of R&R packages the emotional, mental and physical needs of the PAFs
and their QoL should be given due consideration. The objective should not be to restore their income but to improve their overall QoL commensurate with the standards that may be expected
with the level of economic activities taking place.
6. As far as possible the local people capable of earning jobs on their own merits should be given
preference over the people from outside.
7. No displacement of the PAFs should be done unless the rehabilitation site has been properly
prepared.
8. The rehabilitation site should be prepared not only to accommodate the present requirement but
also future development of the community.
20
POSTALE 2008
Obligations and Duties of Various Stakeholders

For proper formulation of the R&R packages and their action plan and then the implementation of the
packages each stakeholders obligations and duties must be clearly defined. The author has tried to
define the obligations in the following manner.
1
Mining companies
Government agencies
Local people
Non-governmental
organizations
1. Gaining confidence of the local people and developing an understanding of their ways of life.
2. Creating proper awareness among the local people regarding the
oncoming mining and associated activities.
3. Appropriate design and planning of the mining and associated
activities.
4. Development of R&R packages and overall community development plans with participation from the local people.
5. Development of rehabilitation action plan (RAP) as well as community development plan (CDP) with participation from the local
people.
6. Making provision for adequate finances for the implementation of
the RAP and CDP.
7. Implementation of the RAP and CDP with participation from the
local people.
8. Maintaining cordial and friendly relationship with the people,
other mining companies, government departments, NGOs, etc.
1. Facilitating the mining companies and local people in gaining
mutual confidence and creation of awareness.
2. Maintaining law and order.
3. Developing suitable infrastructure and civic facilities in the areas
in addition to those to be developed for facilitating mining and
associated activities for facilitating development of the areas
commensurate with the anticipated level of economic activities.
4. Providing legal assistance to the local people.
5. Facilitating the mining companies to develop community development plans and R&R packages and their action plans, i.e.,
RAP and CDP.
6. Facilitating the mining companies in the implementation of RAP
and CDP.
1. Developing an understanding of the nature and extent of mining
and associated activities that are likely to take place in the area.
2. Assess from their own standpoint the impacts of the activities,
i.e., the advantages and disadvantages likely to occur due to the
activities.
3. Facilitating the mining companies in compilation of the required
data for the development of R&R and community development
programs.
4. Participate with the mining companies in the development of
R&R packages and community development programs.
5. Participate with the mining companies in formulation and implementation of RAP and CDP.
6. Develop best possible methods of economic utilization of the
available resources, other then minerals and fossil fuels, for improving the overall quality of life of the complexes.
7. Maintaining cordial and friendly relationship with the mining companies and other agencies.
1. Facilitating both the local people and the mining companies for
the creation of awareness among the local people about the an-
21
POSTALE 2008
(NGOs)
ticipated mining and associated activities.

2. Facilitating the mining companies to develop community development plans and R&R packages and their action plans, i.e.,
RAP and CDP.
3. Facilitating the mining companies in the implementation of RAP
and CDP.
4. Facilitating development of best possible methods of economic
utilization of the available resources, other then minerals and
fossil fuels, for improving the overall quality of life of the complexes.
5. Facilitating cordial and friendly relationship of the local people
with the mining companies and other agencies.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bhattacharya, B C (2003) Resettlement and Rehabilitation of Project Affected Persons (PAPs) in Coal India under CSESMP.
Proc. 19th World Mining Cong., New Delhi. pp 1413-1423.
Mandal, P R (2007) Environmental Concerns of Coal Mining Broad View in Indian Context. 7th Prof. S K Bose Memorial Lecture,
ISM University, Dhanbad. 14 p.
Panda, N., et al (2001). Community Development in Coal Mining Complexes. ENVIS Monograph No 7, CME, ISM, Dhanbad. 110
p.
Saxena, N C (2008) Mine Closure. Scientific Publishers (India), Jodhpur. 224 p.
Saxena, N C (2006) Development of People Friendly Rehabilitation and Resettlement Packages for Mining areas. Proc. Int. Coal
Congress & Expo, New Delhi. pp 317-323.
Saxena, N C (2003) Rehabilitation and resettlement of project affected people (PAPs) in mining complexes. Proc. First International Workshop on Planning, Design and Handling of Environmental Problems with Mining Activities. EMCBTA Project of
MOEF. ISM, Dhanbad. pp325-345.
Tripathi, R N (2000) Rehabilitation and resettlement of project affected persons (PAPs) at Kusmunda and Gevra Projects of
SECL. M.Tech. Dissertation, ISM, Dhanbad. (Unpublished)
Tripathi, R N (2004) Investigations into the Development of a Model for Community Development Planning for Coal Mining
Complexes. Ph.D. Thesis ISM, Dhanbad. (Unpublished)
22
POSTALE 2008
KEYNOTE ADDRESS
IMPACT OF CHANGING SOCIO-LEGAL SCENARIO ON LAND

ACQUISITION FOR COAL MINING PROJECTS
DR. S.K. SARKAR
Secretary General
Society for Mining Research Sustainable Development and Environment
INTRODUCTION
Land acquisition for industrial projects and other development activities has recently emerged as one
of the hot issues affecting timely completion of Industrial Projects. The difficulties and agitation over
land acquisition had been there all along. The intense agitation over land acquisition for Tatas car
factory at Singur and its ultimate shifting to other location in Gujarat signifies a radical change in
situation which would definitely have a bearing on land acquisition scenario in the country During the
present decade, the Government has tried to formulate some policies and have also set in motion
some changes in legislative scenario to balance the interest of the project and project affected persons.
In the present paper an attempt has been made to find out the impact of this changing scenario on
land acquisition for coal mining projects. The scope of the subject is vast but to keep the article short
the basic points of interest have only been discussed.
LAND REQUIREMENT FOR COAL PROJECTS
The Unique Features
The land requirement for mining projects has some unique features unlike steel plants and factories
or any other industry. Land requirement for coal (or any mineral) project is a linear function of total
cumulative production. Nano (car) plant may go on producing millions of car from one thousand
acres of plant but for every million ton of coal production a certain amount of land would be required
mainly depending on thickness and frequency of coal seams at a particular location. The method of
operation, underground or open cast also matters.
Moreover, for any industrial activity a site may be chosen which will cause least amount of economic
and other disruption but coal or mineral has to be mined where it occurs.
Quantum Of Land Required
The quantum of land required for coal mining would naturally be very large as coal industry has
chalked out an ambition target of coal production during the coming decades.
The envisaged coal production during the coming years is expected to be as follows.
XI plan (2011-12)
Million tonne
621
XII plan (2016-2017)

Million tonne
778
XII plan (2021-22)

Million tonne
948
An approximate estimate made on the basis of above projection would give a land requirement figure of around 60 to 70 thousand hectares during the coming 15 years. This may be taken as a reasonable guess as the variables involved are many but
is being made to give an idea about the
enormity of the task.
POSTALE 2008
CHANGING SOCIO-LEGAL SCENERIO

Land Acquisition Act 1894 - The Root Of Trouble
The genesis of the problem and intense agitation over land acquisition which is now being encountered lies in draconian nineteenth century legislation of British era-Land Acquisition Act 1894. The
Act empowered the Government to acquire any land for public purpose within a definite time frame.
The landowners were asked routinely to file objection if any but the relevant Act clearly mentioned
that unwillingness of the landowner to part with the land cannot be a basis for objection or in determination of compensation by collector or by the court to which the case is referred.
After Indian independence and framing of Indian constitution right to property became a fundamental
right as per article 31 and therefore the land Acquisition Act, 1894 went against it and could become
nontenable, but. But the constitution was amended and article 300A was inserted which allowed acquisition of property by due process of Law.
A few other factors which made the Land Acquisition Act draconian were.
i) The Government had the right to acquire land for public purpose but there was no corresponding
legal provision for resettlement and economic rehabilitation of the land losers.
ii) The compensation was meager as it was determined on the prevailing price at the time of notification when the area (especially for mining projects) was under developed.
iii) There was no process of consultation with the community.
Though there were no legal provision the Government in right sense and on humanitarian
grounds tried to resettle the evicted and land losers but as there was no process of consultation
with the affected persons and their representation in the process the Government effort was inadequate and ineffective.
The sum total of all this may be represented by statistics from a NGO with international reputation.
As per the report of Center for Science and Environment, New Delhi. Between 1950 to 1991 mining
displaced about 26 lakh people the second highest toll among all development projects. Of these
not even 25 percent have been resettled. About 52 percent of those displaced were tribals.
The statistics quoted above is of mining project but there should not be any doubt that the same sort
of situation prevailed in other developmental activities. As the situation developed and continued
over a long span of time naturally there was reaction from the civil society and noted intellectuals
took prominent part in agitation over land acquisition like Narmada Bachao agitation. The international agencies like World bank and Asian Development Bank also expressed their concern. The
Government was in a dilemma. A right balance had to be made between interest of development
and welfare of project affected people majority of whom were under privileged tribals.
The Government definitely was concerned as it became apparent when Shri R. Ventataraman the
then President of India in his eve of Republic day speech in 2001 said Let it not be said by future
generations that the Indian Republic has been built on the destruction of green earth and innocent
tribals who have been living there for centuries. Let it not be said of India that this great Republic in a
hurry to develop itself, is destroying this green mother earth and uprooting its tribal population.
Legislative Scenario
President Venkataramans anguished feeling was actually manifestation of concern of the government and during the decade a number of measures were initiated by the Government.
A national policy on Resettlement and Rehabilitation of project affected persons was formulated in
2003 by the Government of India and it came into effect from February 2004. It must be clearly understood that policy formulated did not have any statutory force but never the less, it gave a framework to all concerned about the resettlement and rehabilitation of project affect persons. Moreover,
many industrial establishments were prompted to have their own policy on the subject formulated.
24
POSTALE 2008
Some of the State Governments also followed suit. The Government of Maharashtra however had
their own Act formulated long back in 1978.
The experience gained in implementation of the national policy formulated in 2003 indicated that
there are many issues which need to be reviewed. The adverse impact on affected familieseconomic, environmental, social and cultural must be assessed in transparent and participatory
manner. Social impact assessment and provision of all infrastructural facilities and amenities in resettlement area must be mandatory. Moreover, where scheduled tribal people are being displaced in
large number a well thought tribal development plan should be put in place. There should also be a
time frame and effective grievance redressal mechanism. The National Rehabilitation and Resettlement policy 2007 was formulated to take care of all the issues mentioned above and it became effective from 31st October 2007.
To provide statutory backing to the above policy.
The land Acquisition (Amendment) Bill, 2007 (Bill No 97-2007) and the Rehabilitation and Resettlement Bill 2007 (bill No 98 of 2007) were drawn up.
Both the bills are pending for consideration of Parliament and are expected to be taken up during
winter session of parliament.
3.21 Basic features of oncoming legislation.
The bills mentioned above are complimentary to each other and may usher significant changes
in the field of land acquisition for development. It is not possible to go into elaborate details
within the confine of a paper only basic changes sought to be initiated are mentioned below.
Public Purpose
It has been given expanded connotation and shall include.
(a) Provision of land for strategic purposes relating to military air force work or any other work for
any other work vital to the state.
(b) Provision of land for infrastructure project which among many other includes mining.
(c) The provision of land for any other purpose useful to the general public for which land has been
purchased by a person under lawful contract to the extent of seventy percent but the remaining
thirty percent of the total area of land required for the project is yet to be acquired.
The inclusion of (c) mentioned above has a special significance as would be discussed subsequently.
Willing and non-willing land losers
In the whole process of land acquisition presence of non-willing land losers is unavoidable but at
the same time in a democracy acquiring of land against somebodys wish is a tragedy. In specifying
that 70 percent of land (in non-strategic and non-infrastructure project) is to be acquired from willing
owner some sort of community approval is sought to be obtained.
This change though resented by some state governments and few industry fellows is a welcome
step to defuse the situation.
Person interested
The definition of person interested has been expanded in The Proposed Land Acquisition (Amendment) Bill 2007 from its earlier restricted definition in original land Acquisition Act, 1894 and shall
include.
(i) a person claiming an interest in compensation to be made on account of the acquisition of land
under this Act.
(ii) Tribals and other traditional forest dwellers who have lost any recognized traditional rights.
(iii) a person interested in easement affecting the land.
(iv) Persons having tenancy rights under relevant state laws.
Affected family
25
POSTALE 2008
It is a term used in The Rehabilitation and Resettlement Bill, 2007 and includes all families / person
who may be affected by land acquisition in any way whatsoever. The term has been given wide connotation.
(b) Affected family means
(i) a family whose primary place of residence or other property or source of livelihood is adversely
affected by the acquisition of land for a project or involuntary displacement due to any other reason.
(ii) Any tenure holder, tenant, lessee or owner of other property, who on account of acquisition of
land ( including plot in the abadi or other property) in the affected area or otherwise, has been
involuntarily displaced from such land or other property.
(iii) Any agricultural or non agricultural labourer, landless person ( not having homestead land, agricultural land, or either homestead or agricultural land ), rural artisan, small trader or self employed person; who has been residing or engaged in any trade, business, occupation or vocation
continuously for a period of not less than five years in the affected area preceding the date of
declaration of the affected area and who has been deprived of earning his livelihood or alienated
wholly or substantially from the main source of his trade, business, occupation or vocation because of the acquisition of land in the affected area of being involuntarily displaced for any other
reason.
Similarly benefits to be given to the affected family are also very extensive as would be given below
In case of a project involving land acquisition on behalf of a requiring body(i) the requiring body shall give preference to the affected families in providing employment in the
project, at least one person per family, subject to the availability of vacancies and suitability of
the affected person for the employment.
(ii) Wherever necessary, the requiring body shall arrange for training for the affected persons, so as
to enable such persons to take on suitable jobs;.
(iii) The requiring body shall give preference to the affected persons or their groups or co-operatives
in the allotment of outsourced contracts, shops or other economic opportunities coming up in or
around the project site;
(iv) The requiring body shall give preference to willing landless labourers and unemployed affected
persons while engaging labour in the project during the construction phase.
(v) The requiring body shall offer the affected persons the necessary training facilities for development of entrepreneurship, technical and professional skill for self employment.
(vi) The requiring body shall also offer scholarship and other skill development facilities to eligible
candidates of affected families.
A base line survey would be conducted to identify the affected families / persons.
Social Impact Assessment
In case of a project causing involuntary displacement of four hundred or more families in plain area
or two hundred or more families in tribal or hilly areas social impact assessment will be mandatory to
find out the impact of the project on public and community properties and infrastructure.
Rehabilitation And Resettlement Involvement Of Community
The rehabilitation and resettlement can only be satisfactorily done if it is done in a participatory manner with involvement of affected persons. The new legislative measures seek to achieve it through
public hearing and discussion in concerned gram sabhas and supervision of the implementation of
the plan of rehabilitation and resettlement by representative committees where project affected families would be represented.
Redressal Of Grievances
There will be Rehabilitation and Resettlement Committee at the project level with local representation. Moreover there will be a standing Rehabilitation Committee in the district with District collector
26
POSTALE 2008
as Chairperson. But the main role for time bound redressal of grievances would be of the ombudsman appointed by the appropriate Government. Any affected person, if aggrieved for not being offered the benefits admissible may move a petition to ombudsman for redressal of his grievances.
There should be a National Rehabilitation commission to overview the entire operation.
IMPACT OF EMERGING CHANGING SCENARIO ON LAND ACQUISITION FOR COAL
PROJECTS
It is very difficult to visualize accurately what would be the impact of changing socio-legal situation
on land acquisition for coal projects. But there is no doubt that land acquisition would be a difficult
task through mining has been clubbed with infrastructure and as such hundred percent of the required land maybe acquired by Land Acquisition Act. That the land required for a modern coal project would be very large and would be site specific would add to the difficulty Some of the factors
posing special difficulty has been discussed below.
Schedule V Areas
The oncoming The Rehabilitation and Resettlement Bills 2007 makes it clear that in tribal inhabited
schedule v areas the consultation with Gramsabha and Panchayat is mandatory even at the stage of
notification. In the surcharged atmosphere presently prevailing, consultation is not likely to lead to
consent.
In the past, mining has been done in many tribal inhabited areas but while planning coal projects in
tribal areas special ground work would be necessary if any schedule v area is included within the
planned project area.
Consultation With The Community
In non-tribal non schedule V areas also the rehabilitation and resettlement plan would have to be
discussed in village panchayat. Smooth sailing of formulated plan would depend on the political
alignment of the concerned panchayat. As a modern day coal mining project may require a huge
tract of land around 2000 to 3000 acres it is likely that some of the panchayats may be acting as
spoil sport
Practicability Of Providing Employments
The coal Industry has in the past faced agitation for provision of employment to the land losers
wards The employment was offered to land losers against a certain minimum parcel of land which
varied from company to company and also from time to time. The minimum parcel of land for which a
job has been offered varied from 1 acre to 4 acre.
The situation would however drastically change when the pending bills on Land Acquisition and Rehabilitation and Resettlement are passed by Parliament. Firstly uptill now, land losers claim had no
statutory backing but in near future it would be backed by the statute. It is correct that the statute
would only talk about the priority in employment opportunity and not about the employment as such
but the common man in their wisdom would think that getting employment is their right as per law.
Secondly the number of likely claimants would be excessively high. Previously the landowners were
the claimants but now all the project affected persons whose numbers would substantially increase
(as per the on coming legislation) would be the claimants.
Let a likely case scenario be examined. A moderate sized opencast project with an annual production of around 6 million tonne may require about 900 hectares of land for twenty five years operation.
and the number of land loosing families may be around two thousands. The families indirectly affected may be around another two thousand making the number of total affected families four thou-
27
POSTALE 2008
sand with proportionate number of claimants for jobs in the project, but the irony of the situation is
that a modern day opencast project of the size mentioned may require about three thousand persons
only. Naturally, the project would not be able to fulfill the local aspiration resulting in creation of
strong resentment.
Land Price
The oncoming legislation has specified market price at the time of notification as the price for land to
be acquired and this would increase the land price for a project. it would be more so as market value
as defined in the legislation would be on lower side and higher price might have to be paid and there
is no doubt that the value of land price in future would be much more than paid earlier. The likely
increased land price would have to be factored in during formulation of the project.
CONCLUSION
1. No coal project in scheduled areas should be planned without doing the groundwork involving
consultation with the tribal communities inhabiting the areas.
2. Gestation period for starting a coal project may increase at least in some cases.
3. The expenditure incurred in land acquisition is likely to increase significantly and this should be
factored in while drawing up project and evaluating its economic.
4. Coal industry should invigorate its training department in such a way that it may undertake suitable training programme for project affected persons.
5. Coal Industry should try at least in some project to purchase land from the landowners on principle of Willing Buyer-Willing Seller. The industry might have to offer much higher price but it may
be better option as all the encumbrances including provision of job opportunities training and
other facilities may not be necessary. This however may only be tried in a project not located in a
backward area.
28
POSTALE 2008
KEYNOTE ADDRESS
LEGISLATION & PROCEDURE FOR THE COMMENCEMENT

OF A CAPTIVE COAL BLOCK
H. L. GUPTA
ISP, SAIL, Chasnalla
INTRODUCTION
In the recent years, demand for various minerals/ores has been greatly increased due to the rapid
growth and fast industrialization of the nation. The basic industries like steel, power, cement and
nonferrous metal sectors need uninterrupted supply of huge quantity of raw materials for their survival and sustainable growth. It has necessitated the need to commence new captive blocks and
enhance the production capacity of existing mines, to meet our requirement and keep pace with the
world.
The panned growth of Indian economy could only be guaranteed if assured sufficient supply of energy at affordable price. In the present scenario the development and industrialization is taking
place very fast due to the liberal national policy which is creating a more conducive and appropriate
environment for public and private participation. The major demand of the growing industries is
availability of basic raw materials and power for the sustainable growth and long run survival of the
industry. At the same time, fast industrialization has been essential to accommodate the large number of educated unemployed youth and provide them an opportunity to contribute their skill and talent for the noble cause of national building.
Our country is blessed with almost all the minerals and fuel required to sustain and support the large
industries which can play a vital role and having capabilities to bring the nation on top of the world.
But, unfortunately we are not able to extract the full potential of our mineral resources for various
reasons, of which, the lack of seriousness in developing coal blocks and also mining technology
seems to be the major cause of lagging behind in this field. In order to meet the growing demand for
minerals it has become essential to explore and exploit the available mineral resources, especially
the coal deposits of the country to mitigate the energy crunch at comparatively cheaper rate.
Though, dependency on coal can not solve the problem and concerted efforts have to be taken for
long term mix energy planning to accelerate the power generation. The comparative status of energy
requirement and consumptions has been illustrated as below:
Energy consumption ratio in India &

World.
100
50
India.
0
Oil N/g Coa Nuc Hyd
India. 28.4 8.5 56.2 0.9
World 35.8 23.7 28.4 5.8 6.3
World
POSTALE 2008
Energy consumption ratio in India.

6%
1%
28%
Oil
N/Gas
Coal
Nuclear/E
Hydro/E
9%
56%
Energy consumption ratio of World
6%
6%
36%
Oil
N/Gas
Coal
Nuc/E
28%
Hydro/E
24%
In the present situation, the role of a geologist in mining industry is to provide correct and precise
information about the mineral deposit their qualitative & quantitative assessment and economic feasibility. This helps to facilitate the mine planner to decide the suitable and appropriate method of mining to exploit the mineral at bare minimum cost. There has been realization and seriousness in the
recent years to develop and extract the mineral potential to cater the growing need of steel, power
and other industries. As a result the government of India has taken initiatives to allocate captive
blocks of coal, Iron ore and other minerals, to the private and public sector companies to develop
their own resources and reduce the dependency on import. Though the coal blocks have been identified for allocation in the year 1993, but actual momentum gained after year 2003. Total 188 nos. of
blocks allocated till the year 2007, out of which production started in only 14 blocks and production
expected to start in 19 blocks by 2009, whereas other blocks are under different stages of development. The percentage-wise demonstration show by pie diagram as below:
30
POSTALE 2008
Status of Coal Blocks (188 Nos) allocated till 2007.
19, 10%
14, 7%
U/progress
Prod.Started
Prod. Expected 08-09
155, 83%
India is blessed by huge occurrence of coal deposits in different regions of the country and with regard to proved coal deposit it ranked third position in the world. The total reserves as estimated by
GSI is around 255.20 Billion tones out of which 97.9 BT falls under prove category whereas 157.3BT
still under indicated & inferred category, and this provides an immense scope of exploration work for
maximizing reserves under prove category. The CIL and CMPDIL has already taken initiative by
inviting global Expression of Interest (EOI) for undertaking massive exploration work, in order to convert more and more coal reserves under proved category. The category and depth-wise reserves
have been illustrated as below:
Coal reserves in Billion Tones.(255.20)
Depth-wise distribution of coal

reserves (source-GSI report)
Category-wise coal reserves as on 01.01.2007
150
8%
100
31%
50
0
Proved
Indicated
Inferred
61%
0-300m
300-600m
600-1200m
Coking
Non-
Lignite
Total
17
13
2
80.47
105.89
35.93
0.43
0.11
0.37
97.9
119
38.3
31
POSTALE 2008
Due to the impetuous boom in the geological exploration & mining sector, demand for the experienced professionals and consultants have suddenly increased to plan, develop and commence a
new mine for the optimum production of mineral for their respective industries. Since, there has
been a series of legal provisions and statutory compliances of central and state government like
DGMS, IBM, SPCB, MOEF, Coal Controller, DGM, DMO and Administrative Authorities involved for
obtaining lease and number of clearances, it is essential and imperative for a professional to have
complete knowledge and awareness of all the prerequisite provisions and procedures to plan and set
a mile stone for effective time bound controlling and timely commencement of the project.
In the recent years, many new thermal power plants are proposed to cater the need of growing electricity demand in the country. Also due to the massive expansion programme of Steel plants, the
requirement of both metallurgical and thermal coal will enhanced. Considering the requirement these
industries a sincere and fast development of existing coal blocks is very much imperative. The coal
production and demand status has been illustrated as below;
Coal production and demand status.

800
700
600
500
400
Production
Demand
300
200
100
0
20023
20045
20067
Year
2002-3
2003-4
2004-5
2005-6
2006-7
2011-12(Projected)
Production
Demand
341.23
369.23
361.06
384.07
386.95
418.02
405.00
465.74
431.5
473.18
680.00
731.00
In India maximum coal production comes from open cast mining whereas underground coal production is less than 15 % of total production as a result Open cast reserves are depleting very fast, further open cast mining has become more difficult due to the problem of land acquisition and rehabilitation of project affected persons. Under these conditions impetus has to be given to extract optimum reserve by comprehensive planning to the maximum depth by adopting both opencast and U/G
method. The ratio of production comes from O/C and U/G method illustrated below
32
POSTALE 2008
The above articulated reasons, inspired the author to write this paper, using his 21 years diversified
and vast experiences of being associated with number of projects of Coal, Iron Ore, Bauxite, Gold,
Coal Bed Methane and many others during the tenure of various Government, Public sector and
Corporate companies. The main objective of this paper is to provide comprehensive, consolidated
and ready-made information pertaining to every aspects of executing a new mining project, which
will be extremely helpful, time saving and cost effective for the companies to develop a captive mine
in schedule time.
Briefly and broadly the following steps are involved in the implementation of a captive mine:
Reconnaissance of the area, with specific aim to assess the lateral extent of deposit, existing
manmade and natural features, means of communication and transport etc. intend to apply for
mining lease.
Background and history of the block, related to previous exploration and mining activities has to
be collected. Exploration report of total reserves their quality and suitability for end use.
After the assessment of above aspects, the area can be scrutinized for obtaining lease under
MCR-1960. Application for lease in a prescribed format (Form-1) submitted along with stipulated
fee of Rs. 2500/- under sub rule (3) of rule 22, and desired documents like brief details of area,
deposit, tentative reserve & quality, cadastral map showing the proposed lease boundary demarcation, Certificate of registration of the company, list of technical personals, consent of the
villagers,
The scrutiny of competent consultant for the preparation of Detail Project Feasibility Report and
Mine Plan along with mine closure plan should be identified, and simultaneously progress along
with other activities.
The TOR (Term of Reference) of concerned block along with Form-A is to be submitted to the
Secretary, MOEF, New Delhi, for approval and further guidelines for preparation of Environmental Impact Assessment and Environmental Management Plan (EIA/EMP).
Appropriate and authorized agency to be short listed for preparation of EIA/EMP of the mining
block considering all the statutory requirement of State Pollution Control Board and MOEF.
Consequent to the approval of mine plan by Ministry of coal or by IBM in case of metallic deposit, process of conducting Public Hearing for approved capacity should be initiated.
The application submitted to the Member Secretary, SPCB, for presentation and obtaining date
for conducting P/H. This should be widely advertised in leading local news paper and also announced in all the villages falling within 10 km. radius.
The public hearing is conducted in the chairmanship of DC or his representative and under the
technical supervision of Regional Officer, SPCB, other members who participate are senior citizens, Sarpanch of villages. In the process of P/H details of project deliberated and opinion of the
project affected people (PAP) recorded by RO, and queries raised by villagers suitable reply
given to them which is also duly recorded by RO. The video recording of whole proceedings is
33
POSTALE 2008
done and the CD along with questionnaire and report of RO pertaining to consent of people, sent
to the Member Secretary, SPCB, for his comments and onward submission of report to the Secretary, MoEF. After obtaining the consent of villagers, the SPCB issues a No Objection Certificate (NOC).
The NOC along with approved mine plan and EIA/EMP, sent to the Secretary, MoEF, New Delhi
for obtaining final environmental clearance in respect of the project.
After the environmental clearance is obtained, the process of land acquisition as per the requirement for the purpose of mining and also for erection & establishment infrastructure, should
be initiated with the land owner and revenue department. The process of tendering for different
jobs may also be initiated to avoid delay in project schedule.
The coal Controller Office is to be approached for grant of prior permission for mining. Simultaneously DGMS and other statutory bodies should also be intimated regarding the opening of
mine.
The man-made structures like water pipe lines, High Tension transmission line, roads or any
other such structure falling within the mining block and needs diversion or shifting, action should
be initiated in advance to avoid delay. Authorities concerned to be consulted, for the appropriate
solution.
The engagement of suitable agency for developing and operating mines by adopting state of the
art technology to extract optimum reserve.
In case of re-location of population for mining purpose, Implementation of rehabilitation and resettlement plan in line with the R&R policy of State Govt./ Govt. of India as applicable, has to be
executed. The socio-economic survey has to be conducted to assess the various aspects of project affected people.
34
POSTALE 2008
FLOW CHART FOR ACHIEVING MILE STONE OF MINING

ACTIVITIES.
DETAILED TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY.
DETAIL EXPLORATION OF THE BLOCK.
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF THE SAMPLES.
ESTIMATION OF RESERVES & GRADE.
PREPARATION OF DETAILED GEOLOGICAL REPORT.
PREPATION OF MINE PLAN BY RQP AND INITIATION

OF PROCESS, FOR OBTAINING ENVIRONMENTAL
CLEARANCE FROM STATE POLLUTION CONTROL
BOARD AND MOEF.
APPLICATION FOR GRANT OF MINING LEASE TO BE

SUBMITTED ALONG WITH PRESCRIBED FEE
(RS.2500) AND RELATED DOCUMENTS LIKE
CADASTRAL PLAN SHOWING LEASE BOUNDARY.
PLOTWISE DETAILS OF REVENUE, FOREST AND
GOVERNMENT LAND, CONSENT OF VILLAGERS,
GEOLOGICAL PLAN WITH BRIEF DETAILS OF
RESERVES & GRADE. LIST OF TECHNICAL PERSONS.
NO DUES CERTIFICATE FROM INCOME TAX DEPTT7
MINING OFFICE.
35
POSTALE 2008
ROAD MAP FOR OBTAINING ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE

SUBMISSION OF FORM-I ALONG WITH
PRE-FEASIBILITY REPORT TO THE
MOEF FOR OBTAINING DATE FOR TOR
PRESENTATION.
MINE PLAN PREPARATION BY RQP AND

SUBMISSION TO MINISTRY OF COAL ,
FOR OBTAINIG DATE FOR
PRESENTATION.
TOR PRESENTATION FOR ITS

APPROVAL FROM MOEF.
MINE PLAN PRESENTATION FOR

APPROVAL FROM MOC.
PREPARATION OF EIA-EMP BY
REGISTERED AGENCY, AS PER
GUIDELINES OF APPROVED TOR.
REVISION OF MINE PLAN AS PER

QUERRIES & SUGGESTIONS OF
COMMITTEE MEMBER, MOC, AND
SUBMISSION FOR FINAL APPROVAL.
APPLICATION IN PRESCRIBED
FORMAT FOR OBTAINING NOC U/S
25&26 OF WATER ACT AND U/S 21 OF
AIR ACT 1981 ALONG WITH SPECIFIED
FEE AND DESIRED DOCUMENTS LIKE
PROJECT REPORT, COPY OF LEASE
TRANSFER AND MOUZA PLAN
SHOWING BLOCK BOUNDARY TO BE
SUBMITTED. FOR OBTAINIG DATE
FOR TECHNICAL PRESENTATION
RELATED TO PUBLIC HEARING , AN
APPLICATION ALONG WITH FEE (1.5
LACS) AND COPY OF APPROVED TOR
& EIA-EMP TO BE SUBMITTED TO THE
MEMBER SECRETARY, SPCB.
APPROVED MINE PLAN.

AFTER OBTAINING MOEF CLEARANCE
THE PROCESS OF LAND ACQUISITION
STARTED WITHIN LEASE BOUNDARY,
FOR MINING AND ERRECTION OF
SUPPORTIVE INFRASTRUCTURE.
APPLICATION FOR PRIOR PERMISSION
TO OPEN A COAL MINE UNDER CLAUSE
9(2) OF COLLIERY CONTROL RULE 2000,
IS TO BE SUBMITTED IN PRESCRIBED
FORMAT TO THE COAL CONTROLLER
,MINISTRY OF COAL & MINES,
AFTER PRESENTATION, DATE FOR P/H

OBTAINED AND WIDELY
PROPAGATED IN PROJECT AFFECTED
VILLAGES, NEWS PAPERS, AND
LOCAL MEDIA.
PRIOR APPROVAL OF COAL

CONTROLLER OBTAINED.
STATUTORY COMPLIANCES OF DGMS
ALSO INITIATED SIMULTANEOUSLY.
ADEVERTISEMENT OF P/H NOTICE IN

LOCAL NEWS BY SPCB.
THE OTHER ACTIVITIES RELATED TO

TENDERING AND OUTSOURCING
SHOULD ALSO START SIDE BY SIDE .
P/H CONDUCTED UNDER

CHAIRMANSHIP OF DC IN PRESENCE
OF SPCB OFFICIALS AND VILLAGE
REPRESENTATIVES.
CIVIL WORK AND INSTALLATION OF

MAJORE EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATION OF
TRANSFORMER AND POWER SUPPLY
LINE FOR MINE LAID DOWN AS PER DPR
, TO BE EXECUTED.
CONSENTS AND SUGGESTIONS OF

PUBLIC RECORDED BY RO AND
RECORDING OF WHOLE
PROCEEDINGS ALONG WITH JOINTLY
SIGNED CONSENT RECORD SENT TO
THE MOEF.
PRDUCTION COMMENCED AND

GRADUALLY CAPACITY ENHANCE TO
THE APPROVED PEAK RATED
CAPACITY. RAW COAL SUPPLIED TO
THE WASHERY AND CLEAN COAL
FINALLY SUPPLIED TO THE STEEL
PLANT/ THERMAL POWER FOR END USE.
DATE ALLOCATED BY MOEF FOR

FINAL PRESENTATION OF EIA-EMP.
AFTER SATISFYING THE QUERRIES
AND SUBMISSION OF APPROVED MINE
PLAN FINAL MOEF CLEARANCE IS
GRANTED.
36
POSTALE 2008
FLOW CHART OF ACTIVITIES FOR OBTAINING MINING LEASE &

ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE FOR THE PROJECT.
Application for Reconnaissance permit under MCR-1960. Applied in Form-A , along
with plan in quadruplicate showing all details about area and fee @ Rs. 5/- per Sq Km
and part thereof
Application for prospecting license under MCR-1960. Applied in Form-B, along with
plan and topographical map in triplicate showing block boundary and other details of
the area, and Fee rs. 50/- for first Sq Km and @ Rs.10/- for rest Sq Kms &part
thereof.. Security deposit to be made @ Rs.2500/-Sq km and part thereof. Application
for renewal of PL given in Form-E with Fee Rs. 50/ for 1st and then @ Rs.10/- Sq Km.
Application for Mining Lease MCR-1960 (Rule 22(1). Applied in Form-I, Fee
Rs.2500/- under sub-rule (3) of rule 22, along with Geological plan, Survey plan and
cadastral plan showing plot-wise details of private, Govt & forest land. Also village
boundary and forest boundary should be shown on the plan.
Mining plan & Progressive Mine Closure Plan under MCDR-1988 to be
submitted to IBM (for Metal mines)
along with processing fee of Rs. 1000/per Sq km under rule 22BB of MCR1960.
In case of Coal blocks, Mine Plan

&PMCP submitted to Ministry of
Coal,under MCDR-1988, for its
approval.
Approved mine plan along with
EIA-EMP & Public Hearing Report
submitted to MoEF for obtaining
final Environmental Clearance, under MoEF Gazette Notification No.
1533 dt. 14.09.2006
Approved mine plan along with EIAEMP & Public Hearing Report submitted to MoEF for obtaining final Environmental Clearance, under MoEF Gazette Notification No. 1533 dt.
14.09.2006
Application for prior permission to

open a coal mine from office of the
Coal Controller under clause 9(2)
of colliery control rule 2000. Production started after executing
statutory provisions laid by
DGMS.& other regulatory authorii
Mine opening notice given to IBM,

DGMS and also SPCB. Production
started after executing statutory provisions of DGMS & other regulatory authorities.
37
POSTALE 2008
LEGISLATION FOLLOWED, DURING OPENING OF MINE FOR PRODUCTION.

RETURNS, NOTICES AND RECORDS, (COAL MINES REGULATIONS-1957).
NOTICE OF OPENING IN PRESCRIBED FORM (FORM-I) ACCOMPANIED

BY A PLAN SHOWING MINE BOUNDARIES AND DISTINCTIVE
FEATURES, SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE CHIEF INSPECTOR &
REGIONAL INSPECTOR.
AFTER OPENING OF MINES ACTUAL DATE OF OPENING AND MONTHLY
RETURNS IN RESPECT OF PRECEDING MONTH IN FORM-II, SHALL BE
SUBMITTED BY AGENT/OWNER OF MINES WHICH CONTAINS DETAILS
OF RAISING,DESPATCH&STOCK(TABLE-A) MACHINERY(B), NUMBER OF
MAN-DAYS (C), HOURS OF WORK & EARNING (D)
ANNUAL RETURNS SHOULD BE SUBMITTED BY THE AGENT/OWNER OF

MINES IN RESPECT OF PRECEDING YEAR, IN FORM-III, WHICH
CONTAINS DETAILS OF EMPLOYMENT (TABLE-A),TYPE&CAPACITY OF
ELECTRICAL APPARATUS (B), TYPE&CAPACITY OF MACHINERY AND
EQUIPMENT (C), EXPLOSIVES,SAFETY LAMPS AND MECHANICAL
VENTILATORS (D), OUTPUT (in tones) (E), LEAVE WITH WAGES AND
COMPENSATORY HOLIDAYS (F).
NOTICE OF ACCIDENT SBMITTED IN FORM-IV-A & IV-B GIVING
DETAILS OF ACCIDENT, PLACE, TIME, NATURE OF ACCIDENT AND
RESPONSIBILITY.ETC.
ANY COTRAVENTIONS DURING INSPECTION RECORDED IN FORM-VI.
NOTICE OF ABANDONMENT OR DISCONTINUANCE STATING THE

REASON FOR SAME AND NUMBER OF PERSONS LIKELY TO BE
AFFECTED THEREBY, SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO CHIEF INSPECTOR.
38
POSTALE 2008
Time Schedule for achieving the mile stone:

Sl.
No.
1
Event
Purchase of Geological
Report.
3
4
Bank Guaranty.
Mining Lease Application.
3.
3.
Mining plan submission.
6.
Mining plan approval.
8.
Environmental clearance
application
12.
Forest clearance application in case of forest land

available within lease
hold area.
Environmental clearance
from MoEF.
12.
10
Grant of Mining lease
24.
11
Land acquisition to begin.
19
12
Land acquisition to be
completed
30-36.
13
Application for opening

mine.
30 40(OC)
48 52
(U/G)
31-41 (OC)
49-53 (U/G)
36-42 (OC)
48-54 (U/G)
14
15
Allocation of Captive
Block.
Permission to be granted
for opening mine.
Production to be started.
Time limit.
(In months)
Date of allocation is
taken as 0
date.
1-2
18.
Activities executed to achieve goal within time limit.

Proposal considered by the Screening Committee,
MOC, on the basis of merit and priority.
In reference to allocation letter, the GR obtained from
the concerned department by paying the Exploration
cost of the block.
Bank Guaranty submitted to the Ministry of Mines.
Application along with project details and plans showing proposed lease boundary, shall be submitted to
District Mining Officer.
Mine plan prepared by RQP, shall be submitted to
MOC for approval.
After presentation and necessary modification as suggested by Expert Committee, Mine plan is approved.
Consent of PAP obtained by conducting Public Hearing, and all the documents of P/H proceedings along
with copy of Approved mine plan and EIA-EMP submitted to Member Secretary, State Govt for their approval
and onward submission to MOEF.
Application along with Lease plan and forest compartment plan submitted to the DFO for his approval and
onward submission to CF for issuing Forest Clearance
for said area.
After presentation before MOEF members and necessary modification if any suggested, Environmental
clearance is granted.
After consistence pursuance and timely compliance of
queries raised at various levels, lease is granted for 30
years initially and then renewed after expiry of lease
period after review of project.
Land acquisition can be executed under CBA Act or LA
Act or transfer of ownership by registration process.
Consistent efforts shall be made to mobilize people for
obtaining their consent to give up land for mining purpose.
Application for prior permission from coal controller
shall be submitted and also opening notice to DGMS in
the prescribed format to be submitted.
Consistent pursuance and compliance of queries.
All tendering procedures executed for outsourcing job,
installation of plant & machinery, power supply and
mine development work for commencement of production.
Regular maintenance and monitoring of progress.
Reaching the peak rated

60- 66 (OC)
capacity
72- 78 (U/G)
* The schedule time period has been projected considering the normal time required for completion of
job, however this may reduce or enhance depending upon the efficiency and professional skill of the
executer.
While executing a new project, the various ladders shown in the flow chart provides a guideline to
move forward in achieving the goal. But each step involves a number of comprehensive stages and
39
POSTALE 2008
unless they are identified completely, it shall be difficult for executer to decide the course of action on
priority. Therefore, efforts have been made to deal with each event in detail in the following chapters:
Reconnaissance and brief history of the block.

Detail exploration & estimation of reserves.
Application for grant of lease under MCR-1960.
Project Feasibility Report on the basis of exploration report.
TOR, proposal of project for MOEF approval.
Mining plan preparation as per approved TOR.
EIA & EMP preparation for the approved capacity of the mine as per TOR.
Land acquisition as per LA Act -1894 or CBA (Acquisition & Development) Act-1957.
Rehabilitation & Resettlement of Project Affected Families (PAF) as per the notification of Govt.
of India / State Govt.
Tender process for the outsourcing jobs related to mining and allied activities.
Installation of plant & machinery, arrangement of power supply and distribution system.
Application for obtaining prior permission from Coal Controller and compliance of DGMS provisions for opening/commencement of mine.
Statutory compliances of DGMS, DMO, SPCB, Coal Controller and other regulatory authorities.
Monitoring of production by making phase-wise, month-wise, sector-wise plan.
Transport of ROM coal from mine pit to the washery and arrangement of Rake (Wagons-58)
from Railways for transport of clean coal to the plant for captive use.
Coal washing and quality monitoring for end use.
Reclamation of mined out land and execution of EMP (Environmental Management Plan).
Implementation of CSR policies for improving socio-economic status of PAP.
Regular monitoring of Air, Water, Soil quality & Noise data and compliance with SPCB.
Compliance with Coal controller office and Mining office for sand stowing &protective work and
payment of royalty respectively.
Massive plantation and development of social forestry for clean environment and benefit of the
local inhabitants.
LAND ACQUISITION
In general the transfer of land by buying and selling is executed through registered deed under the
Registration Act. But, in this type of land transaction, both the parties have mutual interest to execute
the deed. When land is to be acquired for public purposes, development projects, erecting infrastructure facilities, mining activities for the extraction of different minerals to meet the requirement of our
industries in the interest of nation, there may be cases where people may not willingly give up their
land. Under these conditions, the need was felt for enactment of Land Acquisition Act -1894 and
Coal Bearing Areas (Acquisition & Development) Act-1957 for compulsorily acquisition of land for
public and developmental purposes.
Land Acquisition Act -1894: The salient features of this Act are noted as below
Only tenancy land can be acquired under this Act.
Only surface right can be acquired, hence, mining lease is required for undertaking any mining
activity.
Acquisition of land is done by State Govt. representatives and land compensation also determined and paid by the District Land Acquisition Officer after receiving estimated amount from
company.
Even after acquisition of land if the land is not required /utilized , this can be de-notified or transferred to the State Government.
Coal Bearing Areas (Acquisition & Development) Act, 1957: The salient features of this Act is
noted as below:
40
POSTALE 2008
Under this Act only coal bearing area can be acquired for mining and allied purposes. All rights
for mining both by O/C & U/G method can be acquired.
Since, all rights for mining activities is acquired under CBA Act, there is no need of grant of
lease from State Government.
Acquisition of land done by the Central Government, but the compensation of land is determined
and paid by the company.
There is no provision for de-nomination of land once acquired.
REHABILITATION & RESETTLEMENT PLAN FOR PROJECT AFFECTED FAMILIES:

Social Impact Assessment (SIA) is mandatory where the involuntary displacement of large number of families is involved.
Tribal development plan is must where the involuntary displacement of sizable number of tribal
is involved.
The SIA report shall be examined by an independent multidisciplinary expert group.
There is a provision to appoint a commissioner/Administrator by the State Govt. to execute R&R
and allot land and sanction the benefit to affected families in consultation with Gramsabha and
Investor, as per the Rehabilitation & Resettlement plan as notified by Government of India.
WASHERY FOR THE BENEFICIATION OF RAW COAL
The quality of coal is determined by the Ash% and coking properties on the basis of which, the utility
of coal in thermal power plant, steel industry and other sectors are decided. In the steel industry coking coal with low ash content is required, but mostly the coking coal reserves confined to the Jharia
coal field having comparatively high ash content as compare to Australian coking coal which contains fairly low ash varying from 6 to 8%, in order to meet the steel plant specifications the indigenous coking coal is invariably beneficiated to reduce the ash content to the level of around 18%,
which is further suitably blended with low ash Australian coal to obtain the desired coke quality.
Similarly huge quantity of non-coking coal which contains high ash content along with contamination
in the form of Shale is burnt for electricity generation in thermal power plants. The use of unwashed
coal produces huge quantity of fly ash which not only pollutes air, water and land but also create a
serious problem of dumping space.
This problem can be reduced by beneficiation of coal and ensuring consistent ash content, which will
not only improve the performance of plant but also reduce pollution load and fright charge and load
on the road transport.
CONCLUSION
This paper can attribute to the acute need of awareness to various entrepreneurs who have been
allocated coal blocks for mine development. Mining of coal is ever remains a challenge because of
its nature of occurrence and intricate geo-mining conditions. Assessment of geological reserve, quality and grade, proper planning, cost feasibility study for the commercial exploitation of coal seams,
maintaining standard safety norms, compliances with statutory provisions, socio-economic management, implementation of rehabilitation of displaced people and finally developing an eco-friendly environment are the major task which has to be managed by an efficient professionals. This paper provides concise, consolidated and handy information which are extremely helpful for all professional
and entrepreneurs who have venture in mining sector.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The author is thankful to Shri U. P. Singh, Executive Director (Collieries) for his kind permission to
publish this paper and deeply indebted to Shri P. Prasad, General Manager I/C (Collieries) for his
valuable guidance and important suggestions in inscription of this paper. The views expressed in
this paper are those of the author and not necessarily of the organization.
41
POSTALE 2008
The figures & data taken from News papers, Mining & Geology Journals, Coal Insight and Notifications & Guidelines issued time to time. Whereas, the procedures based on the general guidelines
and working experiences while practically executing the job.
FLOW CHART FOR BENEFICIATION OF RAW COAL.
RAW COAL (1.0 tone) WITH ASH CONTENT 35-40%
RAW COAL AFTER MANUAL DESHALING (0.8 tone) WITH 2-3%

REDUCTION IN ASH CONTENT.
RAW COAL SENT TO CRUSHING PLANT TO OBTAIN DESIRED SIZE FOR

BENEFICIATION. (-) 75mm and (-) 20mm size separated by screening.
AFTER BENEFICIATION FOUR PRODUCTS ARE GENERATED AND
GENERALISED QUANTITY IN TERMS OF PERCENTAGE ARE CLEAN COAL
( 50%) MIDDLING (20%) SLURRY (10%) & REJECT (20%)
FINALLY IF WE ASSESS THE REALISATION VALUE OF ALL PRODUCTS, IT

COMES MORE THAN THE MARKET PRICE OF RAW COAL. CERTAINLY
THERE IS HIGHER PROFIT, BETTER PERFORMANCE, LESS POLLUTION
LOAD, REDUCED LOAD ON TRANPORT AND ABOVE ALL
COMPARATIVELY LESS LAND IS REQUIRED FOR DUMPING OF FLY ASH.
ENFORCEMENT & ENCOURAGEMENT SHOULD BE THERE TO PROMOTE

USE OF WASHED COAL IN THERMAL POWER PLANTS.
42
POSTALE 2008
POLICIES, LEGISLATIONS AND STATUTES FOR OPENCAST MINES OF

NEYVELI LIGNITE CORPORATION LTD, NEYVELI, TAMIL NADU.
A.R. ANSARI
N.L.C. Ltd, Neyveli.
INTRODUCTION
Neyveli Lignite Corporation Limited (NLC), a Mini Ratna Government of India Enterprise functioning
under the aegis of Ministry of Coal became a reality in the year 1956. It has now become a prime
energy source to the Southern States. Its core business is Lignite mining and Thermal Power generation. The main constituent Units of the Company are three opencast lignite Mines linked to three
Thermal Power Plants with a total mining capacity of 24 MTPA and Power Generation of 2490 MW.
NLC has emerged as an integrated Project consisting of Mine-I and II each with capacity of 10.5
MTPA and Mine-IA with a capacity of 3.0 MTPA; Thermal Power Station-I and II with capacity of 600
MW and 1470 MW respectively and Thermal Power Station-I Expansion with capacity of 420 MW (2
x 210 MW).
NLC is on continual improvement in its performance and is making profits continuously from 19761977 onwards. NLC has also taken up several Expansion / New Projects for its sustainable growth in
the years to come.
Projects under construction
Name of the Project
Capacity
Mine-II Expn.
10.5 to 15.0 MTPA
Thermal Power Station-II Expn.
2 x 250 MW
Rajasthan Mine
2.1 MTPA
Rajasthan Power Project
2 x 125 MW
Coal based Thermal Power Plant at Tu1000 MW
ticorin Tamil Nadu
Investment (Rs.in Crores)

2161.28
2030.78
254.07
1114.18
4904.54
Necessity For A Separate Legislation , Policies & Acts For Lignite Mining Industry
Coal is the prime source of fuel and is contributing 60 to 70 % to the energy sector. Prior to the nationalization, coal was only source in the country for the energy generation. The southern and western parts of the country entirely depend up on the energy generated from the remaining parts of the
country. Detailed exploration strategy adopted in the south confirmed the another source of fuel -
Lignite availability in late 1940s. Since then on, lignite mining was planned and NLC as Lignite mining cum power generation company blossomed.
The policies & Legislations of the coal sector was adopted as such for the lignite Mining sector owning to the fact that resources of lignite (38 Billion Tones) constitute only 15% of the coal resource
(248 billion Tones) in the country .The lignite mining is besieged with high pressure aquifer beneath
the Lignite bed and vast open areas are required to keep the mining operation on for the safe mining
condition. Under such above unique geo- mining conditions it would be appropriate to have separate
Acts & Legislations framed for the lignite mining Industry.
In this context, NLC would to present the existing system of Developing, Working & Implementing
the statutory requirements on Government Policies and issues on Safety & Work Environment, Mineral Conservation, Mining Lease, Environment & Ecology, Socio-Economics, Mine Closure, Energy
conservation & Human Resource Development fields.
POSTALE 2008
GOVERNMENT POLICIES
Lignite Exploration
Lignite Exploration in India is being done as per the Action Plan & direction of Sub-Committee on
Coal & Lignite , GOI
Target area for Lignite exploration will be identified by the Sub-Committee on Coal & Lignite.
NLC is the Nodal agency in monitoring the countrys Exploration in Lignite.
M/s MECL is executing the above work for NLC
Sub Committee on Coal & Lignite reviews the progress
NLC S Role On Lignite Block Development
Based on the results of Exploration, NLC identifies potential lignite Blocks for development
through Private entrepreneurs.
MoC has identified NLC as a nodal agency for lignite Data Base Creation.
NLC is developing Integrated Lignite Information System ( ILRIS )
A Project funded by MoC for Rs. 7.5 Crores
A First of its in the Country
NLC assists MoC for scrutinizing the Lignite mining proposals by other agencies.
NLC is member of Screening Committee for block development, to allot the Captive Block to
private agencies
NLC assists MoC in inviting bids for lignite block development and also scrutinize the
Mine Plan proposals.
NLC is the nodal agency in maintaining & updating countrys lignite production data and exploration data.
In India, about 75 % of Lignite Production is being done in India by NLC .
Factors Affecting Financial Heath Of Lignite Companies.
Surplus Man Power

Low capacity utilization
Untimely revision of Lignite Prices
Huge outstanding Dues
Reforms In Lignite Sector
Reforms in lignite sector followed by in Power Sector in eight Plan (1992-97)

Allowed private sector in captive Lignite Mining
Import duties reduced considerably
Issues Affecting The Growth Of Lignite Sector
Non Participation of Indian Private Sector and foreign equity in coal/lignite mining.
Non establishment of a regulatory for controlling the coal /lignite mining in the private sector.
Need to consider the amendment of the Mines and Minerals (Regulation and Development ) Act
1957.
Need to frame policy measures for quick land acquisition.
Need to consider the amendment of the Contract labour (regulation and abolition) Act of 1970 .
Need for notification for coal / lignite section as infrastructure industry.
SAFETY & WORK ENVIRONMENT

First Mining Company in India under Ministry of coal to get three ISO certification for Quality Control ,
Environment Management & Occupational Health and safety.
44
POSTALE 2008
ISO 9001 : 2000 - Quality Control

ISO 14001:2004 - Environment Management .
OHSAS 18001:1999- Occupational Health and safety
Following improvements were initiated in Health care facilities
Full fledged causality Department with all facilities

Preventive Medical examination for Employees
Separate lab for Out patients
Additional new Renal care unit to ensure dialysis.
Diabetic care with MV Hospital /Chennai
Screening for cancer patients
Recruitment of Specialized Doctors.
Telemedicine Facilities
Introduction of Integrated Hospital Management System .
Setting up Trauma Care Unit
Introduction of Integrated Counseling & Testing Centre for HIV
Following action has been initiated to minimize the causes due to human failure
By creating awareness among workmen/employees by imparting regular on the job training at

NLC GVTC /training centre
Appointment and supervision by duly certified competent persons are undertaken to create an
ideal and safe working environment.
Following best practices/standards
Continual improvement on safety awareness in mines through
Resources allocation
Monitoring of safety standards
Disaster safety management plan
Safety measures adopted in mines

I)
Developments in Conveyor, Tail end cleaning
Long hand shovels are introduced instead of short hand shovels.
Extra pull cord switches are provided at Tail end area.
Locking systems are arranged at LCS panel to lock MCB switches while taking maintenance /
cleaning work.
In order to avoid manual cleaning at Tail End along the conveyor, Back Hoe is converted with
special attachment for conveyor cleaning. Now men need not to be exposed to the danger of
working in the vicinity of running conveyor for this is taken care of by the modified back hoe
with attachment.
Electronic Guarding System: Electronic Guarding system is introduced to stop the conveyor immediately if any one goes close proximity to the running conveyor as well as if tail end side got
chocked due to spillage of soil.
II)
Conventional Mining Equipments
Modification Works in Dozer Hood Design:
Operators are provided with NO-NAP alert drowsy devices.

The role of a spotter is eliminated, since certain accidents were caused due to running over the
spotter by the dumper.
Dumpers and Dozers are provided rear view mirrors on both sides.
In order to reduce fatigue to the operator, the cabin is proposed to be air conditioned shortly
45
POSTALE 2008
III)
Specialized Mining Equipments
In Neyveli Lignite mines, the Bucket Wheel Excavators play a major role in removal of overburden
and lignite. These are giant machines engage about 100 to 150 persons belonging to different engineering disciplines who work on it to keep it in running condition. The above machineries fall under
the category of specialized mining equipments.
Certain safety steps taken at mines with regard to Sme
Introduction of PLC
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) is an innovative measure introducing in giant excavators deployed for excavating the overburden and lignite seams.
These measures prevents
Unauthorized persons from operating the excavator.
It totally eliminates wiring and contactors. This enables to prevent theft of the above materials.
It also eliminates the risk of flashover.
Any interference due to malfunctioning is also eliminated.
In remote and hazardous areas, which cannot be easily approachable by men, the PLC enables
works to be carried out there by means of remote operation from the operator cabin itself.
Communication Network
Since Mines comprises of very large area spread over 25 sq. kms for each of the mines and is deploying various machines scattered over long area, effective communication among personnel to
keep in constant touch is mandatory. The entire NLC complex has been interlinked with optical link
for integration of Data and Voice communication.
Mines have been equipped with radio trunking wireless communication facility by which emergency
messages can be passed directly to control overriding all other normal communication. In addition to
wireless, telephone communications have been provided in GWC / SWC and other remote locations.
In order to overcome the incidents of accidents that seem to occur due to negligence in mines various steps are taken such as
Psychology test:
Counseling of workmen through qualified psychiatrists.
Breath analyzer tests:
Excellent welfare measures are implemented such as good housing, good schooling, providing
scholarships to the wards to keep an employee happy and contented.
MINERALCONSERVATION
In Neyveli Lignite Mines, Lignite is extracted with continuous mining System to facilitate 95% of lignite recovery compared to 85% in open cost mine with conventional technology.
As a part of mineral conservation, priority should be given to plan & exploit higher stripping ration
inferior quality mineral deposits just as being attempted in the Iron industry .More thrust may be
given to develop Coal Bed methane Technology which will help in extracting the methane gas and
leave the mineral resource as such for future exploitation.
The under mentioned methods are being followed to exploit the lignite
Selection of Mining Area is in such a way that the Initial Mine Cut commenced on the favorable
area with minimum OB Lignite Ratio based on the Exploratory Bore well Details.
Check Bore Well Drilling are being established for tracing the multiple seam of lignite which is
not encountered during the initial exploration.
46
POSTALE 2008
The Specialized Mining Equipment engaged in Lignite Mining , are modified in order to excavate
the lignite in the power full artesian ground water condition
Bottom Block of lignite immediately above the powerful aquifers exploited by bucket reversing &
Backward movement.
In order to tackle power full aquifer pressure below the lignite seam , bore well with 1000 GPM
capacity are being drilled in advancing side leaving a lignite bund of width 10m.
The lignite from this bund is being mined out by CME after exploitation of lignite by SMEs
MINING LEASE
The Governor of Tamil Nadu sanctioned the grant of second renewal of Mining lease in favour of M/s
Neyveli Lignite Corporation Limited to mine lignite ,ball clay ,fire clay, china clay and silica sand over
an extend of 259 sq. kms. for a period of 20 years with effect from 06-12-1996 subject to the following conditions.
Necessary transport permits and dispatch slips are obtained for the minerals granted under mineral lease by Neyveli Lignite Corporation Limited from the concerned authorities. Silica sand
should be separately mined by suitable mining methods and stocked and removed for disposal.
Strict observation of the provision of Minerals Act- particularly safety distance pertaining to permanent structures in railway line , high ways etc.
An under taken to be obtained from Neyveli Lignite Corporation Limited to preserve the ecology
.No area in the lease hold is sold or let out or transferred with out prior consent of the state government.
Royalty to be paid
Lignite
: Two rupees and fifty paise per tonne and subsequently

revised to Rs. 64/ tonne
: Rupees seventeen per tonne
Fire Clay
Ball Clay , China Clay
Crude
Processed (including washed)
: Rupees eighteen per tonne

: Rupees Sixty eight per tonne.
Dead Rent
First year of lease
Second to fifth year of the lease
Fifth year to tenth of the lease
Eleventh year of the lease and onwards
: Nil
: Rs.120/- per hectare per annum.
Revised Royalty from Aug. 2007 onwards o be paid

Lignite
: Rs. 64.00 per tonne tonne.
Revised Surface Rent
Rs. 51. 10 per Hectare
Mining Lease Tax
Rs. 62.00 Lakhs as Stamp duty
Water Cess for Seepage water pumped out
: Rs. 0.30/ Kilolitre
Royalty, Surface Rent & Dead rents to be paid by Mining Company to the State Government , are
being frequently revised . The different types of rents , taxes & Cess could be streamlined and standardized under single head.
The mining company is required to comply with the statutory payments to the state government ,
creating infrastructure mine closure fund and simultaneously spending for works such as reclamation, Rehabilitation & Peripheral development activities. The above factors are having direct influ-
47
POSTALE 2008
ence on the ultimate cost of mining . In this context , it is suggested that the fund collected may be
used for the improvement works in local areas by State Government.
Coal industry is operating under two different mining methodologies viz., Open cast and Underground. Due to this land acquisition problem in coal sector is not posing direct impact as compared
to Lignite Sector where the mining is only through Open Cast method.
Environment & Ecology
NLC has been recognised by several awards in the field of eco-friendly management.
Indira Priyadarshini Vrikshmitra Award from Government of India 1986.
FICCI Award for Environment Preservation and pollution Control 1988.
K.P. Goenka memorial award for Environmental Care 1988.
Fly Ash Utilization Award by Council of Power Utility 1999.
Indo-German Green Tech Environmental Excellence Award 2000-01.
Business World FICCI SEDF Award 2006.
SCOPE Meritorious Award for Environmental Excellence and Sustainable Development for
2005-06.
Golden Peacock Eco Innovation Award-2008.
Land Reclamation and Afforestation
Land degradation is one of the major adverse impacts of open cast mining and any effort to control
this adverse impact would be incomplete without appropriate land reclamation strategy
In land reclamation the following methodology is being followed
Planned overburden placement including backfill and regrading of the mined out area to the gentlest topography consistent with other adjacent unmined area.
Establishment of good drainage system to check erosion.
Resorting to the use of biological reclamation techniques involving application of bio-fertiliser,
Humic acid, Organic matter and bring up of leguminous crops.
Careful selection of plant species, plantation methods and post care activities like irrigation, applying fertilizer etc.
About 8,56,463 nos. of various types trees planted in & around Mine-II aprt fro m the slope stablisation works carried out in external dumps .
The various Research activities which are conducted in Mine spoil are given below
In house S&T projects .Bio Fertilizers reclamation of Mine spoil (CARD and Afforestation division).
Rising of different kind of trees in mine-II area of 5 acres under VAM of (S&T) project
Fly ash utilization in agriculture (CFRI & NLC).
Indo-US project For water harvesting.
Air Pollution
Remedial measures adopted in mines
The excavating face & dumping side of the mine is wetted constantly with spraying of water.
The transfer points/ hopper at the conveyor are provided with hoods/covers and the same are
adjusted from time to time.
The belt cleaning devices and rubber wiper are checked up daily during the maintenance time
and adjusted/replaced wherever necessary.
Water lorries, water dumpers, sprinklers are deployed for wetting of haul roads. On average six
water lorries and one water dumper are deployed daily.
Workmen are provided with respirators, goggles and dust masks.
Dense tree belts are created at the surface of the mine.
Trees are planted on both sides of the roads to arrest dust.
48
POSTALE 2008
Readings of the dust samples are collected and analyzed once in 6 months i.e., in March and
September to ensure that the dust concentration limit is contained within the allowable limits.
All the conveyors(both lignite carrying & over burden carrying) have been provided with spray
line to curtail dust.
Air Ambient Monitoring

Eight hours Air Quality monitoring are carried out Core Zone in three Stations in in Mines-2 for
RPM,SPM, NOX & SO2 . Continuous Air Quality monitoring are carried out Buffer Zone in five Stations in and around Neyveli for SPM, NOX & SO2 . Test results shows they are with in limits prescribed by TNPCBd.
Water Pollution Control & Water Management
Control measures for surface water pollution
Retaining walls have been provided to prevent wash off from dumps and /or freshly excavated
areas.
Masonry chutes have been put up to guide the flow of water along the dump slopes.
Stabilization of dump slops by planting of appropriate plant species.
Providing baffles in the channel/drains carrying the storm to arrest the suspended solids, if any
present in the water.
Regular monitoring of mine water in having them tested/analyzed in the approved laboratories
every month.
Measures to prevent ground water depletion

The area of draw down cone will be minimized by establishing ground water pumping wells
(GWC) as nearer to the lignite cut face as possible.
To enhance the ground water recharge potential to the Neyveli aquifer system, R & D study on
artificial recharge has been taken up in the deep water table zone ( recharge area for Neyveli
aquifer system ) under Coal S&T grant.
Impounding of surface run-off water, conservation of water. recycling of water etc. as apart of
integrated ground water management.
Regular monitoring of ground water samples in approved laboratories
Regional Ground Water Monitoring
A Separate Cell created in 1988(Regional Geology Dn.)
1. Dugwells monitored
105 Nos
2. Tube wells (Confined Aquifer) 80 Nos
These Wells are periodical monitored by N.L.C regularly including water quality.
In addition ground water data from State ground water departments, Central ground water departments are also collected.
Data collection for water balance studies

Rain fall data collections
14 Stations
Meteorological Stations
02 Stations
Noise And Vibration Control
The noise and vibration are generally caused by
the mining machinery and other auxiliary/supporting equipments,
blasting operations,
movements of transport vehicles etc.
Remedial measures
The moving /rotatory parts of the machineries are periodically checked and lubricated wherever
found necessary.
49
POSTALE 2008
The noise created by the machineries are muffed with silencers to modulate the noise to tolerable level.
Providing thick tree belt around the periphery of mine to screen the noise.
Providing workmen with ear muffs/ear plugs.
Reducing the exposure time of workmen to higher noise- level working area.
In the case of blasting, the effect of the shock/vibration is controlled at the mine surface level
itself by restoring to the use of milli second delay action detonators and milli second detonating
relays.
Suggestion regarding Height of External Dumps

The Environmental Clearance for Mines-II Expansion Project (10.5 MTPA to 15.00 MTPA) was accorded by MOE & F on 24-12-2002 with 20 specific Conditions and 17 General Conditions. Vide
Special Condition No.2a , OB should be stacked scientifically at earmarked dump site(s). The total
height of the external dump(s) should not exceed 65 m in two or three stages. Overall slope of the
dump should not exceed 28o. Concurrent back filling and rehabilitation should start from the 5th year
of operation. Monitoring and management of and Forests on yearly basis.
At present the height of external dump of Mines-2 is 65m Owning to non availability of virgin land
available for dumping , external dump height needs to be increased to 130 m with the over slope of
28o
M/s CMRI / Dhanbad. Indicated through its model study that the external dumps can be developed
with a dump height of 130.00 m from Ground level .
If the height is to be restricted as per the Special Condition 2a, NLC has to go in for acquisition of
additional virgin land for dumping which in turn will cause additional land degradation . More over at
present the space earmarked for the external dumping is getting exhausted and there is no available
space for further dumping .
Considering the various difficulties expressed above, it was requested for an early amendment to the
earlier condition of the dump height as stipulated by MO E & F
Constantly perceiving with MOE & F in this regard.
SOCIO ECONOMICS
NLC being a leading Public Sector & Mini-Ratna company , is functioning with social corporate responsibility in implementing socio economic schemes.
NLC has been recognized with SCOPE Award 2004-05 in the field of Corporate Social responsibility
.
Socio-Economic development
Production of desired products and rendering of quality services with minimum impact on the
environment, including the human environment (during the economic life)
Resettlement and Rehabilitation of the affected
Peripheral Development (regular extra-business contributions to the society)
Benefits extended to PAF ( Project Affected Families)
Resettlement plot/house for the acquisition of house.

One time financial assistance for displacement with cattle for shed construction.
Shifting allowance to the displaced family.
One time financial assistance to the affected artisans/small trader or self employed for work
shed/shop construction.
Rehabilitation grant (750 days * maw (minimum agriculture wages)) in lieu of employment for acquisition of lands.
50
POSTALE 2008
Subsistence allowance (300 days maw) to displaced families.

Life annuity to vulnerable persons not otherwise covered as part of a family.
Continuance of other support measures already in vogue like exgratia towards value of structure(s) on government lands, special iti apprenticeship training, self employment training, pap
contractor registration, etc.
Schemes in operation for the benefit of the PAFs.
Special Training for PAF members under Medical Lab

Technician Training Scheme
Training for self-employment in co-ordination with Gandhigram Rural Institute
Several contracts are awarded to PAP Societies on concession.
Market Guaranteed Income Generating Scheme of cleaning material production & supply
Peripheral Development scheme (PDS)
Allocating funds in the annual budget for PDS works and infrastructure development works such
as drinking water, schools, roads .
Present allocation of funds for NLC-PDS is Rs.200 lakhs/Annum.
Peripheral Development Committee (PDC) constituted with the Cuddalore District Collector as
the Chairman to identifying the peripheral development works Actvities:
Sinking of new bore wells
Cleaning and redeveloping of existing wells
Repairing and reconditioning of pumps
Construction of New school buildings
Health care camps covering maternity, childcare, immunization, cardiology, orthopedics, eye
care etc.
Out patients from the peripheral villages are treated in the NLC General Hospital.
Desilting of Lakes , Ponds , Tanks & Canals
Construction of Roads, foot-bridges, causeways etc
Particulars of PDS works carried out
Bore wells
Water tanks
Roads
Bridges/culverts/causeways
Eri (tank), de-silting, strengthening etc
School, library, toilet etc.
Street lighting
Miscellaneous like pavement laying, repairs to public building, etc.
: 45 Nos.
: 7 Nos.
: 48 Nos.
: 5 Nos.
: 3 Nos.
: 9 Nos.
: 1 Nos.
: 14 Nos.
MINE CLOSURE
Specific Mining conditions at Neyveli
Lignite is being mined out by open cast method deploying Continuous Mining Technology deploying BWE, Spreaders and conveyor systems where excavation and backfilling is a continuous
process which will culminate in a scientific mine closure process resulting in large working area
compared with any other mining methods.
The lignite is being mined by tackling the ground water at a very high pressure caused by the
existing confined aquifers.
Hence for the safety of the mine, the mine opening to be maintained at the de-coaled / delignited area, has to be at least 250 m width for the entire mine length, leading to a larger void at
any given time of mine operation.
51
POSTALE 2008
As mine is in monsoonic and Cyclone prone area, large sump has to be maintained to collect
water from vast catchment area of the mine.
So it is essentially necessary to re-handle external dump material to retrieve back the mined out
area and to reduce the final void area and depth..
The lignite is mined out at Stripping ratios as high as 1:10 and the average stripping ratio for all
the mines at Neyveli is 1:6 and at Rajasthan it is 1:5, which is comparatively on the higher side
when compared to other Coal mines. The new mine project at Bithok, Rajasthan is having a
stripping ratio of 1:14.33.
The Lignite formation at NLC mines are generally in plains. The outside dump volume on an average is around 30% of the total OB volume. Hence there is corresponding increase in the final
void to be re-filled.
Also, the Strata conditions at NLC Mines are soft. This require more inputs for Landscaping,
Grading of high-wall and dumps etc.
The restriction on dump height upto 65 m also increases the area requirement for external
dumping.
In some places, the natural drains have to be diverted, which results in additional cost.
Mine closure fund

In order to ensure scientific methodology of Mine closure , a Corpus Fund should be generated by
owner/operator of the mines as soon as the mining activity starts and supplemented during extension of mining operation.
Fund should take into account the inflation and discounting factors.
As per the guidelines of MOC, the tentative Mine Closure Cost for the Mines of NLC Ltd has
been worked out and furnished.
In NLC the Mine Closure cost estimates have been earmarked as detailed below:
(cost/tonne)
(1)
For Mine - I
= Rs. 37.86
(2)
For Mine - IA
= Rs. 17.44
(3)
For Mine - II
= Rs. 46.43
(4)
For BLMP
= Rs. 19.64.
Even though the fund is earmarked for mine closure works by Neyveli lignite Mines , the actual requirement would be less , as the mining & refilling and developing the afforestation in the refilled
area are concurrent works carried out alone with mining process. .
ENERGY CONSERVATION
NLC has given prime thrust in energy conservation in the open cast mining operation .The following
conservation measures have been implemented in the Mine Expansion Equippment first in South
East Asia: Medium voltage (690V) motors with Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (VVVF) control drives
are incorporated in the Mines-II Expansion machines & conveyors
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) control in the Rotor Resistance circuits of Slipring drives
are being implemented in phases in various SMEs and Conveyors.
Advantages of VVIF & PLC Control:
Power factor of motors increased from 80% to 95% .
Speed of Conveyor Belt will get automatically adjusted to the load
Life of Conveyor Belt get enhanced
Frequent tripping of system avoided
Flexibility in operation.
Remote monitoring & Quick fault finding .
Machinery down time reduced.
52
POSTALE 2008
M/s MECON was engaged for the consultancy Service in Energy conservation of Mines-2.The recommendations was being implemented by Various divisions of Mines-2
HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT
The Company gives high priority towards training of executives, supervisors and workers. Apart from
utilising the training facilities available in the Training Complex of the Company, the employees are
also deputed to other training centres within India. Training facilities provided by the equipment
manufacturers within the country/abroad are also utilised.
The number of employees in various categories behind the success of the company are
Executives
:3,642
Non-executives
:6,743
Labour
:8,745
Total
:19,130
Initiatives and activities undertaken to develop a culture of high performing organization
Training for Organisational Effectiveness
Achieving organizational excellence through continuous development of its human resources
and accord priority for training and development.
Employees are given in house training, on job techniques, advanced technology, human relations, self-development, etc.
Annually, around 40% of the workforce is provided with Training opportunities
Fostering Employee - Customer Relations through Training
Staff of Telecommunication and Hospital were provided suitable training for improving customer relationship & to improve the service to the employees and their families.
Attractive avenues of career growth
Career growth is linked with the wage revision character of three-tier system viz., labour, supervisory and executives.
The career growth ensures avoidance of stagnation and also overlaps and increases employee
retention self resolve.
Excellent work environment
Process of standardization through training and functional standardization through manuals viz. Purchase Management, Inventory Management and Contract Management.
Employment security through Redeployment
With change in economic scenario and focus on core business activities, Chemical units were to be
closed & employees from Chemical Units were deployed in the core areas of Mines and Thermal
Units.
Formation of Help Line Cell and fixed hours for Grievance hearing
Other Social Welfare
Township with over 21000 houses

Subsidized transport
Medicare with 369 bed hospital (being expanded to 500) supported by 5 peripheral dispensaries.
Canteens - 8 Industrial Canteens
Special Incentive Schemes for small family norm.
Education - 34 schools and 1 college in Neyveli Campus.
Recreation facilities - 3 clubs
Sports with all infrastructural facilities.
53
POSTALE 2008
Post retirement medical assistance.

A creche for children.
Health care programmes for school children.
Provision of infrastructure to Banks. Post offices etc.
Modern Sewage Treatment Plant
Modern Water Treatment Plant
INNOVATIVE IDEAS
Retaining the quality trained human resource in the mining sector becoming increasingly difficult
due to mismatch of pay package compared to Private sectors
Possibility could be worked out to give attractive packages.
Advanced action for Preventing the sea water intrusion
Artificial recharge by high pressure injection to deep aquifer.
Blasting operation with laser technique may be tried out to avoid ground vibration .
Exploitation of deep seated lignite deposit by clean coal technologies such as
Underground Coal Gasification ( UCG)
Coal Bed Methane ( CBM)
Powers must be wrested with mining company to directly negotiate with private land owners & to
emulate their own scheme for speedy land acquisition .
NLC should be wrested with powers to take up overseas Lignite mining cum Power Projects
CONCLUSION
Separate Policies & Legislation for the lignite sector is required and methodology must be evolved to
de-link from the coal sector. Attractive remuneration to the mining sector should be thought of to retain the skilled manpower.
54
POSTALE 2008
INNOVATIVE CONCEPT OF ENERGY SAVING BY USING FRP BLADES IN

AXIAL FLOW FANS : A JOINT STUDY OF ISMU,
TATA STEEL AND ENCON
D. C. PANIGRAHI AND D. P. MISRA
Department of Mining Engineering, Indian School of Mines University, Dhanbad
STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM
Power consumption plays a pivotal role in any type of industry. Therefore energy saving becomes
the top priority in the industrial world. Mining industry is no exception. The main power consuming
activities in underground mines are as follows:
Ventilation
Pumping
Transportation
Main mine fans consumes a large amount of power as it pumps out 10-15 tons of air per every tone
of coal produced. Depending on the production of coal and size of fan, the power consumption
changes. Moreover, it depends on efficiency of the fan and Indian underground coal mines it varies
from 10-70%.
It is obvious that a small amount of saving in energy in unit time leads to large saving of power in a
day/month/year. In Indian underground mines, main mine fans generally have aluminium blades and
alumininum hub. Indian School of Mines University, Dhanbad, Tata Steel Ltd., and ENCON, Mumbai
had jointly organized a study on the main fan of Bhelatand A. Colliery, Tata Steel replacing aluminium hub and aluminium blades with Fibre-glass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) blade and hub with an intention to save energy in ventilation.
Main Mine Fans
Fig. 1 : Plan View Of An Axial Flow Fan

Fig. 1 shows the plan view of an axial flow fan installed in a mine. Existing main mine fan uses aluminium alloy blades attached to a heavy hub. As the fan operation progresses and is subjected to
exposure to humid atmosphere there is corrosion effect on blades. It makes surface of the blade
rough. In case of replacement of aluminium alloy blades, it has been observed that profile of the
blade can not be made accurately matching the newly available advanced and improved aerofoil
POSTALE 2008
section. Moreover, the existing set up with aluminium blade and hub is unable to provide high lift and
low drag co-efficient. All these lead to low efficiency of fan and more power consumption.
INNOVATIVE CONCEPT
A new concept of use of Fibre-glass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) blades and hub has been implemented in Bhelatand A colliery of Tata Steel, India.
Application of FRP (Fibre-glass Reinforced Plastic) in axial flow fans
It is expected that application of FRP blades and hub will reduce energy consumption of main mine
fan. Some the important advantages of FRP Blades are enumerated below.
Non-corrosive quality to fan blades rendering operation of fans in very aggressive environment.
Advanced aerofoil shapes leading to better drag to lift ratio.
Reduced skin friction causes reduction of hydraulic losses in the fans.
Light weight FRP fans ensuring low moment of inertia, minimum wear and stress on motor; bearing and drive system.
Reduce material and installation cost.
Possibility of damage to the fan and drive during sudden stops.
APPLICATION OF THE CONCEPT
Type of fan and its details used in Bhelatand A. Colliery for the trial with FRP hub and blade are
given below.
Fan Type - Axial flow fan
Model VF - 3000
Make - Voltas
Fan Diameter - 3000 mm
Casing Diameter - 3020 mm
Motor Power - 210 kW (278 hp)
The existing hub of aluminium alloy fan and aluminium alloy blade are shown in figures 2 & 3 respectively whereas hub of FRP fans and FRP blades are shown in figures 4 & 5 respectively.
Fig 2 : Hub of Aluminium Alloy Fan
56
POSTALE 2008
Fig 3 : Aluminium Alloy Blade
Fig 4 : Hub of FRP fans
Fig 5 : FRP blades
57
POSTALE 2008
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Performance of fan with aluminium blades and FRP blades are measured with four no. of trials made
during 2001 to 2007. The parameters are air quantity handled, pressure developed and power consumed. Thereby Energy Consumption for both the cases was calculated. Results of these trials are
tabulated below.
Table 1: Results on Ist Trial (14.10.2001)
Particulars
Ampere
Voltage
cos
Air Quantity Handled

Pressure Developed
Power Consumption =
3VI cos
Fan with Aluminium

Alloy Blades
38
3.2 kV
0.997
8214 m3/min
88 mm wg
Fan with FRP

Blades
32
3.2 kV
0.997
8205 m3/min
82 mm wg
209.99 kW
176.83 kW
Salient points of the 1st trial are as follows.
Saving in Power : 15.8 %

Saving of Power per year: 290482 kW hr.
Annual saving in power cost :
@ Rs. 3/- per unit : Rs. 8.71 lakhs/annum.
@ Rs. 5.60 per unit : Rs. 16.27 lakhs/annum.
Failure of Blades on 17.10.2001 after 72 hours of installation.
Table 2 : Results on 2nd Trial (09.8.2003)
Particulars
Ampere
Voltage
cos

Pressure Developed
Power Consumption
3VI cos
Fan with Aluminium

Alloy Blades
44
3.2 kV
0.98
8214 m3/min
88 mm wg
Fan with FRP

Blades
37
3.2 kV
0.99
8240 m3/min
82 mm wg
239.0 kW
203.0 kW
Salient points of the 2nd trial are as follows.
Saving in power : 15.06%

Saving of energy per year : 315360 kW hr:
Annual saving in power in cost:
Failure of blades on 25.8.2003 after 15 days of fan running.
Third and fourth trials were made keeping the blade angles at 18o and 22o respectively. Details of
these trials are given in Table 3 & 4 respectively.
58
POSTALE 2008
Table 3 : Results on 3rd Trial (20.01.2007)

Fan with Aluminium
Alloy Blades
36
3.2 kV
0.966
8005 m3/min
70 mm wg
Particulars
Ampere
Voltage
cos

Pressure Developed
3VI cos
Power Consumption
Fan with FRP Blades

28
3.2 kV
0.966
8078 m3/min
59 mm wg
192.7 kW
149.9 kW
Salient points of the 3rd trial are as follows.

Saving of energy per year : 374928 kW-hr:
Annual saving in power cost:
Table 4: Results on 4th Trial (25.01.2007)
Particulars
Ampere
Voltage
cos

Pressure Developed
Power Consumption
Fan with Aluminium

Alloy Blades
36
3.2 kV
0.963
8005 m3/min
70 mm wg
3VI cos
192.7 kW
Fan with FRP Blades

28
3.2 kV
0.963
8898 m3/min
59 mm wg
165.11 kW
Salient points of the 4th trial are as follows.

Additional air quantity gained : 893 m3/min.
Percentage gain in air quantity : 110.2%.
Saving in electrical energy : 241688 kW-hr.
Annual saving in power cost :
Break Through Result
The implementation of this innovative concept has a payback period of around 3- 9 months.
AGENDA FOR FUTURE IMPLEMENTATION
The results of these trials of FRP Blades and hub are quite encouraging. It is proposed to implement
this study to:
Booster fan of Bhelatand A. Colliery.
Auxiliary fans of Jamadoba Group of Colliries.
59
POSTALE 2008
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT STRATEGY
PROF. (DR) SAMIR KUMAR DAS

Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur
INTRODUCTION
An organization should formulate a policy and objectives, taking into account legislative requirements and information about significant hazards and risks, which the organization can control and
over which it can be expected to have an influence, to protect its employees and others, whose
health and safety may be affected by the activities of the organization.
An organization should
a) implement, maintain and improve an occupational health and safety management systems;
b) assure itself of its conformance with its stated occupational health and safety management policy;
c) demonstrate such conformance to others;
d) seek certification /registration of its occupational health and safety management systems by an
external organization; and
e) make a self-determination and self-declaration of conformance with this standard.
All the requirements in this standard are intended to be incorporated into any occupational health
and safety management system. The extent of application will depend on such factors as the occupational health and safety management policy of the organization, the nature of its activities and the
conditions in which it operates(1).
THE INDIAN STANDARDS
Indian Standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of
the Indian Standards indicated below:
Indian Standard No
3786 : 1983
ISO14001: 1996
14489: 1998
Title
Method of computation of frequency and severity rates for industrial

injuries and classification of industrial accidents (first revision)
Environmental management systems - Specification with guidance
for use
Code of practice on occupational safety and health audit
SOME DEFINITIONS
Accident - Unplanned event giving rise to death, ill health, injury, damage or other losses to personnel or property.
Audit - A systematic, documented, objective and independent examination to determine whether
activities and related results conform to planned arrangements and whether these arrangements are
implemented effectively and are suitable to achieve the organization's objectives .
Continual Improvement - Process of enhancing the occupational health and safety management
system to achieve improvements in overall occupational health and safety performance, in line with
organization's occupational health and safety management policy,
Hazard - A source or a situation with a potential to cause harm in terms of human injury or ill health,
damage to property, damage to the environment or a combination of these.
Hazard Identification - The process of recognizing a hazard in existence and defining its characteristic/impact.
Incident - Unplanned event which has the potential to lead to accident.
Interested Party - Individual or group concerned with or affected by the occupational health and
safety management performance of an organization.
POSTALE 2008
Non-conformance - Any deviation from work standards, practices, procedure, regulations, management system requirements, etc, that could either directly or indirectly lead to injury or illness,
damage or loss to property or a combination of these.
Occupational ill health - Ill health that is judged to have been caused by or made worse by a person's work activity or environment.
Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems - That part of overall management system
which includes organizational structure, planning activities, responsibilities., practices, procedures,
processes and resources for developing, implementing, achieving, reviewing and maintaining the
Occupational health and safety policy.
Occupational Health and Safety Objectives - Overall goals in terms of occupational health and
safety performance, arising from the occupational health and safety policy that an organization sets
itself to achieve and which is quantified where practicable.
Occupational Health and Safety Policy - Statements by the organization of its intentions and principles in relation to its overall occupational health and safety performance which provides a framework for its action and for setting its occupational health and safety objectives and targets.
Risk - The combination of frequency or probability of occurrence and consequence of a specified
.hazardous event.
Risk Analysis - A systematic use of available information to determine how often specified events
may occur and magnitude of their likely consequences.
OVERALL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS REQUIREMENT
In carrying out its commitment in this area an organization shall aim at:
a) Developing the capability to balance and resolve conflicts between occupational health and
safety and other organizational objectives and priorities; and
b) The integration of occupational health and safety into the overall business management process.
COMMITMENT AND POLICY
An organization shall demonstrate its policy and ensure commitment to its occupational health and
safety management system. ..
Leadership and Commitment
The top management shall define and demonstrate its leadership and commitment to occupational
health and safety by allocation of adequate resources to ensure continual improvement in its occupational health and safety performance. All levels of an organization shall demonstrate commitment
to occupational health and safety for an occupational health and safety management systems to be
developed and implemented successfully.
Initial Review
The organization shall carry out an initial review of their existing arrangements for managing occupational health and safety. The current position of an organization with regard to occupational health
and safety shall be established by means of an initial review
of its current occupational health and safety arrangements to:
a) identify the gaps between any existing systems in place and the requirements of this standard;
b) identify all hazards and risks associated with the organization's activity;
c) assess the level of knowledge and compliance with all occupational health and safety standards and legislation; . .
d) compare current arrangements with best practice and performance in the organization's employment sector and other appropriate sectors;
e) review past experience with incidents and results of any previous assessments, compensation, experience. disruption. etc. associated with occupational health and safety
61
POSTALE 2008
f)
assess efficiency and effectiveness of existing resources devoted to occupational health and
safety management.
Based on this information the organization shall plan the progressive implementation of the elements
of the system.
Policy
The organization's top management shall define, document, endorse and review its occupational
health and safety policy which is appropriate to the nature, scale and the hazards and risks of its
activities. The top management shall ensure that the policy includes a commitment to:
a) recognizing occupational health and safety as an integral part of its business performance;
b) achieving continual improvement in its occupational health and safety performance, with
commitment to compliance of relevant legal requirements and to other requirements to which
the organization subscribes, as the minimum to ensure safety at work;
c) selling, reviewing and publishing of occupational health and safety objectives and targets
even if only by internal notification;
d) place management of occupational health and safety as a prime responsibility of the organization;
e) ensure its communication, understanding and maintenance at all levels in the organization;
f) ensure that employees at all levels receive appropriate training and are competent to carry
out their duties and responsibilities; and
g) provide adequate and appropriate resources to implement the policy, communicate the policy
to all its employees and to make it available to public.
PLANNING
The planning process shall address the identification of significant hazards and the assessment and
control of risks associated with the activities of the organization as well as any related legal requirements. Objectives. target and performance indicators shall be established and plans made to
achieve them.
Accountability And Responsibility
Ultimate responsibility for occupational health and safety shall rest with the top management. The
organization shall define, designate, document and communicate occupational health and safety
responsibilities, accountabilities and authority to act and reporting relationships for all levels of functionaries including subcontractors and visitors. The organization shall also establish and maintain
procedure that monitors and communicate any changes in designated responsibilities and accountabilities and the organization shall be able to respond in a timely and effective manner to changing or
unusual circumstances or events.
The organization's top management shall appoint at the senior management level specific management representative(s). with executive powers, who, irrespective of other responsibilities, shall have
defined roles, responsibilities and authority for:
a) ensuring that occupational health and safety management system requirements are established,
implemented and maintained in accordance with this Indian Standard; and
b) reporting on the performance of occupational health and safety management system to top
management for review and as a basis for improvement of the occupational health and safety
Identification Of Hazards And Assessment And Control Of Risks
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures to identify hazards and assess and control
risks related to its activities, products and services over which it has control or influence, in order to
determine those which have or can have significant impact over occupational health and safety. The
organization shall ensure that the significant hazards and risks are considered in setting its environmental objectives. The specific application of hazard identification and risk assessment and control
procedure shall be part of the
on-going planning process.
62
POSTALE 2008
Hazard Identification
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures for identification of hazards in all its activities and situations, products and services, that could give rise to the potential of injury, illness, death
or damage/ loss of property. The hazard identification shall consider:
a) A type of injury or illness that is possible; and
b) Situation or events that could give rise to the potential of injury, illness, damage or loss of property.
Risk Assessment And Control
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures for assessment and control of risks to determine the priorities of the level of risks of injury or illness or damage or loss of property associated
with each identified hazards for the purpose of control. The priority for control shall increase as the
initially established level of risk increases. The organization shall plan the management and control
of those activities, products or services that can or may pose a significant risk on the health and
safety of its employees and public at large.
Legal And Other Requirements
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures to identify, have access to and understand
all legal and other requirements to which the organization subscribes and that are directly attributable to the occupational health and safety aspects of its activities, products or services. The organization shall also keep track of legal and other requirements as well as the changes to these to maintain regulatory compliance. It shall ensure communication of relevant information on legal and other
requirements to its employees at all times.
Objectives, Targets And Performance Indicators
The organization shall establish and maintain documented occupational health and safety objectives
and targets at its each relevant function and level. When establishing and reviewing its objectives, an
organization shall consider the legal and other requirements, its significant hazards and risks, its
technological options and its financial, operational and business requirements and views of the interested parties. The objectives and targets sha1l be consistent with the occupational health and safety
policy including the commitment to safety at work place. Objectives and targets shall be regularly
reviewed and revised based on past performance and in consultation with workplace personnel, occupational health and safety professionals, insurers and other appropriate persons or groups. When
the objectives and targets are set, the organization shall consider establishing the measurable occupational health and safety performance indicators. These indicators sha1l be used as a basis for an
occupational health and safety performance evaluation system and to provide information on both
the occupational health and safety management and operation systems.
Initial And On-Going Programme
The organization shall establish and maintain programme(s) for achieving its objectives and targets.
It shall include:
a) designation of responsibility for achievement of objectives and targets at relevant functions and
levels of the organization; and
b) The means and time frame by which they are to be achieved.
If a project relates to new developments and new or modified activities, products and services programme(s) shall be amended appropriately, where relevant, to ensure that occupational health and
safety management applies to such projects.
Implementation and Operation
Ensuring Capability
1. Resources human , physical and financial
The appropriate human (including specialized skills), physical (including technology) and financial
resources essential to implement and control organization's occupational health and safety man-
63
POSTALE 2008
agement system and for achievement of its objectives, sha1l be defined and be made available. In
allocating resources an organization shall track the benefits as well as the costs of their activities,
products or services, incidents, rehabilitation and the like.
2) Training, awareness and competence
The organization sha1l establish and maintain documented procedures to identify the training needs.
The organization shall also establish and maintain procedures to identify standards and to them
through a training program. It shall ensure that all personnel, whose work/workplace involves significant hazard, receive appropriate training. The organization shall establish and maintain procedures
to document any training provided to its employees and to evaluate its effectiveness . Occupational
health and safety competencies shall be integrated into the organizations business cycle through
recruitment, selection and performance appraisal and training among others. It shall establish and
maintain procedures to make its employees or members at each relevant function and level aware
of:
a) the importance of conformance with the occupational health and safety policy and procedures
and with requirements of the occupational health and safety management system;
b) the significant hazards and risks of their work activities and the benefits of improved occupational health and safety performance;
c) their roles and responsibilities in achieving conformance with occupational health and safety
policy and procedures and with the requirements of occupational health and safety management
systems; and
d) the potential consequences of departure from specified operating procedures. Personnel performing the task which involves hazards and risks shall be competent on the basis of appropriate education. training and/or experience.
Support Action
Communication
Organization shall establish and maintain procedures to ensure that pertinent occupational health
and safety information including significant risks and hazards communicated the people in the organization as well as to the external interested parties.
The organization shall thereby ensure the following means:
a) Communicating the results from management systems monitoring, audit and management reviews to those within the organization who are responsible for and have a stake in the organization's performance;
b) Identifying and receiving relevant occupational health and safety information from outside the
organization; and
c) Ensuring that the relevant information is communicated to people outside organization who are
likely to be affected.
Reporting
The organization shall establish and maintain documented procedures for relevant and timely reporting of information required for monitoring and continual improvement of occupational health and
safety performance.
Internal reporting procedures shall he established to cover:
a) Incident occurring reporting;
b) Non-conformance reporting;
c) Health and safety performance reporting; and
d) Hazard identification reporting.
External reporting procedures shall be established to cover:
a) Statutory reporting requirements; and
b) Stakeholder reporting.
Documentation
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures in paper or on electronic forms to
64
POSTALE 2008
a) describe the elements of the occupational health and safety management systems and their
interaction; and
b) provide direction to related documentation.
Documented procedures and work instructions shall be treated with productivity in mind and with
health and safety matter integrated into each step. The design and review of such procedures shall
be developed by competent people together with involvement from
those required to perform the tasks.
Document control
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures for controlling all documents required by
this Indian Standard to ensure that:
a) they can be located;
b) they are periodically reviewed, revised as and when necessary and approved for adequacy by
authorized personnel;
c) the current versions of relevant documents are available at all locations where operations essential to the effective functioning of the occupational health and safety management system are
performed;
d) obsolete documents are promptly removed from all points of issue and points of use, or otherwise assured against unintended use; and
e) any obsolete documents retained for legal and /or knowledge preservation purposes are suitably
identified.
Documentation shall be legible, dated (with dates of occupational health and safety
revision} and readily identifiable, maintained in an orderly manner and retained for a specified period,
Procedures and responsibilities shall be established and maintained concerning the creation and
modification of the various types of documents.
Records and information management
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures for records and information management
to ensure effective and quick identification, collection, retrieval, indexing, retention and disposition of
pertinent occupational health and safety management system information. Records and information
shall be maintained, as appropriate to the system and to the organization, to demonstrate conformance to the requirements of this standard.
Operational Control
The organization shall identify those operations and activities that are associated with the identified
significant hazards and risks in line with its policy, objectives and targets. The organization shall plan
these activities, including maintenance, in order to ensure that they are carried out under specified
conditions by
a) establishing and maintaining documented procedures to cover situations where their absence
could lead to deviations from the occupational health and safety policy and the objectives and
targets
a) stipulating operating criteria in the procedures; and
b) establishing and maintaining procedures related to the identifiable significant hazards and risks
of goods and services by the organization and communicating relevant procedures and requirements to suppliers and subcontractors.
Design and engineering
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures; to ensure that health and safety is considered at the initial design and planning phase to build risk controls in at this point. To ensure this,
each stage of design cycle (development, review verification, validation and change) should incorporate hazard identification, risk assessment and risk control procedures. Appropriately competent
people shall be allocated clear responsibilities to meet and verify health and safety requirements.
Where the newly evaluated hazard cannot be eliminated or substituted for one that presents lower
65
POSTALE 2008
risks, engineering controls shall be adopted. When the product, process or workplace is redesigned
this experience shall be considered in the design process.
Purchasing
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures for purchasing of goods and services including maintenance procedures under contract to others to ensure that purchased goods, ,services,
and products and subcontractors conform to the organization's occupational health and safety.
Contingency preparedness and response
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures for contingency preparedness and response to plan for contingency in advance and to periodically test these plans to allow all adequate
response to occur during the actual contingency.
While planning the procedure for contingency preparedness it shall consider significant events such
as fire, explosion, toxic release or natural disasters that threaten the viability of the organization. Offsite and on-site emergency plans and procedures shall be developed and periodically tested and
reviewed by the appropriate service provider for example fire brigade, police and the like. For large
installation, emergency plans shall coordinate with municipal or state disaster planning authorities.
The organization shall also establish and maintain procedures to mitigate the effects of such incidents on those directly suffering injury. These procedures shall include:
a) Establishment of appropriate first aid facilities that are matched to the site hazards and availability of further assistance. Sites remote from medical assistance shall have first aid appropriate to
stabilize any injury until transported to such medical assistance; and
b) Process to rehabilitate injured employees by providing appropriate rehabilitation as soon as
practicable after the injury occurs, so that recovery from the injury is expedited.
Critical incident recovery plan
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures for critical incident recovery plan (CIRP) to
aid in-plant employee recovery as soon as possible after the cessation of the event. Only suitably
qualified counselors shall be used to assist victims associated
with a traumatic event. The. CIRP allows the plant to minimize the time required to return to normal
operations and to assist employees who are not injured but who have for example. witnessed an
incident, to cope up with the trauma.
Measurement and Evaluation
Inspection and Testing
The organization sha1l establish and maintain procedures for planning and conducting ongoing inspection, testing and monitoring on regular basis related to key characteristics of its operations and
activities that can have significant hazards and risks. The frequency of such inspection and testing
shall be appropriate to each characteristics/activities inspected, tested or monitored. The personnel
involved in inspection. testing and monitoring shall have adequate skills and experience. Records of
occupational health and safety ongoing inspection, testing and monitoring (with details of both positive and negative findings) shall be maintained and be made available to relevant management, employees and subcontractors.
Suitable testing equipment and procedures shall be used to ensure compliance to occupational
health and safety standards. Timely corrective actions shall be taken where inspection, testing and
monitoring reveals nonconformity with occupational health and safety requirements. Sufficient investigation shall be undertaken to identify both the immediate and underlying causes of any shortcomings. Findings as well as remedial action planned and in progress shall be analyzed and reviewed.
Equipment used for such inspection and testing shall be calibrated and maintained and records of
this shall be retained according to the organization's procedure.
Internal Audit
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures for periodic occupational health and safety
system audits to be carried out in order to:
a) determine whether or not the occupational health and safety management system;
66
POSTALE 2008
i)
conforms to planned arrangements for occupational health and safety management system
including the requirements of this Indian Standard and relevant legislative requirements;
ii)
has been properly implemented and maintained; and .
b) provide information on the results of audits to management.
The organizations audit programme , including any schedule, shall be based on the occupational
health and safety importance of the activity concerned and the results of previous audits. In order to
be comprehensive the audit procedures shall cover the audit scope, frequency and methodologies,
as well as the responsibilities and requirements of conducting audit and reporting results.
Non-conformance, Corrective and Preventive Actions
The organization shall establish and maintain procedures for corrective and preventive actions in the
light of the findings, non-conformance, conclusions and recommendations reached as a result of
monitoring, audits and other reviews of the occupational health and safety management system. The
management shall ensure that these corrective and preventive actions are adequate and implemented and that there is systematic follow-up to ensure their effectiveness.
MANAGEMENT REVIEW
The organization's top management shall at intervals. that it determines. review the occupational
health and safety management system to ensure continuing suitability, adequacy and effectiveness.
The management review process shall ensure that the necessary information is collected to allow
management to carry out this evaluation. This review shall be documented. The management review
shall consider:
a) the overall performance of the occupational health and safety management systems;
b) the performance of individual elements of the systems;
c) the finding of audits;
d) internal and external factors. such as changes in organizational structure, legislation pending,
introduction of new technology, etc, and shall identify what action is necessary to remedy any
deficiencies; and
e) adequacy of corrective and preventive action. .
REFERENCE
1. Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems Specification with Guidance for Use , Bureau of Indian Standards ,
New Delhi
67
POSTALE 2008
ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MINES

CASE STUDY OF MALANJKHAND COPPER PROJECT
G. K. PRADHAN
PCRA, Kolkata
PROF S. JAYANTHU
NIT, Rourkela
INTRODUCTION
Mining operations are energy intensive and every mining enterprise have firmed up their Energy
Management plans so as to continuously monitor and control the energy consumed in various mining operations. While most mines have drawn up their Specific Consumption of electrical and thermal energy used to produce the final product theoretically, efforts have been made to identify areas
of energy saving through addition and modification of improved techniques and gadgets. The present paper broadly highlights the energy saving measures of a large mine like Malanjkhand, where
detailed study had been undertaken to identify areas of energy saving and implementing the new
technologies for further savings.
DESCRIPTION OF THE MINE
Malanjkhand Copper Project of Hindustan Copper Ltd (Fig.1, shows the geographical location) is the
deepest mine in the country. The deposit belongs to the Central Indian Pre-Cambrian shield comprising of granitoid basement, basic dykes and metamorphosed rock of Chilpi Ghat series. The copper mineralisation is predominantly confined to arcuate shaped, 2600 m long, 60 m wide, and 600 m
thick down quartz reef. The mineralized quartz reef strikes in NW-SE direction with a dip of 80 Degrees towards northeast. The hardness of granites in HW and FW of the ore zones ranges from 13
to 25 according to Protodyonokov Index, being 22 on an average for HW and 17 for FW granites.
Youngs Modulus for the entire mine benches is 16.96 x 10^5 Kg/Sq. Cm. The mineralized vein
quartz is also very hard ranging from 15 to 23 b3ing 17 on an average. The ultimate pit design for
this opencast mine was carried out by RTZC in the DPR during 1978. At present the workings are
extending upto 448mRL, and the mine is having over 17 benches. The mine management had taken
the help of Petroleum Conservation and Research Association(PCRA) to have the detailed Energy
Audit.
ENERGY CONSERVATION AREAS
PCRAs energy audit broadly laid emphasis on the following
- Study of the contract demand vis--vis actual production trend
- Power factor management/optimisation
- By use of capacitor bank at each load end, we can go for power factor improvement and thus
saving energy.
- Energy saving in Lighting.
- Energy saving in Switchgears.
- Energy saving by using of Variable Frequency Drive (VFD).
- We can save energy by selection of proper size and High Efficient Motors.
- Energy recording and saving by Online Energy Management System.
In addition, M/s IBP had also took up several studies to optimize bench blasting so that there is effective use of explosive energy followed by savings in electrical energy in electric shovels, diesel
excavators, dumpers, crushing and screening operations etc.
The blasted material is processed at the Beneficiation plant, from where copper ore is extracted
through concentration. The plant rated capacity of concentrator is 2 MT/ annum.
POSTALE 2008
Malanjkhand gets electricity from Madhya Pradesh State Electricity Board (MPSEB) through 132 KV
feeders. The incoming 132 KV is stepped down to the working level 3.3KV & 415V through various
transformers. The total contract demand of this project is 10 MVA. The approx. energy consumption
for the plant is 80% and for the mines is 20%.Our average monthly electricity consumption is 50 lacs
KWh and electricity bill is Rs. 2.5 crores. The overall power consumption in MPU is 74.31%, in Mines
7.25%, WTP 4.84%, I/Well 4.79%, T/Ship 6.12% and in others is 1.69%. Some areas which have
been identified and notable savings have been achieved are as follows:
Reduction Of Contract Demand
Initially the contract demand was 11.5 MVA, which was reduced to 10 MVA since November 2006,
leading to substantial saving in the energy bill. This has resulted in additional saving in power bill to
the tune of about Rs.45 lacs in 2006-2007. This saving is through saving on fixed charge and substantial incentive on load factor. The load factor incentive is to the tune of Rs. 11-12 lacs per month.
Maintaining Unity Power Factor
Installing Capacitors Banks at at Main Receiving Station(MRS), (on the secondary side of 132/11KV
transformer) for the past several years we are maintaining continuously Unity Power Factor. Thus
the incentive on this account runs to Rs. 8-9 lacs per month.
Capacitor Banks
Capacitor banks have been installed at different motors such as in ball mills, crushers etc. This has
benefited to maintain good power quality and having longer durability in electrical distribution system.
Use of capacitor banks at different load end result in reduction in line loss and voltage drop, followed
by increase in life of the system and savings to the tune of Rs. 51389/- per annum.
Illumination
For any opencast mine and a mine like Malanjkhand having deeper benches, lighting constitutes an
important requirement for better safety of men and machinery and also productivity. Due to low investment, in every mine, lighting modifications get higher priority to contribute effective energy saving potential without compromising the DGMS standards.
Some of the widely used lighting systems are:
(a) Switch over to HPSV lamp / MH from HPMV for street lighting and industrial application.
(b) Use of CFL lamps in place of incandescent lamps for domestic and commercial application.
(c) Replace conventional electromagnetic ballast by low-loss electronic ballast.
Based System to New System
Incandescent to CFL
HPMV to MH
HPMV to HPSV
Ordinary FTL to Energy efficient FTL
Saving in Watt
85%
50%
60%
30%
The mine management had reported a possible saving of 73728 KWh energy which leads to saving
of Rs. 3.68 lacs per annum by replacing all Fluorescent Tube light (40 W) to Energy efficient FTL (28
W) with Electronic choke.
Energy savings in Switch Gears
Energy saving in Switch gear is possible by reducing the losses in the power and control circuit.
69
POSTALE 2008
Due to presence of internal impedance of the device watt loss (I2R loss) will be there. This
causes loss of energy, which is undesirable. Modern Circuit Breakers make use of the new technique to achieve lower contact resistance or impedance.
Use of Soft Starters.
Use of Microprocessor based devices.
Use of LED lights.
Only by replacing all conventional indication lamps to LED lights we can save Rs.1.5 lacs per annum.
Using ENERGY SAVER
Energy Saver is an effective Micro-Controller Electronics circuit. It supplies voltage and required current proportional to required torque for any motor. Soft start facility reduces the maximum demand
with smooth step less acceleration minimizing stress on mechanical transmission system. Energy
Saver can be used with refrigerators, air conditioner and other domestic appliances. It senses the
exact power required by motor under different loadings and adjusts the power level to the motor requirement.
Advantages
Reduces losses and increases efficiency (of motor, tube lights, fans etc.)this reduces heating in
motor winding, tube light chokes etc.
It has soft start (for motor), the average inrush current also reduces.
Energy saver saves 3 to 7 KW per day, based on electrical consumption of 30 KW per day.
It stabilizes and regulates voltages, reduces current and extends the life of your appliances
It has normally more than 80000 hours life span.
Selection and Higher Efficient Motors
In most mines and industries, right selection of motors are absent. This lead to running at under
load resulting in heavy energy losses. Due to variable production planning of the mine, many a
times, the motors are bound to operate at under load condition. One study indicate that mines having beneficiation system and a fluctuating production plan give rise to 95% of their motors to operate
at under loading condition. The average running is within 55-60% load. This can be rectified by
proper selection of size and energy efficient motors. When there is substantial cut in production, it is
advisable to install a low capacity motor to effect energy saving. To better understand the situation,
when a 15 HP motor is put on 10 HP load, the net outgo is Rs.137750/-.
In recent years energy efficient motors are available in all sizes, and thus in case of any replacement
this new generations motors need to be installed. Except for emergencies, at no other time the user
should go for multiple winding no. of the motors, since every winding inherits certain losses.
Energy Efficient Motors additionally contribute to :
- Higher efficiency at operating level and consequently reduction in electricity bill.
- Can take care of wider supply variation and higher ambient.
- Lower slip which enhances output of the end product.
Speed control through Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) installation
Increase in the depth of the mine, warrants a well designed pumping layout where consumption of
electrical energy is quite substantial. Because of the increase in depth the mine faces considerable
challenges in maintaining the working benches free from inundation. This is also true for the process
plant where concentrate and ore extraction also involve complex pumping lay out. Using VFDs Malanjkhand had proposed to save up to 112000KWh per annum generating saving of Rs.5.6 lacs.
70
POSTALE 2008
Online Energy Management System

Online Energy Management System is a specific Energy Management System application that support strategic energy management include bench marking,energy use, cost analysis etc. these
analyses can be combined to form powerful information tool that allows the management to have an
understanding of current energy performance, plan and scope for cost effective energy conservation
measures with payback period. Further it assists in stage wise improvements, replacement/ modification. It also helps in
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Devising in Energy audit & accounting systems

Loss assessment
Verifying the performance of Energy Conservation measures
System management
Analyses
System planning
Electricity billing
Power quality issues, etc.
Application
Remote access to reports for authorized users over LAN or over Web.
Single point monitoring of multiple facilities spread across the globe.
Advance online alarm if the set maximum demand limit is about to be exceeded, thus avoiding
heavy excess demand penalties.
Non electrical parameters such as flow, pressure, temp etc. can also be incorporated.
Measurement of power distribution loss.
Computing run hour and off hours of the plant equipment based on load.
Detection of idle running of Mill, Conveyors etc.
Condition monitoring of high value equipment like main mill motors, main auxiliaries.
Increased production, better profitability.
Energy saving in HEMM

HEMM deployed at mines, are the single largest consumer of HSD and Lubricants. Through various
energy audits, it has been observed that by complying to OEM recommendations, the specific energy consumption can be effectively controlled. However, the rough terrain, dustiness in the mining
benches, aging of the operators and the equipment cost of the energy bill gets inflated. Based on the
study at other mines, some of the areas which can contribute to better energy consumption are
Radiator water quality check
Lube oil quality
Using used-lube oil after filtration
Use of additives with HSD for better engine performance
Maintenance of tyres
Maintenance of haul roads
Face cleaning
Controlling the generation of oversize boulders
Ensuring proper filling factor of bucket and dumper. Normally well fragmentation muckpile can
effecitively ensure better filling factor
Regular training of the operators for their skill improvements, etc.
Energy saving in Explosive Energy utilization in Mines
Use of High Energy Cartridged Explosive of IBP
IBP was associated with HCL to evolve smooth blasting systems by manufacturing and using high
energy cartridged explosives. IBP supplied site specific high energy cartridged explosives to MCP so
71
POSTALE 2008
as to have better fragmentation, control on generation of boulders etc. For many years IBP supplied
Indogel 270 and Indoboost(HE) MCP for blasting in their mine. IBP developed new explosive type
based on Energy Factor of the mine benches. Kate(2000) reported the pattern expansion at Malanjkhand with the use of Indoboost(HE) and Indogel 270 from 15.75 Sq.M to 20.90 Sq.M showing
39% increase, thereby saving on drilling meterage, without compromising on fragmentation quality.
As a step forward, to make the explosive loading mechanized, IBP had recommended for the adoption of Site Mixed Slurry Explosives system. At Malanjkhand, because of the technological superiority of SMS explosives over Site Mixed emulsion(SME) explosives, SMS was used after the commissioning of the Support Plant facilities. Site Mixed Slurry explosives, in view of these distinct properties is being used
-
Variable density of the explosives,

Variable Energy level of the explosive
Charging 3 different types of explosives into the holes,
Excellent water proof ness
The mining system comprises of

Drilling :Dia. of drills 165mm, Schramm drills(departmental operations), tyre mounted water well
drills are engaged by the excavation contractors,
Loading : 10 CuM P&H Shovels 3 nos.in departmental workings, 4.6 CuM rope shovels, and hydraulic excavators in contractual working section
Other parameters :
Bench height 12 M(av.)
Depth of holes 14 M.(including 5 to 15 % sub grade drilling, 5% in weathered capping, 10% in veinquartz, and 15% in quartz)
Quantity of explosive per hole : 175 kgs of SMS
Cup Density of SMS Explosives : 0.9 to 1.0 gm/cc
Max. no. of holes per blast : 10 to 12
Initiation by shock tubes.
Rock Parameters
Granite (F/W)
Granite(H/W)
Granite with Vein Quartz
Vein Quartz
Density
g/cc
3.56
3.86
4.20
4.69
UCS
MPa
225.20
177.40
225.20
170.80
Tensile Strength
Mpa
15.60
15.30
10.26
Explosive selection
Stage I : A large number of combination of cartridge explosives were tried. This did not solve the
problem of generation of oversize boulders, toe etc. Thus the concept of Energy factor based explosive selection was adopted and tried. In the first stage High Energy HE Booster(HEB) and High Energy Column (HEC) in 40: 60 % ratio, was tried and the results are placed in Table 1. Some quantity
of Low Energy Column (LEC) was also used in the 4th blast to bring down the energy level for better
post blast results. Although there are instrumentations available to measure the explosive energy in
the field, in this trial energy values of explosives derived from the explosive composition. These data
is readily available with different types of explosives.
Blast hole pattern adopted with Cartridge explosives
Rock type
Hole Depth
Burden
Spacing
Granite
13.5
3.0
5.0
Quartz
13.5
3.5
5.5
Basic
13.5
4.0
5.5
Weathered Rock
13.5
4.0
6.0
72
Qty/hole
190
180
180
150
POSTALE 2008
Table 1 : Showing Energy Factor based explosive use

Parameters
No. of holes
Bench Ht.
Hole depth
Sub-grade
Blast No. 1
16
12
12.75
7%
Blast No.2
26
12.8
13.40
5%
BXS
3.0x3.7
3.2x3.8
Av. stemming ht.

Designed Volume
No. of Rows
Explosive Type & Energy
level(**Obtained from chemical
calculation.
Qty. of explosive in the
Blast(ENERGY kcal/kg **)
HEB(1005)
HEC(950)
LEC(640)
Qty/hole
TOTAL ENERGY LEVEL in
kcal
Per hole energy level
Energy Factor
kcal/CuM(Energy per
hole/volume per hole)
Explosive used in Boulder
In Toe
Total secy. Blg.
Throw
Fly rock
Back break
Back heave
Oversize boulders
% Secy. Blasting
Fume characteristic
Qty. lifted in CuM
Charge factor(while charging)
Charge Factor(final)
Cost of Expl./CuM
3.2
2.5
2150
1960
2
3
PRIMARY BLASTING
Blast 3
58
12.5
14.3
15%
5.7x3.4 &
2.7x4.6
3.0
10800
4
Blast 4
46
13.5
14.5
85
3.4x4.4
3-3.5
9400
4
HEB+HEC
HEB+HEC
HEB+HEC
HEB+HEC+LEC
1227
1478
169
1840
2250
4226
6953
204
192
2705
6000
325
200
3304282
4994660
13574558
10722170
1537
1234
1257
1141
1227
985
1005
918
475
475
200
200
50
+250m
3
Noticed
3 to 4
4
40-45
Negligible
4-5
noticed
Negligible
2
Normal
Normal
14375
1.035
0.81
17.77
12100
0.96
0.76
16.28
SECONDARY BLASTING
425
325
150
325
POST BLAST OBSERVATIONS
20-30
3035
150-200
150-200
2-3
3-4
6 to 7
6 to 7
21
8
Dense
Dense fumes
fumes
Final Result
2500
3840
1.2
1.35
1.0
1.06
28.18
25.26
Observations on the above 4 blasts with Cartridged Explosives

a) It can be concluded that Energy Factor of 1100 is the Optimum Energy, just sufficient to break
the rock to desired size/specifications.
b) Any explosive in excess of 900 result in excessive throw, very high generation of fly rocks, excessive crushing etc.
73
POSTALE 2008
c)
By placing LEC in the column having lower Energy level helps us in energy balancing. There is
scope in increasing the quantity of LEC, keeping in view the total Energy Factor not going below
1100 kcal/CuM.
d) Kate(2000) reported the use of HEC, HEB based on Energy Factor, and further trials were undertaken to expand the blasting pattern. The pattern expansion with the use of HEB & HEC resulted in expanding the drilling pattern from 15.75 Sq.M to 20.90 Sq.M showing 39% increase,
thereby saving on drilling meterage, without compromising on the fragmentation quality.
e) Other benefits like reducing percentage of secondary blasting, toe problem, etc had further established the relevance of Energy Factor based explosive use.
STAGE II :
A wide range of slurry and emulsion based bulk explosives are being used in Indian mines. Some of
the mines also use ANFO. The important properties of explosive which play a vital role in their selection are
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
VOD & Density of explosive : Variable density explosive is most suitable. In case of bulk explosives SMS is most suitable because of its flexibility to have variable density, and three different types of explosives getting pumped into the same hole, at varying proportion. Similarly VOD
levels.
Wt. Strength and Bulk Strength of explosives,
Energy level of explosives : Plays a vital role in deep benches, since explosives of different
strength and energy level is required to be pumped so as to have uniform fragmentation, total
elimination of secondary blasting, etc.
Post-detonation fume characteristics : Oxygen balance explosive is only to be used. This is
because any imbalance in oxygen will lead to excessive generation of toxic fumes, which will
make the working place inaccessible within specified time interval. 3ANFO is not the right type
for these mines since any variation in AN or FO quality, proportion of mixing, exposure to water
will lead to large volumes of fumes generation coupled with blast failures. Maximum Charge per
delay : This is the only parameter which effects the generation of blast induced ground vibration
level in any blast. Normally, after the maximum charge per delay is established based on the
recommended maximum Peak Particle Velocity , the quantity of explosive in any hole is distributed into two decks. In case of cartridge explosives, owing to the constraint of fixed density of
the explosive and fixed energy level the length of the deck to be fixed is done purely on field trials basis. However, in case of bulk SMS the length of the deck can be fixed based on the Energy factor of the rock, i.e. kcal/CuM. In practice decking becomes quite difficult in the predominantly watery holes having water at pressure and in muddy/semi-fluid state. In such situations
after ascertaining the Energy factor of the rock the energy content of the explosive charge is
fixed and density is varied so as to maintain the maximum Charge per delay.
Distribution of variable energy charge in the same bench blasting block keeping in view the stability of the rock in the last row of holes. This system of charging immensely help in ensuring
controlled fragmentation of the stemming area, leading to stable pit conditions, control in the
generation of loose over-hangs etc.
Bulk SMS Explosives

Based on the Energy Level optimized with use of cartridged explosives at 1100 kcal/CuM, efforts
were made to design a product formulation with SMS Explosives having max. 1000 kcal/CuM. The
total coupling with bulk explosives has given a scope for reducing the energy level by at least 1520% .
74
POSTALE 2008
Table 2 : Showing Blasts with SMS Explosives in different rock conditions Pre-Blast data
Blast
No.
Location
of the
bench
Nature
Of strata
Bench
Ht.
(Hole
depth)
No.
of
rows
Pattern
SMS
Expl. Qty
(Av.
Qty/hole)
No. of
Deck
(deck
length)
(St. Ht)
(Hole
BurSpacdia. 165
Kgs.
den
ing
mm)
SMS Cup density maintained at 1.05, Charge/M. 22.66 kgs
Granite,
2756.2
One
12.5
1
460(N)
Quartz &
03
3.2
3.8
(170)
(2.0M)
(13.5)
Apatite
(4.0M)
Appetite
1022.400
One
12.0
2
460(N)
&
02
2.8
3.6
(170)
(2.0)
(13.5)
Quartz
(4.0)
4350
One
472
13.0
3
Quartz
01
3.5
4.0
(180)
(2.5)
(N&HW)
(14.5)
(4.0)
SMS Cup density maintained at 1.2,Charge/M. 27.27 kgs
750
One
12.0
4
460(N)
Appetite
01
3.7
4.2
(150)
(3.0)
(13.5)
(5.0)
7200
One
508(Cent.
13.7
5
Granite
04
3.5
4.3
(170)
(3.0)
H/W)
(15.0)
(4.0)
3930
One
11.5
6
496(H/W)
Granite
04
3.1
4.2
(170)
(2.0)
(13.0)
(4.0)
Post Blast Data
No. of
oversized
boulders
15(Med.
Sized)
03
(small)
Blast
No.
Powder
Factor
(CuM/kg)
Fragmentation
0.85
Satisfactory
2.
0.71
V. Good
3.
1.002
V. Good
25(Med.
Sized)
4.
1.24
V. Good
5.
1.2
6.
1.21
Charging
ratio
CuM/kg
1.18
1.41
0.99
0.80
0.83
0.82
Throw (m)
% boulder
Vertical
M.
Horizontal
M.
Back
break
Muckpile
6.0
40
Neg.
Uniform
6.0
30
Neg.
Uniform
3.44%
(150kgs)
Negligible
35 on
HW 15
on
N.side
Neg.
Uniform
nil
nil
6.0
30
Neg.
Uniform
Good
40
2.07%
(150
kgs)
3.0
40
Neg.
Satisfactory
Satisfactory
Excellent
Nil
Nil
3.0
30
Nil
Satisfactory
Excellent
1.81 %
(50kgs)
7.0%
(7 kgs)
Energy Factor calculations : Basis : To restrict Energy Factor at 1000 kcal/CuM level.
75
Remarks
Satisfactory
Satisfactory
Toe and
mucking
was tight
at one end
Satisfactory
POSTALE 2008
Blast
Nos./
Rock
type
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SMS/TRIALS
B*S*B.H
Qty/H
kcal
kcal/CuM
REMARKS

800 kcal/kg
152
170
136000
895
Scope for pattern expn.
120.96
170
136000
1124
182
180
144000
791
SMS Cup density maintained at 1.2,Charge/M. 27.27 kgs
900
186.48
150
135000
724
900
206.185
170
153000
742
6.
900
149.73
170
170850
1141
Scope for pattern expn.
With these data further evaluation of each blasts were made so as to identify right Energy Level of
explosive, density level, qty./M. etc at our end on a continuous basis. In benches where there is
scope for expanding the pattern, pattern expansion vis--vis Energy factor was adopted. However,
with maxm. 950 kcal/CuM Energy Factor blasts have been conducted. All other considerations like
geological disturbances etc were not taken into account. Till date the entire blasting is with SMS explosives and the mine had reported substantial improvement in fragmentation. Fragmentation improvement in turn benefit in energy savings in all other subsequent operations in Mining & beneficiation.
CONCLUSION
The efforts made by Malanjkhand is laudable and opened much more scope for future, when new
techniques and modifications in the enrgy usage can save energy thereby leading to savings in production cost.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The views expressed are those of the authors and not of the organizations where they work.
SELECTED REFERENCES
1. PCRA(2007) Energy Audit Report Petroleum Conservation Research Association, New Delhi.
2. Pal, D.K., Sikdar, S and Agarwal, G.(2007) Energy Conservation Progress at Malanjkhand Copper Project, Procc. Of Seminar
at Malanjkhand, Nov 2007.
76
POSTALE 2008
LOCATION OF MALANJKHAND
Jabalpur
200km
MCP
Balaghat
90km
Baihar
20km
Gondia
135km
Nagpur
290km
Durg
150km
Blasting
Fragmentation prior to optimization
77
Raipur
200km
POSTALE 2008
FORMULATION OF GUIDELINES ON INSTUMENTATION VIS--VIS STRATA

CONTROL CELL FOR UNDERGROUND COAL MINES
S JAYANTHU, P. PARIDA, A BHAGEL,
National Institute Of Technology, Rourkela,
G SREENIVASA RAO
SOM, Western Coalfields Ltd, Nagpur
INTRODUCTION
During the 10th National Conference of Safety in Mines held at New Delhi during 26-27th Nov, 2007 it
was recommended that each coal mining company, shall establish a STRATA CONTROL CELL at
corporate and area levels within a period of one year, to assist mine managers, for formulation of
Systematic Support Rules, monitoring strata control measures in a scientific way to ensure efficacy
of support system and for procurement/supply of quality supporting materials. Unscientific monitoring
of coal mining strata has resulted in number of fatal and serious bodily injuries to miners and loss of
production from time to time. This issue can be addressed by proper monitoring of strata and taking
adequate control measures in time. Over the years, geotechnical instrumentation and strata control
technologies have undergone considerable change and it is pertinent that the field engineers must
be trained in the state of the art instrumentation for effective implementation of the strata control
measures in coal mines.
Keeping the above requirement in view, a short-term course was held at NIT-Rourkela on Trends in
Strata Control Techniques and Instrumentation for Enhancing Safety in Coal Mines during July 28 31, 2008 attended by officials from DGMS, SCCL, SECL, MCL, HGML, WCL, CMPDIL, CIMFR etc.
It was decided that awareness should be created through workshops/training programs in coalfield
areas such as SCCL, SECL WCL, MCL, NECL, CCL etc to Executives including lower level management (supervisors and diploma holders) to be associated with strata control cell (S Jayanthu, S J
Sibal, 2008, . S Jayanthu and Sk. Md. Equeenuddin, 2008, Jayanthu et al, 2008) Accordingly a
Workshop was conducted at WCL during 7th-8th Nov08 on, and a Training program at SECL during
9th-10th Nov08 with participants including Area Safety Officers, Addl General Managers, Dy General
Managers , Safety officers, SOMs, Asst Managers and also form safety, planning, rescues departments in the mining industry. Over 140 officials were trained in the above course/ workshops/training
programs at NIT-Rourkela, WCL-Nagpur, and SECL Bilaspur.
STRATA CONTROL ISSUES
In view of the recent disasters due to roof control problems in Indian cola mines, it can be said that
When there are so many train and plane accidents and disasters including the recent plane crash
into red sea - the means of transport was not changed but efforts are made to study the problem and
find solutions for it. Thus, some disasters or accidents in coal mining opened new vistas and emergency trend of studying strata behaviour for proper understanding of the strata control problem. Indias future coal mining will depend on how efficiently and economically we can exploit deep coal
deposits by underground mining practices with safety and accepted level of productivity. In view of
not so encouraging results of longwall mining in India, assessment of caveability of roof and support
requirements is still a grey area of research for application of rock mechanics. Parting behaviour in
multiple seams/multiple sections of thick coal seams also need further strata mechanics studies for
optimal extraction of such seams. NIT - Rourkela is in the quest of developing some reliable guidelines for some of the above-mentioned issues through application of suitable rock engineering techniques.
Instrumentation requirements need to be studied with proper knowledge of limitations of the mining
as well as instrumentation technology. In olden days, due to lack of proper instruments, qualitative
POSTALE 2008
observations with limited possibility of quantification lead to some empirical relations/thumb rules.
However, now-days, with improved technology of mining/instrumentation, numerical models - computers applications for analysis of data; mining engineers got more confidence on quantities observations, and gained improved satisfaction through observational approaches. Acceptability of such
studies by the filed personnel may be improved by proper interpretation of the data so generated by
experts in the strata monitoring. There is a need to be more innovative in application of the existing
instrumentation with proper planning by experienced strata control engineers which may lead to possibility of modification in existing practices fro better safety and economy of mining venture.
Now-a-days, the progress of the technology is so furious that between the time the page proofs are
completed and the time the book/paper comes off the press, some items will have become outdated.
However, in case of underground coal mining, in general, and for instrumentation to understand the
strata behaviour particularly the progress is not as expected. It remained a lot with traditional systems and a few attempts were made to adopt/absorb recent trends in these aspects. Recent practices in application of strata monitoring instrumentation is reviewed in this paper along with possibilities of improved systems for application in coal mines.
With the advent of modern coal mining techniques, it has become imperative to adopt innovative practices in place of traditional means of supports/methods of mining. Statistics of roof fall accidents over a
couple of decades indicated that 34-43% of the accidents occurred under coal roof, conditions. About
2500 million tons of coal has been locked in pillars of which only about 1000 million tons is amenable
to opencast mining, about 1500 million tons is to be extracted by underground mining. Unresolved
strata control management is one of the major reason for losting of pillars. Although technology has
been improved now-a-days by BG method, Integrated caving, Hydraulic mining, some of the trials
are unsuccessful (for example Churcha, Kottadih etc), and many more due to lack of suitable strata
control technique. Need of modification to the existing guidelines has been felt through observational
approaches for safe and cost effective mining operations. it needs a detailed understanding of strata
behaviour with appropriate and proper application of the state of the art instrumentation technologies.
Strata control management is one of the major reasons for losing of pillars. Although technology has
improved now-a-days with the introduction of Blasting Gallery method, Integrated Caving method
and Hydraulic Mining, some of them are unsuccessful with the loss of trials at Churcha, Kottadih,
etc., and many more due to lack of suitable strata control techniques. Salient features that lead to
typical problems in underground coal mining include;
Steeply dipping, faulted, folded, highly gassy beds under aquifers and protected land have remained
virgin.
Developed pillars under fires, surface features sterilized because of acute shortage of sand.
Development has been in multi sections.
Highly stressed zones have been created due to barriers/stooks causing difficulty of undermining of
the seams.
Prediction of strata behaviour by theoretical analysis becomes unreliable due to the problem of
simulation of the real field conditions in mathematical, physical or numerical models. Thus, empirical
formulation, based on in-situ measurements of strata behaviour parameters, is an accepted way to
estimate the strata behaviour. Earlier expressions representing the behaviour of openings were
usually time-dependent, logarithmic or exponential functions derived based upon curve fitting to the
experimental data obtained from convergence measurements carried out in underground. Various
approaches for design of support systems are illustrated in Fig 1.
RECOMMENDATIONS OF SAFETY CONFERENCE
National Conference on Safety in Mines, being the highest tri-partite forum of the country to discuss
major safety issues and for making policies / strategies for improving the safety status in mines, had
79
POSTALE 2008
also discussed the issue of strata control in four out of the nine conferences held so far. Recommendations of these safety conferences have been instrumental in formulation of statutory guidelines.
APPROACH
BASE
Statestical Analysis of underground

observations
EMPIRICA L
OBSERVATIONA L
Efficacy of support system

Ground deformation monitoring
Analysis of Ground and support interaction
TECHNIQUE
Statestical surveys
Rock Mass classification
Anchorage tests
Monitoring while mining
Characteristic curves
ANALYTICAL
Analysis of stresses and displ acements
Mathematical modelling
Numerical modelling
Physical modelling
Fig 1: Various approaches for design of strata control systems

Thrust Areas
From the foregoing analysis of accidents due to fall of roof and sides, the following thrust areas have
been identified to reduce the potentiality of the hazards due to fall of roof & sides:
Use of Roof bolts as a primary means of roof support
It is suggested that for supporting the freshly exposed roof, roof bolts shall be used as a primary
means of support. Use of roof bolts only as support system to support freshly exposed roof will reduce exposure of persons below freshly exposed roof. It is essential to inculcate a culture of no operation at the face till the roof is supported by roof bolts up to 0.6 m from the face. However, while
implementing roof bolting, the following issues need special attention:
(i) The support system primarily with roof bolts shall be designed based on scientific observations
of roof rock properties / behaviour. Horizon of prominent parting plane or plane of weakness
above the working section should be identified to decide the length of bolts.
(ii) There must be well laid mechanism to ensure supply of proper quality of roof bolts, grouting materials (resin / cement capsules), bearing plate, nuts & bolts etc.
(iii) At the same time quality check of installed roof bolts are also equally important. It is observed
that at many places, suitable anchorage testing machines are not available for testing of efficacy
of the roof bolts as per the guidelines. It is need less to mention that efficacy of the entire strata
control system is based on the efficacy of installation of the roof bolts.
(iv) Considering the advantage and popularity of resin capsules world over, it is important to consider use of resin grout in place of cement grout, in difficult strata conditions to start with. Based
on the experience, use of resin capsules in place of cement capsules may be considered in all
conditions.
(v) The other critical area is the proper understanding of the principles and procedures of roof bolting by the workers at grass root levels, particularly the persons engaged in roof bolting. Their
proper understanding will help in proper implementation. Hence it is suggested to arrange workshops / training programme etc. on actual practice of roof bolting for the support persons and
supervisors.
Stability of sides of pillars or galleries
From the analysis of accidents due to fall of roof and sides, it is observed that about 28% of the accidents due to fall of roof & sides are caused due to fall of sides only. It is primarily because comparatively much less attention is paid for stability of sides compared to that of roof. Except in highly
disturbed areas where side spalling takes place regularly, not much of attention is paid on the stabil-
80
POSTALE 2008
ity of sides though its contribution to total accidents is quite significant, i.e. 9% of total accidents and
16% of total belowground accidents.
In view of the above, in order to reduce the accidents due to fall of roof & sides, it will be imperative
on the operators to pay adequate attention towards the stability of sides also. This may be ensured
by properly dressing the weak / loose sides, stabilizing weak sides by side bolts with or without wire
meshes, plastering, guniting, shotcreting or brick walling as required. Further it is also essential to
maintain proper line of extraction in depillaring districts to avoid undue accumulation of stresses.
Establishment of strata control cell
The condition of strata and the stress environment around any working place is always dynamic in
nature. No two working place is having identical strata condition. Hence any single readymade solution for strata control is not feasible. It is essential to assess the roof condition of the working places
at regular intervals by scientific methods. Similarly, monitoring of the effectiveness of roof bolts and
strata condition in the active working areas are also critically important because effective monitoring
helps in taking critical decisions like modification of SSR, withdrawal of work persons in the event of
any danger from fall of roof and sides. State of the art monitoring system through instrumented rock
bolts, tell-tale, multipoint bore hole extensometer, convergence indicator, load cells etc. are available
for continuous monitoring the roof behaviour. Depending on the condition of roof, rate of extraction
and the degree of exposure, suitable monitoring schemes, need to be developed and implemented.
Hence to give a constant backup technical support to the practicing managers, it is essential to establish suitable strata control cell at Corporate level and also for a class or group of mines. Need for
setting of strata control units in the mining companies was recommended in fifth conference. Such
strata control cell should be manned by adequate number of technical personnel headed by a senior
official not below the rank of Chief General Manager at Corporate level and an official not below the
rank of Dy. Chief Mining Engineer at area level to assist mine managers. Suitable training gallery for
practical training of workers and supervisors regarding application of different strata control devices
may be established.
REQUIREMENT OF INSTRUMENTATION
Common instrumentation useful for understanding strata behaviour in around a typical gallery in a
development or depillaring panel is presented in Fig 2. Based on the previous strata monitoring studies in Indian coal mines, qualitative as well as quantitative nature of the strata behaviour has been
studied from the start of the depillaring operations in almost all the mines for monitoring convergence
and load on support. In experimental trials of any new practices of mining methods, extensive instrumentation is generally proposed for the strata monitoring (NIRM, 2000; Jayanthu et al, 2004).
The following instruments would be useful for better understanding of strata/support behaviour in a
typical underground coal mine:
a) Multi-point Extensometers
b) Instrumented Bolts
c) Anchor Load Cells
d) Stress Gauges
e) Remote-reading Convergence Indicators
f) Tell Tales
g) Convergence Indicators
h) Prop Load Cells
The instruments would be located such that they will be able to provide information required for the
purpose. The purpose may be monitoring the performance of supports provided, adequacy of the
supports, warning of the falls/unstable conditions. In a development gallery, the instruments are located in the mid of the junctions, even after splitting and slicing of the pillars. These instruments
would be installed at strategic positions near middle of the panel, nearly two pillars in advance, and
monitored till accessible. The cable from the remote monitoring instruments would be taken through
81
POSTALE 2008
conduit pipe laid in a notch made along the floor making all efforts to protect them against the
LHD/SDL movements.
Index:
L T
C
IB Instrumented bolt
BHE Bore Hole extensometer
M Magetic ring anchor
C Convergence indicator
N Notch along the floor for remote wire through conduite
pipe
S Stress capsule
LC Anchor load cell
P Prop support
V Mechanical/Vibrating wire
type load cells
R Remote convergence indicator in a grove at the proposed
rib position
TT Tell Tale instrument
Fig 2. Instrumentation plan of a typical Gallery in a coal mine
Fig 3. Instrumentation of a typical depillaring panel in a coal mine
82
POSTALE 2008
Details of the observations were discussed by Jayanthu (1999), and Jayanthu (2002). The telescopic
rod convergence meter measures the distance between two pegs, one in the roof and the other on
the floor vertically below it. Remote convergence stations function on the principle of change of resistance due to convergence.
Set of remote type of convergence indicators and stress capsules along with other instruments such
as strain bars, bore hole extensometers, dialation meters etc., were installed near mid of the panels
(Fig 3). These set of instruments were commissioned in the development headings against the position of the ribs to be retained within the goaf.
The position of such ribs was ascertained well before start of the depillaring. Manholes of 1 m x 0.85
m dimension and 2.5 3.0 m height were made in these ribs. Stress capsules were installed at a
depth of 2-3 m in the manholes, while remote convergence indicators along with other instruments
are commissioned. After installation of the instruments, the manholes were protected by a set of
props, leaving the instruments within the manhole. The present practices and purpose of some of the
strata/support monitoring instrumentation is as follows:
Extensometric Monitoring
Multi-point magnetic-ring extensometers will be used to monitor the bed separation up to 8 - 10 m in
the roof at a few selected locations. A few Tell Tale instruments will also be installed for estimation of
bed separation in the roof. Extensometers may also be installed in the floor, to determine the extent
of floor heave. Similarly, the sides also will be monitored to assess the movements within the pillars.
Based on the data recorded, the horizon of the weak planes along which bed separation or fracture
is taking place, will be identified.
Strain in the Bolts
Instrumented bolts will be installed in the roof. These instruments will provide information about the
strain or load developed along the length of the grouted bolt at different portions. These instruments
will also be used in the sides of the pillars/floor to estimate the thrust.
Load on Bolts
Anchor load cells will be installed along with the freshly installed bolts. These load cells will indicate
the total load exerted by the strata along the bolt length.
Stress Changes
The change in stress with the extraction process will be monitored using stress gauges installed in
the pillars. They will be installed at suitable depths inside the pillars, and they will be monitored as
the drivages progress.
Roof-to-Floor Convergence
Convergence points would be installed at suitable locations for recording roof to floor movements at
different stages of depillaring. It consists of roof and floor pegs, and the monitoring will be done with
the telescopic read-out unit. Initially four readout units of telescopic type are proposed. Attempts
would be made to monitor roof-to-floor convergence in the goaved out area using remote indicating
convergence indicator.
PURPOSE OF INSTURMENTATION
Purpose of the instrumentation should be clear for the planners before commissioning any instruments for understanding strata behaviour. Inadequate number or improper selection of instruments
83
POSTALE 2008
may lead to unsafe decisions by mine planners, while more than required number/type of instruments, not only lead to confusion but also uneconomical. Therefore, experienced strata control engineers with proper understanding of the filed problem, and sufficient knowledge on interpretation of
the so generated data are primary requirements for a successful instrumentation program. Some of
the common requirements for use of the strata monitoring instruments in underground coal mines
are as fallows:
Comparison Of Effectiveness Of Different Strata Control Practices
Qualitative as well as quantitative nature of strata behaviour was monitored in the development
galleries. Details of the strata monitoring instruments, namely, convergence stations, extensometers
and Tensmeg strain gauged cables along with other type of strata monitoring instrumentation are
presented elsewhere (Jayanthu et al., 1998, CMRI, 1997, NIRM, 1997, 1998, 1999). Convergence
monitoring stations were installed by grouting pegs in the roof and floor. A telescopic scale was used
for regular monitoring of the closure between the pegs. These stations were installed at about 10 m
interval along the galleries and in junctions of the development workings.
Prediction / Warning Of Roof Falls
Critical conditions of strata behaviour invariably occurred in Indian geomining conditions after extraction of two rows of pillars with 50 60 m span, and at an area of extraction of 4,000 - 6,000 m including the ribs in the goaf. Therefore, strata pressure and its manifestation in terms of convergence
need intensive monitoring at these conditions. Attempts made for warning of such condition include
measurement of convergence of galleries around the extraction line on daily basis, but indices formulated in terms of rate of convergence per day appeared to be useful for 60% of the cases.
Continuous monitoring of strata behaviour in terms of convergence of openings in advance on either
side of the extraction line, and stress levels over pillars, stooks in advance of the extraction and ribs
in the goaf was required through remote monitoring instruments for understanding the strata mechanics at critical conditions of roof falls. Continuous monitoring of support pressures was attempted to
investigate the rock mass response to mechanised pillar extraction (Follington IL and Huchinson, 1993).
Convergence of advance workings in depillaring panels has been widely believed to be a reliable indicator for warning of goaf falls. However, misconception on the limitations of the warning limits, interpretation of the convergence data caused confusion in taking the decisions on safety of the workings and the
face workers in many situations of depillaring. Thus, the design and successful implementation of the
warning system as part of the mine production cycle pose a stern challenge to mine managements. It is
a challenge that will require adoption of a multi-desciplinary approach. Many accidents in depillaring
panels in recent times are self revealing and emphasizes the need of proper education to the concerned
on the limitations and applicability of the existing guidelines and further studies required for the prupose.
This paper presents the results of evaluation of some of the existing guideines for warning of goaf falls
with reference to the convergence data in four experimental depillaring panels. Field experimental studies sponsored by the Ministry of Coal and Mines, Governement of India, were conducted on strata behaviour with special reference to convergence and stress variation during an experimental trial of extraction of pillars with cable bolts as major support system in 6.5 -8.0 m thick coal seam. Analysis of the
convergence data with reference to the existing guidelines indicated poor probability for warning of goaf
falls. Whereas, convergence velocity and acceleration based on continuous monitoring data showed
distinct anomalies before the major roof falls and potential for better understanding of strata mechanics
during pillar extraction. Therefore, emphasis was made for creating an appropriate task force including
statutory, field, academic and research agencies to reevaluate and formulate appropriate guidelines on
warning of goaf falls in the interest of improved safety in depillaring by caving in coal mines.
Many a times, the rate of convergence in advance galleries/workings exceeding 2 mm/day has been
adopted for prediction (probable warning) of goaf falls in depillaring panels in Indian coal mines (Anon,
2001). The term, prediction may not suite well to the situations with uncertainty of input data such as;
geo-mechanical properties, variation of different parameters from site to site etc (Peng et al, 1998).
84
POSTALE 2008
Therefore, use of only the term probable warning of goaf falls is emphasized in this paper. Prediction
(probable warning) of goaf falls based on convergence data was discussed by many investigators
(CMRI, 1987; Maity et al, 1994; NIRM 1997). However, its applicability in varying geomining conditions
was not widely evaluated. As a result, applicability of such guidelines to the situations of some of the
accidents, resulted in conclusion of the strata mechanics analysis as a gods act, in view of the art of
mining still taking over the available Science of mining. In all, strata movement has been accounted for
about 30% of the total underground accidents due to fall of roof (Jayanthu et al, 1998). Nearly 50% of
the accidents are in depillaring areas, and about 15% are due to abutment pressure. On the whole, 1/6th
of the accidents are attributable to lack of prior knowledge of unsafe conditions and unavoidable. This
indicates the need of detailed technical examination of methods of extraction, formulation of reliable
guidelines for warning of roof falls, and strategies to be adopted for improved safety, productivity and
conservation.
Generation Of Data Base/Formulation Of Guidelines/ Evaluation Of Applicability Of Existing
Guidelines
Probable issues inhibiting formulation of reliable guidelines may be due to widely varying site conditions
from one panel to another, limitations of the existing instrumentation, practical problems of
commissioning and maintaining the instruments, collection of the monitoring data, lack of proper
experience/exposure of the investigators/front line supervisors to understand and infer the data, which
may misguide the miners and probably create confusion on taking proper decisions based on such
guidelines. Consequently, a permanent loss of the property or life is imminent in view of improper
understanding of the limitations of the instruments, reliability of the data and the probably misleading
inferences. Keeping these issues in view, an attempt is made to study the applicability of the existing
guidelines for warning of roof falls based on convergence data with respect to the experimental studies
in a bord and pillar panel at New Chirimiri Ponri Hill (NCPH) mine, Chirimiri area of South Eastern
Coalfields Limited (SECL) (Jayanthu, 1999). Based on the available convergence data of four
experimental panels, attempt was made in the beginning to derive warning limits based on application of
the existing guidelines for warning of major roof falls. About 250 records of convergence were
available for different monitoring stations before local/major falls in the four depillaring panels. The
distance between the monitoring station and the goaf edge was in the range of 5 to 50 m, and about
30 records were also available for the convergence inside the goaf.
In majority of the cases by many investigators (CMRI, 1987; NIRM, 1997; Maity, 1994), the data was
collected daily by manual measurement of roof to floor convergence for prediction (probable warning) of
roof falls in goaf during extraction of coal in Indian geomining conditions. Thus, many empirical relations
suggested for prediction of falls are thus based on daily convergence data. Exact information about
sharp changes in convergence a few hours before and after the fall was not available from the manual
systems.
For a practical miner, even if a probability of warning of 90% is achieved by any typical sophisticated
system, the remaining 10% cases (which may involve a disaster) may lead to confusion if the existing
warning limits are sternly followed. In many investigations, the first author while acknowledging the
limitations and applicability of the existing guidelines and the available technology states The first line
supervisor - a Mining Sirdar (In case of a depillaring panel of a coal mine) is the right person to take
immediate decision at the working face. In view of no infallible limits for warning of goaf falls based on
convergence data are available in the international mining scenario, it is not possible to forewarn that a
fall can come at a definite time i.e., at 1 pm or so. However, as qualitative observations of stressing
and distressing symptoms, excessive sound (some experienced front line supervisors are skilled to
identify the difference between the sound of failing rock or coal), more sweating in the face etc., are
imminent before the major roof falls. These measurements of convergence etc., may be considered as a
tool to quantify the qualitative observations to aid in better understanding of the strata mechanics rather
than warning the falls with 100% probability.
85
POSTALE 2008
Moreover, since the site conditions change from panel to panel, pillar to pillar, gallery to gallery; the
uncertainty of the input data should be understood by the investigators and considered properly in any
modeling or analysis before suggesting a warning limit. To make the effort of measuring convergence
more functional for the miners, when a probability is shown for abnormal bending of roof, the supervisor
may take a decision to not to deploy persons near the goaf edges or strategic places effected by air
blast etc.,. However, when the other symptoms support these observations of accelerated roof
movement, it may be considered as a useful warning to stop the face and wait for the major roof fall for
safety of the face employees. Unless the exhaustive data on different geomining conditions are collated
and statistically analyzed, the existing guideline on warning of roof falls may land the field engineers in
confusion. Furthermore, reliability of the instruments needs to be ensured before commissioning in the
sites to avoid collection of improper data leading to misguiding results/interpretation. Therefore, an
appropriate task force including statutory, field, academic and research agencies may be created to
reevaluate the guideline on warning of roof falls in the interest of improved safety in depillaring by caving
in coal mines.
Analysis of the convergence data with reference to the existing guidelines indicated poor probability for
warning of roof falls. Potential use of convergence velocity and acceleration on the basis of continuous
monitoring data is demonstrated for warning of roof falls and better understanding of strata mechanics.
An understanding of the roof behaviour/strata mechanics of the surrounding rock mass and its
interaction effects on geometry of excavation, support system etc., is usually a critically important first
consideration. Fortunately, modern numerical methods provide a basis for those concerned to come to
grip with these complex interactions and to arrive at a rational guideline. The challenge ot mining
community is thus, not only one of assembling and coordinating the activities of
planning/designing/procuring the appropriate instruments/systems, but also one of introducing an
appropriate management and technical support structure to ensure its successful
operation/maintenance ensuring the reliability of the data collected and suitable interpretation of the
same with better understanding of the practical mining problems. Experience over many years has
amply demonstrated that the challenge of adopting and implementing a total system cannot be taken
lightly, particularly in regard to extensive roof fall accidents/disasters in coal mines, in the recent times
Against this background, continuous convergence monitoring in depillaring panels with appropriate
interpretation will undoubtedly provide meaningful assistance to all who are serious about the safety in
depillaring in coal mines.
INSTRUMENTATION VIS--VIS STRATA CONTROL CELL
Ever since the start of mining, the mining engineers have been facing typical challenges of fighting
with nature unlike other branches of engineering, where few branches deal with the man made materials. Thus continuous development of new strategies are aimed at high productivity, safety, conservation through advances in extraction technology, automation, logistics, preventive maintenance,
planning and organization. The future of the mining industry demands more emphasis on caveability
studies, support design, modification to the existing guidelines through observational approaches, for
cost effective and safe mining operations.
Technically, observational approaches for strata control have been widely thought over but limited
attempts were made due to need of additional instruments for the purpose of monitoring of the roof
behaviour. Various instruments visually showing bed separation, etc, are used in UK and USA, to
evaluate the effectiveness of the support/stability of roof. Modifications in the support systems were
made based on the data from these instruments (Jayanthu et al, 2008).
How a mining engineer views management will be determined by its perception of engineering and
technology itself. There is also a need to change a social, cultural perspective, utilization of systems
approach to design instructional systems for supervisory staff directly involved in the mining operations at the face in implementation of strata control management. More attempts are required to tag
management with industrial engineering and control system group without confining with humanities
and social sciences education. However, achievement through human engineering is tremendous.
86
POSTALE 2008
No doubt the ability to perceive opportunities with the available support material/strata control techniques at the concerned mine sites and utilize it for safe working atmosphere in underground will be
a hall mark of a successful strata control engineer, which is possible only through observational approaches deploying state of the art instrumentation.
Additional instrumentation practices are required for understanding goaf behaviour, without causing
disturbance for moving machinery, especially at the junctions, minimizing disturbance to the safety of
the persons. For the purpose, possibility of wide application of remote monitoring, continuous monitoring, Wireless communication of data/Tele-monitoring internet, Integrated Seismic System (ISS),
Online analysis/Real-time monitoring, Use of fiber optics for data transmission are some of the future
possibilities of wide application of instrumentation with state of the art instrumentation/mining technology following Integrated approaches by the field/statutory/academic/research personnel.
STRATA MANAGEMENT ORGANISATION A CASE STUDY
The Safety and Productivity of mining operations depend up on the better strata control management, good ventilation and right method of working. The operation of large underground areas, attracts design of customized strata control techniques and management before commencement of
the workings and constant strata monitoring by instrumentation by the technical experts.
Keeping in view of the growing energy demand, underground mines are progressively using mechanized technologies. This includes advanced technologies like Long wall mining, Continuous miner
technology, blasting gallery method, wide stall method & SDL & LHD intermediate technologies.
Hand Section mining with basket loading is being phased out eliminating human drudgery envisaging Safety and Productivity. Singareni Collieries Company Limited (SCCL) is 120 years old coal mining company established in 1887. SCCL is a joint share holding company of 51% by Government of
Andhra Pradesh and 49% by GoI. Company is presently operating 36 underground and 14 opencast
mines in Godavari Valley Coalfield. It produced 40.60 MT coal with a turnover of Rs.5,157 Crores in
2007-08.
By the introduction of intermediate/advanced technologies in SCCL from 2003 onwards, the average
fatalities occurred due to strata movement (roof falls) per year has been reduced from 15 to 5 per
year. Production from underground mines was 12.64 MT during 2007-08 which constitutes 31% of
the total production i.e. 40.60 MT. The current year target is 13.40 M.T.Strata monitoring studies are
being conducting by the above Scientific/Academic Institutions using Load cells, Convergence indicators, Tell-tale extensometers, Rotary tell-tale extensometers, Sonic-type multi-point extensometers, Remote extensometers, Stress cells, Strain-gauge bolts in all advanced technologies for the
prediction of impending roof problems to take advance safety measures.
The strata control cells are established at three regions, coordinates with local mine management
and the respective Scientific/Academic Institutions with regards to strata management studies.
SCCL Strata control cell

G M (Project Planning)
Dy, GM (R&D), Corp.
KGM Region
Dy. Manager
RGM Region
Dy. Manager
87
BPA Region
Dy. Manager
POSTALE 2008
The development and transfer of technology between Scientific/Academic Institutions to industry has
led to introduction of total roof bolting in all underground mines of SCCL eliminating vertical & horizontal supports to the bare minimum. Company consumes about 25 Lakh roof bolts per annum.
SCCL also replacing the vertical goaf edge supports by introducing breaker line roof bolting. The
above could be achieved because of the continuous interaction and association with Scientific and
Academic Institutions.
For effective functioning of strata control cell, as envisaged in the 10th Conf of safety in mines, it is
essential to have appropriate strata management organization (Narsingrao, 2008) so that required
number of instruments would be made available with proper exposure to the officials on selection,
planning, installation, monitoring and interpretation of the strata behaviour observations. It is also
required to keep sufficient number of instruments for monitoring a panel in any area including a few
convergence indicators, load cells, borehole extensometers etc under the preview of the strata control cell. The number of instruments to be made available at a particular point of time may be decided
based on the specific requirements in concerned areas, corporate level etc. As a general rule, instruments required for a panel may be kept as stock in the strata control cell, so that undue delay in
procurement may be avoided while conducting strata behaviour monitoring in any panel in that particular area. Similarly, a few instruments of importance such as convergence indicators, load cells,
bore hole extensometers may be kept in the corporate level for supply to the areas and mines.
CONCLUSION
Unscientific monitoring of coal mining strata has resulted in number of fatal and serious bodily injuries to miners and loss of production from time to time. This issue can be addressed by proper monitoring of strata and taking adequate control measures in time. Over the years, geotechnical instrumentation and strata control technologies have undergone considerable change and it is pertinent
that the field engineers must be trained in the state of the art instrumentation for effective implementation of the strata control measures in coal mines. Instrumentation requirements need to be studied
with proper knowledge of limitations of the mining as well as instrumentation technology. In olden
days, due to lack of proper instruments, qualitative observations with limited possibility of quantification lead to some empirical relations/thumb rules. There is a need to be more innovative in application of the existing instrumentation with proper planning by experienced strata control engineers
which may lead to possibility of modification in existing practices fro better safety and economy of
mining venture. NIT-Rourkela is in the quest of developing some reliable guidelines for some of the
above-mentioned issues through application of suitable rock engineering techniques.
During the 10th National Conference of Safety in Mines held at New Delhi during 26-27th Nov, 2007 it
was recommended that each coal mining company, shall establish a strata control cell at corporate
and area levels within a period of one year. Keeping the above requirement in view, a short-term
course was held at NIT-Rourkela on Trends in Strata Control Techniques and Instrumentation for
Enhancing Safety in Coal Mines during July 28 - 31, 2008. Thereafter, a Workshop was conducted
at WCL during 7th-8th Nov08 on, and a Training program at SECL during 9th-10th Nov08. Over 140
officials from the cola mining industry were trained in the above course/ workshops/training programs
at NIT-Rourkela, WCL-Nagpur, and SECL Bilaspur. Organisation of Strata Control cell presented in
the case study may be followed in other coal industries and effort should be made to modify the coal
mine regulation # 124 (Appendix 1) in consideration of recent trends in strata control techniques and
advanced instrumentation for strata behavior monitoring through effective functioning of strata control cell to be established in all the coal fields.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
S Jayanthu and Sk. Md. Equeenuddin, 2008 Geological Factors Contributing to Strata Control Problems in Mines,
Proceedings of short-term course on Trends in Strata Control Techniques and Instrumentation for Enhancing
Safety in Coal Mines during July 28 - 31, 2008, NIT-Rourkela, pp-120-135
S Jayanthu, T N Singh and V Laxminarayana, 2008, Problems of Underground Coal Mining vis--vis Geotechnical
Instrumentation for Extraction of Coal Proceedings of short-term course on Trends in Strata Control Techniques
and Instrumentation for Enhancing Safety in Coal Mines during July 28 - 31, 2008, NIT-Rourkela, pp-136144
88
POSTALE 2008
S Jayanthu and V Venkateswarlu, 2008, Strata Behahiour in Development and Depillaring workings supported with
Roof Bolt and Cable Bolts, Proceedings of short-term course on Trends in Strata Control Techniques and Instrumentation for Enhancing Safety in Coal Mines during July 28 - 31, 2008, NIT-Rourkela, pp-145-153
S Jayanthu, S J Sibal, 2008, Evaluation of Impact of Mechanisation and Depillaring Under High Horizontal
Stress Fields vis-a-vis Strata Control in Underground Mines, Proceedings of short-term course on
Trends in Strata Control Techniques and Instrumentation for Enhancing Safety in Coal Mines during
July 28 - 31, 2008, NIT-Rourkela, pp-154-176
S Jayanthu, M K Misra and G M N Rao, 2008, Methodology for Estimation of Kaiser Stress and Determination of
Rock Properties, Proceedings of short-term course on Trends in Strata Control Techniques and Instrumentation
for Enhancing Safety in Coal Mines during July 28 - 31, 2008, NIT-Rourkela, pp-177-188
S Jayanthu , H K Naik, D P Singh and R N Gupta,2008, Design Of Support System For Depillaring And Longwall Workings, Proceedings of short-term course on Trends in Strata Control Techniques and Instrumentation for Enhancing Safety in Coal
Mines during July 28 - 31, 2008, NIT-Rourkela, pp-189-203
S. Narsing Rao, 2008, Strata Management Organisation in Singareni Collieries Company Limited, Andhra Pradesh, Proceedings
of short-term course on Trends in Strata Control Techniques and Instrumentation for Enhancing Safety in Coal Mines during
July 28 - 31, 2008, NIT-Rourkela, pp-204-205.
S Jayanthu and T N Singh, 2008, Application of Numerical Model for Strata control studies in coal mines, Proceedings of
Training Program ONSTRATA CONTROL TECHNIQUES AND INSTRUMENTATION IN COAL MINES
ATManagement Development Institute, Bilaspur, SOUTH EASTERN COALFIILDS LIMITED, 9th 10th November 2008
Jayanthu S, V Laxminarayana and Pradhan G K, 2008, Guidelines for support plan and Strata Monitoring for Underground Workings in Coal Mines, Proceedings of workshop on ONSTRATA CONTROL TECHNIQUES AND
INSTRUMENTATION IN COAL MINES ATManagement Development Institute, Nagpur, Western
COALFIILDS LIMITED, 7th 8th November 2008
CMRI 1997, Mechanised depillaring of thick seam standing on pillars at NCPH
CMRI, 1992,Wide stall mining of Bansgarha seam at Central Sounda colliery, CCL
CMRI, 1993,Design of face and gate road support for extraction of XIII seam at North Amlabad colliery, BCCL
CMRI, 1993,Development of a method for mining of Major seam of Rajur colliery, WCL
CMRI, 1994,Experimentation of wide stall mining to enhance recovery from Burhar seam at Amlai colliery, Suhagpur area, SECL
DGMS, 1996, Annual reports and circulars from Girectorate General of Mines safety, India, 1975 to 1996.
Follington IL and Huchinson IN, 1993, Application of continuous monitoring to investigate the rock mass response to
mechanised pillar extraction, Geotechnical instrumentation and Monitoring in open pit and Underground mining,
Szwedzicicki (ed.), Balkema, Rotterdam, pp 169-174
Singh. T.N. and Jayanthu. S, 1992, Behaviour of shield supports during integral caving of thick seams - A Case
Study , Int. Symp. on Thick Seam Mining: Problems and Issues, CMRS, Dhanbad, 19- 21 Nov, pp 573-582.
Jayanthu S, Venkateswarlu V and Raju N M, 1998, Effectiveness of a cable bolting in development galleries of a
thick coal seam, Proc. National Seminar on Outlook for Fossil Fuels and Non-metallic Mining and Mineral based
Industries ( FOSMIN-98), 20-21 Aug98, Chennai, pp 163-170.
Jayanthu S, Singh T N, and Singh DP, 1998, Study of strata behaviour during extraction of pillars in a thick coal
seam, Presented in the 17th International Conference on Ground Control in Mining, West Virginia University, 46th Aug98, pp 202-211.
Jayanthu S, Venkateswarlu V, Patnaik S, Reddy C D and Raju N M, 1998, Strata control by cable bolting in development galleries of a thick coal seam containing clay bands, Proc. National seminar on Indian Mining IndustryProblems and Prospects, Chandrapur, 27-18 Feb98, Paper #3, 16p.
Jayanthu S, 1999, Application of rock mechanics for improvement of productivity in thick coal seams- an appraisal,
Proceedings of Platinum Jubilee Symposium on Improvement of Productivity in Mining Industry, 28-29 Jan99,
BHU, Varanasi. pp 341-360.
Jayanthu S, Venkateswarlu V, and Gupta, R, N., 2000, Behaviour of rock mass reinforced with roof bolts and cable
bolts, Proc. National seminar on Rock Reinforcement, 29-30 Jan2000, BHU, Varanasi, pp 341-359.
Jayanthu S, Atul. G, and Gupta, R, N., 2000, Dealing with pillaring in adverse roof conditions under high horizontal
stress fields, Mining Engineers Jl, Vol 2, No v, Nov2k, pp 10-18.
Jayanthu S, and Gupta, R, N., 2001, Characterization of strata behaviour around coal mine roadways supported by
roof bolts and cable bolts, presented in the International Symposium on rock bolting, 6-7June2001- Germany.
S Jayanthu, Atul Gandhe, V Venkateswarlu, and R, N. Gupta, 2001, Strata behaviour in a Blasting Gallery panel
during extraction of bottom section pillars at greater depths, published in The Indian Mining & Engineering
Journal, (September-2001), pp 19 - 23.
89
POSTALE 2008
S Jayanthu, Atul Gandhe, and Gupta, R, N., 2001, Strata behaviour during undermining in multiple coal seams,
Journal of Mines Metals and Fuels, Vol XLIX No. 12, (December 2001), pp 449-453.
. S Jayanthu, A. Gandhe & RN Gupta, 2002. Extraction of pillars in multiple coal seams Problems and issues. Mining Engineers J, vol. 4, no. 2 [September, 2002] p. 7 9.
S Jayanthu, , 2002. Variation of vertical stress during extraction of pillars in a thick coal seam, Mining Engineers J,
vol. 4, no. 5 [December, 2002] p. 8 16.
Jayanthu S, and Singh DP, 2004, Numerical model studies for understanding stress distribution during extraction of
pillars in a thick coal seam, Proc. Of the International Conference on Technology and Management for Sustainable Exploitation of Minerals And Natural Resources, 5-7 Feb, 2004, Kharagpur , India.
S.Jayanthu, T.N.Singh, and D.P.Singh, 2004, Applicability of existing guidelines for warning of roof falls in depillaring panels vis--vis convergence observations in the filed experimental studies, Mining Enginers Journal, Vol
5, No 8, pp 9-17.
Larry Howe, 1998, A decade of mobile roof support application in the United States, 17th International Conference on
Ground Control in Mining, West Virginia University, 4-6th Aug. 98, pp 187-201.
Maity SN, Prasad S and Prasad M, An empirical approach towards indication of major roof falls in bord and pillar
depillaring panels through extensive strata control investigations, Jl Mines Metals and Fuels, Aug-Sep94, 1994, pp
185-190
Mark, C and Mucho, TP, 1994. Longwall mine design for control of horizontal stress. Proc US Bureau of Mines
Technology Transfer, New Technology for Longwall
NIRM, 2000b. Interim Report on Application of Fast Roof Bolting Technology in Western Coalfields Limited, and
Design of Support System for Development Galleries at Tandsi Project, Kanhan Area, WCL. 20 pp. +figures
NIRM, 1997a, Design and experimentation of cable bolting for adverse ground conditions in thick coal seams containing
clay bands, S & T Report, 64p
NIRM, 1997b, Development and application of continuous strata monitoring system (CSMS) for evaluating roof stability
in coal mines, , S & T Report, 76p
Peng SS, Merwe V, and Mark C, 1998, Perosnal discussions with Dr S Jayanthu on warning/prediction of roof falls at the
NIOSH, Pittsburgh, and west Virginia University, USA during July-August, 1998.
Trevor GC and Jose LC, Towards practical application of ground reaction curves, Innovative mining for 21st century,
Balkema, 1993, pp: 151-171.
nal E, Design Guidelines and Roof Control Standards for Coal Mine Roofs. Ph.D. Thesis, Pennsylvania State
University, University Park, USA, 1983, 355p.
90
POSTALE 2008
APEENDIX I
The Coal Mines Regulations #124. Support Plan
(1) The owner, agent or manager of every mine shall formulate a support plan to secure the roof and sides of
belowground workplaces, which shall be subject to revision with change in condition, for all workings
belowground.
(2) The owner, agent or manager of every mine having workings below ground shall, before commencing
any operation frame, with due regard to the engineering classification of strata, local geological conditions, system of work, mechanization, and past experience, and enforce the support plan specifying in relation to each working place the type and specifications of supports and the intervals between:
(i) supports on roadways including places where machinery is used for cutting, conveying or loading;
(ii) each row of props, roof bolts or other supports;
(iii) adjacent props, roof bolts or other supports in the same row;
(iv) last row of supports and the face;
(v) powered supports;
(vi) fore-poles or sprags;
(vii) shields; and
(viii)the pack and the face.
Provided that, in respect of a mine where development operations are already in progress, the support plan
shall be framed and enforced within 30 days of the date of coming into force of this regulation.
(3) The manager shall, at least 30 days before the commencement of any operation subject to the provision to
sub-regulation (2) submit a copy of the Support Plan to the Regional Inspector who may at any time, by
an order in writing, require such modification in the Plan as he may specify therein.
(4) The Manager shall hand over copies of the Support Plan in English as well as in a local language understood by majority of the persons employed in the mine together with illustrative sketches, to all supervisory officials concerned including the Assistant Manager and Under Manager and shall also post such
copies at all conspicuous places in the mine.
(5) The Manager and such supervising officials shall be responsible for securing effective compliance with
the provisions of the Support Plan, and no mine or part of a mine shall be worked in contravention
thereof.
(6) The support plan shall include inter-alia system of, monitoring of the support performance, measurement
of strata behaviour, re-setting of supports, provision of temporary support, replacement of old supports,
withdrawal of supports and clearing of falls of ground. The support plan shall also include the implementation strategy of the plan, training and inspection and supervision policies.
(7) The owner, agent or manager shall formulate & implement a code of standing orders specifying:
(a) The system and the organisation for procurement and supply of supports of suitable material, adequate
strength and in sufficient quantity where these are required to be readily available for use;
(b) The method of handling including dismantling and assembling where necessary and transportation of
the supports from the surface to the face and from the face line to their new site;
(c) The system and the organisation for maintenance and checking of supports, dressing the roof and side
erecting, examining and re-tightening of supports and re-erecting dislodged supports, including the
use of appropriate tools;
(d) The panel of competent persons for engagement as substitutes in the event of a regular Supports-man
or dresser absenting from duty; and
(e) The manner of making all concerned persons such as loaders, dressers, supportsmen, shortfirers,
sirdars, overmen and assistant managers including persons empanelled for engagement as substitute
supportsman or dresser fully conversant with the support plan and the Codes of Standing Orders under
this sub-regulation and under regulation 127 and the nature of work to be performed by each in that
behalf.
91
POSTALE 2008
THROTTLES TO SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT OF

SMALL-SCALE MINING IN INDIA
SUBIR KUMAR MUKHOPADHYAY
Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur
INTRODUCTION
Nations economy largely depends on her mineral wealth besides agriculture. In fact, the industrial
growth, to a large extent, depends on and reflects the development of mineral resources. India like
many other countries in the world is fortunately endowed with resources of many important minerals,
distributed in numerous large and small deposits. Exploitation of most of the minerals in small deposits by small-scale mining is drawing increasing attention particularly when the large deposits are getting exhausted sooner than most of us realize. Small mineral deposits are the targets of small-scale
mining involving low-technology, limited capital investment with ultimate objective of utilization of
minerals either in small-scale or in small quantities in large-scale mineral based industries. Thus,
due to its economic importance small scale mining occupies a special niche in mining world.
HISTORICAL BACKGROUND
Small-scale mining (SSM) in historical sense evolved from scratching for red ochre in Bomvu Ridge
in Swaziland around several millennium B.C. SSM is mentioned in De Re Metallica by Georgius Agricola (1494-1555), the best known work on mining and metallurgical practices of sixteenth-century.
In India, objects made of copper have been found at Kalibagan in Rajasthan which are dated between 2900 and 2700 B.C. More organized information on mining in India around 300 B.C. is available in Kautilyas Arthashastra. Copper ore mining was prevalent at Khetri in Rajasthan in medieval
period during the time of Akbar and is mentioned in Ain E Akbari (1598) written by Abul Fazzal.
Mining practices till hundred years ago can be classified as small-scale mining as compared to todays measure. The scale of operation used to be small in absence of high degree of mechanization.
Whatever small the operations might had been the mineral industries integrated with mining activities
were the key to the development and the foundation upon which our modern society is built.
SSM AROUND THE WORLD
The prevalent and developing socio-economic and techno-economic condition all over the world are
pushing up the economy-of-scale every day. The trends to go in for larger and larger mines for obvious reasons could be seen in some developed countries. But nevertheless small-scale mines are
widely prevalent throughout the world, more than usually realized. This is true for most of the developing countries including India. According to one UN estimate SSM accounts for about 10% of total
world mining production. As this figure includes figures from the highly industrial countries, where the
role of SSM sector is marginal, the contribution of small-scale mining to the economy of developing
countries is certainly much higher and more significant. To name a few countries involved with significant small-scale mining activities are Bolivia, Brazil, Burma, Chile, China, India, Indonesia, Malaysia, Mexico, Mozambique, Peru, Sierra Leone, Thailand, Turkey, Zaire, Zimbabwe, etc.
Excluding atomic and minor minerals and rocks India produces 4 fuel minerals, 11 metallic minerals,
50 non-metallic/industrial minerals out of which 38 minerals are mined exclusively in small-scale sector for utilization in various industrial and agriculture sectors. In addition, commercial granite in India
has become a major export item of the country. India has approximately 4200 mines. Since, all of
them do not file the returns, so Directorate General of Mines Safety (DGMS) reports about 2300
mines who send returns to the directorate. The employment in this sector in India alone would be
well over 500,000. In India, due to lack of intensive research effort and data acquisition problem the
figures vary widely in reports published by the authorized agencies.
POSTALE 2008
DEFIITION AND CHARACTRISTICS

Because of highly complicated reasons universally accepted definition of SSM has not yet been
evolved. The yardsticks of smallness are different in different countries. What in the eyes of a country is a small mine, may seem to be quite large in other country. Again what is a small mine for iron
ore or limestone, may be a very large mine for gem stone. However, one may distinguish between
small and large mines on the basis of output per day, number of persons employed, degrees of
mechanization, fixed assets, revenue earned from sales and annual profit, besides some other factors like capital investment, size of deposit, depth of workings, etc.
Since, in general SSM is difficult to define precisely, the typical mining operation in small scale produces limited amount of minerals from limited ore resources that are not amenable to mass mining.
Output is won without much use of mechanical energy and business skills but paradoxically enriches
the nation by playing the role of scavenger from mineral conservation point of view which otherwise
would have been left in place unexploited.
SOCIO-ECONOMIC BENEFITS
SSM has an important role to play for the socio-economic development particularly in underdeveloped backward areas by way of generating employment. Tolls, spare parts, implements required in
certain cases can be produced in local workshops. An extensive SSM as cluster mining may help to
improve the infrastructure of the underdeveloped areas by say, road construction and rural
electrification.
In SSM leases are given to the small mine owners where even the miners may share the output and
sales may involve public agencies and private buyers. Though SSM has certain drawbacks like low
wages, high accident rates, little training, and in some cases seasonal nature of employment, the
SSM operations are labor intensive activities, generating employment opportunity in remote areas far
from cities and townships. Out of about 4200 mines operated in India 85% can be classified working
under SSM sector. This sector accounts for about 35% of total non-fuel mineral production. In India
minerals contribute to about 22% of the exports. Some of this earning must be percolating to the
workforces diversifying rural employment opportunities and changing in the socio-economic life-style.
Benefits (Indian Perspective)
In one sense SSM usually denote mining in the under-developed rural region by the local population,
all by themselves with their own resource and expertise. SSM in disorganized and un-sustained form
arrest, misuse and encourage illegal exploitation of small deposits but it unlocks dormant deposits
and has potentiality to rural growth in under-developed remote areas.
Direct benefits of SSM
Employment potential, employment of women, utilization of mineral, no involvement of hi-tech, minimum financial involvement, simple marketing.
Indirect benefits of SSM
No exploration formalities and related cost, opportunity for discovering valuable minerals, waste land
development, sentimental value, inspiring value, infrastructure development in case of cluster mining, development of rural based mineral industries.
THE INDIAN SCENARIO IN SSM
The most important aspect of artisanal/small-scale mining in India is the absence of any nationally
accepted criteria for identifying such mines. However, in the Rule 42 of the Mineral Conservation and
Development Rules (MCDR), 1988 mines have been classified as category-A and category B
based on average employment and type of machinery deployed and in addition, the Indian Bureau of
93
POSTALE 2008
Mines (IBM) has categorized certain mines employing less than 25 workers, yet with another nomenclature, as tiny mines. But the above classification is solely for the purpose of some relaxation
of certain rules and regulations and has no scientific or economic basis for such categorization.
However, the Mining, Geological and Metallurgical Institute of India (MGMI) has framed a guideline
based on output and the type of mineral being mined. As a result, no classified statistical data are
available, collected , maintained and published for proper appreciation of the role of SSM in countrys economy, in spite of the fact that such mines constitute to about 93% of the total numbers of
mines working all over India which have roughly been estimated to be around 8700. All these mines
are not worked legally. Quite a few of the total number of mines belonging to small-scale category
are worked as cluster and some of them are artisanal. Out of around 4200 mines filling the returns,
85% can be classified in the segment of SSM sector. This accounts for 35% of non-fuel mineral production which are situated mostly in underdeveloped areas.
Due to lack of adequate market, geological investigations, transport facilities, opportunity cost and
due to seasonal variations in operations moving with varying and erratic market and mining being a
risk-involved venture, SSM has taken some what a back bench in business scenario in India. Import
of mineral exceeds export leaving a deficit of about 33%, even though India has mineral trade with
around 100 countries.
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
The concept of sustainable development has found very wide acceptance in all industrial exercises
in recent years. In United Nation Conference on Environmental and Development (UNCED) in Rio
de Janeiro (1992), the concept of sustainable development played a central organizing role. In addition to United Nation, many other national and international organizations like Word Bank ecological
research institutes and corporate groups etc. have now embarked on the concept of sustainability.
There has been many agreement, disagreement and uncertainty about the meaning of sustainable
development. However, the most agreed upon and oft-quoted definition is derived from Brundtland
report (WECD, 1987: p.387) - Development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of the future generation to meet their own needs.
Sustainability as Working Concept
The fundamental concern that must come with while discussing sustainable development in any
business are human welfare, environment and future. The ultimate goal must be to maintain both the
productivity of the nature as well as its material gains, i.e. non-renewable resources in their utility.
SUSTAINABLE MINERAL DEVELOPMENT
Sustainable mineral development concepts are in nascent stage. The Department of Environment,
U.K (1994) has charted the aims of sustainable mineral development strategy which is valid for the
development of mineral any country whether by SSM or large-scale mining (LSM). The charters will
be given in the main paper.
SOCIETAL ASSESSMENT VALUE ON THE PART OF SSM OPERATORS
It has been steadily observed that SSM operators usually view their development proposals as selfserving and their attitude is oriented towards profit maximization only. The usual strategy is least
cost planning externalizing the cost onto the Government or quietly dismissing it resulting into legacy of grievances and mistrusts.
Therefore, the above perception and experience are providing a clear vision to the public that the
societal values are absent in SSM in general, in India. Commitment to the principles of sustainable
94
POSTALE 2008
development has an important role to play in building the basis for SSM on the part of the small mine
operators.
STRINGENT REGULATORY AND POLICY FRAME WORK
In spite of the contribution made by SSM in national economy and for social upliftment, this sector of
our country, does not find any appropriate place in our policy statement. We have however, a very
special place for small scale industry (SSI), but no such place is there for SSM and SSM is not considered as an industry for claming certain benefits meant for SSI. In a way it is a neglected sector in
our economy.
Secondly, due to a plethora of rules and regulations administered by various departments of both
central and state governments, SSM fails to flourish to boost national economy to the extent it should
have done. Interpretation of rules in its own way, dampens the zeal of new entrepreneurs in this
field. It has become stagnant cesspool of limited players lacking foresight or vision and hence impending the sustainable growth and induction of foreign funding.
Thirdly, in the latest mineral policy statement 1993, as also in earlier policy statement, SSM has not
been given importance except in one statement in a casual manner.
SUSTAINING SSM AND BUSINESS
As majority of Indian mines are small or medium size their competitiveness plays a vital role in the
mineral trade and sustained business development as a whole. One of the classical example of the
products of Indian SSM had been mica. More than 90% of the world market was in Indian hand.
Granites and marbles are catching up currently.
To sustain SSM business other than balancing the import and export, it is necessary to maintain traditional market for SSM products. Legislative amendments are required to facilitate rapid processing
of mining leases. Various bureaucratic and procedurals hurdles are required to be simplified.
Specific to the inherent peculiarities and pertinent problems of SSM and for effectively regulating
their activity towards sustained growth some measures have been drawn out under Indian context.
The measure will be presented in the main paper.
GOVERNMENT- NGO AND - INDIGENOUS PEOPLE ALLIENCE
Impact assessment of SSM on the characteristics of the local indigenous people raises several issues like cultural impacts on life style , conflicts between tribalists and developers and compensation
to the Project Affected people ( PAPs) giving rise to government-NGO- industry - indigenous people
alliance of the future.
CONCLUSION
Sustainability is an evolutionary process. Global mining industry is at the beginning of it by adopting
only one of its attribute i.e. environmental principles of pollution control. SSM is still far away from its
goal in India. The principle target in sustainability is augmenting the conservationism by which todays conservation of natural resources will produce equal welfare for the next generation. Incidentally, SSM business is still not sustainability oriented because of lack of concentrated effort to make
the business sustainable, and lack of thinking process in this sector for development.
It is however, believed that with the growing awareness of sustainability in the business world, SSM
business too, in India, will successfully adopt its principles for the socio-economic development of
rural areas along with its overall growth and business opportunities.
95
POSTALE 2008
RESETTLEMENT AND REHABILITATION A SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY

DR. A. NANDI
Project Resettlement Officer, Project Implementation Unit,
PWD(Roads), Govt. of W.B. and
Head(R&D), National Institute of Small Mines, Kolkata
INTRODUCTION
Any development project be it at large or small scale brings in its wake a host of benefits that are
envisaged to be accrued to the overall progress of the society at large. The concept of benefit, that is
invariably associated with development, is often subjective to the initiator of the project, who tends to
glorify the means in the interest of end. There is, of course, no doubt that development process is to
continue in an uninterrupted manner if human civilization is to sustain, not to speak of reaching a
height it never seemed to be achievable before. In the process it is the interest and even sustenance
of common people that suffer the brunt of the impact of development project.
All development projects proclaim to focus people at its centre of attention, by way of alleviating
poverty. However, it is more often than not, that peoples misery is often ignored. This is exemplified
in the degree and range of adverse impact the projects bring forth, such as change in use of land,
water, mineral and other natural resources, sometimes in an irrevocable manner. The most significant impact of a project is related to a range of resettlement effects. Displacement as a result of land
acquisition, expropriation and disruption of social network, community structures and systems are all
components of resettlement impact. These effects can negate positive output of the development
projects, if mitigation measures are not taken to counteract adverse impact of resettlement.
RESETTLEMENT IMPACT AND LOSSES
There are several types of losses associated with resettlement impact depending on nature and
range of displacement and disruption. Resettlement can be either involuntary or voluntary, depending on nature of project, its range of displacement and peoples need and urgency of fulfillment. The
losses can be categorized as follows.
a) Loss of productive assets, including land, sources of livelihood
b) Loss of housing, community structures, services & systems
c) Loss of other assets
d) Loss of community resources, habitat, cultural sites etc
The mitigation measures of these losses varies according to policy of the funding agency. In case of
projects financed by external agencies like Asian Development Bank or World Bank, Involuntary Resettlement policy of the respective Bank is followed which does not always conform to the law of the
country so far as involuntary resettlement for non titled persons is concerned. The externally funded
projects have mandatory provisions that resolve resettlement issues of the project affected persons,
community and common infrastructures. Previously resettlement issues beyond land acquisition
were not looked after by the national government. However, situation has changed significantly after
Indian Government has taken up the issue of resettlement and rehabilitation by taking initiative in
formulating act to mitigate adverse resettlement impact.1
Resettlement impact varies in range and severity according to project types and requirement of land
for the project. Small plots of land required for urban services, such as, sewage treatment, water
pipeline, car parking, for schools or health centres will cause limited resettlement impact. On the
other hand, large scale irrigation, open cast mining or solid waste management site require more
1
www.prsindia.org/docs/bills/1197003987/1197003987_Rehab_20and_20settlement.pdf
96
POSTALE 2008
land and result in significant resettlement impact. Transport projects such as, highways may require
limited land for narrow alignment but that may cut across administrative boundaries, divide land holdings and temporary land borrows for construction. Whatever may be range of impact the objectives
and principles of Involuntary Resettlement policy of Asian Development Bank remain the same.
These are stated briefly as follows.
Involuntary resettlement should be avoided wherever possible
If unavoidable, displacement should be minimized by exploring all viable options
People displaced to be compensated and assisted in a manner, so that their economic and
social future should be as favourable as that of pre-project situation
People affected to be informed fully & consulted on resettlement option
Existing social & cultural institutions to be fully supported and the resettlers should be integrated
in to the host community
Absence of formal legal title should not be a bar to compensation. Particular attention should be
paid to the vulnerable group of people, such as, female headed household, indigenous people,
ethnic minorities, below poverty line people.
Involuntary resettlement would preferably be a part of project & cost of resettlement and
compensation should be included in the project costs and benefits.
RESETTLEMENT REQUIREMENT IN THE PROJECT CYCLE
In the externally aided projects resettlement requirement is part of a development strategy and forms
an integral part of the project design. Following steps are undertaken to complete Asian Development Banks requirement.
Initial Social Assessment (ISA)- during Fact finding mission when scope and resources for
resettlement planning is determined
Project Preparatory Technical Assistance (PPTA)- feasibility study includes preparation of
Resettlement Plan
Management Review Meeting (MRM) reviews the summary of Resettlement Plan in the Report
and Recommendation of the President (RRP)
Appraisal Mission finalizes Resettlement Plan
Loan negotiations include assurances on resettlement plan implementation
Implementation of resettlement Plan is supervised
The Resettlement Plan incorporates monitoring and evaluation
RESETTLEMENT ISSUES: SOME BASIC DEFINITIONS
In order to comply with requirement of involuntary resettlement policy, certain issues need to be understood and dealt with properly. The most frequently asked question that often crop up is who is an
Affected Person. So far as Bank policy is concerned any person, family or community that stand to
lose physical or non-physical assets, including houses, productive lands, forests, pastures, fishing
areas as resource bases, important cultural sites, commercial properties, tenancy, income-earning
opportunities, social & cultural networks are all encompassed covered within Affected Person.
Next question raised is about compensation to be paid. Most of the land acquisition laws aptly deal
with compensation for titled land or other assets. However, that may not be sufficient to meet the
objective of restoration of social and economic base of the affected persons. Therefore, Banks policy emphasizes on: a) payment of compensation for lost assets at replacement cost, b) transfer and
relocation assistance, c) assistance to rehabilitate & restore livelihood.
It is often noticed that, those involved in implementing Resettlement Plan as per Banks policy, resent payment of compensation or assistance to the people without title, who according to official nomenclature are nothing but encroacher. Bank makes a definite and significant deviation from conventional norms of compensation by defining eligibility of assistance to a non-titled person, such as,
share croppers or tenant farmers, people using customary land, seasonal migrants and squatters. In
granting assistance to these people, the loss of their access to unregulated resources is recognized.
97
POSTALE 2008
The method of compensation to these people may include mitigation measures to restore income
and living standards substituting compensation payment. Further, it has been mentioned in unequivocal terms that land lords who gain from illegal rents from public safety zones are not to be
compensated. This clearly makes distinction between a person occupying public utility land/area in
pursuit of livelihood and a land lord gaining advantage by utilizing it. It may be noted that one of the
guiding principle of the Banks Policy on Involuntary Resettlement is to protect and assist the vulnerable people in reinstating to their pre-project socio-economic situation.
In case of communities who donate land voluntarily in exchange of project benefits, such as, health
clinic, school, water supply system ambit of resettlement does not imply. However, social safeguard
policy will still be followed. This includes such mechanism as follows: i) owners and users of land /
property verify publicly that they agree to donate land for project purpose, ii) no squatters/vulnerable
persons will be affected, iii) grievance redress mechanism should be in place.
So far as vulnerable group is concerned special measures are to be taken to improve their social
and economic condition. It is imperative that their need and priority get proper attention and they get
a chance to improve their socio-economic status.
STEPS OF RESETTLEMENT PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION
In keeping with Banks policy and objectives some good practices are suggested to translate objective of involuntary resettlement into a reality. These are as follows.
To take all measures to minimize or eliminate involuntary resettlement where feasible exploring
viability of alternate options
Define likely impact of resettlement during PPTA feasibility study
Carry out census and socio-economic survey during project preparation stage to identify all
losses and impact pf resettlement to avoid influx of outsiders or speculators beyond census cutoff-date
Conduct stakeholders consultation including all affected persons, particularly the vulnerable
group
Compensate all affected persons irrespective of title for all losses at replacement cost
In case of relocation, consult with the affected persons and host community to formulate
relocation options
Establish appropriate income restoration measures where loss of income and livelihood is
expected.
Prepare a Resettlement Plan including time-bound implementation process
Involve specialists in resettlement and social development and the affected people in planning,
implementation and monitoring of Resettlement Plan.
AN OVERVIEW OF IMPLEMENTATION OF RESETTLEMENT PLANS
That the resettlement impact is something we will ignore only at a risk of social tension and mayhem
is a fact too well known to those involved in social development issues. At a time when information
about almost anything is at fingertips, none can afford to be ignorant about resettlement policy, objectives and entitlement of the people affected due to development project implementation. However,
there is a gap in understanding the issues of resettlement and the role of entitlement to mitigate
negative impact. Quite often the personnel implementing resettlement plan foster a grudge towards
the project affected persons & community, particularly if they belong to vulnerable section. This
negative attitude is not going to help proper implementation of resettlement plan and project benefits
that are perceived at planning period will be lost if a section of the society is left out of the fruit of
development. Therefore, an attempt is being made to highlight the issues often raised at implementation stage and also to find out means to tackle those issues.
98
POSTALE 2008
Resettlement Scope And Impact - Planning And Implementation

Resettlement Plan is usually conceived and prepared right in the beginning, during PPTA stage
when preliminary design indicates resettlement impact in terms of loss of land, property, housing,
common property resources and social networks. However, it is often noticed that design horizon,
alignment or scope of project's construction/erection works do not match with ultimate requirement at
the implementation stage. Highway alignment during construction, specially when existing road is
strengthened or widened, tends to deviate from the initial design which determined scope of resettlement and land acquisition. This raises the issue of minimizing resettlement impact by alternate
alignment options, including bypassing congested settlement. Some examples from ADB funded
West Bengal Corridor Development Project (WBCDP) may be cited. Along Chakda-Bongaon stretch
of State Highway 1, land acquisition was initiated in 14 pockets, some of which are highly congested
clusters in North 24 Parganas district near the Petrapole border with Bangladesh. After declaration
notice was served under Section 6 of LA Act the affected persons gave petition for reducing land
requirement, as all of them will lose their shops and hence their livelihood. Series of meetings were
held among the project implementation officials, the affected persons and the district Land Acquisition officers and a midway was worked out where width of the road for improvement was reduced to
an optimum level without compromising traffic safety and highway design. This action fulfills the policy of Involuntary Resettlement where impact is minimized by alternate design. But that cost the project delay in land acquisition and consequent handing over the road stretch for construction work.
Another example of different nature may be quoted, where shop owners of Gopalnagar, an old congested market place along State Highway1, resisted bypassing the highway at critically restricted
stretch even at the cost of land acquisition. The alternate options for bypass were not acceptable to
them because, business along this highway is too important to lose than to part with a small piece of
land. However, in all such cases where alternate options are sought to avoid or minimize displacement project implementation suffers from inordinate delay, and thereby increase in project cost.
In another ADB financed Kolkata Environment Improvement Project (KEIP) revised resettlement plan
was prepared after a gap of nearly six years since the inception of the project, where changed
alignment for sewerage and drainage work reduced resettlement impact in some densely habited
settlements along storm water canals which flush out Kolkata's sewage. These examples amply signifies the importance of resettlement impact at various stages of planning and implementation of
project.
During an evaluation study of implementation of Resettlement Plan conducted by ADB, the project
implementation unit had expressed the concern for inordinate delay in project construction due to
compliance with resettlement plan implementation as per loan covenant. Resettlement Plan based
on initial study, when neither project design nor horizon is finalized, can not portray the extent of resettlement impact at the time of implementation.
Defining An Affected Person And His Entitlement
According to policy guidelines of ADB/World Bank funded projects not only title holders who are eligible for compensation and assistance for loss of property, but all those who stand to lose their assets, livelihood or common property resources are also entitled for compensation. The non-titled
persons are given a generic name of Informal Dwellers, who are either residing or carrying on
business, trade on government land. This definition has broadened the scope of entitlement for involuntary resettlement and surely has given a human face to the misery of displacement due to development project. Moreover, usage of common property, such as, pasture, fishing areas, forest is
recognized by the concept of entitlement beyond the limit of individual ownership.
Another definition adopted for eligibility criteria is the census cut-off-date, which attempts to exclude
speculators or outsiders trying to take advantage of the policy which accept entitlement irrespective
of titles. But fixing the census cut-off-date for the project affected persons at an early phase of project preparation gives rise to complications when entitlement is finalized based on situation prevailing
during implementation. To make things worse, the credibility of the non-titled persons so far as their
99
POSTALE 2008
entitlement in respect of census cut-off-date is concerned is hard to define since none of them possess documentary evidence of occupying that plot of land/structure for residential or commercial
purpose. To resolve this issue, project implementation unit of West Bengal Corridor Development
Project worked out a list of documents which can be considered as evidence of occupation for business or residential purpose. Local self government plays an important role in identification of entitled
persons as per census cut-off-date. The tax collected for business enterprise, residences or certificate of residence issued by the Panchayat are considered as evidence of commercial establishment
or residential house.
The title holders are paid compensation for the loss of the land/structure/other assets according to
Land Acquisition Act of respective state Government, although LA Act does not necessarily cover
replacement cost which is the entitlement basis as per ADB's Involuntary Resettlement Policy. In
such case the difference in compensation and replacement cost is usually paid from project. There
are other forms of entitlement, such as, transitional cost to support during the period between displacement and relocation, income assistance to tide over temporary phase of loss of income or livelihood. There is also provision for income restoration measures in the form of sustainable vocational
training to regain pre-project level economic status. Of all types of entitlement, income restoration
assistance stands to be criticized from all concerned. Everybody acknowledges the difficult, almost a
Herculean task of income restoration of a persons, family, community who have, almost overnight,
lost their access to livelihood, without alternate resources at hand that is compatible to their ability,
skill or education. This is most relevant in case of large scale displacement involving rural people,
the farmers, artisans and others whose livelihood is based on traditional occupations. There is a
need of concerted effort to identify need, capability, and willingness of these affected persons to access various types of occupational traits and financial support for a considerable period if the loss of
income and livelihood is to be replaced with sustainable income resources accessible to displaced
people.
Grievance Redress Mechanism
All projects execution modality should include a well established and functional grievance redress
mechanism. This process would ideally be initiated since the inception of project implementation this
can solve many issues by addressing a proper time and without delay. There are instances of resolving issues informally, where project implementation unit deals with the affected person individually
on a case to case basis. However, a well established set up, such as Grievance Redress committee
at administrative level, has more authority to deal with more complicated issues, such those involving land acquisition, relocation sites, entitlement, etc in a convincing manner that is acceptable to
project authority and the affected persons as well. Grievance Redress Cell/Committees are established in all levels of administrative units, from district to Gram Panchayat level and people are acquainted with the set up. This institutional set up can very well be utilized for resolving resettlement
issues with proper training and awareness programme for the personnel.
Participatory Consultation With Stakeholders
The externally funded projects pay lot of weightage on stakeholders' consultation since initial stage
and continues till project completion phase. Significance of consultation lies in giving transparency
and credibility to the project and its relevance grows progressively with the project. It may be referred
that the key players of a development project include the stakeholders, who are the project executers, administrators and the people directly or indirectly benefited from the projects. Hence, consultation with them since the beginning gives them a fair chance to gauge the relative cost and benefit of
the project. Moreover, certain resettlement issues can be resolved to the satisfaction of the people
concerned if consultation takes place prior to and during project preparation and implementation
stages.
An instance of a positive result of stakeholders' consultation on the project planning and execution
may be cited here. As a component of West Bengal Corridor Development project, some rural ac-
100
POSTALE 2008
cess roads were considered for improvement and strengthening, provided the road sections do not
involve land acquisition. One of the selected road sections is Andulberia road section that connects
interior rural hinterland with the National Highway34 in Murshidabad district. After initial selection
was made, it transpires that the road section does not possess sufficient road land for the required
widening and it was decided to drop that road section from the project component. However, the
people residing by the road side approached the project authority to reconsider the decision and include the road section into the project. They expressed their willingness to donate land. A joint inspection was organized along a stretch of about 6 km with all the villagers, project personnel, the
surveyor, Amin from Govt, LA Department to identify the required land and decide upon the road
alignment. The stakeholders organized an open meeting with all the land owners, who want to contribute land and the project personnel. After a series of meetings road alignment was finalized and
nearly 400 landowners donated land amounting to 6 acres of land. Although the quantity of land required is small, it can not undermine the effort put together by the stakeholders, mostly poor farmers,
to redesign and re frame the project requirement to fulfill their need. This is a case of manifestation
of people's power to gain their benefit in a positive manner. It may be mentioned in this context that
road improvement under Prime Minister Gram Sadak Yojana (PMGSY) is being carried out in this
manner where the project design team conducts a transect walk along the required length with the
primary stakeholders to decide upon the width that may be taken up for the improvement work without going into lengthy land acquisition process.
Stakeholders' consultation is also instrumental in dissolving disputes that may jeopardize project
progress midway. Hence, lot of importance has been given to conducting stakeholders' consultation
during initial assessment, planning and implementation phases. In monitoring and evaluating project
progress stakeholders' perception of the project is of much value. After all, the people are the beneficiary of development and they have the legitimate right to evaluate project's performance.
Lessons Learned
Being involved in resettlement planning, implementation and monitoring gives one an opportunity to
have close look at the intricate actions that are required to successfully implement a resettlement
plan. This experience may prove to be valuable in implementing resettlement plan for development
project and the author wishes to share some of the lessons learned from implementation of resettlement plan.
The progress of the resettlement activities was faster and smooth where project implementing authority, with the help of Implementing Agency, the representatives of the affected persons and the
local government bodies acted collectively. Organizing public consultation regularly proved to be of
utmost importance to create an atmosphere of trust and transparency among the common people. In
most places dismantling of the affected structures after payment of compensation and resettlement
assistance was done spontaneously to make the site free of encumbrances. Where necessary, PIU
provided assistance in shifting the goods and dismantling the structures.
Project impact in terms of number of affected persons and quantum of loss, reflected in Resettlement Plan prepared at a preliminary stage does not always reveal the actual situation during implementation. This has an adverse effect among the Affected Persons, which raised grievances among
the people. It is suggested that final Resettlement Plan may be prepared after inventory of actual
loss, availability of right of way and requirement of land acquisition are known before project implementation and prior to a reasonable period of commencement of civil work to avoid any unwarranted
anxiety among the people.
6.5.3 Payment of resettlement assistance to the informal dwellers has been a unique feature unheard before. This shows the human face of the project and the affected persons occupying unauthorized structures came forward to clear the site free of encumbrances. In the stretches of congested clusters, litigation was avoided by consulting the legal title holders prior to finalizing design
requirement.
101
POSTALE 2008
CONCLUSION
Of late there has been immense awakening among the people thanks to the efforts of the activists
- about environment, the danger of its depletion and need for its preservation. In the midst of all the
enthusiasm generated for environmental concern, the social issues, particularly resettlement, related
to some of the basic human needs that deserve to be fulfilled, are often shelved. Development process very often tends to accelerate with the advent of hi-tech modernisation and push behind the fundamental requirements of mankind food security and shelter ranking foremost among them. In the
context of the development projects social cost is often overlooked. So, when under compulsion of
external funding agencies resettlement has to be taken care of, it assumed a notion of much skepticism, and definitely a misunderstood concept. There is misgiving among the project executing agencies that resettlement and rehabilitation could have been done away with, if only they are allowed to
do so. On the other hand, for many it is a necessary nuisance, to tolerate as long as required. Some
of the activists and advocacy NGOs, unfortunately have made themselves feel important by utilizing
resettlement issues to their advantage. All said and done, resettlement and rehabilitation concepts
are going to stay here for centuries to come, probably, as long as development continues to make
human civilization advance to unknown height. There is no doubt that development needs land and
change in land use pattern will cause displacement which in turn creates the necessity for resettlement and rehabilitation. In order to do justice to resettlement one has to understand the issues and
complications that are inter wined within resettlement process. To those who are sincerely involved
in resettlement planning and implementation, the action is not a mere duty to perform, but an act of
social responsibility which beacons to rise above triviality of planned activities and arouses satisfaction of a social activist.
102
POSTALE 2008
MINERALOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PARTICULATE MATTER

- A LEGAL REQUIREMENT FOR AIR QUALITY IN OPENCAST MINE
A. JAMAL AND WASNIK NISHANT KUMAR
Institute of Technology, BHU, Varanasi
INTRODUCTION
For healthy and eco-friendly environment, Fresh air is not a basic necessity for healthy environment.
The particulate matter present in fresh air should be analyzed and characterize in order to provide
healthy environment around the mine. In mine, air quality is a major concerned because of all activities related with exploitation of coal mineral is responsible of generation and dispersion of particulate
matter into the ambient environment. The air borne particulate matter is particles of different mineral,
ore, associated rocks and surrounding surface activities. The concentration of these minerals may
have different affinity with water as far as dust suppression is concerned. In some areas, the low
concentration of particulate matter in air is also responsible of various diseases related with air quality (CPCB, 2007). It may be perhaps due to high concentration of some minerals which has not so
far considered in the existing standard for air quality. In this paper ,a case study is described with a
need for inclusion of minerals in place of elements particularly for mining industry.
METHODOLOGY
A case study of an iron ore mine A, was selected to study the characteristics of particulate matter
(PM) in terms of concentration and mineralogical composition. The concentration of PM was monitored by High Volume Air Samplers. The sites for air quality monitoring were in core (Haul road,
crushing plants screening points, drilling, blasting and loading points etc.) and buffer zones ( villages) of mines. The concentrations of PM in g/m3 were calculated to assess the air quality in and
around the mines. The PM collected on glass fiber filter paper were sieved by ultrasonic sieving apparatus to analyze the size and mineral composition. The concentration and minerals composition of
particulate matter is discussed in this paper. The mineral composition was determined by petrologic
microscope (Nicon, H600 L). The results of concentration and mineral composition of particulate
matter of iron ore mines are given in Table -1 and 2.
AIR QUALITY AND CONCENTRATION OF PARTICULATE MATTER IN AN IRON ORE MINE A
An opencast Iron ore mine, in Bellary district is selected for detail study. The area is dry and hot in
summer (430C). The rainfall is low (approx. 750mm)and mostly occurs during June to September.
The geological formation of the area is of Precambrian age. The common rock types of the area are
meta -basalts, phyllites, ferruginous shale, conglomerate with less amount of banded hematite
quartz and huge deposit of Banded Hematite Jaspar. These all rocks are of Donimalai formation
containing huge deposit of iron ore with laterite capping. During mining of iron ore, the laterite (3
to10m thick) and phyllites are being removed due to high dip (65-800) of ore body. The heavy
mechanization (hydraulic excavator, wheel loaders, wagon, DTH drill, high capacity dumpers etc.) of
opencast mine is responsible for high generation of particulate matter and subsequent dispersion
due to dry season and intense wind. The run of mine ore after screening is sent to different consumer points. Hence, screening of iron ore is also a major source of particulate matter in the mine.
For air quality monitoring purposes, the area of mine A, has been divided into : Core zone; C1 & C2
and Buffer zone B1, B2 & B3.The particulate concentration and mineral composition in core zone and
buffer zone monitored by air samplers is summarized in Tables -1 to 2 in subsequent paragraphs.
It may be observed from Table 1 that the suspended particulate matter (SPM) in core zone is in significant concentration. It is ranging from 634.3 g/m3 to 806.2 g/m3 with an average value of
610.4 g/m3 with a standard deviation of 15.8 at point C1. At point C2, it is fluctuating from 593.7
POSTALE 2008
g/m3
to 838.9 g/m3 with arithmetic mean of 810.2 g/m3. The concentration of SPM in this
area is much higher than the recommended permissible limit (500 g/m3). The above concentration
is showing the extreme situation when there was no water spraying for last three days due to some
unavoidable circumstances in the area.
Table 1 Concentration of SPM in core and buffer zones in mine A

SPM concentration in
Sample
No.
Minimum value
C1
C2
634.30
593.7
B1
B2
B3
317.2
173.2
265.2
Maximum value
g/m3
Arithmetic mean
Standard deviation
610.4
810.2
15.4
20.9
321.6
282.6
342.8
9.8
19.9
21.2
Core zone
806.2
838.9
Buffer zone
384.6
382.2
468.2
In buffer zone (residential areas and villages) also, air quality monitoring was conducted (Table 1).
The concentration of SPM in these areas (B1, B2 & B3) is also not within the recommended permissible limit (200 g/m3). The concentration of SPM in these areas is certainly lower than the above
shown values where water spraying is done frequently.
AIR QUALITY AND MINERAL COMPOSITION OF PARTICULATE MATTER IN AN IRONE ORE
MINE A
The air quality may be characterized in terms of constituents added into the atmosphere through
mines operations. In mines, the dissipation of fine rock particles, ores and minerals into atmosphere
is a common phenomenon. In iron ore mines, particles of hematite, quartz, phyllites, jasper and
many other minerals are common constituents. Table 2 summarized the different minerals and their
relative percentage at various places in mines.
Table 2. Mineral Composition of Particulate matter in an opencast iron ore Mines
Mineral Composition %
Sampling Sites
Quartz
C1
C2
8.3
7.5
B1
B2
B3
21.7
23.4
78.6
Jaspar
Hematite
Core Zone
28.3
50.3
23.5
55.2
Buffer Zone
19.6
23.8
21.6
18.6
27.6
37.6
Matrix/fine
cloud
Unidentified
Rock fragments
7.3
7.1
5.8
6.7
29.0
30.2
5.1
05.9
6.2
11.1
It may be observed from Table 2 that in mines atmosphere, the particulate matter are mostly minerals. Depending upon its properties, it remains in atmosphere of core and buffer zones of the mine.
104
POSTALE 2008
The above observation shows that the quartz concentration in buffer zone is more than core zone.
The other sources of quartz and its properties have to be studied in detail.
MINERAL COMPOSTION AND LEGAL REQUIREMENT
Mining is a major activity in India after agriculture particularly in the present time when the exploitation of mineral resources is open to globally. The aesthetic and environment is bound to affect significantly. Among environmental component, air is most important because of huge consumption by
living beings in general and human in particular. Along the air, various suspended particles of a particular size are also inhaled. The USEPA (http://www.epa.gov/ttn/atw/allabout.html) has given mostly
list of chemicals (188 chemicals) as air pollutants to be included as air pollutants. In mining areas,
the inclusion of minerals (Quartz, feldspar, mica, fibrous minerals, pyrite, sphalerite, galena, hematite, magnetite, coal, etc.) should be included as a parameters for permissible standards. In standards of underground mine given by ILO (1991). Some minerals have been included in the recommended permissible limit. Such standards in Indian legislation for environment may also be included
and framed into the rule and regulations to accelerate R & D on these issues in the country. National
Institute of Mines Health conducted basic research on this aspects and reported that 2.1 % of employees of ACC Ltd. are suffering with Silicosis, 11.6 % had lung disorder etc. (the website: mines,
gov. in) the permissible exposure limit is 3 mg/m3 whereas in ambient permissible limit is 500 g/ m3
(CPCB, 1991)
AKNOWLEDGEMENT
The field assistant provided by officers of the concern mine is gratefully acknowledged. The financial
assistance of CSIR, New Delhi is gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCE
International Labour Organisation (1991); Occupational Exposure Limits for Airborne
Toxic Substances. (Third edition); International Labour office, Geneva, 1991
Jones, Tim; Blackmore, Pete; Leach, Matter; Berube, Kelly; Sexton, Keith Richards Roy (2002). Characterization of airborne
particles collected within and proaimal to an opencast coal mine: South wales, U.K. Environmental Monitoring and Assessment (2002), 75 (3), 293-312.
Christine, G. Parks, Karsten Conrad and Glinda S.Cooper (1999). Occupational exposure to crystalline Silica and Autoimmune
disease. Environmental Health Perspectives Vol. 107. Supplement 5, oct 1999; 793-802.
mines.gov.in/budget0506/chapter4.pdf
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/atw/allabout.html
105
POSTALE 2008
LEGISLATIVE STATUS FOR VIABLE AND EQUITABLE BALANCE

BETWEEN ENVIRONMENT AND DEVELOPMENT
CHAND CHANDNA
G. M(.Mines), Barodia Silica Sand Mines, Talwandi, Kota, Rajasthan
INTRODUCTION
April 22nd is a earth day, the day dedicated to recognize the beauty and riches of the earth and to
make the earth healthier and safe place to live. Earth day was first observed on April 22nd, 1970
with the message Give Earth a Chance for reclaiming the purity of the air, water and living environment. Earth day have brought awareness about the dangers of overpopulation, energy waste
and other issues of living environment.
The United Nations environmental agency organized the international conference on human environment at Stockholm from 5th June to 14th June 1972. It was attended by representative of 114 Nations. The Prime Minister of India Mrs. Indira Gandhi also attended the conference. The conference adopted the motto only one earth for the entire humanity. The UN General Assembly designated June 5 as world environment day to deepen public awareness, the need to preserve and
enhance the environment. Celebration of world environment day is on that day, the UN conference
on human environment at Stockholm in 1972 was started.
The Assembly reconvened United Nations conference on environment and development (UNCED)
after 20 years the earth summit from June 03 to 14th 1992 at Rio de Janeiro to foster our
common future. The conference was attended by 115 heads of the states, 10,000 Govt. missions and 20,000 NGOS. The 6 basic conspicuous issues were taken up in this conference.
(1) Green house Gas Emission
(2) Forest
(3) Population
(4) Technology transfer
(5) Finance (Global Environment facility)
(6) Degradation
The Rio Earth summit ended with the adoption of the Rio declaration where Nations took up the
challenges of a viable and equitable balance between environment and development and a sustainable future for the earth and its people.
Environment may be divided in two divisions
(1) Natural environment which consists of air, dust, water, land, forest, minerals, etc.
(2) The social environment which consists of social, economical, political and living environment.
Natural environment: - it is a common pre-presumption with non mining men that the natural environment is degraded only by mining operations without analyzing the basic facts. Scientific mining
have the concept to maintain the environmental norms.
Mining leases are granted under the specific laws of
(1)
(2)
(3)
Mines & minerals (Regulation and development) Act 1958.

Mineral conservation and development Rules 1958.
Mineral concession Rule 1960.
These grants are operated under the provisions of mines Act. 1952 and there under framed mines
Rules regulation and by laws etc.
These rule have the provision of health, safety and welfare to maintain and regulatory Acts and concession rule have all the provisions of re-maintaining the degraded land and greenery of the area. The
POSTALE 2008
health safety welfare land reform, greenery are the basic requirement of scientific mining operations.
This can only be preserved by maintaining the good environmental conditions. As such practically the
mining operations are keeping equitable balance between environment and development by carrying
out scientific mining and observing mines Rule & Regulations.
In addition to above Acts rules & regulations the Government of India bounded the mining operations
by enacting the following Acts & policies to preserve the environment.
(1) The Indian forest Act 1927.
(2) The wildlife (protection) Act. 1972 (amended in 1991).
(3) The water (prevention and control of pollution) Act. 1974 (amended in 1991) and rule 1975
(amended in 1991).
(4) The forest (conservation) Act. 1980 (amended in 1988 the forest conservation rule 1981.
(5) The air (prevention and control of pollution) Act. 1981(amended in 1987).
(6) The Environment (protection) Act. 1986.
(7) The public liability insurance Act. 1991 (amended in 1992).
(8) The National environmental tribunal Act. 1995.
(9) The National Environment Appellate authority Act. Policies. 1997.
(10) National forest policy 1998.
(11) National conservation strategy and policy statement on environment development 1992.
(12) Policy statement on abatement of pollution 1992.
These above additional acts and policies are taken care of by non-mining technical authorities who
are having pre-presumptions for degradation of environment by mining operations, not much aware
of equitable balance of environment & development of mines and minerals.
SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT & ITS DEGRADATION
If we analyze our feasible thought, where the degradation of environment main causes are our poverty,
unemployment, illiteracy and increasing population where as scientific mining of minerals is one of the
means of survival of such increasing population and eradication poverty which keeps the viable and
equitable balance between the environment and development. So poverty is the mankinds biggest
curse and is also the largest polluter. The territory area of India is only 3,287,263 Sq. km. and the increasing population upto 2001 Census is 1,027,015,247. So the density of population per sq. km. is
nearly 324 which is highest of the world expect Japan. As such the population which is 72.22% living in
rural area and only 27.78% population lives in the urban area. Majority of poors are living in the rural
area. Mining is such a Industry which is established only in the rural areas which is a major source of
employment for land less villagers and poor . As the population is increasing but the territory area will
be same & remain constant. So the increasing population increasing the population-density per sq. km.
every year.
N.G.OS are beating their drums to get stop the developments of mines & minerals. The respected
legal judiciary of the country concerned with the flow of legal parameters with in their privileges but
who are worried about the social environment of the poor land less villagers, those are making their
livings, employed in mining operations, thus making them wood cutters to quench their hunger, by
restricting the mining developments in the surrounded legislative clutches. If practically basic poverty
will be eradicated, our natural & social environment will be improved automatically in happiest Bungalows of greenery of the poor as our prosperous gentry happy to keep their houses green. So mining
industries are the only contributor to uplift the standard of living of our poor villagers to maintain the
natural and social environment.
I quote Smt. Indira Gandhi our late prime Minister at UN conference on human environment at
Stockholm in June 1972, Said, The rich countries may look upon development as the cause of environmental destruction but to us, it is one of the primary means of improving the environment of living for
providing food, Water, Sanitation, Shelter of making deserts green and mountains habitable.
107
POSTALE 2008
So all our NGOS & politicians thoughts must be emphasis to solve the basic reason of degradation
of environment like poverty unemployment, illiteracy and increasing population density to improve
economical, political and social environment.
MINERALS TREASURY
Wining of minerals is to extend the power of the country. So it is the paramount object of the country
to produce maximum minerals, the natural resources, to make the country strong. These natural
resources are countrys wealth. Minerals are countries treasure hidden under the crust of the earth.
These are not man made. It is Gods process to form mineral and Gods wonderful gift given to the
country to become flourish such as the minerals wealth and oil deposits countries enjoying the minerals Gods gifts treasury.
I quote Chanakya the great famous sharp Politician in his Kautilya Shastra as early as 400 Be.
Said Mines are the source of treasury, From treasury comes the power of government and the
earth whose armament is treasury is means of treasury and army. So minerals are hidden treasure
of our country and power of our army to face the challenges.
FOREST & SCIENTIFIC MINING
Scientific & systematic mining never hamper the environment. On the contrary now greenery and
thick plantations are seen and maintained at mines and most of them are become good picnic spots
to enjoy. Because these have ownership to guard to save & to maintain. Gypsum mining is a blessing in
cleaning the land for agriculture. Gypsum is typical chemical sediment pertaining to seas. Among
sedimentary rocks it forms a layers associated with native sulfur which makes the land barren. After
extracting this layer of Gypsum the land becomes fertile and yield good crops. Similarly it is obvious
that after carrying out mining the same land can be reused for required purposes in a better way because the land excavated is refilled, will be more porous and fertile. So a better & thick forest can
also be grown. The point is that the land used for mining is reused after excavation of minerals in a batter productive uses & afforestation. Some degradation of forest is caused from small &
unauthorized mining which are running unsystematically in a unscientific way of workings.
MINES & ENVIRONMENT
Mining and environment both are correlated as such the mining operations have to be maintain more
economical to maintain environment. For that economical survival of the mining operations are essential. The economic prosperity of the mine depends on the mineral value to be mined. As such the
different mineral mines have different mineral values and different valued areas. So the different
mines have different economical status. But the rules regulations are almost same for all mines irrespective to the minerals mined and the area of lease (small or big) granted for mining, without considering the economical survival. When the survival of mine of a poor minerals are very hard and
there is no economical prosperity of the mine & minerals than where from care will be taken to improve the environment along with the norms of the different valued minerals with prosperity & feasibility. It is a proved law of nature first to make once living, there after one will take care of his living
environment.
So first promote the mine economical viable and than desire the havens green prosper environment
at the mining fields proportionate to the respective mines and minerals status.
FACILITY TO PROMOTE MINE, MINERALS & ENVIRONMENT
First of all the Govt. should have ascertain the deposits of the minerals for the requirement of the
Nation. For that land should be identified, demarcated and kept reserve for leasing out the area with
all feasible allotment of land to mine, to dump and to develop compensatory greenery with the economical survival to observe all the required provisions under all acts, rules & regulations.
108
POSTALE 2008
We know practically it is vary difficult but it is a misfortune to develop our minerals that the Govt. do
not have its own land for mining, dumping and plantation. More over do not have identified land possessing different valued minerals.
If the Govt. is keen and sincere to promote the environment on ground may think to facilitate the mining by providing the land as under at a reasonable returns in value with the interest to promote mining and environment.
1. Land for mining
2. Land for waste dumping
3. Land for plantation
For promoting mining the land for these purposes should have to be acquired first by the Govt. before leasing out the area including mineral bearing identified land, close to it non-mineral bearing
land for dumping and plantation. The land for dumping close to mine area makes the mineral to obtain economical with least degradation of land and environment. The land for plantation should also
be close to the workings to have better guard and cares of the plants as the owner of the greenery.
Ownership of the plants must, which can only be cared & guarded the plantation with full interest and
the plantation can also be converted in to the economical viability of producing crops.
PRACTICAL USE OF EXPERTISE SKILL
It is a very true fact that until unless the mine and its product minerals are not economically make
viable, we can not promote the environmental conditions better in the field at mining areas. The
Govt. deployed expertise skills & knowledge are used only in inspecting the paper works and their
skills are used in issuing notices to penalize only but not used in promoting and implementing their
expertise skill in the field to promote environment economical in real sense with viability of the mine
of different minerals of high and low values producing, by observing all requirements of provisions. If
their skills practically make usable which may be experienced the facing problems and thus a clear
picture will be come out to be solved by the Governing authorities and a real thought of promoting
environment will be surfaced in real sense to enjoy the world.
Govt. may have provisions by sending their experts teams to monitor, teach to monitor better with all
their experts norms, suggestions to promote the environment practically at the ground at the cost of
organization to teach them but not to penalize.
But it is observed that the present practice of the Govt. is more theoretical. Our most of skill experts
becoming environmental experts opening offices to prepare the paper works without any much practical change in the field and highly charging at their convenience for Govt. approval. Practically the
Govt. wants compliance in the papers but not so on the surface mostly.
FINANCIAL FACILITY
It is also one of the ways to promote mines & environment by financing mines development and
schemes to promote plantation. Mines development is a big investment to get the return in hopes.
So no financial institution are coming forward to finance on the development works of the mine and
without developing the mine no mineral can be produced. As such the huge finance is required to
develop the mine first. So the Govt. should have come forward with his financial agencies to finance
the mine development works to establish the mine as financed while developing of other industries
with subsidy to establish. When once the mine is well established the environment will be well maintained practically in the mine areas with the establishment of mine.
It will be further progressive positive thoughts of the Govt. considering financial loan on the plantations in the mining areas to promote the environment. Mining agencies are the best agencies to develop greenery in the fields because they enjoy ownership of the greenery developed to better guard
109
POSTALE 2008
and have sincere care and watch of the plantation planted and developed. So the funds of the Govt.
diverted to their other agencies neither have care, nor have watch and guard of the planted plantation but have the only care to spent the fund allotted to them, which is not returnable. If such funds
are allotted to the respective mining agencies for plantation at the mining areas then the greenery of
the areas will be practically worth seen, to enjoy the environment and the funds allotted are returnable on an installment basis. If the Govt. will provide the subsidy to these mining agencies, Will attract them to come forward to share their full interest to make the world green. Considering these
financial facilities will be the practical steps taken to promote the mines and environment in a real
practical sense by permitting subsidy for the following works
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
For development of mines.

For plantation works.
For tube-wells for watering plants.
For fencing the plantation area to guard.
Fertilizers to promote plantation.
For scientific instrument to monitor environment.
It will be an appreciable positive step of the Govt. to promote mines & environment in real sense on
a refundable investment with havens green environment.
ENERGETIC STRENGTH
Mining organizations have their deployed energetic strength may make use for plantation and their
maintenance for their survival. This energetic strength may be used as an Uranium energy for plantation if the Govt. have a positive practical approach to facilitate the workings of mining areas plantation to develop with the returnable schemes of interest. Those persons planting some plants should
have their attachment to grow them up and develop as they have attachment in growing up their
children with the expectations to enjoy better their old age life with them. The forest department employees, so called taking some interest in plantation with the interest of continuing their salaries returns. As such it is law of human nature to create the interest in the interest of the environmental
privileges to be enjoyed by the world. Such interesting schemes may change the attitude of Mass
workers in growing plants, will stand a lesion to spread the message of developing plantation.
CENTRAL POINT TO COMMAND
There should be central single point to command the all grants of mines and its operational conditions. As regard mining and environment, the commands are with number of departments which
have their own different vision without assessing the other departments feasible consideration along
with the economical development of mine operations which is the main base to develop greenery
and environment.
The internal departmental clarifications and observations should be viewed at the central command
points internally and all requirements of environmental conditions are parallely viewed to promote
better mine operations which are the base to promote the environment by planning the grants feasible & viable.
CONCLUSIONS
It is a concluded fact that first to promote the mining to promote the environment. By Surrounding the
mining around the number of legislative clutches are making it unviable. Where as mining is contributing a large part to share the Nations economy. So mines environments are to be shared & promoted providing the land for mining, dumping and plantation by acquiring the land by the Govt. for
specific purposes to keep equitable balance between environment and development.
110
POSTALE 2008
Mining of minerals contribute great part in growing the economic status of the country, eradication of
poverty, employment to poor villagers, making the land better reusable, developing echo-friendly
mining environment, picnic spots, growing industrialization and making the country strong to stand.
So for mines & minerals development & for protection of environment some soft ruling must be enacted and justification to mines & minerals should be given for viable and equitable balance between
environment and development of mines and minerals. In the words of Dr. Abdul Kalam our Nations
President said equality of justice decides Nations progress. For a peaceful human life, law and justice have to assist. If justice fails to protect human rights the Nation fails. It is the responsibility of
legal community to ensure that these elements of rights, justice, liberty, equality and fraternity become available to all.
The ownership of the planted area should be let enjoyed by mining agencies, till the life period of the
mine to have better care, watch and guard of the plantations for their survival.
Interesting schemes should be introduced with returnable interest to the deployed mine workers in
developing plantation.
The highly Govt. deployed expertise skill to be make usable practically in the field to promote mining
and environment under their guidance on the surface.
The agencies preparing environmental plans in the papers should have to be held responsible in
promoting the environment of the assigned areas practically on the field. So that the investment
charges may have to be used viable in promoting the environment.
Financial facilities of the Govt. to promote the mines & environment on considering the loan and providing subsidy will be a appreciable practical steps in promoting legislative status for viable and equitable balance between environment and development.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The views expressed are authors not the organization serving and thankful to the directors of M/s
Bundi Silica Sand Supply Co. for giving kind permission to publish this paper.
REFERENCES
M.M.W. Oct. 90 by Shri G.L. Tandon (Padma Bhushan)
Mining Code. 1960 Lawyers Chambers Supreme Court of India. New Delhi by J. D. Jain
Authors Privios Paper 1995-96
Mines and Minerals ( Development and regulation ) Act 1957
Mining newspaper. Dec. 2002 - by Y. C. Gupta
National seminar on policies, statutes & legislation Postal 2002
Manorama year book 2003.
Mineralogy by A.V. Milovsky and O.V. Kononov.
National Seminar on policies, statute & legislation postal 2005.
111
POSTALE 2008
DUST MANAGEMENT PLAN IN MINES

VIJAY KUMAR
Govt. Polytechnic, Bicholim, Goa
INTRODUCTION
Dust is a significant environmental aspect associated with all our mining operations. Dust can
typically be generated by activities such as earthworks, excavation, blasting, transportation and
product processing and can be exacerbated by dry climatic conditions and winds. Dust is considered
to be any particle suspended within the atmosphere. Particles can range in size from as small as a
few nanometers to 100 microns (m) and can become airborne through the action of wind turbulence, by mechanical disturbance of fine materials or through the release of particulate rich gaseous
emissions. Most mine-originated dust is chemically inert, however there is the potential for more
harmful and persistent particulate contamination to occur from mining ore containing or associated
with certain products, such as asbestos, radioactive materials or heavy metals. Emissions from operating machinery not included as greenhouse gasses can also be classed as dust particulates.
Dust is measured using a variety of methods, the most common being Total Suspended Particulates
(TSP), which nominally measures up to 50m, and PM10 or PM2.5 (particulate matter less than
10m or 2.5m in size, respectively). Deposited matter measures the mass of any particulate falling
out of suspension expressed in mass per area per time, and is the least commonly used in determining dust concentrations. PM10 and PM2.5 measurements are associated with the potential for health
impacts because particles below these sizes may penetrate the nose and enter the lung. Preparation
and implementation a Dust Management Plan will help management to minimize dust resulting from
the Mining Project.
DUST MANAGEMENT PLAN PURPOSE
This plan is designed to provide for the management of dust caused by operations at the mining Project. The purpose of this document is to define a management strategy whereby mining company
can be successful in preventing dust from the operations exceeding regulatory levels and/or causing
a nuisance to adjacent residences. This plan will help in monitoring and managing the impacts of
dust in the following areas:
Mine area
Transport corridor
Accommodation village
Waste dumps
The plan should be prepared prior to construction and during the construction, operation and decommissioning phases of the project. The plan should be subject to ongoing review to meet the
change and to technological advances throughout the life of the operation. All commitments and procedures contained within this plan and the performance of project should be audited internally and
externally by the relevant authorities
Dust Management plan Objectives
The objectives of the Dust Management Plan are to:
Minimise dust emissions within the project area.
Ensure that dust emissions meet appropriate criteria and do not cause environmental Problems.
Prevent any adverse impacts on environmentally significant flora and vegetation communities.
Preparation of Dust management plan; -Dust Management Plan shall:
1. Identify dust affected properties and the relevant dust limits consistent with the statement of
state pollution control agency.
2. Provide details of the measures to mitigate the potential impact of dust from the mining activities and beneficiation Plant; and
POSTALE 2008
3.
Outline measures to mitigate dust emissions from the premises so that the cumulative emissions at all privately owned residences are below the established standard
Various steps in preparation and implementation in plan are
1. Project area
2.Relevant legislation and guidelines
3. Climate
4. Dust management strategies
5. Management action
6. Responsibilities
7. Communication
8. System and performance
9. Implementation of improved plan
Project area; -Decide Extent, location, project area comprises the prospecting, mining and processing plant. Collect information of main access to the project area, village located approximately to the
mine, waste rock dump situation.
Relevant legislation and guidelines; -Find Legislation, policy and guidelines and standards relevant to the dust which are generally applicable to human health and amenity issues as well as to get
Environment License.
Climate; - The severity and extent of dust emissions is largely influenced by climate. Hot, dry conditions result in more favourable conditions for dust lift, while dust deposition is strongly influenced by
wind strength and direction. Collect the various information from meteorological department like season, the average annual rainfall and its distribution, wind roses .A more detailed description of the
project and the prevailing environmental conditions should be prepared.
Mission Statement; -Mining company is committed to continuously reducing levels of fugitive dust
generated by the Mining and allied activities. Each company is sensitive to the concerns of local
residents regarding the levels of dust experienced in the township, and will ensure systems that facilitate communication with local residents are maintained.
Dust management strategy; -The Dust Management Strategy is intended to provide a reproducible
and consistent approach for managing dust generated by Mining and allied activities, with the aim of
achieving the Mission Statement. On an annual basis, the dust and water management Team1 will
reviews the dust risks, outlines objectives and targets to address the significant risks, meet policy
commitments, legal and other requirements, and stakeholder concerns, and then commits to dust
suppression improvement plans to meet the objectives and targets. Dust Management Strategy includes,
1. Dust risk assessment
2. Objective and target
3. Dust suppression improved plan
1. Conducting the dust risk assessment - On an annual basis, the mines Manager with the dust
and water management Team and Environmental manager to review the dust sources and activities
which may contribute dust to the township. During the review, significant risks with an existing dust
suppression improvement plan action should be reviewed, to check the effectiveness of the plan in
reducing the residual risk. The committee should consider the following when reviewing:
113
POSTALE 2008
1. Changes or additions to site activities and processes, 2.Performance against previous years action 3. New or changed legislation, 4.Community feedback 5.Monitoring results 6. Internal and external audit findings 7. Existing operational controls.
2. Setting Objectives and Targets
The dust and water Management team set and approve objectives and targets that the team plans to
meet over the reporting period during the annual review meeting. In setting objectives and targets,
the team considers the following:
1.
3.
5.
Environmental risks identified

Audit findings and corrective actions,
Technological options,
2.
4.
6.
Legal non-compliance issues,

Stakeholder complaints and views,
Financial, operational, and business requirements
3. Developing the Dust Suppression Improvement Plan (DSIP)

Once objectives and targets have been defined, the dust management team holds an annual DSIP
development meeting. The dust suppression improvement plan outlines actions to describe how operations will meet the endorsed objectives and targets, and address high risk areas identified
.Progress on the DSIP should be tracked at monthly meetings. Additional actions that are undertaken during the reporting year should be tracked in the same forum. The DSIP should be aligned
with the operations budgeting cycle to ensure adequate financial and human resources to completing them carried over into the following year.
Management action - Dust control is the science of reducing harmful dust emissions by applying
sound engineering principles dust control systems can reduce equipment wear, maintenance and
downtime, increase visibility, and boost employee morale and productivity. Measures to control dust
are important aspects of both operational and environmental management systems at iron ore mines
and a key part of land-use planning. There is a need of continually addressing and managing the
challenges associated with dust. Dust generated from the site can be minimized by the careful planning of the development and operation of the site. For the purposes of achieving the stated objectives of this dust management plan, measures to manage dust in this management plan are categorized according to the potential sources from:
General mining activities, including construction, extraction, crushing, stockpiling and haulage.
Traffic on roads, including access and haul roads.
Blasting.
1. General Mining activities; the following measures should be employed to minimize dust emissions:
1. A minimum clearing policy should be adopted to ensure that vegetation is cleared only when
and where necessary. In instances where the clearing of extensive areas is unavoidable, additional dust suppression techniques should be employed to ensure stabilization of the cleared
surfaces. When clearing:
Where practicable vegetation should be salvaged from the site to be cleared (taking care to
limit the amount of soil disturbance) and retained;
Topsoil should be removed to the maximum depth practicable and consistent with best operational practice,0
Where practicable, topsoil should be directly transferred to exposed surfaces requiring rehabilitation and covered with salvaged vegetative material;
Where direct transfer of topsoil is not possible, it should be stockpiled and stabilized with previously salvaged vegetation; and
Topsoil stockpiles should be further stabilized by encouraging native vegetation to establish
and, if necessary, appropriate stabilizing emulsion should be applied to supplement these
measures.
2. As practicable and consistent with operational requirements, disturbed areas should be progressively rehabilitated, to reduce the potential for windborne dust generation.
3. Truck mounted sprays will water unsealed, regularly trafficked areas such as access tracks,
work areas and haul roads as conditions require.
114
POSTALE 2008
4. Water sprays should be fitted to dump hoppers, crushing and screening plants and stackers.
5. A monitoring programme should be implemented to quantify dust levels, identify dust generating
sources and to determine ambient dust levels.
6. Any blasting required to facilitate construction should be conducted only under favorable wind
and weather conditions.
7. Routine housekeeping practices should be employed to contain and collect any spillages that
could contribute to dust generation around conveyors, loading / unloading areas and sediment
traps.
8. In the event that dust levels exceed acceptable limits, dust suppression measures should be
immediately reviewed and more stringent measures implemented as appropriate.
9. If additional dust control measures are required and dust suppressant products are deemed
necessary, only environmentally benign products will be used.
10. All personnel (including contractors) should be informed of their responsibilities and the importance of minimizing ambient dust levels during site inductions.
11. Other methods of minimizing site disturbance should be undertaken, including limiting vehicle
speeds and restricting access to some areas.
12. Any complaints received will be registered and will trigger a review of the relevant dust management procedure/s by the Mines Manager as a basis for development and Implementation of
appropriate modified practice/s.
2. Haul roads - The impacts of the haul road on the immediate surrounds come not only from the
dust generated through vehicle movement with in mine, but also from the potential for spillage of
crushed material being transported between the mine and port.
For the purposes of minimizing dust generation from the haul road, the following measures should
be employed:
1. Vehicle speeds should be restricted on unsealed surfaces. It is proposed to restrict vehicle
speeds on haul rods within the ridge area to 40 kilometers per hour.
2. Water should be regularly applied to haul roads via controlled spray or dribble bars.
3. All loads bound for Gerald ton should be covered.
3. Blasting - Blasting is the greatest single source of dust generated by the mining operation. Due to
the close proximity of the mine to environmentally sensitive vegetation communities, attention shall
be given to minimizing the impact of fugitive dust arising from blasting at mine site. The following
measures should be employed to minimize dust from blasting activities:
1. Methods for minimizing the amount of dust produced by drilling and blasting operations should
be investigated and applied where applicable.
2. Climatic conditions should be monitored and the data used to assist with planning blast events.
Prevailing wind information should be utilized to, where possible, undertake blasting when wind
directions are blowing away from the community, which is located in close proximity of the pit.
3. The surrounding vegetation should be the subject of a monitoring programme designed to enable early detection of adverse impacts as a result of dust deposition. In particular site personnel
will monitor dust deposition on the surrounding communities.
Responsibilities And Reporting
All employees and contractors have responsibilities in relation to dust management, overall responsibility for ensuring that the site environmental management requirements are met during the life of
the operation will rest with Mines and environment Manager. In respect of the Dust Management
Plan, this responsibility will include:
Ensuring that all construction and operational personnel, both the proponents workforce and
contract personnel, conform with requirements pursuant to the Management Plan.
Ensuring that contractor staff are fully inducted and aware of their environmental responsibilities
and obligations.
115
POSTALE 2008
Ensuring that monitoring requirements are being met contracting companies undertaking construction or operational roles will be required to appoint an environmental representative. The
key responsibilities of this representative will be to:
Maintain routine contact with the proponents mines Manager to ensure that environmental objectives of this plan are being met.
Provide monthly reports to the proponents mines Manager on environmental issues and conduct
regular audits.
Ensure that all management aims and monitoring requirements of the Dust Management Plan
are being met.
The main areas of responsibility at each level of the organization are

General Manager
Ensure the site operates in accordance with Department of Environment licenses.
Ensure personnel are aware of their obligations under the Department of Environment license.
Approve and implement the Dust Management Plan.
Ensure appropriate resources are available to meet the commitments made in the Dust
Management Plan.
Manager mining Operations
Provide resources to ensure employees are trained in the correct use of dust control equipment.
Coordinate development of the Dust Management Plan.
Communicate the Dust Management Plan to Operations personnel.
Coordinate and chair the Dust and Water Management Team meetings.
Provide resources to participate in dust control trials.
Manager Maintenance
Provide resources to ensure dust control equipment is well maintained and operational.
Provide resources to participate in dust control trials.
Support the Manager in the implementation of the Dust Management Plan where required.
Manager Environment
Maintain the dust monitoring network and associated quality assurance programme.
Produce relevant internal and external dust reports.
Chair the Coastal Communities Environmental Forum (CCEF).
Develop and implement community consultation programmes.
Establish and maintain greening areas.
Asst. Manager Operations
Ensure team members and contractors comply with relevant environmental license Conditions.
Communicate dust performance to team members.
Manger/ Asst manager Logistics
Undertake road management, including spillage clean up, road watering, and operation of the road
sweeper.
Other Official
Ensure team members and contractors comply with relevant environmental license conditions.
Communicate dust performance to team members.
All Employees
Report dusty conditions and/or faulty equipment that may result in dusty conditions.
Adhere to standard operating procedures.
Suggest dust control improvements.
Dust and Water Management Team
Drive improvement in dust performance in all parts of mine.
Profile dust sources and controls.
Facilitate the flow of ideas and information to and from the operations crews to maintain and improve their ability to manage dust in all aspects of the operations.
Recommend improvements or alternatives to existing dust controls as appropriate.
Conduct or facilitate trials of new controls as appropriate.
Facilitate appropriate change management practices for dust improvement projects.
Track all dust improvement plans being performed at the Port Operations, and provide
116
POSTALE 2008
this information to interested parties in an appropriate format as required.

Consolidate and report on performance against dust measures.
Communication
Internal - There is a wide range of communication channels through which staff can be informed of
dust management issues and practices occurring during mining operations. Many of these channels
are two-way and provide staff with a means to raise issues associated with dust management at the
site.
Inductions and Training; -All personnel who work autonomously are required to undertake site induction training. Topics covered in the induction include the significance of dust management at the site
and its potential impact on the local community, and the responsibilities of all personnel on site to
minimize the amount of fugitive dust generated by the operations. Individuals must prove competent
at the induction by undertaking an assessment. Additional training is provided in the form of Environmental Awareness Modules, with one module specifically focused on dust management during
mining operations. These modules are presented on an as-needed basis by the Environment Department.
Incident Reports; -All internal dust related observations are recorded as incident reports. These reports are entered into a database for tracking and management, and are reviewed on a monthly basis by the Senior Management at the monthly Health, Safety and Environment meeting, and by the
Dust and Water Management Team.
Health, Safety and Environment Meeting (Site Level); - Arrangement of Monthly Health, Safety and
Environment meetings at the site. All significant dust management issues must be communicated in
this forum, including both internal and external reports.
Dust and Water Management Team Meeting; -A monthly meeting arrangement to review dust performance and fresh water usage, discuss internal and external dust issues, review the previous
months dust and water monitoring, discuss new ideas, and document the status of Dust Suppression
Improvement Plan actions and other dust initiatives being implemented.
Exceedance Analysis;-On a daily basis, check the previous 24-hour monitoring results. If an exceedance is recorded, the Environmental Engg. Provide an exceedance analysis to the mines manager.
External - There are several forums through which communication is facilitated between the mines
management and members of the community and government, the community forms a key part of
the operations dust management strategy.
Annual Environmental Report; - The Annual Environmental Report includes a review of dust monitoring results, comparison against performance targets, a summary of dust management initiatives from
the reporting period, and proposed initiatives for the next reporting period. The Annual Environmental Report should be submitted to the Office of Major Projects, which then distributes copies of
the report to several government agencies. Members of the public upon request can view the Report.
Community Environmental Forum; -For liaison with the local community this forum can be established which involves representatives from the community and can meet as required, with a minimum of two meetings per year. Progress on key elements of the Dust Management Plan are reported to and discussed with members. The Community Environmental Forum provides the following:
1. A formal mechanism for community representatives to communicate their views on any environmental issues of relevance to present and potential future operations of company.
2. An avenue for the company to provide information to the community on environmental aspects of
the operations activities, monitoring, and future plans, with allowance for community comments
and feedback on these.
3. An avenue for community requests for information on environmental aspects of the operations
activities, monitoring, and future plans.
4. Consultation on the type of information required by the community, and the content of company
information being distributed on environmental issues.
117
POSTALE 2008
Complaints; -Established a dust complaint procedure like telephone number and insure availability of
this number is regularly communicated in local print media. The line is operated 24 hours per day
and allows callers to identify themselves or remain anonymous. Complaints are recorded, disseminated, and responded to as per the Complaint Evaluation and Response Flowchart .All received
complaints should be collated, analyzed, and reported to the Environment Department as part of
dust performance reporting.
Exceedance Analysis;-If any particulate matter and total suspended particles exceedance is recorded repot to Department of Environment .The report will include the meteorological, TSP and
PM10 data from the monitoring equipment.
Internet; -Create a internet site which provides data on a 12-hourly basis, a seven day plot of 12hour average dust concentrations, wind speeds and wind, directions, a wind rose showing wind
speed and directions for the previous 12 hours;
Social and Environment Reports; -The annual Social and Environment Report includes a summary
of the main dust management initiatives from the previous year, and the initiatives planned for the
following year.
Community Newsletters; -Prepare a community newsletter for the local peoples and delivered it. The
newsletter aims to keep community members informed of the activities of mining operations, including details on recent dust management initiatives and outcomes.
Site Environmental Advisor; - Depute a Site Environmental Advisor who is available to respond to
and provide information on any internal or external dust inquiries.
System and performance review
System review - The suitability, adequacy and effectiveness of the Dust Management Plan is reviewed annually at the meeting. The review considers the following:
Suitability of the Mission Statement;
The extent to which objectives and targets have been met;
Dust concerns or complaints from external stakeholders;
General dust performance based on monitoring results;
Periodic audit findings from the Department of Environment;
Periodic internal audit findings of dust management practices;
Periodic internal technical reviews of dust control trials and investigations;
Changing circumstances, including developments in legal and other requirements; and
Annual external review of dust management practices and dust monitoring results.
Any changes or recommendations for improvement identified in this meeting must be incorporated
into the annual review of the Dust Management Plan.
Performance review - Each year, a documented review of performance against the previous years
Dust Management Plan and associated Dust Suppression Improvement Plan must be undertaken.
The Performance Review is intended to:
Report on performance against objectives and targets, and the Dust Suppression Improvement
Plan,
Provide a review and analysis of dust monitoring results for the reporting year,
Analyze trends in monitoring data, evaluate the effectiveness of completed improvement plans, and
compare data to standards and guidelines where relevant;
Summarize complaints relating to dust received from the community; and
Provide analyses of exceedances recorded at community against the agreed standards.
The Performance Review also captures the outcomes of the annual review meeting. The Performance Review should be prepared by the Environment engg. and shall be submitted to the Department of Environment on an annual basis. Where applicable, results from this Review should be incorporated into the implementation elements, which include incident reporting, operational procedures, and training and awareness. Conduct periodic internal audits of dust control and monitoring
measures. Performance reviews should be undertaken following feedback from regulatory authorities of the Annual Environmental Report.
118
POSTALE 2008
Implementation of Improved dust management plan - After performance review the next step is
implementation of site-specific improved dust management plan for proactive dust control. Dust
minimization, management and monitoring measures must be implemented in accordance with the
Dust Management Plan to insure that all management aims and monitoring requirements of the Dust
Management Plan are being met.
Most of the mining companies have one or another form of dust management plan, The mining companies shall prior to the commencement of mining operations, revise the Dust Management Plan to
the satisfaction of regulatory authority and community. Every mining company must be committed to
preparing and implementing a Dust Management Plan in order to minimize dust resulting from the
Project.
119
POSTALE 2008
REMOTE SENSING A REVIEW OF ITS APPLICATION

IN MINING AND ALLIED INDUSTRIES
ANUBHAV GAURAV AND KAUSHIK DEY
National Institute of Technology, Rourkela
INTRODUCTION
Remote sensing is the small or large scale collection of data about an object from some remote area
by use of recording or real time sensing devices, which are not in contact of the object. Earth observation, weather satellite, magnetic resonance imaging and airborne or space borne sensor imaging,
are the examples of remote sensing application in day to day life. Remote sensing can be classified
into two groups, namely, passive sensing and active sensing. Passive sensing (uses passive sensors) is a phenomenon of detecting the natural radiation that is emitted or reflected by the area or
object to be studied. Reflected sunlight is commonly used for this type of sensing. Examples of passive sensing are photography, infra red reflectance, radiometry. On the other hand, active sensing
first emits a radiation to scan the area or object under study and a passive sensor captures the reflection of the emitted radiation. Sonar and Radar are examples of active sensing [1].
Remote Sensing can be used to collect data on dangerous sites and inhabited areas. It is implied for
study of deforestation, climatic changes, oceanography, and mineral explorations. It also has significant use in defense service. It replaces the conventional methods, which are costly, time consuming
and low in accuracy.
Systematic Arial photography carried out during the world war - I with different sensor installed on
aircrafts, might be considered as the earliest form of remote sensing. Newer and smaller sensors
were developed gradually to install in any low flying crafts. This was followed by the coming of technologies like infra red imaging and mapping technology and radar, which were also used for remote
sensing. With the advent of geostationary satellite, remote sensing found new dimension of technologies and new area of application, namely, agriculture, transport, mining and many more. Recent
developments in remote sensing include image processing of satellite imagery of modern satellites
such as NIMBUS, LANDSAT, and RADARSAT etc.
In India, the application of remote sensing was started in late 1980s after the advent of softwares
that could easily process huge amount of data, such as DATAMINE [2].
APPLICATIONS OF REMOTE SENSING IN MINING- A REVIEW
Remote Sensing helps job to be done economically, fast and precisely and hence, has vast application in mining industry. Remote Sensing is playing its role in a number of fields. It can be divided into
three main regions in which Remote Sensing is very important, namely, mapping and surveying,
mineral explorations, and environmental controls.
Application In Mapping And Surveying
After mineral exploration, if it is confirmed that a reserve is economically attractive, it is decided to
plan a mine there. For this, extensive amount of relevant information are required. A wide scale surveying of the mine area is carried out followed by mapping. The surveying data ranges from vegetation belt, rock structure, strength of rock mass, bearings of the area, to the attitude of beds and others. All these information are extracted relevant to the mining conditions using various instruments
such as Global Positioning System (GPS), infra red sensors, theodolite and others. Utilising these, a
mine is designed that would be best suited to the area in terms of maximum extraction, safety and
profitability. This work was tedious and a huge amount of data was to interpret before reaching to a
final conclusion. With the advent of new technologies, not only this burden has been relieved, but
POSTALE 2008
also these technologies are capable of providing such a huge amount of data in a systematic manner to ease the interpretation. Only relevant data are considered for calculation and interpretation.
Thus, remote sensing plays a major role in this area. The case histories of mapping and surveying
carried out in south west and central Iran are described below
Application in Zagros Suture Zone, SW Iran[3]: The Neyriz ophiolite, which consists of massive
gabbro, sheeted dykes and pillow lava, occurs in SW Iran and is surrounded by limestone. The detailed study was carried out by Thermal Infra Red Region (TIR) and Visible Near Infra Red + Short
Wave Infra Red (VNIR+SWIR) region datasets of Advanced Space borne Thermal Emission and
Reflectance Radiometer (ASTER). When compared to field evidences, it was found that TIR enhanced the gabbro, sheeted dyke and pillow lava better than any other bands and VNIR+SWIR enhanced cretaceous rock units. The ASTER instrument was installed on the Earth Observing system
(EOS) and records the radiation of three bands in Visible Near Infra Red (VNIR) and six bands in
Short Wave Infra Red region (SWIR). It also records the bands in Thermal Infra Red (TIR) region.
Then samples were taken from the region and compared for the mineral deposits with the imagery
taken. The model was prepared on this account and hence, a detailed surveying of the area was
made possible with the help of remote sensing.
Application in Central Iran[4]: It has been found in studies that 741 and 541 bands in infra red and
654 bands in thermal imagery are most suitable for enhancement of clays and igneous rocks. The
study also showed that Optimum Index Factor (OIF) could be used to get better results in the area
where the vegetation is scanty. The Principle Component Analysis (PCA) is applied for feature extractions. The images then formed using the spectral bands are faster to generate. The images
formed by true colour or standard false colour do not show much difference in the rock variations.
Hence the Crosta and OIF methods were used. These had benefit in terms of:
identification of the suitable composite colour that can enhance the mineral in the area present,
to emphasize the spectral bands to be used,
to show the environmental conditions of the minerals present.
The procedural steps that were carried out in central Iran for mapping the variable topography is
presented in Figure 1. The area under study had variable topography and had scanty rainfall. It
came under semi-arid to arid region. Hence, remote sensing was the best option for the mapping
and the orebody modeling.
Application In Mineral Explorations
Mineral exploration is the method carried out to gather information of an area about its mineral content. The use of recent methods of remote sensing is also being applied for mineral exploration. Mineral Resource Information System (MRIS) is a database of mineral information. To study the iron
and manganese deposits at Keonjhar (Orissa) and Shinghbhum (Jharkhand) and the limestone
mines of Raipur, MRIS was developed based on the remote sensing and Geographic Information
Systems (GIS). This MRIS runs independently of any commercial activities related to them. The database consists of spatial data given by LANDSAT images, IRS images and IRS-LSS-II. Thus, the
database developed using remote sensing and GIS helps in following ways:
1.
2.
3.
4.
they are far more accurate than the manual methods,

they are easily available and can be reproduced as and when required,
the database can be easily edited and are easy to maintain,
they are more economic as compared to the other methods of mineral explorations.
The database contains the information about the mine location, the mineral deposit, the type of minerals, their lithology and the associated minerals.
121
POSTALE 2008
Data used
ETM+, Geological maps, digital topography
maps and ground truth
Area identification (pixel dimensions) for digital analysis
Enhancement techniques, Digital analyses. Classification and
NDVI
Software used, ER- Mapper 6.1 version and ENVI 4 version
PCA, OIF and Crosta analysis
Information Integrated
Thematic information extracted
Results and Conclusions

Fig. 1 : Procedure Used For Carrying Out Surveying In With Remote Sensing
Application in Carbonates Exploration[5]: There are several types of carbonate deposits in nature,
namely, limestone, dolomite, marble etc. For the facilitation of identification of such carbonate deposits using remote sensing, they are broadly divided in two major categories: limestone and dolomite.
The mine producing largest quantity of zinc and lead in the Middle East Asia is situated in Isfahan
province of Iran. It contains various minerals including dolomite and limestone. Since, the mine contained limestone and dolomite simultaneously, to separate them PCA was applied, which did not
show any topographic shadows. In Figure 2, the dark red and dark blue colours represent dolomite
and limestone in pure form, while the colours in lighter shed show them in mixed form.
Fig. 2 : Various Cabonate Minirals Present In The Mine In Isfahan Province, Iran
122
POSTALE 2008
Application in Bauxite ore exploration[6]: Eastern Ghats comprise one of the oldest groups of rock
in Indian sub continent. Rocks present here are Charnockites, Khondalites, Granites, Granodiorites
and unclassified Granulites. Every element has different spectral signatures as per its composition.
Remote sensing also deals with spectral reflectance of object in spatial domain. They are very likely
to get adulterated with other reflectance. Since the indirect exposure of rocks is dealt, it is required to
have the target material unmixed from the background. This study area was near Koraput town,
Orissa, India, which contained quartz, feldspar, garnet, granite gneiss apart from some amount of
hornblende and pyroxene. The study used X-ray diffraction and thermal analysis and showed that
the chief aluminous ore was gibbsite associated with hematite and anatese. LANDSAT TM was also
used in this analysis. The digital images can be obtained in single band pattern or additive colour
composite of RGB pattern. The LANDSAT image used here was obtained for visible (bands 1, 2, 3),
near infra red (band 4) and mid infra red (band 5, 7) regions of Electro-Magnetic Spectrum (EMS).
Band 3 gave more information as compared to band 1, 2 due to its low attenuation that was caused
by the atmosphere. Band 4 gave relevant information of the vegetation cover, and band 7 was found
to be useful for accurate discrimination of the lithological conditions. Hence, the colour composite
image was formed, which showed the laterite and bauxite deposits along the soil cover. The chemical tests of the rock samples (taken from the area) showed presence of high grade of bauxite.
Hence, it can be inferred that satellite imagery can be used for mineral explorations utilising the
spectral signature of individual mineral. The red soil showed similar reflectance as the laterite and
bauxite capping, but it was a barren hill area and had no soil layer present.
Applications in Gold Prospecting[7]: In Dumara Gold Prospects, Philippines, the AirSAR was developed by NASA JPL. The imagery and required data were obtained by AirSAR and then the field
investigations were carried out. The AirSAR images taken earlier[8] were also visually interpreted for
major structures. One of the uses of AirSAR is to map the fractures in the area under study that may
control the deposits. The presence of volcanic plugs was observed in the imagery. Thus, the probability of occurrence of deposits was more as such plugs contained mineral fluids. The images by
AirSAR showed three alteration zones, which were three meters thick. These information are important for prospecting of mineral deposits.
Application in Uranium Ore mining [9]: Remote sensing was carried out in 43 varied regions and
171 deposits. Then, all maps including those generated by Remote Sensing imagery, airborne sensors and existing maps were collected and included in a book named Remote Sensing Image Feature of Uranium Ore in China. The basic controlling features, metallogenetic processes, ore type
features and exploration guide can be reflected by such maps. The uranium deposits were caused
due to varied geological processes and metallogenesis. Hence, RS images of such deposits contained various factors, namely, linear images (which showed tectonic movements), tone abnormalities (which showed thermal events) and pattern landscape (which showed metamorphism). The inferences were drawn from the data pertaining to 171 deposits under study. It was proved to be helpful in understanding the evolutions of ore deposits and environmental constraints for mining operations.
Application in exploration of Permian Limestone [10]: The Permian limestone of Iran consists of
lateritic bauxite horizon. The in-field exploration of the area was difficult due to the geological conditions. Hence, the rock separating procedure was carried out by remote sensing techniques. The recognition of such limestone was difficult. Thus, LANDSAT Imagery was used. Ratio method was used
to separate the Permian limestone from Oligocene limestone and difference method was applied for
separation of different limestone. The space imagery has led to an accurate, economic and fast exploration. These techniques have contributed in ways as,
1. determination of unclear structures,
2. showing up faults and folds easily, and
3. studying the centers of high tectonic activities.
Different types of alterations, as clay and iron oxides, were analyzed using ETM+ or ASTER images.
The data processing techniques (Crosta and OIF) were applied, where the alteration probability is
maximum. The attenuation left can be removed by visual interpretation.
123
POSTALE 2008
Application in Environmental Issues

In mining industry, it is important to care of the rules and regulations set by the government concerned to protect the environment. It is a shame if mining engineers are unable to protect and nurture the environment surrounding a mining site. The mining area due to mining activities suffers from
soil erosion; heavy silt deposition in the river bed; air pollution mainly from suspended particulate
matter; ground and surface water contamination and noise pollution. Using remote sensing, some of
this aspects can be regularly monitored, especially, silt deposition, soil erosion, land degradation
suspended airborne mineral particle. These data would help in monitoring of environment and in
mitigating appropriate environmental protective measures.
Application in ShengFu-Dongsheng Coalfields, China[11][12]: In 1988, the investigation was completed by Remote Sensing Application Institute of ARSC. The environmental study was done by TM
imagery, combined with field investigations. TM4, 3 synthetic images, taken in 1987 and 1996, was
used for acquiring information on landforms, gradients and vegetation. The interpretation showed the
air pollution aroused from coal pits. By implementing several reforms that were inferred by routinely
analysis of the multi-period RS data, the average desertization reduced by 28.5% and the river silt
discharge decreased 56.18 percent apart from the soil erosion lessened. From the interpretation of
remote sensing imagery data, it was found that maximum environmentally affected area (middle area
of the mine) was improved.
Application for Pollution Control in South Africa [13]: Many asbestos mines have been rehabilitated in South Africa. However, an investigation reported that environmental problems were being
faced still in the rehabilitated area. Analytical Spectral Device (ASD) field operator was used to collect spectra of asbestos in the region and samples were also collected from the spectral library to
compare. The spectroscopy method used here had the benefit over X-ray, in terms of precision even
due to slight change in chemical composition. Study was also carried out for detection of particles in
air, water and land. Extensive mining was undertaken in the Mafefe and Mathabatha areas in the
Limpopo Province of South Africa, where the wastes were disposed in the village itself. Spectral
lines were recorded for each type of rock samples, which were obtained from library of Council for
Geosciences. Then, the observation were taken and forwarded as given in Fig. 3.
From Fig. 3, it can be inferred that the different asbestos minerals were found in the region and all
showed similar reflectance. Anthophylite and tremolite showed similar reflectance at lower wavelengths but differed at higher. Anthophylite did not saturate in the region as compared to tremolite.
The study showed that it was better and was more precise than the conventional methods of extensive sampling and chemical analysis. It also could have been better if was carried out on a space
borne sensor. Thus, potential pollutant of the area could be identified with better means and steps
could be taken to check them.
SCOPES OF REMOTE SENSING IN INDIAN MINING INDUSTRY
With the privatization of mining industries, mineral growth increased in India. This demands the application of new technologies as remote sensing and thermal imagery for mineral exploration, geological mapping, land mapping and to address environmental issues. Remote Sensing is the application or use of the remotely sensed data from satellites or airborne sensors followed by their interpretation. This reduces cost and time of the study with very high accuracy. Presently, it has become a
standard first step for mineral explorations [14]. In India, the National Remote Sensing Agency
(NRSA) has started working on this [15]. With launching of the Earthwatch, it is expected that the remote sensing technologies would be revolutionized. In this, a low flying craft with the air borne sensors (80 m) was used to take readings at fixed intervals. However, such explorations were not widely
carried out in India. Orissa is the only state having digital database of 75000 sqkm area that includes
high resolution, radiometric, digital elevations and topographical data [16].
124
POSTALE 2008
Fig 3: Reflectance Of Different Asbestos Minral Found In The Area

Thus, a national policy should be set up to enhance the use of remote sensing in mining, particularly
for (i) mineral exploration, (ii) geological and land mapping and (iii) environmental effects. Every
state should have its mineral database available for the investors. Remote sensing must be a mandatory device especially for the regions like north-eastern states, Jammu and Kasmir and coastal
area. Policy must be framed for mineral exploration through remote sensing in seabed and deep sea
area under Indian coastal zone. Apart from framing the policy regarding this, financial allocation is
also required to carry out the work by suitable agencies like NRSA, CIMFR, NGRI etc.
REFERENCES
1. John Gongerich, Mahasa Roostaii, laude A Durocher , Maryam Dehghani, Application of remote sensing in miniral explorations, downloaded from: www.gisdevelopment.net/application/geology/mineral/ma04066abs.htm
2. Sandeep
Ray,
Evolutiom
of
mining
software
market
in
India,
downloaded
from:
www.gisdevelopment.net/application/geology/mineral/geom0001.htm
3. Majid H. Tangestani, A comparative approach on TIR and VNIR-SWIR datasets of ASTER instruments for lithological mapping
in
Neyriz
ophiolite
zone,
SW
Iran,
downloaded
from:
http://www.gisdevelopment.net/application/geology/mineral/ma06_6.htm
4. H. Ranjbar, H. Shahriari and M.Honarmand, Comparison of ASTER and ETM+ data for exploration of porphyry copper mineralization:
A
case
study
of
Sar
Cheshmeh
areas,
Kerman,
Iran,
downloaded
from:
www.gisdevelopment.net/application/geology/mineral/ma03028pf.htm
125
POSTALE 2008
5. Shahab Poursaleh, Separation of carbonates using PCA on ASTER bands, downloaded from:
http://www.gisdevelopment.net/application/geology/mineral/geom0018.htm
6. I.C. Das, Spectral signatures and spectral mixture modeling as a tool for targeting aluminous laterite and bauxite ore deposits, Koraput, India, downloaded from: www.gisdevelopment.net/application/geology/mineral/geom0017.htm
7. A.Y.B Anifowose, O.A. Bamisaye and I.B. Odeyemi, Establishing A Solid Mineral Database for A Part of Southwestern Nigeria, downloaded from: http://www.gisdevelopment.net/application/geology/mineral/maf06_15.htm
8. Liu Yingchun. The Application of the TM data to the gold deposit prospecting, downloadd from:
www.gisdevelopment.net/aars/acrs/1996/ts10/ts10005.asp
9. Qizhong Lin, Suhong Liu, Linhai Jing and Jianwen Ma, The Macroscopic Effect of Remote Sensing Geoinformation and Mineral prospecting downloaded from: www.gisdevelopment.net/aars/acrs/1999/ps6/ps61231a.asp
10. Floriz Khairi and Pegah Izadpanah, The Methods of permian limestones enhamcement by using of Remote Sensing,
downloaded from: www.gisdevelopment.net/application/geology/mineral/index.htm
11. Lei Jiannian Gao Huijun Qiu Shaopeng Zhang Guangchao Zhang Feng, The Application Study of RS and GIS Technology in
Environmental Remote Sensing Investigation of She Fu -- Dongsheng Coal fields In China, downloaded from:
www.gisdevelopment.net/aars/acrs/1999/ps6/ps6203pf.htm
12. Feng Fucheng, Mao Yaobaom Wan Young and Wang Xinmin, Remote Sensing Research for Geological Area Selection of
Coalbed
Maehane
in
Qinshui
Basin,
Shanxi,
Chian,
downloaded
from:
www.gisdevelopment.net/aars/acrs/1999/ps2/ps200a.asp
13. Brilliant M. Petja, Yaw A. Twumasi, George T.Tengbeh, Phila C. Sibandze, Leon Croukamp, Spectral Differentiation of Asbestos Minerals in South Africa for Potential Use in Pollution Monitoring, downloaded from :
http://www.gisdevelopment.net/application/geology/mineral/maf06_26.htm
14. P.K.
Chamapti
Ray,
GIS
in
geosciences:
the
recent
trends,
downloaded
from:
www.gisdevelopment.net/application/geology/mineral/geom0012pf.htm
15. A. Venkateshwar, Scope for application of GPS in Indian Coal Industry, downloaded from:
www.gisdevelopment.net/technology/gps/techgp0047.htm
16. Pranit
Bhasin,
Mineral
exploration
using
modern
techniques,
downloaded
from:
www.gisdevelopment.net/application/geology/mineral/geom0014.htm
126
POSTALE 2008
POLICY REQUIREMENTS FOR CLOSURE OF (ABANDONED) MINES

R. SUNDAR SINGH
Senior Manager (Mines), V.M. Salgaocar & Brother Pvt. Ltd., Goa
DR.V.M.S.R.MURTHY
Associate Professor, Indian School of Mines University, Dhanbad
GURDEEP SINGH
Professor & Head., Indian School of Mines University, Dhanbad
P. NATESAN
Chief General Manager (Mines), V.M. Salgaocar & Brother Pvt. Ltd., Goa
INTRODUCTION
The present legal framework in India basically covers the preparation of progressive and final mine
closure plans and about the financial assurance. The abandoned mine closures have not been taken
up in a very serious way in the present legal framework. The population of mines under closed category increases by default, also its associated legacy. Resource additions due to explorations cannot
out speed the production levels. Hence, the mines are bound to close sooner or later. The recent
global economic slow down will trigger more mine closures, of course unplanned. Inventory of mines
closed or abandoned classified under the reason under which they had been closed will help the
policy makers to evolve strategies specific to the category.
PRIORITISATION OF SITES
Mines get closed due to any or combination of the following instances:
1. depletion of all reserves
2. economically unviable
3. accidents
4. legal or statutory orders
5. community issues
6. lack of demand of the mineral
A mine closed due to depletion of reserves cannot have the closure strategy as that one closed due
to lack of demand of mineral. Not all the mines closed can be considered for reopening. The mines
which were closed for reasons other than reserve depletion are always a potential asset or risk to
risk to the state.
The abandoned mines are found in many places all over the world where there have been historical
mining activities and their rehabilitation is expensive. Clearly, society previously received both the
benefits and the negative impacts from these activities but the question is who should pay for the
rehabilitation of these areas. One opinion is that the government should pay for rehabilitation; while
another is that the previous owners (or their heirs) should be held responsible for such clean-up actions (i.e. the polluter pays principle in its purest form). An issue with the latter option is that for most
abandoned mines the previous owners are no longer viable companies, cannot be located, or an
individual owner may have died and it is therefore impossible to recover any costs. Another issue is
that some sites are located in areas with many older abandoned mines making it uncertain who is
responsible for the pollution.
The legacy left behind in the closed mine community forms precedence for the mines nearing closure. Unforeseen circumstances can also result in the temporary closure, mothballing or placing a
mine on stand-by. Temporary closure raises a number of considerations such as; how long can a
mine be idle before it must implement full closure; how should employees and suppliers be treated
POSTALE 2008
(financially and otherwise) to ensure their services are available when the mine re-opens; and what
level of environmental controls must be maintained to limit long-term impacts as well as short term
costs.
The authors have collated the number of abandoned mine sites as given in Table 1.
Table 1 List of abandoned mines A global perspective
Country
No. of Mines
US
557650
NSW
500
Victoria
2000
Canada
10139
UK
11700
S Africa
143
Ireland
128
Sweden
1000
Japan
5500
Chile
665
Scotland
80
589505
In India, we see mine closures done in an unplanned manner in even large operations due to various
compulsions. With the present reserve base and production levels in India, the average mine life of
major minerals like iron ore, manganese, Bauxite and limestone in our country may not last more
than 50 years. Any increase in the reserve base will be offset by the increased production targets in
long run.
The mines and quarries producing low volume industrial minerals and construction materials are
often the life line of the undeveloped regions, but remain a challenge in dealing with when becomes
abandoned due to their many in number.
The total value of mineral production (excluding atomic minerals) during the year 2007-08 is estimated at Rs. 99,533.10 crore.1 The amount of royalty paid by the coal sector to the various states in
1999-2000 was about Rs.21.1 billion2. A tiny fraction of revenue collected by the states from the mineral industry primarily as royalty can be pooled to plan, implement and monitor the remediation of
abandoned mine sites.
The National Mineral Policy 2008 states that Efforts would be made to convert old disused mining
sites into forests and other appropriate forms of land use3.
OPTIONS FOR CLOSURE
States can have different ranking/ prioritisation criteria for the rehabilitation of abandoned mines.
Typically, criteria used in the prioritisation focus first on public safety and then the environment.
The number of mines abandoned in India as per IBM is 297. The financial assurance being levied on
the Mining lessees cannot offset the closure cost. Hence, the need for State to divert the revenue
from mines to a Central Closure Fund to take up the neutralize the abandoned sites. In few cases,
even the State or the lessees are not in a position to take up timely planned closure due to court directions. Grant of mining leases over small extent of lands will not support systematic mine closures
in regional level as individual mines develop their own dumps, tailing dams, mills, etc resulting in
many small sized mining units.
128
POSTALE 2008
Area specific approach to deal with the abandoned sites resulting due to small scale mining has to
be initiated. Effective participation of stakeholders in policy making can deliver expected results on
ground(Fig.1).6
Fig. 1 : A Comprehensive Mine Closure Methodology For Abandoned Mines

Comprehensive mine closure for abandoned mines, presently operating mines, and future mines
remains a major challenge for virtually every mining nation in the world. To accommodate the need
to close abandoned mines and to ensure that existing and future mines are appropriately closed will
require the cooperation of a diverse stakeholder community, new and innovative methods of financing closure and major policy and legislative change in most nations to ensure post-mining sustainable development4
Evaluating risks and unknowns during the different phases of mine life cycle form the key for developing suitable closure planning strategies (Fig. 2).
Fig. 2 : Evaluating Risks And Unknowns In Mine Closure During The Mine Life Cycle
129
POSTALE 2008
CONCLUSION
Detailed regulatory framework is required to deal with the abandoned mine sites on each closure
category basis. Guidelines specific to individual categories of abandoned sites are necessary to be
developed to guide the industry. Any attempt to address the abandoned sites remediation issues
should necessarily have the final objectives and its performance indicators, without which the efforts
will not be tangible.
REFERENCES
1. Annual report 2007-08, Ministry of Mines
2. Overview of Mining and Mineral Industry in India, TERI 2001
3. National Mineral Policy 2008
4. Mining for the Future, MMSD 2002
5. Guidelines For Preparation Of Mine Closure Plan, IBM
6. Stakeholder Engagement Standard, Exposure draft September 2005 Accountability 2005
7. Planning for Integrated Mine Closure: Toolkit, ICMM
130
POSTALE 2008
CLOSURE PLANNING FOR MINES -- AN APPRAISAL

D. K. KHANDA
Mahanadi Coalfields Limited, Sundargarh
B. K. PAL
National Institute of Technology, Rourkela
INTRODUCTION
Mine closure is an intricate phase in the life of the mine, which calls for comprehensive planning beforehand. Many investigations to be made hand in hand with the mine plan in order that the site is
released in an ecologically sustainable state of the society suggest the planning for the closure
phase. However in many instances of the mine closure, such practices are rarely seen.
PLANNING FOR SUCCESSFUL MINE CLOSURE
The chief goal of closure planning is to return the mine site in an ecological sustainable and suitable
state for future land use. Keeping the essential considerations of the mine closure, it should be the
goal of mining companies to integrate the closure plan with the mining plan in a cohesive manner. In
addition to the environmental impact assessment implementation of the following phases in effective
manner is required for successful closure of mine:
Exploration,
Mine plan,
Development,
Production phase,
Mine closure, &
Post mine closure phase

Statutory requirements as per the Indian mining law need further modifications in view of the everchanging international and national mining scenario. Closure of any mine requires adequate measures to prevent solid waste generated during the life of the mine. Attempts are thus required to develop guidelines for safe and technically feasible closure of mines proposed to be closed in near future, so as to make the mine closure safe, economical and less painful [3].
Closure of any mine requires adequate measures to prevent solid waste generated during the life of
the mine. Post closure planning involves determination of alternatives for different activities and timings when these activities should be initiated. Planning encourages effective utilization of the deposit
and also provides for phase wise development of mining deposit. Waste minimization, mineral conservation and judicious land use are the other benefits of other planning. If the land is not reclaimed
to original topography or appearance, then it is developed for some useful purpose, which is called
rehabilitation [2].
To protect and control the environment in systematic and scientific manner an environmental management plan is framed out. Reliable evaluations of the condition of the mine are needed with scientific database, particularly for evaluating the closure criteria scientifically/technically. Nowadays,
there is also a pressing demand on mine operators to evaluate the condition of the mine for prediction of the residual life of the mine with reference to safety, economy and conservation. Although a
number of techniques have been developed to determine the life of the mine, it is not an easy task
and all suffer from deficiencies and limitations to give foolproof closure criteria with respect to economy and safety.
As an alternative, integrated approach is needed combining the benefits of the recent mining technology and present operational parameters of the mine for development of guidelines on closure
management without much pain on the part of the mine owners, local community etc. For the
POSTALE 2008
purpose, it is required to evaluate the parameters influencing closure of the mine with due regard to
the technology and safety.
ASPECTS OF MINE CLOSURE PLANNING
There are five important aspects of mine closure planning which are enumerated below:
Legal Aspects
Environmental related legislation on mine closure and effects are discussed by many investigators.
In recent years, there had been some awareness regarding mitigative measures for control of pollutions, and some of the salient acts passed by parliament are:
Indian Forest Act, 1972
Wildlife Protection Act, 1972
The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1974
The Forest Conservation Act, 1980
The Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981
The Environment Protection Act, 1986
Mineral Conservation and Development Rule, 1988
The Environment Impact Assessment Notification, 1994
The Environment Impact Assessment Notification, 2006
The Mineral Concession Rules, 1960

Like other developed countries, a few years back i.e. in 2003, Govt. of India, Ministry of Mines has
made some amendments in Mineral Conservation and Development Rule, 1988 incorporating the
closure aspects of the mines. Earlier, the National Mineral Policy as amended in 1993 has led stress
on environment, forest and energy conservation. The rehabilitation of closed mines and the displaced persons besides the afforestation of the mined out area has also been made as the part of
the policy. But the amendment in Mineral Conservation and Development Rule in 2003 has introduced a requirement for the submission of the mine closure plan one in advance of the closure. The
regulatory bodies like Indian Bureau of Mines, State Pollution Control Boards and Director General
of Mines Safety supervise the entire mining process and they keep the mine operation on the check.
The Central Government has amended the Mineral Concession Rules, 1960 and Mineral Conservation and Development Rule, 1988 vide Notification No. GSR 329 (E) dated 10.4.2003 and No. GSR
(E)330 dated 10.4.2003 respectively.
As per these amendments all the existing mining lessees are required to submit the Progressive
Mine Closure Plan along with prescribed financial sureties within 180 days from date of the notification. Further, lessee is required to submit Mine Closure Plan one year prior to the proposed closure
of the mine. In the notification it has been enumerated that the progressive closure plan and the
final closure plan should be in the format and as per the guidelines issued by the Indian Bureau of
Mines.
Technical Aspects
The technical aspects of mine closure planning deals with the following parameters:
Management of pit slopes and waste dumps
Management of hydrology and hydro-geology
Details of decommissioning of infrastructures
Closure of entry to the mine

Environmental Aspects
The environmental aspect is concerned with the fulfillment of objectives of the following needs:
Management of final voids

132
POSTALE 2008
Reclamation of forest/vegetation
Management of recharge areas
Acceptable surface and ground water flows
Alternative use of land
A closure plan is an effective strategy for improving environmental performance and profitability, reducing liability and providing a basis for consulting with interested and affected parties on site rehabilitation. Such strategy on environmental management must be compatible with the prevailing mine
practices. The management strategy must incorporate scope for reviewing and for further improvement. An effective mine closure plan is one that integrate day-to-day operations with the end objectives in all implementation through out the life cycle of the mine. The plan must be periodically reviewed to remain current and effective.
Social Aspects
The effect of social impact of mine closure is of great concern and involves the following aspects:
9
Re-deployment of work force
9
Management of community facilities
9
Canalization of available water
9
Emancipation from PAPs
Financial Aspects
Mine closure cost elements needs to be clearly defined keeping in view of the following aspects:
o
Cost of closure activities
o
Cost of organization for executing the closure activities
o
Cost of post project monitoring
o
Bond/insurance for the closure cost
EFFECTIVE MINE CLOSURE PLANNING GUIDELINES FROM INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL ON
MINING AND METALS (ICMM)
The International Council on Mining and Metals (ICMM)'s published Planning for Integrated Mine
Closure which provides practical guidance for a key challenge in the mining sector: closing a mine in
a sustainable manner. This is what ultimately defines the long-term environmental and social impact
of a mine. Closure, when undertaken in an integral and sustainable fashion, is a significant part of
the mine's contribution to an area's social, economic and institutional development. One catalyst for
the new guide was the 2003 report of the Mining, Minerals and Sustainable Development Project.
This noted that "the planning and development of any mining project needs to be aimed at creating
durable benefits on a number of scales" and that the social and economic dimensions of closure
planning still frequently receive too little attention.
In 2006 ICMM conducted a survey on the status of integrated mine closure planning within the industry. This study found numerous examples of leading practices but also a number of areas that required further improvement. In summary, it is increasingly obvious that more consistent implementation of good practices is required throughout the mining sector and the guide is designed to support
this goal [1].
A key component in closure planning is highlighted by the word integrated in the title of the new publication. Closure is not something to be considered only as a mine nears the end of its productive life.
It needs to be part of every aspect of the mine life cycle.
Integration is about fully incorporating social and community issues into closure plans. In the past,
closure planning has been the responsibility of operations management and focused on environ-
133
POSTALE 2008
mental aspects. Integrated planning requires community engagement to scope the challenges, conceptualize the solutions, implement the design and verify the outcomes.
The people involved in closure planning may hold different views on what can and cannot be
achieved and expectations may vary among stakeholders. Understanding these differences, which
may change over time, is key to closure planning today. Working with various stakeholders to come
up with balanced, realistic and achievable target closure outcomes that can be funded and supported should be the goal.
Effective closure planning has numerous benefits. When communities get involved it generates
broader support for closure decisions. In addition, closure cost estimates will be more accurate, increasing the likelihood that sufficient funds will be available for this phase. Potential liabilities will
also be progressively reduced and the risk of regulatory non-compliance will be minimized [4].
The new planning guide is not meant to be prescriptive but it provides essential tools designed to
support multinational mining companies as well as small and medium sized enterprises. The six
chapters give an overview of the different facets of integrated closure planning for company personnel involved in all stages of the mine life cycle. The final chapter consists of a detailed descriptions of
13 tools, most of which are new and have been developed to cover gaps identified in current closure
planning [7].
The guide describes three basic steps for developing an effective closure plan - steps that should
blend into each other over time rather than being distinctive stages. The first step is the development
of a conceptual closure plan that is used to guide activities during exploration, pre-feasibility, feasibility/design and construction. When the conceptual plan is well defined and based on community and
stakeholder input, it may not change much during the initial years of an operation. It will link closely
to operational, environment and social management plans, and includes various monitoring programs needed to verify that the closure planning process is meeting its goals [6].
The second step involves development and implementation of a detailed closure plan, which increases the depth and detail of specific goals and milestones from the conceptual plan. This plan
remains active throughout operations, although it needs to be regularly updated. The backbone of a
detailed closure plan are the action plans, indicating what is to be done and when, who is responsible for the action, the resources required and the costs to complete the action.
The third and final step is the effective transition to closure, which may take the form of a decommissioning and post-closure plan. This should be predominantly a project driven plan; the result of planning during the mine life [5].
The processes and tools in this guide would ideally be applied at the pre-feasibility stage and
throughout the mine life. In reality though, many mines already in operation today may have never
had any closure planning. The closure planning approach and guidance is still valid in these circumstances but may require more effort over a shorter period of time.
MODERN MINE CLOSURE PLANNING TOOLS
Balanced closure outcomes help create community ownership of the plan and increase the likelihood
of successful closure. As the guide notes, "Increasingly today, management looks to community
ownership of the post-closure goals as the well of energy that will permit closure initiatives to prosper
when the mining company is no longer involved."
The physical activities that are needed to close down a mine are relatively straightforward. The
greater challenge today involves leaving a social and environmental legacy that operators, governments and communities can be proud of. The long-term reputation of the industry depends on it.
134
POSTALE 2008
Remote sensing and GIS can play an important role in mine closure planning. Remote sensing gives
synoptic and repetitive coverage of affected area. Thus identification and evaluation of the geoenvironmental degradation becomes techno-economically feasible and more convenient through
application of remote sensing. The digital data acquired by the satellite and digital image processing
techniques are quite useful for land cover mapping.
CONCLUSION
Mining Engineers, Environment Engineers, Mining Industry and Government today must work together to care for the future generations. Restoration and rehabilitation are to be taken as important
aspects of mineral resource management. Mine closure planning is to be integrated with the mine
planning. Reviewing and improving of the ongoing activities in a mine should be practiced for effective mine closure. Strategic planning for mine closure needs to be developed to cover all environmental aspects, socio-economic conditions and technical parameters.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The authors are thankful to Mr. S.R. Upadhyay, Chairman-cum-Managing Director and also to Mr. D.
Chattopadhyay, (HR) for their encouragement to perform this work. They are also thankful to Mr. N.
K. Jain, General Manager, Basundhara Garjan Bahal Area and also to Mr. K. C. Khuntia, Project
Officer, Basundhara Opencast (West) for providing necessary facilities without which this publication
would not be possible. They are also thankful to authorities of National Institute of Technology,
Rourkela for granting opportunities to carry out this work.
REFERENCES
1. Floyd, J., Wilson, C. (2006): Closure of the Golden Sunlight due to Mine Environmental Quality and Land Management Problems Survey Report of Jefferson County Local Development Corporation (JLDC) and Community Advisory Transition
Committee.
2. Handle, E. (2005): Industrial Park Site Study and Transition Plan of the Mine Property Summary Report of East of Whitehall,
MT.
3. Krupp, F. (2004): An Environmental Challenge for the West, Proc. of the Western Governors Association Environment
Summit, pp.258 276.
4. Marks, B. (2004): Nomination of Mine Closure considering Damages on Agriculture Status Report of Dept. of Agriculture for
Hard rock Mineral Award for Community Outreach.
5. Wilmoth, R., McCloskey, L., Jordan, D., Lefever, J. (2003): Prevention of Acid Mine Drainage from Open Pit High Walls. Proc.
of the 6th Int. Conf. on Acid Rock Drainage (ICARD), held in Cairns, Queensland, Australia, July 16-21, pp. 184 195.
6. Wilmoth, R., McCloskey, L., and Jordan, D. (2003): Prevention of the Mine Site from Heavy Damage and Adoption of Open Pit
High Walls Proc. of the 5th Int. Conf. on Hydrometallurgy, held in Vancouver, Canada, Aug. 02 06, Volume 2, pp. 18611871.
7. Whitlock, J and Whitlock, C., (2001): Recent Advances in Technologies for Biological Treatment of Thio-cyanate, Cyanide,
Heavy Metals and Nitrates. Proc. of the Annual TMS Conference and Cyanide Symposium, held in British Columbia, Feb.
22 25, pp.315- 324.
135
POSTALE 2008
DESIGN OF LIGHTING SYSTEM IN SURFACE MINES A NEW STRATEGY

M. ARUNA, Y.V. RAO
National Institute of Technology, Surathkal
N. C. KARMAKAR
Institute of Technology, BHU, Varanasi
INTRODUCTION
In surface mines, where the work is carried out during the night hours, artificial lighting is very much
necessary for safe and efficient working condition. Since huge investment is involved in mining projects, which involves powerful, large and heavy mobile equipment requires good working condition
for increased productivity[1,2,3]. Donald Trotter[4] and Stewart Don[5] refer to various studies concluded that poor lighting is one of the cause of accident, which can be reduced by increase in illumination level. As per William Bruce Bell[6] one must light a task according to the ability of ones eyes
to see and not according to the way a light source illuminates. This signifies the design of illumination system, which is very important for good vision, so that individuals may work therein with reasonable comfort.
One major problem in mine lighting is continuous changing of workings including haul roads[7,8]
within pit limit, due to which it is almost impossible to provide any kind of permanent structure for
illumination. The shifting or erection of poles at regular interval is necessary so as to confirm required light level as per the standard. Low surrounding reflectance is another problem in the mines.
On the other hand, if minimum luminance level is ensured by the system, it would always produce
necessary visibility. Because of this reasons it is very difficult to maintain lighting standards throughout the work area. This demands the scientific design of illumination system in any lighting project.
LIGHTING STANDARDS
In India provisions are made regarding mine lighting under Chapter XIII of The Coal Mines Regulations (CMR) 1957[9]. In Regulation No.154(2)(b), the Chief Inspector of Mines is authorized to prescribe the standards of lighting to be provided by notification in the official Gazette. In this context
standards are prescribed for opencast mine illumination by Circular (Legis.) 1/1976 and Circular
(Legis.) 3/1976 for coal and metal mines, respectively[10]. The standard of lighting specified is in
terms of minimum required illuminance level.
The Commission Internationale de Eclairage (CIE) i.e. International Commission on Illumination,
Austria has brought out the Guidelines to the Lighting for Opencast Mines[11] in the year 1987,
which stresses upon uniformity as well. CIE also suggests for average illuminance level instead of
minimum illuminance level. Even the Bureau of Indian Standard (BIS)[12] code of practice for lighting
of public thoroughfares cites average illuminance level and overall uniformity ratio for traffic road
lighting. Table-1 highlights the comparison of DGMS, CIE and BIS illumination standards at some
critical places.
SYSTEM OF LIGHITNG IN SURFACE MINES
In mines spot lights are provided at all work areas in addition to the machine mounted luminaries. In
general, luminaries may be mounted on:
machines used in the mines
movable telescopic tiltable trolley mount lighting mast
tripods
towers erected on planned locations outside the blasting zone
POSTALE 2008
Generally lamps mounted on tripods are used near the loading machines, for face lighting. Telescopic lighting mast (also called mobile light towers) either self-powered or towable type is used at
the place, where more number of activities is carried out simultaneously. In some critical areas such
as dumpyards, stackyards etc. where the dumping activities and the vehicle movement are being
carried out, it is advisable to go for movable lighting system connected to the main lighting scheme.
In many of the mines it found that the separate portable type generator set is provided for the
dumpyard illumination. The high mast system can be provided depending on the dumping surface
area. The light towers generally used are of heights 12 m, 20 m and 30 m. Places like stackyards,
wagon loading point, crusher site etc. are illuminated by metal halide (MH) or high pressure sodium
vapour (HPSV) lamps mounted on towers. Each tower consists of four to six luminaires covering a
large area, around it[13].
The haul roads are illuminated with single side arrangement of poles, which can be shiftable and
erected on a pre-planned safe distance[14]. In most of the Indian mines the height of the poles varying from 7 m to 12 m, with the angle of the light arm usually 35 to 70, with horizontal. The HPSV
and fluorescent tube lamps (FTL) are very commonly used for mine roadway lighting, irrespective of
the type of haulage system. In some mines high pressure mercury vapor (HPMV) lamps are also
used for roadway lighting. In semi-mechanised mines where fluorescent tubes are used halogen
lamps (HAL) illuminate the junctions.
PRINCIPLE OF LIGHTING
Comfortable vision is a highly subjective parameter, which may be difficult to ascertain. It is influenced by various factors, both physical and personal. An effective lighting installation is one, which
has been designed and installed so as to provide sufficient illuminance on a visual task.
Illuminance And Luminance Level
Illuminance is one of the factors, which influences visibility. Illuminance is governed by lighting standards specified by various regulatory bodies. These standards are for the purposes of guidance only,
because depending on other factors, better visibility may be achieved with lower illumination, or even
the standards mentioned may give inadequate lighting. In fact illumination affects visibility in an indirect manner. The amount of light reflected from the object to be seen, i.e. its brightness level is of
direct importance. An increase in lumen output probably means an increased surface brightness.
The brightness of the surface is mainly depending upon the incident illumination falling on the surface and also on its reflection factor. In mines because of poor surrounding reflectance the actual
required lux level is very high, compared to the recommended standards.
Uniformity
Good lighting is not only a matter of more light but is also a matter of proper distribution of light. For
example, well-lit road surfaces have to appear evenly illuminated, with no apparent dark patches and
a minimum of glare. It is possible only when the distribution of light is more or less uniform throughout the length of haul road. Uniformity ratio of illuminance[15] on a given plane is a measure of the
variation of illuminance over it. There are two ways of expressing uniformity ratio, (i) ratio of the
minimum to maximum illuminance or (ii) ratio of the minimum to the average illuminance. The latter
is known as overall uniformity ratio and denoted as Uo. Overall uniformity ratio is considered for
mine lighting design.
In mines because of undulating terrain and continuous movement of working faces, it is very difficult
to maintain uniform distribution of light throughout the field. It is recommended[11,12] that uniformity
should not be less than 0.3 for the perception to remain acceptable. Bell[6] introduced the concept of
diversity ratio which is reciprocal of uniformity ratio. He suggested the ratio of maximum to minimum
illuminance as 5:1 for any lighting installation. The renowned British Lighting Engineer, W. R. Ste-
137
POSTALE 2008
vens, mentioned that a diversity ratio of 1.5 to 1 in illumination should generally be accepted as permissible minimum level[6]. The Australian Standard AS 1680-1 requires that the ratio of the minimum
to average illuminance on an unobstructed work place should not be less than 0.8[16].
Glare
Glare is caused as a result of any excessively bright source of light in the field of view that results in
the loss of visibility, discomfort, annoyance, interference with vision, or eye fatigue[17]. Glare may be
of two types, namely disability glare and discomfort glare[2]. Disability glare directly interferes with
visibility and ultimately with visual performance. Disability glare is very important in mining. However
glare is not a major problem in surface mines, unlike in underground mines where the mounting
height is restricted. In surface mines glare can be easily avoided by mounting the luminaires out of
vision field and also with proper angle of orientation.
IMPORTANCE OF SURFACE REFLECTANCE IN LIGHTING DESIGN
The foremost importance of the lighting design is to provide sufficient illuminance on visual task. But
increase in lux level need not necessarily improve visibility proportionately. In fact, illuminance level
i.e. light falling on a visual task affects the visibility in an indirect manner. It is rather the brightness
level of the visual task that bears direct relationship with level of visibility. The brightness of a surface
depends on the property of the surface known as reflectance. Hence it is the reflected illuminance
that has greater bearing on what is seen[2,18].
Because of this, it is of paramount importance for the lighting designers to have a thorough knowledge of the reflectance factor of the surface for which illumination system is to be designed. The reflectance property of the surface helps in estimating the proportion of light the environment reflects
as well as it helps in getting the idea of how the reflected light is distributed. The reflectance property
of any surface, particularly a rock surface, is greatly influenced by the amount of moisture it contains.
It is important to understand how wetness of a surface influences the characteristics of the reflected
light. The lighting designed for a dry surface may not suffice when the surface becomes wet.
DESIGNING LIGHTING SYSTEM BASED ON INCIDENT LIGHT
In the present study a stretch of 1.0 km long haul road was considered in an iron ore bench of 12 m
width, which is quite common in surface mines. Design of the haul road was attempted with nine
different types of luminaries namely, 40 W twin set FTL, 80, 125 and 250 W HPMV and 70, 100, 150,
250 and 400 W HPSV lamps. Lamp mounting heights have been varied at five steps, namely 8, 10,
12, 14 and 16 m. Tilt angle of luminaire was kept constant at 10, as it gave best results at this angle[18]. Using SURLux[19] design software, maximum pole spacing was determined, for a given
pole height and luminare characterstics, in compliance with the required lighting standards (1.2 lux
minimum illuminance level, 4.0 lux average illuminance level and 0.3 overall uniformity ratio). By optimizing the pole spacing, the number of poles required for each type of sources to illuminate the
entire length of road was calculated.
While calculating the number of poles, fractional number has been rounded off to the nearest integer
and it has been increased by one to have poles at both the ends of the road. Table-2 gives the design parameters, such as pole height, tilt angle and pole spacing, for nine types of sources, for five
varied mounting heights. In some cases, it is not possible to satisfy minimum lighting standards at
the same time for any combination of spacing as marked by asterisks.
Using the optimized lighting configurations (as indicated in Table-2), total annual costs for all the
lighting systems were calculated with the help of SURLux cost model[19]. Total annual costs comprises of three cost components, such as total fixed cost, total running cost and total maintenance
cost. Total annual lighting cost for all the lighting systems is also given in Table-2.
138
POSTALE 2008
DESIGNING LIGHTING SYSTEM BASED ON SURFACE REFLECTANCE

In general, the more the light the surfaces reflect (the higher the reflectance) the easier they are to
see[20]. Further, wetting the surface changes its specular conditions abruptly [21], due to which the
average luminance of a surface increases, which results in decrease of overall uniformity[18]. Because of this reason it is not practical to design the lighting system with respect to average luminance level (for low surface reflectance). Hence the design has been made taking 0.5 lux as minimum acceptable reflected light (instead of incident light) and 0.3 as reflected overall uniformity ratio.
The reflectance of haul road is 11.27 % for dry and 9.97 % for wet condition (as obtained from laboratory studies)[22]. Table-3 indicates the optimized lighting configurations for the design based on
reflectance of mine surface, for both dry and wet condition. The respective annual cost is given in
Table-4.
OVERALL DISCUSSION
From Table-2 it is observed that with 16 m height pole the total annual cost for 150 W HPSV lamps
is the minimum (Rs. 87,739/-), followed by 100 W HPSV lamps
(Rs. 99,071) at 10 m pole
height. In most of the cases the cost is high with FTL and HPMV lamps. This is mainly because of
their shorter life and relatively more number of poles required compared to other type of sources.
The cost is high with FTL at 14 m pole heights (Rs. 4,67,404/-). However the uniformity ratio is high
with these lamps compared to high wattage HPSV sources. As indicated in Table-2, in some of the
cases, represented by asterisks, the design parameters do not satisfy the minimum lighting standards. In all other cases, the lighting design could fulfill the minimum illuminance level (1.2 lux minimum illuminance level, 4.0 lux average illuminance level and 0.3 overall uniformity ratio).
Table-3 gives the design parameters as obtained using the SURLux program, at five different stages
of pole heights. It represents the maximum possible pole spacing for given height of pole to achieve
minimum reflected illumination standards. Out of nine sources, with some sources namely, 2 x 40 W
FTL, 80 W HPMV, 70 W HPSV and 100 W HPSV, it is not possible to achieve the minimum lighting
standards, hence not shown in Table-3. As indicated in Table-3, in some of the cases, represented
by asterisks, the design parameters do not satisfy the minimum lighting standards. In all other cases,
the lighting design could fulfill the minimum illuminance level (0.5 lux minimum illuminance level and
0.3 overall uniformity ratio) reflected from the surface. For example from Table-3 it is seen that the
optimum pole spacing for 150 W HPSV sources to meet the light requirements is 49 m for dry condition and 45 m for wet condition, both at 16 m pole heights.
Table-4 indicates cost of the illumination system for all the combinations mentioned in Table-3. It is
seen that lowest cost for haul road illumination in iron ore bench is achieved with 150 W HPSV
sources at 16 m pole heights, under both dry and wet conditions. Illumination cost under wet condition is more than under dry condition by
{(1,66,096 - 1,51,849) / 1,51,849} x 100 i.e. 9.4 %
However, by designing the lighting system based on surface reflectance, taking the worst condition
in the mine (i.e. wet condition), illumination cost is increased by approximately two times of the design based on incident light.
CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Indian guidelines are totally silent about the uniformity ratio and average illuminance level, which are
important parameters for effective lighting design. Again, Indian guidelines on illumination standards
are based on the incident light expressed in the unit of lux. Surface reflectance property takes no
role in the design aspects. Therefore, the suggested minimum level of illumination may fall far below
the required level for good visibility if the reflectance of the surface is very poor. For assure visibility
as per standards, it will be preferred to design lighting system based on the reflected light level
rather than incident light level. Thus designing under wet surface condition would ensure minimum
139
POSTALE 2008
light level even under worst condition of surface reflectivity. The factors like type of luminaire, mounting height, spacing, aiming angle etc., govern the design of lighting installation. Scientific design of
artificial lighting is very important to fulfill the lighting standards as prescribed by various regulatory
bodies.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
An attempt has been made in this paper to design the lighting system based on reflectivity of
illuminating surfaces in mines, which already exists in a few non-mining type of projects. This
study therefore offers a new methodology for such design incorporating the reflectivity of road
surfaces.
The results of this study demonstrate the possibilities of introducing average illuminance level
and uniformity ratio in the design of illumination system for Indian surface mining industry, which
is mainly regulated by minimum illuminance level as per DGMS guidelines.
The study on the hypothetical haul road of 12 m width and 1 km stretch reveals that out of all the
nine different types of luminaires considered in the design,
150 W HPSV lamps mounted on
16 m high poles spaced at 45 m intervals offer the most suitable lighting system.
As the vision process is dependent on the reflected light, it is hoped that in near future, mine
lighting design would also give due weightage to surface reflectance. In that case the present
work would act as a leading study in the design of mine lighting.
Recommended design parameters for haul road illumination based on theoretical as well as field
study:
Minimum mounting height of lighting installation, in general, should be governed by HEMM
of maximum height plying on the road. Pole height may be varied from 12 to 16 m for haul
roads of around 12 m width, which is usually prevailing in Indian mines. From stability point
of view, pole height, in general, should not exceed 16 m. However, if the clearance height is
not sufficient then overhang of luminaire is to be avoided.
Spacing between poles depends upon the mounting height, luminous intensity distribution
characteristics of luminaire and the reflectance of illuminating surfaces. Pole intervals must
be regular to achieve high uniformity of light level over the entire haul road and for better
visual performance. As a thumb rule, for standard haul roads of 12 m width, the spacing varies up to 2 to 5 times the height of pole depending upon the luminaire characteristics.
Any luminaire, in general, gives its best effect up to 15 tilt angle. Low tilt angle has the advantage in controlling glare from the source.
As a general practice, light sources are located above the kerb of haul road of standard
width. For wider roads, overhang is preferred in comparison to high tilt angle (greater than
15) to achieve uniform distribution of light across the haul road.
Wherever the road takes sharp turn, care should be taken for proper illumination at the bend
by installing extra poles, if required.
Indian mining regulations specify only minimum illuminance level. But most of the countries
follow CIE guidelines which specify minimum average illuminance level as well as uniformity
ratio. Bureau of Indian Standards also specify minimum of 4.0 lux as the average illuminance level and 0.3 as the uniformity ratio for highways and other light traffic roadways. In
the present work, these aspects have been taken into consideration and it is proposed that
they may be incorporated in the statutory guidelines of DGMS for the Indian mining industry.
HPSV lamps are recommended for surface mine illumination as they have high luminous
flux as well as longer economic life compared to other types of lamps.
This work may be extended to other metallic and non-metallic mines, so that a set of design
parameters can be generated, which would be directly utilized by the mining industries for
design of illumination system.
REFERENCES
1. Karmakar N. C. and Chauhan B. S., Illumination Survey And Cost Analysis For Large Scale Open Cast Coal Mine, Indian
Mining & Engineering Journal, April, 29-32, 2002.
140
POSTALE 2008
2. Lewis W. H., Underground Coal Mine Lighting Handbook, Part 1: Background, Information Circular - 9073, Bureau of Mines,
United States Department of the Interior, 1986.
3. Lalith Mehtha, Energy Saving and Latest Trend in Road Lighting, Light Newsletter, Published by Indian Society of Lighting
Engineers, Mumbai, Vol. III, No. IV, October, 2003.
4. Donald Trotter, Mine Lighting, Canadian Mining Journal, No. 7-12, July-Dec, 24-31, 1977.
5. Stewart Don J., Light In Daily Life, Published by The Technical Press Ltd, London, 1948.
6. William Bruce Bell, Lighting In Coal Mines, Proceedings of the Symposium on Environmental Engineering in Coal Mining,
London, November, 63-71, 1972.
7. Bandhopadhyay P. K., Lighting of Open Cast Mines, Proceedings of National Conference on Lighting for 21st century, Bangalore, 1989.
8. Bandhopadhyay P. K., Lighting of Open Cast Mines, Proceedings of International Conference on Lighting Technology
Prakash 91, 254-259, 1991.
9. Anon., Coal Mines Regulations (CMR) 1957, India.
10. Anon., DGMS Circulars of 1976.
11. CIE, Guide to the Lighting for Opencast Mines, CIE Publication No. 128, 1988.
12. BIS, Code of Practice for Lighting of Public Throughfares, Indian Bureau of Standards, IS:1944 (Part I&II), Manek Bhavan,
New Delhi, April (1991).
13. Anon., Sigma Search Lights, Manufacturers Catalogue, 2000.
14. Aruna M, Rao Y. V, Harsha Vardhan & Karmakar N. C., Design of Illumination System In Surface Mines- A Case Study, Light
Newsletter, Published by Indian Society of Lighting Engineers, Vol. III, No. 11, April, 2003.
15. CIE, Street Lighting and Accidents, CIE Publication No. 30, 1976.a.
16. Anon, Lab Notes of Light Lab International Pty. Ltd., www.lsa.com.an
17. Helms Ronald N. and Clay Belcher M., Lighting for Energy Efficient Luminous
Environments, Published by Prentice-Hall,
New Jercy, Second Edition, 1991.
18. Ir. Van Bommel W. J. M. & de Boer J. B., Road Lighting, Published by Philips Technical Library, Kluwer Technische Bocken B.
V., Deneter-Antwerpen, 1980.
19. SURLux, Lighting Design Software developed by the authors.
20. Anon., Illumination Design for Interiors, Issued by the Lighting Service Bureau, London, 1948.
21. Boast, B. W., Illuminating Engineering, McGraw-Hill Book Co. Inc, New York, 1942.
22. Aruna, M., Rao, Y. V. & Karmakar, N. C., Study of Reflectance of Mine Surfaces and Its Influence on Design of Illumination
System of an Opencast Mine, Proceedings of International Conference on VISION 2004 A Challenge, Bangalore, November
4-7, 43-47, 2003.
141
POSTALE 2008
Table 1: Comparison Of Lighting Standards As Specified By Various Regulatory Bodies

DGMS Cir. Legis. 1&3
Location
Average
lux
Minimum lux
Haulroad
0.5 to 3.0 (H)
Dumpyard
3.0 (H)
Stackyard
3.0 (H)
Mine site office
0.2 (H)
Crusher premises
0.2 (H)
Near face
5.0 (H) & 10.0 (V)
Note: H horizontal V Vertical
CIE 128 - 1988

Overall uniformity
ratio
30
30
10-20
30
100
100
IS:1944 (Part I&II)

Average
Overall uniformity
lux
ratio
0.30
0.25
0.25
0.4
4
-
0.3
-
Table 2 : Comparative Analysis Of Optimum Lighting Arrangements For Various Types Of Sources
Source
2x40 W
FTL
80 W
HPMV
125 W
HPMV
250 W
HPMV
70 W
HPSV
100 W
HPSV
150 W
HPSV
Height of
pole (m)
8
10
12
14
16 *
8
10
12 *
14 *
16 *
8
10
12
14
16 *
8
10
12
14
16
8
10
12
14
16
8*
10
12
14
16
8*
10 *
12
14
16
Spacing
(m)
Minimum illumination level (lux)
Average illumination level (lux)
Uniformity
ratio
No. of
poles
Total annual
cost (Rs.)
16
18
15
10
16
10
34
27
20
14
25
38
47
46
40
34
35
28
22
16
52
45
40
34
25
58
89
1.64
1.78
1.96
2.25
2.36
3.05
1.27
2.42
3.2
3.32
2.91
1.86
1.36
1.73
2.28
1.48
1.71
2.05
2.27
2.6
1.22
1.62
1.93
2.11
4.71
2.57
1.45
5.28
4.16
4.02
4.10
4.08
4.05
3.98
4.00
4.08
4.05
9.79
6.02
4.49
4.05
4.06
4.98
4.09
4.11
4.00
4.02
4.13
4.08
4.02
4.02
15.98
7.97
4.93
0.31
0.42
0.48
0.54
0.57
0.75
0.31
0.60
0.78
0.81
0.29
0.30
0.30
0.42
0.56
0.29
0.41
0.49
0.56
0.64
0.29
0.39
0.47
0.52
0.29
0.32
0.29
64
57
68
101
64
101
30
38
51
72
41
27
22
23
26
30
30
37
46
64
20
23
26
30
41
18
12
2,37,391
2,35,609
2,97,814
4,67,404
2,43,288
4,25,045
1,48,404
2,03,332
2,85,000
3,43,845
2,38,544
2,00,343
2,15,304
2,49,719
1,07,620
1,20,217
1,57,085
2,06,659
3,02,955
142
99,071
1,19,401
1,41,414
1,70,469
2,73,247
1,25,891
87,739
POSTALE 2008
Source
Height of
pole (m)
Spacing
(m)
Minimum illumination level (lux)
Average illumination level (lux)
Uniformity
ratio
No. of
poles
Total annual
cost (Rs.)
18.95
11.20
9.05
7.35
5.90
41.20
29.71
21.66
16.70
12.38
0.30
0.29
0.29
0.30
0.29
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.29
0.29
30
19
17
15
14
29
24
20
18
15
2,56,364
1,71,170
1,57,683
1,43,283
1,37,450
3,58,959
3,07,537
2,61,708
2,40,425
2,04,554
8
34
5.69
10
55
3.25
12
62
2.66
14
70
2.27
16
80
1.76
8
36
12.54
10
44
9.06
400 W
12
52
6.56
HPSV
14
60
4.93
16
70
3.61
*design parameters not satisfying minimum lighting standards
250 W
HPSV
Table 3 : Design Parameters Satisfying Minimum Standards In Iron Ore Bench

Height of
pole (m)
8
10
12
14
16
8
10
12
14
16
8
10
12
14
16
8
Surface condition
Pole spacing
(m)
No. of poles
dry
wet *
dry
wet
dry
wet
dry
wet *
dry *
wet *
8
11
7
10
5
4
-
126
92
144
101
201
251
-
dry
wet
dry
wet
dry
wet
dry
wet
dry
wet
16
12
19
16
21
18
21
16
19
13
64
84
54
64
49
57
49
64
54
78
dry *
wet *
dry *
wet *
dry
wet
dry
wet
dry
wet
25
24
32
27
49
45
41
43
32
38
21
23
dry
wet
34
34
30
30
Minimum illuminance (lux)

on surface
from surface
125 W HPMV
4.39
4.43
5.02
4.45
4.98
4.42
250 W HPMV
4.48
5.15
4.43
5.11
4.46
4.96
4.54
5.03
4.4
5.06
150 W HPSV
4.71
4.96
4.54
5.06
4.53
5.2
250 W HPSV
5.69
5.69
143
Overall uniformity ratio

on surface
from surface
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
-
0.42
0.63
0.62
0.78
0.77
0.86
-
0.43
0.63
0.62
0.78
0.78
0.86
-
0.51
0.52
0.5
0.51
0.5
0.5
0.51
0.5
0.5
0.51
0.32
0.30
0.42
0.42
0.52
0.52
0.60
0.57
0.63
0.62
0.32
0.30
0.42
0.42
0.51
0.52
0.60
0.57
0.64
0.62
0.53
0.5
0.51
0.5
0.51
0.51
0.29
0.30
0.35
0.35
0.55
0.59
0.29
0.30
0.35
0.35
0.55
0.58
0.63
0.56
0.30
0.30
0.29
0.29
POSTALE 2008
Height of
pole (m)
10
12
14
16
8
10
12
Surface condition
Pole spacing
(m)
No. of poles
dry
wet
dry
wet
dry
wet
dry
wet
43
41
51
49
54
51
55
53
24
25
21
21
20
21
19
20
dry
wet
dry
wet
dry
wet
36
36
44
44
52
52
29
29
24
24
20
20
Minimum illuminance (lux)

on surface
from surface
4.81
5.32
4.59
4.83
4.49
5.03
4.54
4.9
400 W HPSV
12.54
12.54
9.06
9.06
6.56
6.56
Overall uniformity ratio

on surface
from surface
0.54
0.54
0.51
0.49
0.51
0.51
0.51
0.49
0.35
0.37
0.43
0.44
0.49
0.52
0.56
0.59
0.34
0.37
0.42
0.45
0.49
0.53
0.56
0.59
1.41
1.23
1.01
0.92
0.75
0.66
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.29
0.30
0.31
0.30
0.30
0.57
0.53
0.53
0.53
0.29
0.31
0.34
0.37
(Contd.)
dry
60
18
14
wet
58
18
dry
63
17
16
wet
60
18
* design parameters not satisfying minimum lighting standards.
4.93
5.37
4.66
5.24
0.30
0.30
0.34
0.37
Table 4 : Total Annual Illumination Cost In Iron Ore Bench [For Design Parameters As Given In Table-1]
Source
125 W HPMV
250 W HPMV
150 W HPSV
250 W HPSV
400 W HPSV
Total annual cost (Rs.)

Dry surface
Wet surface
Height of pole (m)
8
10
12
14
16
8
10
12
14
16
8
10
12
14
16
8
10
12
14
16
8
10
12
14
16
6,16,067
4,89,069
5,62,198
14,58,799
5,35,467
4,74,829
4,43,446
4,56,137
5,16,215
2,73,247
2,22,050
1,51,849
2,56,364
2,15,621
1,94,254
1,90,291
1,85,732
3,58,959
3,07,537
2,61,708
2,40,425
2,31,526
144
7,64,222
11,16,593
7,02,094
5,62,341
5,15,477
5,95,080
7,44,641
2,86,466
2,63,261
1,66,096
2,56,364
2,24,511
1,94,254
1,99,693
1,95,389
3,58,959
3,07,537
2,61,708
2,40,425
2,45,013
POSTALE 2008
MINE SAFETY MEASURES IN INDIA WITH

SPECIFIC REFERENCE TO INFORMAL COAL MINING
MRINAL K. GHOSE
Indian School of Mines University, Dhanbad
INTRODUCTION
India has the experience of mining for fairly long period. In the post-independence period the growth,
barring some public sector units, has been in small and medium mining units [1](Rudra, 2002). Recognition of the fact that small-scale mining can make a significant contribution to developmental objectives, which has been one of the principal motives for this persistent interest [2](Noetstaller,
1994).As per Indian Mines Act 1952, it does not make much of a distinction between small mines or
others [3](Anon,1991). However, some of the mines are exempted from provisions of most of the
Mines Act in certain cases on the basis of type of minerals mined, purpose of mining like for prospecting and others, depth of workings and number of workers etc.[4](Ghose, 2003b). Mining companies despite the frequent accidents largely ignore safety norms for workers, and it has no different at
Indian mines. For the companies, mineral extraction is the primary focus and the safety of their
workers never bothers them. The Directorate General of Mine Safety (DGMS) has vast powers, but it
has never been exercised. The DGMS is authorized to close mines where safety norms are violated
or where miners are at risk. The DGMS never bothers to act tough as it could invite the wrath of coal
companies. Questions are also being asked about the functioning of the mining sardar (supervisor).
The mining sardars are being accused of not visiting the mines or reviewing the situation. According
to norms, the mining sardars should visit the mine during the day and at night regularly. They are
also supposed to make surprise visits. Attentions regarding safety of miners are being taken up with
the Coal India several times and suggestions made to Coal Ministry to provide Global Positioning
System (GPS) to help to locate the miners, but have not been taken seriously . In West Bengal and
Jharkhand, three subsidiaries of Coal Indian Limited (CIL) function - Central Coalfields Ltd, Bharat
Coking Coal Ltd.and Eastern Coalfields Limited. More than 20 mine mishaps have taken place in
these mines in the last 30 years [5](Anon 2005-2006). The objective of this paper is to focus on the
mine safety measures to protect the mine workers from accidents and on the informal mining which
is rampant in the area.
WORKERS SAFETY MEASURES IN MINES
The Mines Act, 1952 seeks to regulate the working conditions in mines by providing measures to be
taken for the safety of the workers employed therein. To ensure the implementation of the Mines Act,
1952, the Union Legislature has framed the Mines rules, 1955, Metalliferous Mines Regulations,
1961, and the Maternity Benefit (Mines) Rules, 1963, etc. The Mines Act, 1952, prescribed duties of
the owner (defined as the proprietor, lessee or an agent) to manage mines and mining operations,
the health and safety in mines [6](Ghose 1990a) .It also prescribes the number of working hours in
mines, the minimum wage rates, and other related matters. The Mines Rules, 1955, provide the procedural aspects. Both penal and pecuniary punishments are prescribed for contravention of obligation and duties under the Act.
The Metalliferous Mine Regulation, 1961 provides for the certification of the competency and fitness
for the managers of mines, mine engineers, supervisory staffs, foreman, and surveyors. The regulation also prescribes the types of mining plans, the types of survey and mining instruments to be
used, the equipment used for access and egress of workers to the mines, transportation of men,
minerals, and other related matters. The Mines and Minerals, Development and Regulation Act,
145
POSTALE 2008
1957, ('MMDR') and the Mines Act, 1952, together with the rules and regulations framed under them,
constitute the basic laws governing the mining sector in India.
The relevant rules in force under the MMDR Act, are the Mineral Concession Rules, 1960, and the
Mineral Conservation and Development Rules, 1988. The health and safety of the workers is governed by the Mines Rules, 1955 created under the jurisdiction of the Mines Act, 1952.The Mineral
Concession Rules, 1960 outline the procedures and conditions for obtaining a Prospecting License
or Mining Lease. The Mineral Conservation and Development Rules, 1988 lays down guidelines for
ensuring mining on a scientific basis, while at the same time, conserving the environment. The provisions of Mineral Concession Rules and Mineral Conservation and Development Rules are, however,
not applicable to coal, atomic minerals and minor minerals. The minor minerals are separately notified and come under the purview of the State Governments. The State Governments have for this
purpose formulated the Minor Mineral Concession Rules.
COAL AS THE PRIME ENERGY SOURCE
India ranks sixth in the world in terms of energy demand accounting for 3.5 per cent of world commercial energy demand [7;8](Anon 2002;Ghose 2003). With a gross domestic product (GDP) growth
of 8 percent set for the tenth five-year plan (2002-07), the energy demand is expected to grow at 5.2
percent (Anon2005a; 2005b). Although, the commercial energy consumption has grown rapidly over
the last two decades, still a large part of India's population does not have access to it [9](Ghose
2002). . At 479 kg of oil equivalent (kgOE), the per capita energy consumption is also low when
compared to some of the other developing countries, like Thailand (1,319 kgOE), Brazil (1,051
kgOE) and China (907 kgOE). Primary commercial energy demand grew almost three-fold at an annual rate of 6 per cent between 1981 and 2001, to reach 314.7 million tones of oil equivalent (MtOE).
India's incremental energy demand for the next decade is projected to be among the highest in the
world, spurred by sustained economic growth, rise in income levels and increased availability of
goods and services. India's commercial energy demand is expected to grow even more rapidly than
in the past as it goes down the reform path in order to raise standards of living.
The all-India installed capacity of electric power generation under utilities was 1,12,058.42 MW as on
31st March 2004, consisting of 77,968.53 MW of thermal, 29,500.23 MW of hydro, 2720.00 MW of
nuclear and 1869.66 MW of wind power which has increased to 115544.81 MW as on 31st January
2005 consisting of 80,201.45 MW of thermal, 30,135.23 MW of hydro, 2720 MW of nuclear, and
2488.13 of wind power [10](Shankar 2005). A capacity addition of 41,110 MW has been, targeted for
the tenth plan [8](Ghose 2003). The projected requirement of commercial energy is estimated at
about 412 MtOE and 554 MtOE respectively in 2007 and 2012 respectively (Table 1). The commercial energy demand is estimated to grow at an average rate of 6.6 per cent and 6.1 per cent respectively during the period 2002-07 and 2007-12 [11](Banerjee 2004). However, the demand may be
less by 5 per cent and 10 per cent during 2006- 07 and 2011 -12 respectively due to increasing use
of information technology (IT) and prevalence of e-Commerce, which will mainly affect the demand
of energy in transport sector. Coal's share of total energy demand remains highest at 46 % from now
till at least 2011-12 [12](Anon 2003-2004). Burning of all these fossil fuels are not environmentally
sustainable and causing green house effect to the atmosphere [13](Ghose 2004b).
INFORMAL COAL MINING
Informal mining is an unofficial and unsanctioned activity, often labeled as illegal by officialdom and
certainly so in India. Unauthorized mines are not uncommon in mineral-rich regions of poorer countries, and India is no exception. Whether they constitute merely a law and order problem including
safety issues, or there are important social and economic questions involved has yet to be thrashed
out. The mining industry, at regional, national and international levels, is ambivalent towards such
mining, tending to draw attention away from their informal nature to the size factor. This form of mining is largely absent in the industrialized world but can be extensive elsewhere, wherever coal is
readily available, and can constitute an important part of the local economy [14] (Ghose 1991). In-
146
POSTALE 2008
formal mining usually has a long history, rooted in an era before government regulations came into
force and overlapping the period of dramatic expansion of mining associated with modem industrial
development and the demand for electricity.
The International Labour Organization [15]( ILO 1992;1999)recognizes that grinding poverty has led
to the development of small-scale economic activity, including small-scale mining, which enables
poor people to survive, despite low profits and high risks [16](Alfa, 1999). Alfa also subdivides mining
into 'artisanal' and 'semi-industrial' and goes on to say that artisanal mining and quarries appear to
be liable for fewer taxes and duties than small-scale mining, thus differentiating these practices as
two categories. The same author also states that small-scale artisanal operations are used, but in a
formal and legal manner, suggesting that the difference may lie not in size but in the formality or the
nature of operations. Martinez-Castillo (1999)[17] has in fact described such mining as 'traditional'
and 'informal', and traces the cause to "the economic crisis, urban unemployment in the cities, poverty in the agricultural areas and the violence that prevailed in the 1980s gave rise to a growing social .phenomenon - individual, family or collective migration to zones other than the place of origin,
searching for safety and economic survival" (p. 31). The exact number of people involved in informal
mining is unknown but may exceed 200,000. Raniganj is not the only region in India where informal
mining is carried out. The coal deposits in Raniganj extend northwestward into Jharia and Karanpura. There, too, 'illegal' mining is a fact of life, probably for over 500,000 people [18](Lahiri-Dutt
2003). These people are living on the fringes of the money economy, surviving largely on subsistence cultivation and grazing, supplemented by scavenging for coal. Total aggregate production in
India from this type of illegal mine is likely to be impressive, though no specific data are available.
Estimates of its volume come, for example, from coal-starved neighbouring Bangladesh, until recently without legal trade relations with India. Many brickfields around Dhaka use 'Indian coal',
mainly from these mines , with an annual formal coal production of about 28 Mt, yield from informal
mines may amount to IMt . International decision-makers have indeed noted this kind of mining, but
at the same time, much attention has been drawn to small mines in different countries, especially the
developing ones. The Government of India recognizes only 'small-scale' mines, which are actually
different from unauthorized mines, as they have legal status.
The oldest collieries in India are located in the Raniganj region some 250 km northwest of Calcutta,
and it is here that the British colonial administration first started collieries in the late 18th century.
The region still contributes significantly to national coal production. In the early days of mining, local
landlords or zamindars4 were enthusiastic about opening collieries [19](Rothermund and Wadhwa,
1978), but gradually much of the ownership passed into the hands of private companies. There are
121 coal mines located in Burdwan, Bankura, Birbhum and Purulia districts of West Bengal, and in
Dhanbad and Godda districts of Jharkhand . As is typical of an old mining region, Raniganj's economy, too, shows signs of aging: unproductive underground mines manually operated by a highly unionized labour force. Underground voids, frequent occurrences of land subsidence and mine fires are
common problems. Raniganj today has a significantly higher level of urbanization than the rest of the
state of West Bengal, or India [20](Lahiri-Dutt, 2001). The informal mines that operate in Raniganj
may give us a clue to understanding some of the urgent issues of mineral resource management
that need to be made transparent. It may help us understand the role of the community in mining;
how development has impacted on people in the third world; how local communities enforce their
traditional rights over the land in the absence of a participatory process; and how, in the mining sector of less developed countries, the formal and informal sectors continually supplement and complement each other. The ownership of land in the Raniganj region had passed from local adivasis (indigenous peoples) to agricultural castes long before coal mining caught on as a popular business
enterprise with the zamindars[21;22] (Fernandes 1992; Ghosh 1996). Yet, the santha/s (one of the
indigenous communities) and the bauris (a low caste), continued to remain closely attached to their
lost land and used to leave the mines during the cropping season for agricultural work. In the past,
this encouraged mine owners to bring in outside labour, who later came to dominate the formal industrial labour force. Consequently, when the agricultural sector receded, due to the expansion of
largescale mines, local inhabitants were forced to seek jobs elsewhere.
147
POSTALE 2008
The type of illegal mining occurs, not on leasehold land of the mining company, but on land owned
by individuals but with coal occurring close to the surface. The Indian Constitution says that the state
owns all mineral resources occurring underground. One of the problems of small-scale mining in
India is the multiplicity of laws and acts it has to comply with, especially in view of the generally low
level of technology, capital investment and small size. The temptation for an individual to circumvent
the laws is immense.
MINE ACCIDENTS
There are four main reasons for accidents in informal collieries:
Roof fall: either at the entrance or at the work face, or related to blasting; or sidewall fall;
Presence of toxic gases (C02 and/or CO) and lack of oxygen;.
Fire due to seepage of oxygen; and
Inundation.
The legal-illegal nexus is evident in the cases of accidents too. For example, the fact that the mining
company still follows the conventional board-and-pillar system in most underground operations. In
this system, the entire coal can never be lifted, as a significant amount of leftover coal has to remain
to provide the structure. Neglect of proper sand stowing of underground hollows often adds to the
serious risk to the local built environment above ground[23] (Lahiri-Dutt, 1999). Moreover, ECL
leaves a mine as soon as it becomes uneconomic. The remaining coal is thus left for local villagers
to scavenge upon, enticing them into a seriously risky situation. Instead of enforcing the existing legal safety net, the approach of the authorities is to illegitimate local communities. Breaking open of
sealed underground mines is quite common in Raniganj. What is significant is that the underground
cavities, which should have been sand stowed, are often found empty. In New Kenda colliery in
Jamuria, the presence of carbon monoxide in an abandoned underground colliery killed three members of a santhal family in November 2001. This happened close on the heel of the accident in Lalbandh, Barabani. At New Kenda, ECL had stopped work some time earlier, but had neglected to fill
up the voids properly with sand.
In Mahabir colliery, in a flooded mine abandoned by the ECL, local people cut coal standing in waistdeep water. As a result, the illegal collieries have a rather short-life span - never over five years. The
most common accident is roof fall when the mine operations become deeper and bigger. This happened close on the heel of the accident in Lalbandh, Barabani. However, small mines are not synonymous with informal mines, except in terms of scale . About 55 minerals (excluding coal) are being
exploited in India in about 3,600 working mines. Of these, about 400 may be considered as large
mechanized, opencast or underground mines. The rest are small mines, or class B mines.[24,25]
(NISM, 1993, 1994). However, no. data are available an total production from informal mines.
REVIEWING SAFETY MEASURES IN COAL MINES
Safety In Coal Exploration
Exploration of coal reserves in the country is carried out in two stages. In the first stage, Geological
Survey of India (GSI) undertakes Regional Exploration for locating potential coal bearing areas on a
continuous basis. In order to supplement the efforts of Regional Exploration, services of GSI and
Mineral Exploration Corporation (MECL) have also been engaged for carrying out Promotional (Regional) Exploration funded by Ministry of Coal. In the second stage, Detailed Exploration is carried
out. Central Mine Planning and Design Institute Ltd. (CMPDI) directly as well as through Mineral Exploration Corporation ,State Govts. and private agencies carry out detailed exploration, for the purpose of mine planning and exploitation of coal reserves for meeting the demand of different sectors
of the economy. The detailed exploration in the command area of SCCL is carried out departmentally. Priorities of various projects/blocks, taken up for Detailed Exploration, are decided taking into
account factors like emerging demand and its location, availability of infrastructure for coal evacuation and techno-economics of the mine development including coal quality.
148
POSTALE 2008
Coal Companies of Coal India Ltd. (CIL) and CMPDI have identified 289 blocks proposed to be retained by CIL to sustain a production level during 2006-07 (final year of X plan) for another 30 years
i.e. up to 2036-37. These blocks retained by CIL are termed as CIL blocks. All other blocks which
have not been retained by CIL are termed as Non-CIL blocks. A study was carried out to assess the
total requirement of detailed drilling in non-CIL blocks. Departmental EFC of Ministry of Coal has
approved the proposal of CMPDI to continue the scheme of Detailed Drilling in Non-CIL Blocks in X
Plan at an estimated cost of Rs.70.66 crores.
Currently about 230 blocks are identified as Non-CIL Blocks of which 136 blocks are listed as captive
mining blocks. Out of 136 captive mining blocks, the Detailed Exploration has already been completed in about 87 blocks. Of the remaining 49 blocks, 12 blocks have already been allotted for captive mining based on regional exploration . The detailed exploration is to be carried out in the remaining 37 blocks. Of the 94 tentatively identified Non-CIL blocks, Detailed Exploration has already been
completed in 29 Non-CIL blocks and is proposed to be taken up in remaining 65 Non-CIL blocks in
the X and the subsequent plan period.
Control Of Mine Fires And Subsidence
In the Jharia coalfield at the time of nationalization of coking coal mines in 1972, there were reportedly, 70 active mine fires in about 17 Sq.kms. Fire Projects were taken up from 1975 to 1988 for
control of these fires at an estimated outlay of Rs.114.57 crores. 10 fire were extinguished. However,
6 more fires have been added during the period. A diagnostic study was undertaken under the Jharia
Mine Fire Control Technical Assistance Project with World Bank assistance of US $ 12.00 million for
developing a long-term plan for dealing with the problem of the Jharia Coalfield. The study, consisting of two components, development of fire fighting programme and preparation of environment
monitoring plan, has been completed. The study brought out that fire area has reduced substantially
to 8.9 Sq.K.M. A High Level Committee under Chairmanship of Secretary(Coal) was formed in December, 1996 to examine subsidence and fire in Jharia and Raniganj Coalfields. The Committee has
submitted its final report in December, 1997. The recommendation of the Committee are under various stages of implementation.
From 1997-98, Government of India introduced Environmental Measures and Subsidence Control
(EMSC) schemes for control of fire and subsidence and other environmental measures. To deal with
the problem in a comprehensive manner, Committee of Secretaries in March'2003, decided that a
total Action Plan delineating the time frame for completing various activities and the detailed rehabilitation plan would be prepared. Accordingly, Action Plans, based on the Master Plan of BCCL and
ECL have been prepared delineating a time frame of 20 years for completion of all the activities involved in the Plan in phases. ' The detailed activities for the first 5 years have been set out and also
the sites to be taken up in the first phase of 5 years have been identified. Subsequently the Master
Plan of BCCL and ECL had also been updated.
The Master Plan of BCCL envisages a capital outlay of Rs.5714.81 crores and that for ECL it is
Rs.l769.40 crores. The funding of the various activities of the Master Plan is proposed from Plan
Allocation made for Environmental Measures and Subsidence Control (EMSC) Schemes, stowing
excise duty under Coal Conservation and Development Act and from internal mobilization of funds
by Coal India Limited. The updated Master Plans for ECL and BCCL to deal with problems of fire
and subsidence, stabilisation, rehabilitation etc. were prepared in Dec., 2003 and April, 2004 respectively. The plans have been cleared "in principle" by the Planning Commission and they are under
consideration for approval by the Government. Draft notes for the Public Investment Board have
been prepared and are under process. Various schemes as per priority given the Master
Plans/Action Plans are being approved under Environmental Measures and Subsidence Control(EMSC) / Rehabilitation, Control of Fire and Subsidence (RCFS). The status of implementation of
these schemes is as follows:
The SSRC is being assisted by three Standing Sub-Committees, each dealing with one of the three
relevant major areas of research :-
149
POSTALE 2008
Production, Productivity & Safety

Coal Beneficiation & Utilisation
Environment & Ecology
Research and academic institute mostly implement the projects either independently or in collaboration with coal & lignite mining companies. CMPDI acts as Nodal Agency for co-ordination of research
activities in coal sector, which involve identification of thrust areas for research activities, identification of agencies, which can take up the research work in the identified fields, processing the proposals for Government approval, monitoring the progress of implementation of the projects, preparation
of budget estimates, disbursement of funds etc. As on 15th December 2005, 56 S&T projects are ongoing. During the period from Jan. 2005 to December 2005, a total of 7 S&T projects have been
completed and 3 projects are on final stage of completion.
The Coal India Ltd gives primary importance to safety in operations. This is evident from the Mission
of Coal India Ltd where CIL is committed to continue coal mining operations with due regard to
Safety and Conservation. With this in view a Safety Policy of Coal India Ltd has been formulated
and implemented. CIL has also created a structured Internal Safety Organization (ISO) in each subsidiary as well as at the holding company level at CIL to implement the Safety Policy and other
safety measures. This has resulted in substantial improvement in the safety scenario of coal mining
activities since Nationalization of coal mines. As a result of the safety measures being taken with
vastly increased production it has been possible to reduce the trend of fatalities and fatality rates in
CIL from 233 fatalities in 1975 to 70 fatalities in 2004.
The following broad safety measures were pursued in the year 2004 for reduction of accidents in
coal mines of CIL: Thrust on conducting Safety Audits of mines by expert Mining/Mechanical/Electrical Engineers
for assessment of threat of major accidents like inundation, fire or explosion and implementation
of results of the same.
Risk Assessment as a tool for improvement of safety was continued.
Thrust was given on inspections of mines, including surprise back-shift inspections, by senior
officers like Area GMs, Agents/Sub-Area Managers/Project Officers, Colliery Managers and officers of the Internal Safety Organization.
As a measure of precaution against in-rush of water the following measures were pursued:
Assessment of danger of inrush of water from surface as well as underground source was
done for each mine and action programme drawn up and implemented.
Extensive check surveys were undertaken either by teams of surveyors within the Area or
by external agencies.
Thrust on measures for prevention of roof/side fall accidents was maintained through
Drawing up Support Plans for each mining district based on scientific Rock-MassRating and implementation of the same.
Thrust on use of steel roof bolts /steel rope roof stitching using quick setting cement capsules.
Resin grouting has been introduced in some highly watery mines.
Training of support personnel, dressers and supervisors.
For reduction of accidents in opencast mines the following measures were taken:
Implementation of Codes of Practice and Traffic Rules and monitoring implementation of the
same.
Examination of contractor's vehicles/equipment by the company's engineers.
Conducting on-site training programmes for contractor's employees.
Training and retraining of Heavy Earth Moving machinery operators in modern training institutes.
Conducting of slope stability studies.
Efforts towards reduction of exposure of workmen to risks through mechanization were continued.
150
POSTALE 2008
In UG mines: by replacement of manual loading by mechanised loading by Side- DischargeLoaders, Load-Haul-Dumpers, Powered Support Longwall technology, Continuous Miner technology.
Regular Basic and Refresher Training was imparted to workmen and supervisors.Special on-site
training programmes were conducted for contractor's workers. Regular retraining programmes
were conducted for special categories of employees like support-men, dressers and supervisors.
Audio-visual training films on various subjects have been prepared for imparting standardized
training in each Vocational Training Centre in each coal producing country.
Thrust on Emergency preparedness was maintained through:
Preparation of Emergency Action Plans.
Demarcation of Escape Routes belowground as well as on plans.
Conducting of Mock Rehearsals, monitoring failure points for further improvement. Thrust on
training and retraining of workmen, supervisors to increase safety awareness of the workmen. CIL has taken up a programme of preparation of Video films for imparting standardized training in all its training centres and 33 out of 58 planned films have been completed.
The safety status of coal mines is being continuously monitored at different levels. At the mine level
the Safety Committees, where workmen are represented, review the safety status of every mine.
Workmens Inspectors make inspections of the mines and the reports of the inspections are rigorously acted upon. Bipartite Committees of management and workmens representatives review the
safety status of each and every Area. At the subsidiary company headquarters level Tripartite Committees which include representatives of the Directorate General of Mines Safety (DGMS) also review the safety performance of the company and suggest measures for further improving the safety
standards. The Coal India Safety Board, comprising representatives of the coal companies, the
workmen, DGMS, the Department of Coal review and deliberate on safety measures to be taken for
improving the safety performance of CIL bi-annually. To arrest the rising trend of fatal accident a
meeting of 39th CIL Safety Board was held on 12th June,2004 at Kolkata. The safety situation of the
coal mines is also reviewed bi-annually by the Standing Committee on Safety in Coal Mines chaired
by the Honble Minister in-charge for Coal. Last such meeting was held under the chairmanship of
Minister of State for Coal & Mines on 13.9.2005.
Mines Rescue Services
Six mine rescue Stations (RS), eighteen Rescue Rooms with Refresher Training Facilities (RRRTs)
have been established and are functioning in various subsidiaries of Coal India Limited.
Modern Equipment have been provided to rescue Stations (RS), Rescue Rooms with Refresher
Training Facilities (RRRTs). There are 1080 nos. of Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA),
180 nos. of reviving Apparatus and 102 nos. of Short duration Breathing Apparatus (SDBA).In addition some Chemical type Oxygen self rescuers have also been provided and kept in different rescue
stations. Several incentives have been introduced for attracting suitable persons to serve in the Rescue Services. Shortage of field volunteers have been made up by and large.New technology equipment like infra-red imager, paging system, etc. have been introduced. Trial is under way for development of cordless radio-communication system for use by Rescue Teams in rescue/recovery work
belowground. One large diameter drill machine for evacuation of miners trapped below-ground has
been procured from abroad and supporting equipment have been procured from indigenous sources.
The machine is kept in readiness at Sitarampur Rescue Station of ECL.
Safety Monitoring In Coal India Limited
Safety in coal mines of Coal India Limited is monitored by the following bodies apart from DGMS
and the Internal Safety Organisations of CIL and its subsidiary coal companies.
(1) Workmens inspectors: Safety status of each and every mine is monitored by representatives of
the workmen, one each from Mining, Electrical and Mechanical disciplines through inspections,
the reports of which and status of compliance of recommendations are forwarded to the local
DGMS office.
151
POSTALE 2008
(2) Safety committee at mine level: The Safety Committee at mine level also monitors the safety
status at each mine every month through inspection followed by a meeting for review of safety
status of the mine. This committee consists of representatives of workmen and management.
(3) Area level bipartite/tripartite safety committees: The Area Level Committee comprising representatives of workmen and management monitors the safety performance of the Area biannually.
Often representative of DGMS also participates.
(4) Subsidiary level tripartite safety committee: Tripartite safety committee functions at subsidiary
company level and consists of representatives of workmen, DGMS and management for review
and monitoring of safety measures. This body meets bi-annually.
(5) Coal India Safety Board: This is headed by the Chairman, CIL with workers representatives, Director (T), CIL, Director (P), CIL, CMDs of subsidiary companies, the DGMS, a representative of
the Ministry of Coal as members and Executive Director (Safety & Rescue) CIL as Member Secretary. The Board reviews the safety status of CIL bi-annually, formulates policies and gives
guidelines for improving safety standards.
(6) Standing Committee on Safety in Coal Mines: The safety situation of the coal mines is also reviewed by the Standing Committee on safety in Coal Mines Chaired by the Minister for Coal.
In addition, Conference on Safety in Mines is held by Ministry of Labour / DGMS, where representatives of Trade Unions, management, educational/research institutions and Ministry of Coal participate. These meetings are held every 3 or 4 years.
TECHNOLOGIES ADOPTED TO REDUCE THE NUMBER OF ACCIDENTS.
Following State-of-the-art technologies are adopted to reduce number of accidents in CIL.mines:
1. Design of system of support of roof in the development workings in underground mines by scientific support systems based on Rock Mass Rating (RMR) studies.
2. Increased use of Roof Bolting / Roof Stitching methods of support using steel roof bolts/ steel
wire ropes with quick setting cement grout to arrest bed separation at early stages to impede deterioration of roof.
3. Introduction of modern drills like mechanized drilling machine to avoid exposure of support personnel to unsupported roof while drilling for roof bolting and greater use of quick-setting cement/resin capsules grouted roof bolts for support in development workings in underground
mines.
4. Reduced exposure of workers to mining hazards by mechanization of loading operations by increasing use of SDLs and LHDs in belowground mines, Powered Support longwall (PSLW) system of mining, Continuous Miner Technology etc., are being progressively adopted in suitable
areas.
5. Regular monitoring of mine environment by handheld gas detectors/alarms and flame safety
lamps for detecting inflammable and noxious gases. Besides, for early detection of situations
that could lead to an outbreak of fire or an explosion, highly capital intensive computerized continuous mine environmental tele-monitoring system (ETMS) have been installed and are in operation in thirteen identified underground mines
6. Introduction of surface miner, an eco-friendly technology to reduce hazardous operation like drilling, blasting and crushing wherever applicable.
CONCLUSION
The Mineral Conservation and Development Rules, 1988 lays down guidelines for ensuring mining
on a scientific basis, while at the same time, conserving the environment. The study reveals that
safety norms for workers are largely ignored by mining companies despite of the frequent accidents
Informal mining as well as unscientific mining in the legalized mining are the cause of mine accidents. It has been observed that the process of economic development in study area has bypassed
local, poorer groups, which are responsible for the mushrooming of unauthorized mines. The poor
villagers must be given their traditional rights and customs when faced with attempts by the large
mining companies to impose new, more contractual and market based notions of rights and obliga-
152
POSTALE 2008
tions. The economic superstructure must always be seen as a product of struggle, not as something
preexisting or predetermined and the informal mines can actually be seen as a form of resistance to
the mining economy on the part of local communities. The unintended collieries, therefore, are the
grounds of contestations between the more powerful, formal, market-oriented, global economy, and
the subordinated, informal, tradition-oriented peasant economy.
REFERENCES
Alfa, S., 1999. Child labour in small-scale mines in Niger. In: Jennings, Norman (Ed.), Child Labour in Small Scale Mining: Examples from Niger, Peru and Philippines. Working Paper. Sectoral Activities Programme, International Labour Office, Geneva.
Anon: 1991, The Mines Act 1952, Dhanbad, Gyan-Khan Prokashan, pp. 1108.
Anon (2002) Overview of India's Energy Sector, Planning Commission, Government of India, New Delhi,
Anon (2003-2004) Ministry of Coal and Mines, Govt. of India,
Anon (2005a) Coal Vision 2025, Ministry of Coal , Government of India , New Delhi,
Anon (2005b) Report of the Integrated Energy Policy Committee, Planning Commission, Government of India, New Delhi,
Banerjee, S.P.(2004) Social dimensions of the mining sector, Journal of the Institutions of Engineers (India), Mining Engineering,
August, pp 5-10
Fernandes, W., 1992. Power and powerlessness: Development projects and displacement of tribals. Social Action (JulySeptember):246.
Ghose, A.K: 1990a, _Technology trends and policies for solid energy materials in developing countries by 2001_, In F. Weitang
(ed.), Proc. 14th World Mining Congress, Beijing, Pergamon Press, pp. 6676.
Ghose, A.K.: 1991, Towards an integrated plan for socio-economic development the small-scale route, Jr. of Mines Metals and
Fuels, March, p. 7.
Ghose, Mrinal K. (2002) Potentials of geothermal energy, Jr. of Energy in Southern Africa 13(4)
pp 144-148
Ghose, M.K.: 2003a, _Promoting cleaner production in the Indian small-scale mining Industry_, Jr. Cleaner Production 11, 159
165.
Ghose, M.K.: 2003b, _Environmental impacts of Indian small scale mining industry- an overview_,Minerals and Energy 18, 2433.
Ghose, M.K.: 2003c, _Indian small-scale mining with special emphasis on environmental management_,Jr. Cleaner Production
11, 167174.
Ghose, M.K.: 2004, _Impact of mining on female community a perspective of female miners in the Indian context_, Mineral and
Energy, Sweden 4, 1624.
Ghosh, I., 1996. Changing land ownership situation and the displacement of peasantry in the Raniganj coalbelt, West Bengal.
Journal of Indian Geographical Foundation, Calcutta.
ILO (1999)International Labour Organisation , Social and labour issues in small scale mines. Report for Discussion at the Tripartite Meeting on Social and Labour Issues in Small Scale Mines. International Labour Office, Geneva.
ILO (1992) International Labour Organisation . Employment, incomes and equality: A strategy for increasing production. International Labour Office, Geneva.
Jodha, N.S., 1986. Common property resources and rural poor in dry re~ons of India, Economic and Political Weekly, XXXI: 27,
July 5.
Lahiri-Dutt, K., 1999. State and the market: Crisis in Raniganj coalbelt, Economic and Political Weekly, XXXIV: 41,2952-2956.
Lahiri-Dutt, K., 200 I. Mining and Urbanization in the Raniganj Coalbelt.The World Press, Calcutta
Lahiri-Dutt, K., 200 3. Informal coal mining in Eastern India:Evidence from the Raniganj Coalbelt. Natural Resources Forum, 27,
pp68-77.
Martinez-Castilla, Z. 1999. 'Child labour in traditional mining: Mollehuaca, Peru', in Jennings, N.S. (Ed.) Child Labour in SmallScale Mining:Examples from Niger. Peru. and the Philippines. International Labour Office, Geneva.
National Institute of Small Mines, India (NISM), 1993. News Bulletin No. II, October. NISM, Calcutta.
National Institute of Small Mines, India (NISM), 1994. News Bulletin No. 12, January. NISM, Calcutta.
Noetstaller, R: 1994, _Small-scale mining, practices, policies, perspectives_, In A.K. Ghose (ed.), Smallscale Mining A Global
Overview, New Delhi, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co, pp. 310.
Rudra, A.K.: 2002, Policies, statues and legislation in small and medium mines, National Seminar on Policies, Statutes & Legislation, January, Dhanbad, India, CMRI.
Sankar, T.L (2005) Road Map for Coal Sector Reforms, Ministry of Coal , overnment of India , New Delhi,, Part I of the Report,
December 2005
153
POSTALE 2008
LEADERSHIP AND CULTURE THE KEY TO SAFETY PERFORMANCE

T. K. JENA
Noamundi Iron Mine, Tata Steel
INTRODUCTION
The meaning of Culture in Oxford dictionary is improvement by mental or physical training: intellectual development: a particular form, stage or type of intellectual development or civilization. The use
of the word culture therefore implies that this is something to be desired and to strive for: a way of
life, which is what safety, should be in the context of our day today life.
One element of culture is discipline; its requirements become a law that must be obeyed. Those embracing culture come to it out of desire: they want to join in. Exclusion is what they fear and they discipline themselves to confirm
Let us take an example of Bhopal, the worst industrial disaster in history, we find from the investigation report that none of the safety system, relief valve, absorber, flare, refrigeration, was in working
order. More than 3000 people were dead and many more thousands were diseased when the deadly
MIC gas leaked.
The key element in developing safety culture is developing a rigorous safety discipline, which only
will make the area a safe place to work. The flashing lights, a multitude of alarms and computer
monitors, limit switches and other protective devices will be of help but cannot substitute a safe work
culture.
THE PRINCIPLES OF A TOTAL SAFETY CULTURE
Traditional safety cultures typically provide the necessary support for employees to strive beyond
minimal efforts. Organizations relying on conventional safety and leadership approaches often fail to
inspire the necessary safety-related behaviours and attitudes in their employees. In addition, these
organizations have difficulty in identifying, and then removing barriers to safety excellence. Although
most individuals possess the necessary values and intentions, their actual behaviours may not support a Total Safety Culture. In a Total Safety Culture, employees not only feel responsible for their
own safety, they feel responsible for their co-workers' safety, and the organizational culture supports
them acting on that responsibility.
Behaviour-Based Observation and Feedback
Using simple but effective observation techniques, employees periodically observe each other and
then give appropriate one-on-one coaching feedback regarding safety-related behaviours. Observational data is collected and analysed to identify areas needing special attention. It is then discussed
in work teams to develop relevant intervention strategies. As employees become more comfortable
with the informal observation process, they begin to observe and give behaviour-based feedback
informally as safety coaching becomes a natural part of the work culture.
So what does a positive safety culture look like? Basically it consists of eight core components as
follows:Worker Involvement
Employees to feel that they have some say in safety issues. They are to be involved in developing
and implementing safety initiatives. Feedback from employees is to be actively solicited because few
people know the hazards that accompany a job better than the people who do it.
POSTALE 2008
Management Commitment to Safety

Senior managers uses their authority to enable and empower workers to behave in safer ways. They
know a safe and productive working environment is much more likely to be developed from support
by key managers.
Personal Accountability
Employees are to be held accountable for their own well-being. Supervisors also realize that they are
responsible for the safety performance of their subordinates. Just as punctuality, productivity and
quality dimensions of worker performance are assessed by appraisal, so is safety.
Performance Management
Job safety analysis is to be used to identify critical unsafe behaviours and measure the frequency of
their occurrence. Employees are to be rewarded without any bias when they reach safety goals because People behave the way they are measured.
Co-worker Support
Employees are to be trained through employees awareness in improving safety(EAIS) programmes
regarding how to give and receive constructive feedback from their co-workers. They should understand their behavioural impacts not only their own safety, but the safety of those around them.
Training, Equipment, Physical Environment
Employees should have the proper training and physical resources to perform their jobs in . Personal
protective equipment to be readily available, and with safe work environment.
Organizational Commitment
Both managers and rank-and-file employees are to be committed to the well being of all employees
and to the organization as a whole. Each one should demonstrate his commitment and their behavior should radiate as a role model/benchmark on safety.
Job Satisfaction
The relationship among the seven previous factors is critical in analysing the entire culture as a
whole. When they work in conjunction with one another, job satisfaction increases. By addressing
these eight key components, safety officers and managers begin to change safety culture for the
better future. Considering the costs, both personal and financial of safety matters as well as the
many benefits ,a positive safety culture can provide, culture change is a process well worth undertaking.
CONCLUSION
The need to involve all people in an organization with clear and concise expectations under strong
leadership and regular measurement and reporting on performance are the key elements in improving safety performance of any organization.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The author is grateful to Mr. D.B.Sundara Ramam, Agent and Chief (Noamundi and Katamati Iron
Mine of M/s TATA STEEL) and Mr.S.S.Hota,Chief(HR/IR),OMQ for giving necessary guidance &
permission for publishing this paper.
155
POSTALE 2008
A PROACTIVE MASTER PLAN FOR SUSTAINABLE

AND ECO-FRIENDLY ENERGY SECURITY
SUBHASIS SEN
Retired Scientist, Central Fuel Research Institute, Dhanbad
NANDITA MOITRA
Biomass Energy Consultant, Bangalore
PREAMBLE
Proposasl which include selective mining of coal sections so as to avoid intermixing of dirt bands and
partings from the thick interbanded seams in open-cast mines, low temperature carbonisation of
coals with recovery of all useful by-products, production of petroleum substitutes through tar hydrogenation route, washing of char for obtaining a smokeless and eco-friendly fuel free from the hazards of spontaneous combustion and several other proactive measures have been advanced.
Investigation was also undertaken on low temperature carbonisation of biomass obtained from agricultural wastes and forest litters rich in the precursors of oil-generating coal macerals. The experimental studies show that the raw materials, collected from various types of bio-mass, when further
processed and subjected to low temperature carbonisation yielded nearly 10 to 14 percent of tar and
nearly 50 percent of char, respectively resembling petroleum crude and low rank coals, besides
other products like ammonical liquor and gas. These products can be co-generated and blended with
coal and hydrocarbons not only for improving the quality of the respective fuels but also to conserve
and extend their available reserves.
A comparative study on the properties of bio-mass oil with that of the conventional fuel oil confirms
that the former is a potential source of liquid fuel while the bio-mass LTC (low temperature carbonisation) char having adequate calorific value can also supplement as a smokeless eco-friendly source
of solid fuel for power generation and other uses, thereby significantly conserving both the solid and
liquid varieties of fossil fuels. Further it is suggested that these new sources of fuels of both liquid
and solid categories can be co-generated in low temperature carbonisation plants along with coal to
make the processes need-based, cost-effective, eco-friendly and employment-generating.
DISCUSSION
The master plan of power management in the context of the existing Indian energy scenario has
been worked out basically in relation to the nature of the Indian Gondwana coals which, despite inferior quality, is presently the storehouse for supply of the principal raw material for thermal power
generation. These coals occur mostly in thick seams interspersed with dirt bands and partings of
carbonaceous shale, argillaceous shale and sandy shale occasionally having adequate thickness
(Basu, 1964). In case of intermixing of carbonaceous shale or other high ash material with coals
which are inherently of inferior quality, ash content of the run-off-mine fuel supplied to the industries
would turn out to be extremely poor. Use of such high ash coal in the power plants would not only
cause immense harm to the environmental and ecological systems but would also damage the
power plant equipments including furnace lining of the boiler. Besides these, additional burden of
ash disposal and transport of useless matter would increase the coast of power generation which
can be straightforwardly dispensed with by introducing appropriate modifications and innovative in
the process of mining and coal preparation.
Studies conducted at the Bilaspur Coal Survey Laboratory of Central Fuel Research Institute (Konar
et.al., 1996) have shown that due to intermixing of dirt bands and partings in large opencast coal
projects, the quality of run-off-mine coal may deteriorate in the following manner:
(a) Coal excluding all bands: 25 - 30% ash
POSTALE 2008
(b) Coal with shaly coal bands: 30 - 40 % ash

(c) Coal with all bands: 45% and above ash
(d) Coal with all bands including partings (true dirts with more than 1 m thickness): 50-60% ash.
Such pervasive but readily avoidable deterioration in coal quality is predominantly caused due to
extensive and indiscriminate use of dragline and other large-size equipments in the open-cast system of mining.
SELECTIVE MINING OF COAL
Working of typical thick coal seams interspersed with dirt bands and partings having adequate thickness are usually conducted in opencast mines with the help of heavy machineries and blasting, followed by collection of coals associated with large amounts of dirt. In some of the mines, as a measure of quality control, dirt are hand-picked from the conveyor belt or mechanically separated; but
despite such practice, run-off-mine coals dispatched to the consumer generally contain large
amounts of shaly impurities.
It has been suggested by the authors (Sen, Sen and Moitra, 1999) that apart from hand picking of
shales from the conveyor belts and mechanical deshaling, selective mining by adopting strip mining
following special devices for working the coaly sections in isolated slices and discrete benches
should be adhered to. To facilitate such process of mining, in addition to restricted use of conventional draglines and other large size machineries, which are essential for removing overburden and
working of thick coal segments, miniature mining equipments should be developed and deployed.
This would help collection of coal in suitable horizontal slices following the benches delineated by
partings and thicker bands having adequate height and strength. Such partings and bands could be
separately mined and used as fillers in the mining area itself, thereby avoiding transportation of the
waste materials to the power plants, as well as, solving the problem of ash disposal to a great extent.
Instead of designing boiler for accommodating high ash coals, which in the long run would give rise
to severe ecological problems, attempts should be made to reduce the ash content of the run-offmine coals as far as practicable in situ, followed by coal preparation.
COAL PREPARATION
In India, beneficiation of non-caking coals is now being seriously considered for preventing environmental degradation and for deriving benefits like saving of transport cost, improved fuel performance, increase in heat value of the fuel and longevity of the power station machineries, simultaneously minimising the problem of ash disposal and consequent ecological factors.
For deriving optimum advantage from coal by extracting all value-based ingredients from it, coal
preparation should be designed and practiced on the basis of a thorough study on the nature of Indian coals which are basically different in comparison to the foreign coals of Carboniferous origin.
Apart from the highly assorted and interbanded disposition, Indian coals of Lower Gondowana affinity are also characterized by extremely heterogeneous nature as revealed in their maceral and microlithotye contents. This high ash, high volatile low rank coal contain significant amounts of liptinite
or exinite group of coal macerals, such as, sporinite, cutinite and resinite which are known to yield
oil-like substances on appropriate treatment. These macerals typically occur in intimate association
with argillaceous matter, particularly in low rank coals. Hence, on conventional practice of coal beneficiation, a significant part of these precious hydrocarbon-yielding ingredients concentrate in middling or rejects. A part of liptinites that would accumulate in the washed fraction of the coal would be
burnt in the power plant furnace which could have been gainfully retrieved. Since hydrocarbongenerating liptinite (exinite) group of coal macerals tend to associate with lithotypes containing
durainous and argillaceous constituents, to obtain maximum quantum of tar, the raw coals should
preferably be subjected to low temperature carbonisation before washing.
157
POSTALE 2008
It is well known that from oil shales which contain large amounts argillaceous matter in intimate association with alginate and similar oil-yielding substances generate significant amount of hydrocarbons on pyrolysis or retorting. Following the same process at 600o C, also known as low temperature
carbonisation (LTC), from low rank power coals soft coke, tar - resembling petroleum crude, ammonical liquour and gas could be obtained.
LOW TEMPERATURE CARBONISATION OF COAL
Since the fifties, studies on low temperature carbonisation (LTC) of coal, briquetting of char, hydrogenation of tar and various other studies on industrial utilisation of low rank coals were conducted at
the Central Fuel Research Institute, Dhanbad, and Regional Research Laboratory, Hyderabad. LTC
studies of Indian coals conducted in these laboratories, showed the importance of the process for
generating power and deriving value-based chemicals from low rank coals. In the early sixties the
need to establish LTC industries in the country at the earliest was realised. Rama Rao (1961) of the
National Council of Applied Economic Research opined that in order to generate electricity from coal
at competitive prices, the only alternative appears to be to carbonise non-caking coal at low temperature, recover and process the liquid and gaseous by-products and use the pulverized char as
fuel. Usually in the process of LTC of low rank high volatile coals - conducted at 600o C - about 40 to
50 percent of soft coke or char and 8 to 12 percent of tar could be obtained together with ammonical
liquor and gas. It has been suggested (Sen et al, 1994, Sen and Moitra, 2007) that tar obtained from
power coal from a number of LTC plants located near the mines, could be collected in a central hydrogenation plant for conversion to petroleum-substitute fuels and chemicals. Even a conservative
estimate of 8 percent yield of tar from low rank coal guarantees 16 to 24 million tonnes of supply of
the basic raw material for embarking upon a major coal to oil project, provided 200 to 300 million
tonnes of coals are annually subjected to low temperature carbonisation.
Conversion of coal to oil by tar hydrogenation route is an established and comparatively convenient
technology which has already been studied in CFRI in respect of several Indian coals. For this purpose, low rank perhydrous coals with higher exinite content, higher volatile matter and high tar yield
have been found to be particularly suitable, because of high hydrogen content and fluid nature of tar
(Lahiri and Mukherjee, 1972).
BENEFICIATION OF CHAR
Preliminary investigations (Sen, et. al.1994, 1996) have shown that like coal, soft coke in fine size or
char can also be washed using organic liquids. The results of float and sink tests of a low temperature char with 46 percent of ash, obtained from a high volatile coal
with 5.2 percent moisture, 37.0 percent ash, 25.5 percent volatile matter and 32.3 percent fixed carbon, representing a typical inferior grade, high moisture, high volatile run-off mine coal that are generally used in Indian power plants, have been presented in Table1.
TABLE 1 : Results of Float and Sink Test of a High Ash Char
Sp.Gr.
Particulars
Amount %
Ash %
1.60
Float
Sink
Float
Sink
Float
Sink
Float
Sink
Float
Sink
19.4
80.6
49.1
50.9
63.1
36.9
74.9
25.1
83.8
16.2
19.9
52.5
32.9
59.5
37.1
60.7
37.8
77.3
40.7
77.8
1.70
1.80
1.90
2.00
158
POSTALE 2008
In this particular char it is observed that at 1.60 specific gravity, nearly 20 percent yield with ash of
about 20 percent could be obtained which appears to be suitable for specialized uses including
manufacture of formed coke or briquettes of tailor-made specification and for blending with coking
coals. This fraction can be used for beneficiation at lower density after further crushing. The scouting
test shows that at1.90 specific gravity, the sink, which is of the order of 25 percent that constitutes
the reject having more than 77 percent of ash. On computation, it appears that the material sinking
at 1.60 specific gravity and floating at 1.90 specific gravity would yield 55.5 per cent of medium quality char with about 41 percent of ash which can be used for power generation. This fuel would obviously be smokeless, less pollutant and on burning would produce intense heat in comparison to the
original high moisture coal.
The study is very relevant from the point of view of conversion of coal tar to oil and use of beneficiated chars having higher fuel value and lower moisture content, compared to usual coals that are
supplied to the power plants. Apart from extraction of maximum quantum of tar, LTC chars produced
in the process can be stored in a safe manner avoiding spontaneous combustion and weathering.
LTC char or soft coke, being softer than coal, would consume less amount of energy for crushing. In
China, experiments have shown that char forms a good quality fuel and could be used in pulverised
fuel furnace of power station (Qianlin and Bin, 1989). Nearer home, Thatoi, Singh and Sohal, (1996)
have confirmed that char can be successfully beneficiated in washary in a very economical and energy saving manner. Apparently, char obtained by carbonising high volatile coals at 600 C may
cause ignition problem due to drop of volatile matter to 8 percent to 14 percent. This problem can
easily be surmounted by blending of coal char with high volatile coal or bio-mass char which is almost like a high volatile coal.
In India, technology in regard to low temperature carbonisation, hydrogenation of tar, briquetting of
char or utilisation of fines in fluidized bed for power generation, utilisation of fly ash as raw material
for bricks and other purposes etc have already been developed in Central Fuel Research Institute,
Dhanbad, and Indian Institute of Chemical Technology (formerly Regional .Research .Laboratory),
Hyderabad.
BIO-FUEL
At this juncture of crucial fuel shortage, a crisis-laden and power-hungry country like India needs to
derive adequate energy from other sources as well. For this purpose, like many other countries, India too has geared up for developmental activities on various possible sources of energy options,
such as, nuclear, sun, wind, ocean, hydal, cow-dung and bio-fuel derived from waste vegetal
sources.
While nuclear source offers enormous supply of energy, presently its operating process is not considered as a completely secure and risk-free venture. On the other hand, totally clean power options
obtained from sun, wind, ocean, hydal power etc may take a long period to substitute coal as a major
source. Hence, in the present period of power predicament, side by side with coal, bio-fuel can be
considered as a viable potential energy source. It is well known that in Brazil, ethanol obtained from
sugar cane has been commercially used for several decades as a partial substitute to petroleum.
(Calvin, 1987; Anon, 1991a, 1991b, Jimenez, Bonilla, Ferrer, 1991). Extensive use of bio-fuel would
substantially conserve the valuable non-renewable resources of fossil fuels and in the long run may
even replace it.
Like fossil fuels, bio-fuels too occur in solid, liquid or gaseous forms which not only resemble and
analogous to the former, but also in many respects appear to be superior to the former. Both being
derived from various parts of plants, yield similar products on pyrolysis and, hence, can be advantageously considered for co-processing and blending in respect of the comparable products.
Bio-fuels obtained from seeds of jetropha or sources like sweet sorghum, euphorbs plant, jojoba
shrub etc essentially require land for plantation and, hence, may cause food shortage in future. In
159
POSTALE 2008
contrast, the present proposal of renewable fuels do not require any additional land for cultivation,
neither it require deforestation or cutting of the trees, since all the raw materials in this case would be
obtained from waste vegetal sources which are freely and abundantly available. For collection,
transportation and initial processing of these sources, opening of new jobs in the rural areas is distinctly possible.
HYDROCARBON LIQUID
Based on petrographic studies, Teichmller (1974) concluded that petroleum-like substances in coal
are definitely generated from exinite or liptinite group of coal macerals and very probably also from
vitrinites. Lahiri and Bhattacharya (1961) correlated yield of tar and char with maceral composition
and showed that in low rank coals exnite group of coal macerals give double the amount of tar compared to that of vitrinite. Based on the information obtained from these studies, the present investigation was undertaken on LTC products of exine-rich bio-mass like algae, spores, cuticles, and resins
which are respectively considered to be the precursors of alginite, sporinite, cutinite and resinite - the
oil-generating macerals of coal. Since exinites of low rank coal and lignite yield more tar (Lahiri and
Bhattachrya et.al.,1961) or petroleum-substitute products, the authors selected some bio-mass samples which contain large quantum of precursors of exinites as possible source of hydrocarbon (Sen,
et.al.1992 a,b). The LTC study was conducted on various types of processed bio-mass obtained
from agricultural wastes, forest litters and algal bodies, grown in overhead tanks in areas having
bright sunshine. All these studies show encouraging results as the tar obtained from the bio-mass by
pyrolysis was similar to petroleum crude in many respects.
Preliminary studies have shown that from exine-rich plant debris 50 to 150 liters of tar per tonne of
dry bio-mass could be obtained which may form a potential source for synthetic fuel (Sen, Sen and
Sen, 1992a, 1992b). The study was conducted in more detail (Moitra, 1997) in some bio-mass samples selected from various sources. Amongst these, samples collected from land plants recorded 52
to 65 percent carbon and 6.7 to 8.6 percent hydrogen on dry ash free basis. On subjecting to low
temperature carbonisation at 6000C in Gray-King apparatus these samples yielded nearly 7 to 13
percent of tar, 20 to 38 percent of ammonical liquor and 36 to 48 percent of char. The proportions of
yields, however, depend on rate of heating and other relevant factors. Slow pyrolysis conducted on
some of the selected bio-mass in Fischer-Assay apparatus yielded nearly 10 to 16 percent of tar, 14
to 25 percent of ammonical liquor and 38 to 50 percent of char.(Table 2)
TABLE 2 : Low Temperature Products from Bio-mass Samples (Fischer Assay)
(Yield %)
Sample
,Oil
Char
Liquor
Gas
1.
2.
3.
9.9
14.7
16.3
50.0
38.0
40.0
25.2
17.0
14.2
12.9
28.3
27.5
The elemental composition of biomass tar Table-2 showed high carbon content (80.3%), high hydrogen content (10.9%) and moderately high oxygen content (7.8%) and extremely low sulphur content
(0.01%). The moisture content of the bio-mass tar was 13.5 percent which is high compared to that
of the conventional fuel oil. This value could, nevertheless, be reduced by proper treatment. Evidently, elemental composition of the bio-mass tar shows very encouraging results which is confirmed
by the gross calorific value of the sample recording 10,080 KCal/Kg on dry ash free basis. Extremely
low sulphur content of the bio-mass oil is a very favourable factor for its commercial utilisation. Certain other values (Table 3) such as density, heating value, setting point and flash point etc. of biomass oil are similar to the values shown by conventional fuel oil, indicating the potentiality of the
former as an alternative source of the latter.
160
POSTALE 2008
TABLE 3 : Comparison of Composition and Some Properties of Bio-mass Oil with Conventional Fuel Oil
Composition/Properties
Fuel Oil
Biomass Pyrolysis Oil
Carbon %
Hydrogen %
Nitrogen %
Sulphur %
Oxygen % (by difference)
Water %
Density, kg/dm3
Lower Heating Value
(K Cab/kg)
Setting Point, oC
85 - 86
11 - 11.5
3-5
1 - 2.6
2
0.01
0 - 94
9608 9694
25 - 30
80.3
10.9
1.0
0.01
7.8
13.5
1.1
9405 9466
23
Flash Point, oC
90-180 (P.M.)
102 (COC) A 71 (P.M.)
BIOMASS CHAR
The solid residue of low temperature carbonisation of bio-mass or bio-mass char was found to be a
suitable solid fuel with 4.5 to 6.0 percent moisture, 18.0 to 25.6 percent ash, 25.4 to 35.0 percent
volatile matter and 36.3 to 43.6 percent fixed carbon on as received basis in most of the char samples obtained from land plants. On dry ash free basis, volatile matter and fixed carbon of the samples range between 36.4 and 47.9 percent and 52.1 and 63.6 percent, respectively. The gross calorific value of the virtually sulphur-free biomass char, determined in a bomb calorimeter, was found to
be 5818 K. cal/Kg. on dry mineral matter free basis which evidently indicates that, apart from tar and
other chemicals obtained from the bio-mass, char too can be used as an eco-friendly and smokeless fuel both in the form of pulverized fuel and briquette. Such fuel can be used for power generation as well as for domestic purposes, particularly in rural areas.
CONCLUSION
Since Independence, coal exploration and research in India have progressed in a satisfactory manner. CFRI studies have shown new insight in coal preparation resulting in establishment of several
washeries for beneficiation of coking coals. Studies on carbonisation, blending of coal and other
relevant measures have significantly helped in stretching the inadequate reserves of metallurgical
grade fuels. At this crucial period of power crisis when all over the world much emphasis has been
given to find out the future sources of energy, in India too top priority and paramount importance in
fuel research should be enforced.
Indias energy sector has continued to depend primarily on fossil fuels composed largely of inferior
grade coals. While coals earmarked for the steel industry are washed for obtaining cokes of the
stipulated grade, power coals, on the other hand, are not beneficiated which in turn has caused serious environmental degradation and damage to the eco-system. As days pass on with advanced
equipment and knowledge base, it is now possible for us to comprehend the far-reaching damage
that has caused to the over all environmental setup of the country for utilising unwashed inferior
grade coals. Recent investigation, undertaken with the help of American satellites, has confirmed
that the root cause of formation of thick fog and smog during winter in northern parts of India is due
to emission of fly-ash from coal-fired boilers. Burning of fossil fuels in ever increasing and unprecedented scale has caused immense harm to the environment because of carbon dioxide emission
and consequent green-house effect leading to rise in temperature. These destructive phenomena
together with large scale deforestation in the northern part of the country have been greatly responsible for the perpetual snow-line of the Himalayan front to ascend causing excessive melting of snow
and consequent recurrence of severe flood.
161
POSTALE 2008
In the present paper the authors have discussed some of these problems and have suggested certain practical measures for efficient preparation and utilization of coal for preventing and combating
environmental degradation and disaster.
Besides implementation of innovative steps in open-cast mining operation for reducing ash content
of the run-off-mine coal, it has also been suggested to conduct low temperature carbonisation of low
rank coal followed by washing of the soft coke which can be used as an eco-friendly smokeless fuel
in the power stations.
Use of high ash coal in the power plants has not only caused immense harm to the environmental
and ecological systems but is also responsible for damaging the power
plant equipments including furnace lining of the boiler. Besides these, additional burden of ash disposal and transport of useless matter increase the coast of power generation which can be readily
solved by introducing appropriate modifications and innovations in the processes of mining and coal
preparation.
The study conducted on laboratory scale, as well as, with Fischer-Assay apparatus, show the importance of bio-mass, obtained from agricultural wastes and forest litters, as a future source of both liquid and solid fuels. This source does not require extra areas for planting new types of trees or shrubs
- only for obtaining substitute oil - , neither has it involved in deforestation or cutting of the trees. Biomass oil obtained from this renewable source can be upgraded by hydrogenation, fractionation and
various supplementary chemical processes, The gross calorific value of the virtually sulphur-free biomass char, was found to be 5818 K cal/Kg on dry mineral matter free basis which evidently indicates
that, apart from tar and other chemicals obtained from the bio-mass, char too can be used as an
eco-friendly and smoke-less fuel, both in the form of pulverized fuel and briquettes. Such fuel can be
used for power generation as well as for domestic purposes, particularly in the rural areas. Since
sulphur content of the bio-mass char is extremely low, it can be used as a potential component for
blending with strongly caking high sulphur coals of Assam and other matching coals for obtaining
superior grade metallurgical coke. Char can also be possibly used as slurry mixed with water and oil
for which appropriate investigation should be conducted.
It is suggested that instead of having separate LTC units for pyrolysis of bio-mass, the plants envisaged for LTC of coal could be used for bio-mass as well, so as to reduce the cost of the project.
Similarly, tar obtained from bio-mass pyrolysis could be co-processed with coal tar for reducing the
prohibitive coast of hydrogenation plant. Detailed laboratory scale investigation followed by pilot
study in this direction should be undertaken on priority basis and the concerned Public and Private
Sector Departments and CSIR Laboratories should conduct the necessary feasibility studies on
technical aspects of the proposed integrated project on fossil fuels and bio-mass.
Because of high moisture content, preparation and drying processes of low rank coals require additional energy besides special care during storage for avoiding weathering and spontaneous combustion, particularly in high temperature zones. In contrast, char can not
only be washed in a much improved manner but can also be safely stored for years without fire hazards and deterioration in quality of fuel.
The preventive measures with regard to utilisation of coal in industries which may decelerate the
process of environmental degradation are summerized below:
1.
2.
3.
Use of clean coal/char.

As far as practicable, shifting of coal-based industries, particularly the power plants to southern
and central parts of the country, away from the cities. In that case substantial part of the gases
generated from coal-fired boilers would be transferred towards the seas, located on both sides
of the Peninsula.
Innovative steps to filter the gases and fly-ash particles emitted from the power plants to be
taken up for which extensive studies and research are necessary.
162
POSTALE 2008
The study conducted on laboratory scale, as well as, with Fischer-Assay apparatus, show the importance of bio-mass, obtained from agricultural wastes and forest litters, as a future source of both liquid and solid fuels. This source does not require extra areas for planting new types of trees or shrubs
- only for obtaining substitute oil - , neither has it involved in deforestation or cutting of the trees.
While bio-mass oil obtained from this renewable source can be upgraded by hydrogenation, fractionation and various other chemical processes, the solid, char, on the other hand, may be used as
briquettes pulverized fuel or as slurry mixed with water and oil. Since sulphur content of the biomass
is extremely low, it can be used as a potential component for blending with strongly caking high sulphur coals of Assam and other matching coals for obtaining superior grade metallurgical coke.
It is suggested that instead of having separate LTC units for pyrolysis of biomass, the plants envisaged for LTC of coal could be used for biomass, so as to reduce the cost of the project. Similarly, tar
obtained from bio-mass pyrolysis could be co-processed with coal tar for reducing the prohibitive
coast of hydrogenation plant. Detailed laboratory scale investigation followed by pilot study in this
direction should be undertaken on priority basis and the concerned Public and Private Sector Departments CSIR laboratories should conduct the necessary feasibility studies on technical aspects of
the proposed projects on fossil fuels and bio-mass.
REFERENCES
Anon (1991, a) Substitute for diesel from Jetropha seeds, Urja, 29, No. 4, 49
Anon (1991, b) Coal from Agricultural wastes, Everyman's Science, 26(i), 26-27
Basu, T. N. (1964) On the Intercorrelation of Gondwana Coalfields in India, Metals and Minerals Review, Nov. 1964, pp. 5-31.
Brooks J. D. and Smit, J. W. (1969) The digenesis of plant lipids during the formation of coal, In , Coalification and Formation of
oil and gas in Geppsland Basin, Geochim Cosmochim Acta, v. 33, pp. 1183-1194
Calvin, M., (1987) Fuel Oils from Euphorbs and other Plants. Bot Journ. Linn, Soc., 94, 97-110
Jimenez L., Bonilla J. L. and Ferrer, J. L., (1991) Exploitation of agricultural residues as possible fuel sources, Fuel, 70, 223-226
Konar, S. K., Chattopadhyay, A. K. and Shah, B.L. (1996) Scope of power coal upgradation with particular reference to energy
management, Seminar on Energy Conservation and Management, Central Fuel Research Institute, Bilaspur Unit, Sept. 9,
1996.
Lahiri, A and Mukherjee D. K. (1972) Techno-economic feasibility of oil from coal in Upper Assam, Proc. Symp. Chemicals and Oil
from Coal, Central Fuel Research Institute, Dhanbad, pp. 51-88.
Lahiri, K. C. and Bhattacharya, R. (1961) Assessment of low temperature carbonisation products from petrographic composition
of coals, Symp. on Low Temperature Carbonization of Non-Caking Coals and Lignites and Briquetting of Coal Fines, v. 1, 258271, Regional Research Laboratory, Hyderabad, Nov. 20-22, 1961.
Moitra (nee Sen), Nandita, (1997) Chemical Investigation and Evaluation of Certain Plant Derived Materials as Petroleum Substitute, Ph.D. Thesis (unpublished), Nagpur University, Nagpur.
Moitra Nandita (2004) An Insight into the Oil Prone Precursors of Fossil Fuels for Selection of an Exine-Rich, High Hydrogen
Biomass, its Pyrolysis, and Product Evaluation as Fuel, Energy Sources, 26, pp. 1363-1368.
Moitra Nandita and Sen Subhasis, (2007) Sustainable and Environmental-Friendly Power from Waste Biomass, Gondwana Geol.
Magz. V.9, June, 2007,pp. 235-237.
Qianlin, Zhung and Bin, Yuchi, (1989) Combustion characteristics of fast pyrolysis char, Proc. Intern. Conf. on Coal Science,
Intern Energy Agency, v. 1, pp. 265-268, Oct. 23-27, 1989, Tokyo.
Rama Rao, G. (1961) Electricity - a by-product of low temperature carbonisation of coal, Low Temperature Carbonisation of Noncaking Coals and Lignites and Briquetting of Coal Fines, Regional Research Laboratory, Hyderabad, CSIR, v-1, pp. 307-310.
Sen, Subhasis Sen, Meera and Sen, Nandita (1992a) Exploration of forest and agricultural wastes as a source of fuel - perspective from the study of fossil fuel, Urja, v. 32(3), pp. 11-14.
Sen Subhasis, Sen Meera and Sen Nandita (1992 b). Hydrocarbons from algal bodies and vegetal sources - a prognosticated
assessment, Urja, v. 32(5), pp. 23-26.
Sen Subhasis and Sen Meera, (1994a) Petrography and origin of coal vis-a-vis integrated clean coal technology - a prognosticated study, Seminar on Clean Coal Technology, Environment and Analytical Aspects, Indian Institute of Chemical Technology, Hyderabad, 15-16, April, 1994.
Sen Subhasis and Sen Meera (1994 b) Utilisation of low rank Indian coals for power with by-product recovery and waste management - perspectives beyond 2000 A. D., Intern. Symp. on Mineral Beneficiation - Recent Trends and Beyond 2000 A.D.,
Indian Bureau of Mines, Nagpur, India, October, 3 & 4, 1994, Abstract, p.83
163
POSTALE 2008
Sen Subhasis and Sen, Meera (1996). A total package in utilisation of low rank coals and related fossil fuels, Jour. Geol. Soc.
India, Spl.V. 47, pp. 11-14.
Sen Subhasis, Sen Meera and Moitra, Nandita (1999) Selective mining and integrated use of power coal : a new approach in
waste management and pollution control, In, Environmental Management in Coal Mining and Thermal Power Plants, pp. 123127, (Eds.) P.C. Mishra and Ashutosh Naik, Technoscience Publications, Jaipur.
Sen Subhasis, (2007) Integrated and Eco-Friendly Power Management India2020 - FromVision to Reality, Jour. Geol. Soc. India,
Spl.V. 47, pp.261-264.
Teichmller, M. (1974), Generation of petroleum-like substances in coal seam as seen under the microscope. In, Advances in
Geochemistry, 1973, Technip, Paris, pp. 321-398.
Thatoi, K.C., Singh, Ram and Sohal, G.D.S. (1996): Energy Conservation at Jindal Strips Ltd., Raigarh, Seminar on Energy Conservation and Management, Central Fuel Research Institute, Bilaspur Unit, Sept. 9, 1996, Abstract
164
POSTALE 2008
AN INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

ADITYA KUMAR PATRA, SANTOSH KUMAR RAY, ANJALI KUMARI, MOHAN PRASAD,
MOHD. SHAMSHAD ALAM AND ACHYUTA KRISHNA GHOSH
Central Institute of Mining and Fuel Research, Dhanbad.
INTRODUCTION
Social impact assessment (SIA) includes the processes of analysing, monitoring and managing the
intended and unintended social consequences, both positive and negative, of planned interventions
(policies, programs, plans, projects) and any social change processes invoked by those interventions. Its primary purpose is to bring about a more sustainable and equitable biophysical and human
environment (IAIA, 2003a). Vanclay (1999b) defines SIA as the process of analysing (predicting,
evaluating and reflecting) and managing the intended and unintended consequences on the human
environment of interventions (policies, plans, programs, projects and other social activities) and social change processes so as to create a more sustainable biophysical and human environment.
By social impacts we mean the consequences to human populations of any public or private actionsthat alter the ways in which people live, work, play, relate to one another, organize to meet their
needs and generally cope as members of society. The term also includes cultural impacts involving
changes to the norms, values, and beliefs that guide and rationalize their cognition of themselves
and their society (IAIA, 2003b).
Salient features of the definitions of SIA
The important features of these definitions are as follows (IAIA, 2003a; Vanclay, 1999b):
The goal of SIA is to bring about a more ecologically, socio-culturally and economically sustainable and equitable environment. Impact assessment, therefore, promotes community development and empowerment, builds capacity, and develops social capital (social networks and trust).
The focus of concern of SIA is a proactive stance to development and better development outcomes, not just the identification or amelioration of negative or unintended outcomes and assisting communities and other stakeholders to identify development goals, and ensuring that positive outcomes are maximised.
The methodology of SIA can be applied to a wide range of planned interventions, and can be
undertaken on behalf of a wide range of actors, and not just within a regulatory framework.
SIA contributes to the process of adaptive management of policies, programs, plans and projects, and therefore needs to inform the design and operation of the planned intervention.
SIA builds on local knowledge and utilises participatory processes to analyse the concerns of
interested and affected parties. It involves stakeholders in the assessment of social impacts, the
analysis of alternatives, and monitoring of the planned intervention.
The good practice of SIA accepts that social, economic and biophysical impacts are inherently
and inextricably interconnected. Change in any of these domains will lead to changes in the
other domains. SIA must, therefore, develop an understanding of the impact pathways that are
created when change in one domain triggers impacts across other domains, as well as the iterative or flow-on consequences within each domain. In other words, there must be consideration of
the second and higher order impacts and of cumulative impacts.
In order for the discipline of SIA to learn and grow, there must be analysis of the impacts that
occurred as a result of past activities. SIA must be reflexive and evaluative of its theoretical
bases and of its practice.
While SIA is typically applied to planned interventions, the techniques of SIA can also be used to
consider the social impacts that derive from other types of events, such as disasters, demographic change and epidemics.
SIA is best understood as an umbrella or overarching framework that embodies the evaluation of all
impacts on humans and on all the ways in which people and communities interact with their socio-
POSTALE 2008
cultural, economic and biophysical surroundings. SIA thus has strong links with a wide range of specialist sub-fields involved in the assessment of areas such as: aesthetic impacts (landscape analysis), archaeological and cultural heritage impacts (both tangible and non-tangible), community impacts, cultural impacts, demographic impacts, development impacts, economic and fiscal impacts,
gender impacts, health and mental health impacts, impacts on indigenous rights, infrastructural impacts, institutional impacts, leisure and tourism impacts, political impacts (human rights, governance,
democratisation etc.), poverty, psychological impacts, resource issues (access and ownership of
resources), impacts on social and human capital, and other impacts on societies. As such, comprehensive SIA cannot formally be undertaken by a single person, but requires a team approach (IAIA,
2003a).
SCOPE OF SIA
The objective of SIA is to ensure that development maximises its benefits and minimises its costs,
especially those costs borne by people (including those in other places and in the future). Costs and
benefits may not be measurable or quantifiable and are often not adequately taken into account by
decision-makers, regulatory authorities and developers. By identifying impacts in advance: (1) better
decisions can be made about which interventions should proceed and how they should proceed; and
(2) mitigation measures can be implemented to minimise the harm and maximise the benefits from a
specific planned intervention or related activity (IAIA, 2003A).
An important feature of SIA is the value system held by the project affected people (PAP) and the
professionals carrying out SIA. In addition to a commitment to sustainability and to scientific integrity,
such a value system includes an ethic that advocates openness and accountability, fairness and
equity, and defends human rights. The role of SIA goes far beyond the ex-ante (in advance) prediction of adverse impacts and the determination of who wins and who loses. SIA also encompasses:
empowerment of local people; enhancement of the position of women, minority groups and other
disadvantaged or marginalised members of society; development of capacity building; alleviation of
all forms of dependency; increase in equity; and a focus on poverty reduction.
Evaluation of an SIA needs to consider its intended purpose. Some conceptualizations of SIA are
related to protecting individual property rights, with clear statements of adverse impacts required to
ensure that individual rights are not transgressed. Where these rights are violated, SIA could be
seen as contributing to mitigation and compensation mechanisms. In these situations, SIA tends to
concentrate on the negative impacts. In other contexts, however, particularly in developing countries,
there should be less emphasis on the negative impacts on small groups of individuals or on individual property rights. Rather, there should be greater concern with maximising social utility and development potential, while ensuring that such development is generally acceptable to the community,
equitable and sustainable. SIA should also focus on reconstruction of livelihoods. The improvement
of social wellbeing of the wider community should be explicitly recognized as an objective of planned
interventions, and as such should be an indicator considered by any form of assessment.
The objective of SIA is to bring change to one or more of the following (IAIA, 2003a; Vanclay, 2000):
peoples way of life that is, how they live, work, play and interact with one another on a day-today basis;
their culture that is, their shared beliefs, customs, values and language or dialect;
their community its cohesion, stability, character, services and facilities;
their political systems the extent to which people are able to participate in decisions that affect
their lives, the level of democratisation that is taking place, and the resources provided for this
purpose;
their environment the quality of the air and water people use; the availability and quality of the
food they eat; the level of hazard or risk, dust and noise they are exposed to; the adequacy of
sanitation, their physical safety, and their access to and control over resources;
their health and wellbeing health is a state of complete physical, mental, social and spiritual
wellbeing and not merely the absence of disease or infirmity;
166
POSTALE 2008
their personal and property rights particularly whether people are economically affected, or
experience personal disadvantage which may include a violation of their civil liberties;
their fears and aspirations their perceptions about their safety, their fears about the future of
their community, and their aspirations for their future and the future of their children
Activities comprising Social Impact Assessment (IAIA, 2003a)

SIA comprises most of the following activities. It:
participates in the environmental design of the planned intervention;
identifies interested and affected peoples;
facilitates and coordinates the participation of stakeholders;
documents and analyses the local historical setting of the planned intervention so as to be able
to interpret responses to the intervention, and to assess cumulative impacts;
collects baseline data (social profiling) to allow evaluation and audit of the impact assessment
process and the planned intervention itself;
gives a rich picture of the local cultural context, and develops an understanding of local community values, particularly how they relate to the planned intervention;
identifies and describes the activities which are likely to cause impacts (scoping);
predicts (or analyses) likely impacts and how different stakeholders are likely to respond;
assists evaluating and selecting alternatives (including a no development option);
assists in site selection;
recommends mitigation measures;
assists in the valuation process and provides suggestions about compensation (non-financial as
well as financial);
describes potential conflicts between stakeholders and advises on resolution processes;
develops coping strategies for dealing with residual or non-mitigatable impacts;
contributes to skill development and capacity building in the community;
advises on appropriate institutional and coordination arrangements for all parties;
assists in devising and implementing monitoring and management programs.
CORE VALUES, PRINCIPLES AND GUIDELINES OF SIA (IAIA, 2003a)
I. Core Values
II. Principles
III. Guidelines
: Fundamental, ideal-typical, enduring, statements of belief that are strongly held

and accepted as premises (is-statements).
: General statements of either a common understanding or an indication as to a
course of action about what ought to be done (ought statements).
: Statements by which to plan a specific course of action and which clarify how it
should done (action statements).
Guidelines can be described as statements which provide advice or direction by which to plan a specific course of action. They are written as specific statements of instruction about what to do and/or
how to do it. Typically they are action-statements. A principle is a macro statement that provides a
general guide to a course of action about what ought to be done. They are written as oughtstatements. Core values are statements about fundamental beliefs that are deeply held. They are
typically is-statements. Values determine principles, from which guidelines can be written.
I. Core Values Of SIA (IAIA, 2003a)
The SIA community of practice believes that:
[a] There are fundamental human rights that are shared equally across cultures, and by males and
females alike.
[b] There is a right to have those fundamental human rights protected by the rule of law, with justice
applied equally and fairly to all, and available to all.
167
POSTALE 2008
[c] People have a right to live and work in an environment which is conducive to good health and to
a good quality of life and which enables the development of human and social potential.
[d] Social dimensions of the environment specifically but not exclusively peace, the quality of social relationships, freedom from fear, and belongingness are important aspects of peoples
health and quality of life.
[e] People have a right to be involved in the decision making about the planned interventions that
will affect their lives.
[f] Local knowledge and experience are valuable and can be used to enhance planned interventions.
Ii. Principles Specific To Sia Practice (Iaia, 2003a)
Equity considerations should be a fundamental element of impact assessment and of development planning.
Many of the social impacts of planned interventions can be predicted.
Planned interventions can be modified to reduce their negative social impacts and enhance their
positive impacts.
SIA should be an integral part of the development process, involved in all stages from inception
to follow-up audit.
There should be a focus on socially sustainable development, with SIA contributing to the determination of best development alternative(s) SIA (and EIA) have more to offer than just being
an arbiter between economic benefit and social cost.
In all planned interventions and their assessments, avenues should be developed to build the
social and human capital of local communities and to strengthen democratic processes.
In all planned interventions, but especially where there are unavoidable impacts, ways to turn
impacted peoples into beneficiaries should be investigated.
The SIA must give due consideration to the alternatives of any planned intervention, but especially in cases when there are likely to be unavoidable impacts.
Full consideration should be given to the potential mitigation measures of social and environmental impacts, even where impacted communities may approve the planned intervention and
where they may be regarded as beneficiaries.
Local knowledge and experience and acknowledgment of different local cultural values should
be incorporated in any assessment.
There should be no use of violence, harassment, intimidation or undue force in connection with
the assessment or implementation of a planned intervention.
Developmental processes that infringe the human rights of any section of society should not be
accepted.
IAIA (2003b) summarises principles of SIA as follows

Achieve extensive understanding of local and regional settings to be affected by the action or policy
Identify and describe interested and affected stakeholders and other parties
Develop baseline information (profiles) of local and regional communities
Focus on key elements of the human environment
Identify the key social and cultural issues related to the action or policy from the community and
stakeholder profiles
Select social and cultural variables which measure and explain the issues identified
Identify research methods, assumptions and significance
Research methods should be holistic in scope, i.e. they should describe all aspects of social
impacts related to the action or policy
Research methods must describe cumulative social effects related to the action or policy
Ensure that methods and assumptions are transparent and replicable
Select forms and levels of data collection analysis which are appropriate to the significance of
the action or policy
Provide quality information for use in decision-making
168
POSTALE 2008
Collect qualitative and quantitative social, economic and cultural data sufficient to usefully describe and analyze all reasonable alternatives to the action
Ensure that the data collection methods and forms of analysis are scientifically robust
Ensure the integrity of collected data
Ensure that any environmental justice issues are fully described and analyzed
Ensure that research methods, data, and analysis consider underrepresented and vulnerable
stakeholders and populations
Consider the distribution all impacts (whether social, economic, air quality, noise, or potential
health effects) to different social groups (including ethnic/racial and income groups)
Undertake evaluation/monitoring and mitigation
Establish mechanisms for evaluation and monitoring of the action, policy or program
Where mitigation of impacts may be required, provide a mechanism and plan for assuring effective mitigation takes place
Identify data gaps and plan for filling these data needs
Other Guiding Principles (IAIA, 2003a)

There are many International Agreements and Declarations that contain notable statements. Principle 1 of the 1992 Rio Declaration on Environment and Development, for example, states that Human beings are at the centre of concerns for sustainable development. They are entitled to a healthy
and productive life in harmony with nature. Principle 17 calls for impact assessment to be undertaken. Article 1 of the 1986 Declaration on the Right to Development states that: The right to development is an inalienable human right by virtue of which every human person and all peoples are
entitled to participate in, contribute to, and enjoy economic, social, cultural and political development,
in which all human rights and fundamental freedoms can be fully realized. The human right to development also implies the full realization of the right of peoples to self-determination, which includes,
subject to the relevant provisions of both International Covenants on Human Rights, the exercise of
their inalienable right to full sovereignty over all their natural wealth and resources.
In International Agreements and Declarations social issues are often implied but rarely given adequate emphasis. Nevertheless, the statements that are given in those Declarations can be rewritten
to refer to social issues more specifically. The following is a list of international principles in common
usage rewritten to apply more directly to social issues:
Precautionary Principle: In order to protect the environment, a concept which includes peoples
ways of life and the integrity of their communities, the precautionary approach shall be applied.
Where there are threats or potential threats of serious social impact, lack of full certainty about those
threats should not be used as a reason for approving the planned intervention or not requiring the
implementation of mitigation measures and stringent monitoring.
Uncertainty Principle: It must be recognised that our knowledge of the social world and of social
processes is incomplete and that social knowledge can never be fully complete because the social
environment and the processes affecting it are changing constantly, and vary from place to place
and over time.
Intragenerational Equity: The benefits from the range of planned interventions should address the
needs of all, and the social impacts should not fall disproportionately on certain groups of the population, in particular children and women, the disabled and the socially excluded certain generations or
certain regions.
Intergenerational Equity: Development activities or planned interventions should be managed so
that the needs of the present generation are met without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs.
169
POSTALE 2008
Recognition and Preservation of Diversity: Communities and societies are not homogenous.
They are demographically structured (age and gender), and they comprise different groups with
various value systems and different skills. Special attention is needed to appreciate the existence of
the social diversity that exists within communities and to understand what the unique requirements of
special groups may be. Care must be taken to ensure that planned interventions do not lead to a
loss of social diversity in a community or a diminishing of social cohesion.
Internalization of Costs: The full social and ecological costs of a planned intervention should be
internalised through the use of economic and other instruments, that is, these costs should be considered as part of the costs of the intervention, and no intervention should be approved or regarded
as cost-effective if it achieves this by the creation of hidden costs to current or future generations or
the environment.
The Polluter Pays Principle: The full costs of avoiding or compensating for social impacts should
be borne by the proponent of the planned intervention.
The Prevention Principle: It is generally preferable and cheaper in the long run to prevent negative
social impacts and ecological damage from happening than having to restore or rectify damage after
the event.
The Protection and Promotion of Health and Safety: Health and safety are paramount. All
planned interventions should be assessed for their health impacts and their accident risks, especially
in terms of assessing and managing the risks from hazardous substances, technologies or processes, so that their harmful effects are minimized, including not bringing them into use or phasing
them out as soon as possible. Health impacts cover the physical, mental and social wellbeing and
safety of all people, paying particular attention to those groups of the population who are more vulnerable and more likely to be harmed, such as the economically deprived, indigenous groups, children and women, the elderly, the disabled, as well as to the population most exposed to risks arising
from the planned intervention.
The Principle of Multisectoral Integration: Social development requirements and the need to consider social issues should be properly integrated into all projects, policies, infrastructure programs
and other planning activities.
The Principle of Subsidiarity: Decision making power should be decentralised, with accountable
decisions being made as close to an individual citizen as possible. In the context of SIA, this means
decisions about the approval of planned interventions, or conditions under which they might operate,
should be taken as close to the affected people as possible, with local people having an input into
the approval and management processes.
III. Developing Guidelines
Because guidelines are specific recommendations for action, they need to be developed in the context in which they are to be applied and they need to be addressed to a specific audience. Therefore,
they need to be developed in conjunction with the relevant parties. They need to become accepted
as the guidelines of that group rather than being imposed.
There are many different groups who are potentially interested in guidelines for SIA. They include:
SIA practitioners require guidelines to improve their practice;
Regulatory agencies require guidelines in order to specify or audit the scope of SIA activities
they commission as well as the quality of SIA reports they receive;
Policy and program developers require guidelines to ensure that policy and program development considers social impacts;
Affected peoples and NGOs require guidelines to be able to participate effectively in SIA processes. Local action groups (resident action groups) and NGOs often act like a regulatory agency
in checking the appropriateness of SIA processes.
170
POSTALE 2008
Developers (proponents) and Financiers require guidelines to be committed to good practice in

environmental and social impact assessment, to adequately resource such practice, to liaise effectively with practitioners and interested and affected parties, and with regulatory agencies.
Development agencies (multilateral and bilateral aid organisations) require guidelines to ensure that the most benefit is obtained from their aid projects, that SIA components are adequately resourced, and that the aid projects themselves do not have unintended environmental
or social consequences.
SIA VARIABLES & PROJECT/POLICY STAGE

For each project/policy stage, the SIA variables should be identified and potential impacts of project
on these variables should be assessed. This approach should ensure that no critical areas are overlooked. The task for the assessor is to spell out the magnitude and significance of impacts for each
cell like those identified in the illustrations. This can be presented in the form of a matrix as presented in Table 1. The next step in the development of the model is to suggest the social impact
variables for stages in project development given different project/policy types and settings. The
variables in Table 1 are suggestive and will vary depending on the types of projects for which the
SIA is carried out.
Population change
Population size density & change
Ethnic & racial comp. & distribution
Relocating people
Influx & outflows of temporaries
Presence of seasonal residents
Community & institutional structures
Voluntary associations
Interest group activity
Size & structure of local government
Historical experience with change
Employment/income characteristics
Employment equity of disadvantaged
groups
Local/regional/national linkages
Industrial/commercial diversity
Presence of planning & zoning
Political & social resources
Distribution of power & authority
Conflict newcomers & old-timers
Identification of stakeholders
Interested and affected parties
Leadership capability & characteristics
Interorganizational cooperation
171
Decommission/
abandonment
Operation/
maintenance
Construction
implement
Detailed
planning,
funding &
impact
assessment
Social impact assessment variables
General
planning, policy
development
preliminary
assessment
Table 1 : Matrix relating project stage to social impact assessment variables (IAIA, 2003b;
Vanclay, 2000)
POSTALE 2008
Economic Process
Increase/decrease of economic activities
Increase/decrease in food production
Impoverishment/affluence
Job creation/loss
Geographical Processes
Urban sprawl (expansion of urban
areas into rural areas)
Urbanisation
(growth of villages into cities)
Increased transportation and rural
accessibility
Physical splintering
(such as caused by major roads)
Community and family changes
Perceptions of risk, health & safety
Displacement/relocation concerns
Trust in political & social institutions
Residential stability
Density of acquaintanceships
Attitudes toward proposed action
Family & friendship networks
Concerns about social well-being
Community resources
Change in community infrastructure
Indigenous populations
Changing land use patterns
Effects on cultural, historical, sacred
& archaeological resources
Socio-cultural Processes
Globalisation (the incorporation of
the local into the global)
Emancipation and empowerment
(the process of facilitating the integration
of disadvantaged groups in civil society)
Marginalisation and exclusion
(the process of creating marginal groups
in society, which as a result are denied
access to services)
Segregation(the process of creation of
social difference within a community)
Other Processes
Excessive alcohol and drug use
Gambling
Prostitution, vandalism and graffiti
Activism
Litter
Traffic
Risk taking behavior & Resentment
STEPS IN THE SIA PROCESS
The social impact assessment itself may contain the ten steps outlined in Fig. 1. These steps are
logically sequential, but often overlap in practice (IAIA, 2003b).
172
POSTALE 2008
Develop public involvement program
Public involvement
Describe relevant human environment and zones of influence
Identify probable impacts
Investigate probable impacts
Determine probable response of affected parties

Estimate secondary & cumulative impacts
Recommend changes in proposed action or alternatives
Mitigation, remediation, and enhancement plan

Develop and implement monitoring program
Include interested and affected parties in all steps of the SIA process
Describe proposed action and alternatives
Identification
Community profile
Scoping
Projection of estimated effects
Formulation of alternatives
Mitigation
Monitoring
Fig. 1 : Steps in the social impact assessment process

PUBLIC INVOLVEMENT IN SIA
An effective public involvement plan to involve all potentially affected public groups is a prerequisite
for success of a SIA. It requires identifying and working with all potentially affected individuals and
groups starting at the very beginning of planning for the proposed action and alternatives. Groups
affected by proposed actions include: those who live nearby; those who will hear, smell or see a development; those who are forced to relocate because of a project; and those who have an interest in
the proposal but may not live in proximity. Others affected include those who might normally use the
land on which the project is located (such as farmers who have to plow around a transmission line).
Also there are those affected by the influx of seasonal residents because they may have to pay
higher prices for food or rent, or pay higher taxes to cover the cost of expanded community services.
The practitioner must be aware of literacy levels, language barriers, and cultural differences in preparing the public involvement program. Potentially affected public groups also may be identified
through spatially oriented census data, literature review, networking with agency contact lists or referrals from field staff. Once identified, representatives from each interested and affected party
should be systematically consulted to determine potential areas of concern/impact and ways each
representative might be involved during initial planning and the final decision. A full range of public
involvement techniques should be used to collect information about public response to a proposed
action. In this first step, the pieces are put in place for a public involvement program which will last
through implementation and become the foundation for monitoring. Most agencies will have a public
involvement unit for support (IAIA, 2003b).
173
POSTALE 2008
In a similar line Connor (1997) have proposed for the Participative Approach to Social Impact Assessment and Management (PASIAM) model which consists of four phases such as (a) Profiling
(summary of the key characteristics of a community or region prepared over some (say 10) days by
an applied sociologist or applied anthropologist who first reviews any written sources and then interviews 12 - 15 key informants), (b) Projecting (Estimates of the future state of the community or region in five or ten years from now (i) if the proposal is implemented and (ii) if it is not, are prepared
by the project team summarizing expected changes in: population, education, economy, public
health and municipal services and presented before the local community for their response), (c) Assessing (Working with community leaders and key informants, estimates are made about different
segments of the community: who gains, who loses, what is gained or lost and how important are
these gains and losses to those affected.), and (d) Managing (Ways to maximize the benefits, minimize the losses and compensate for the unavoidable for each segment of the community are worked
out with community leaders following a publication, open house(s) and planning workshop.).
PROVISIONS OF SIA UNDER DIFFERET R&R POLICIES OF INDIA
National Rehabilitation and Resettlement Policy, 2007 (NRRP, 2007)
An entire chapter (Chapter IV of National Rehabilitation and Resettlement Policy (NRRP), 2007) is
devoted to social impact assessments of projects. It states that where involuntary displacement of
four hundred of more families en masse in plain areas, or two hundred or more families en masse in
triabal or hill areas or areas mentioned in the Schedule V or Schedule VI to the Constitution of India
is involved as a result of upcoming of a new project or expansion of the existing project, the Government shall ensure that a SIA is carried out in the proposed affected areas. Where it is required to
undertake Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA), the SIA study shall be carried out simultaneously with the EIA study.
The SIA report shall be examined by an independent multi-disciplinary expert group constituted for
the purpose. Two non-official social science and rehabilitation experts, the Secretary/Secretaries of
the department(s) concerned with the welfare of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes of the appropriate Government or his (their) representative(s), and a representative of the requiring body shall
be nominated by the appropriate Government to serve on this expert group. Where both EIA and SIA
are required, a copy of the SIA report shall be made available to the agency prescribed in respect of
environmental impact assessment by the Ministry of Environment and Forests, and a copy of the EIA
report shall be shared with the said expert group (Sections 4.4.1 & 4.4.2).
In case where both EIA and SIA are required, the public hearing done in project affected areas for
EIA shall cover issues regarding SIA and where EIA is not required, SIA report should also be made
available to the public through public hearing.
The Ministry of Defence, in respect of projects involving emergency acquisition of minimum area of
land in connection with national security, may be exempted from the provisions of SIA (Section 4.7).
Coal India Resettlement & Rehabilitation Policy, 2008 (CIL, 2008)
Coal India came with its latest R&R Policy in May 2008. As such there is no mention of SIA in this
Policy. However it does say that through the preparation of resettlement and rehabilitation action
plans subsidiaries of Coal India should safeguard the project affected people (PAP) to improve, or at
least regain, their existing standard of living and earning capacity after a reasonable transition period
(Section 7). Actual implementation of R&R package must follow a detailed survey of the project affected villages to formulate the list of persons/families affected by the project, nature of effect, the
likely loss of income, etc. (Section 10). Under Section 22, the provision is kept to have projectspecific arrangements to deal with grievances of project affect families (PAFs).
Jharkhand Rehabilitation and Resettlement Policy, 2008 (JRRP, 2008)
The JRRP, 2008 has almost taken in full of all the provisions of SIA mentioned in NRRP, 2007 and
has included these in Chapter IV of the Policy. However it has attached a more stringent condition
174
POSTALE 2008
than mentioned in NRRP, 2007 with regards to the requirement of SIA. Here the involvement of
minimum number of families that are to be involuntarily displaced for mandatory requirement of a
SIA is fixed at one hundred. The other important feature that has been added is that before initiation
of land acquisition, the requiring body shall be required to provide written undertaking to abide by the
provisions of this Rehabilitation and Resettlement policy (Section 4.6).
CONCLUSION
There has been some debate over the precise meanings of terms such as Social Impact Assessment, Social Analysis, Social Assessment, Social Appraisal, and even Social Soundness Analysis
(Goodland, 1999). The review indicates that amongst the international professional community interested in SIA, although there is not a generally agreed definition, there is widespread agreement
about the concept in principle. Most SIA professionals consider SIA to be more than a methodology,
and that it is philosophy about development and democracy. As such, it considers pathologies of
development (i.e. impacts), goals of development (such as poverty alleviation), and processes of
development (e.g. participation, capacity building) (Goodland, 1999). There is no reason why SIA, as
a disciplinary entity rather than as a methodology, could not be involved in assisting communities to
determine their development priorities. The focus of social impact assessment studies on the preparation of a report for a regulatory hearing should be changed to a welfare based study and SIA studies should be carried out not by learned outside experts without community input, but it should be a
participative approach where stakeholders, especially the local community will be involved in each
stage (Connor, 1997).
REFERENCES
Goodland, R. (1999). Social and environmental assessment to promote sustainability. Paper presented to the annual meeting of
the International Association for Impact Assessment, New Orleans. Informal draft available from Environment Department, the
World Bank.
IAIA (2003a). International principles for social impact assessment. Special Publication Series No. 2, May. International Association for Impact Assessment (IAIA). www.iaia.org (accessed on 20 November 2008).
IAIA (2003b). Principles and guidelines for social impact assessment in the USA. Impact Assessment and Project Appraisal,
volume 21, number 3, September 2003, pages 231250, Beech Tree Publishing, 10 Watford Close, Guildford, Surrey GU1
2EP, UK. International Association for Impact Assessment (IAIA). www.iaia.org (accessed on 20 November 2008).
Vanclay, F. (1999a). Social impact assessment. In Petts, J. (ed) International Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment
(Vol 1), Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Vanclay, F. (1999b). Summary of workshop on International Guidelines and Principles for Social Impact Assessment. Report to
the closing session of the meeting of the International Association of Impact Assessment, Glasgow.
Vanclay, F., van Schooten, M., and Slootweg, R. (2000). Social impact assessment. In Briffet, C. & Obbard, J. (eds) Environmental Assessment in East Asia, Singapore: Institute of South East Asian Studies.
Vanclay, F. (2000). Environmental and social assessment for large dams. World Commission on Dams. www.dams.org (accessed
on 20 November 2008)
Connor, D. M. (1997). Participative Social Impact Assessment and Management: Cross-Cultural Application. Presented at Society
for Applied Anthropology, March. Seattle, WA.
NRRP (2007). National Rehabilitation and Resettlement Policy, 2007. Ministry of Rural Development. Government of India.
CIL (2008). Coal India Resettlement and Rehabilitation Policy, 2008. Coal India Limited.
JRRP (2008). Jharkhand Rehabilitation and Resettlement Policy, 2008. Government of Jharkhand.
175
POSTALE 2008
NEED FOR SEPARATE LEGISLATION AND INVESTMENT FRINDLY

APROACH FOR UCG
SANTOSH KUMAR RAY
Central Institute of Mining and Fuel Research, Dhanbad
D C PANIGRAHI
Indian School of Mines University, Dhanbad
INTRODUCTION
Conventional power generation system has efficiency only 30-35%. Advanced power generation
system like Underground Coal Gasification (UCG) has the potential to have efficiency between 40 to
45%. Moreover, UCG technology could vastly increase the amount of exploitable reserves by gasifying deep, thin, and low grade coal seams. The coal could be converted to gas for a variety of uses
and emissions of sulphur, nitrous oxides and mercury could be dramatically reduced. Another benefit
of UCG is that hydrogen accounts for nearly half the total gas product which can be separated and
actively used as automotive fuel or as feed-stock for the Chemical Industry. This paper addresses
regulatory frame work for operation, product and process of UCG, safety and environment issues
and need for investment friendly approach for UCG. UCG process and development of UCG technology are also illustrated.
UNDERGROUND COAL GASIFICATION PROCESS
Underground Coal Gasification (UCG) is a process to convert un-mineable underground coal/lignite
into combustible gases by gasifying the coal in-situ. The coal reacts with injected air or oxygen and
steam, to form gases, liquids and ash. Product gases are a mixture of combustible (carbon monoxide, hydrogen & methane) and non-combustibles (carbon dioxide, nitrogen & un-reacted water vapor) gases. UCG, at present, is the only feasible technology to exploit energy from deep un-mineable
coal seams in an economical and environmentally clean way.
The process involves making of two adjacent boreholes drilled into coal seams and use of pressurized oxidant such as air or oxygen/steam is used for ignition of coal seam. Figure 1 shows basic configuration of underground coal gasification process. These two boreholes are known as injection and
production boreholes. The cavity between these two wells is called the gasification reactor. Oxidant
is injected through injection borehole and product gas is obtained through production borehole. The
oxidants react with the coal through a set of gasification and pyrolysis reactions to form a mixture of
combustible and non-combustible gases. The product gases are then washed cooled and filtered
and CO2 is separated/captured before transmission by insulated pipe line to the power generating
site. Well-developed processes that are available for the capture of CO2 include physical adsorption,
chemical absorption and separation membranes (Burton et al, 2006).
UCG development has largely been concerned with enhancing the connection between boreholes in
coal, controlling the underground process, and scaling up the process to commercial-sized operations.
POSTALE 2008
Fig. 1 : Basic Configuration Of Underground Coal Gasification Process

A conceptual design of the Chinchilla project, Australia is shown in Fig. 2.
Fig. 2 : Conceptual Design Of The Chinchilla Project (After Blinderman And Jones, 2002)
The long term goals of this project were power production and liquid fuels production using gas-toliquid technology, such as Fischer-Tropsch synthesis (Burton et al, 2006). Raw gas produced at the
well head is cooled down to separate the liquids that are further processed and prepared either for
sale or disposal. The gas is then cleaned up through cyclones and compressed through a compressor to bring its pressure to a level acceptable for the gas turbine. The gas is further cleaned up in
sintered metal candle filters before it goes to gas turbine. Electric power is produced through gas
turbine. Hot gas from the gas turbine exhaust is passed through a boiler and the steam produced is
used to drive a conventional steam turbine that produces power. Tars, oils and phenols are separated and sold as a by-product of the UCG process.
DEVELOPMENT OF UCG TECHNOLOGY
UCG technology in India is in drawing board stage. This technology may be best suited for deep
seated, thin, low grade, inaccessible coal/lignite deposits. In the interest of development of UCG
techniques on a fast track, it would be necessary to allow private/foreign companies for setting-up
demonstration-cum-commercial UCG projects for utilization of deep seated coal and lignite deposits.
This will not be feasible if UCG operations are taken up under the coal mining regulatory framework.
177
POSTALE 2008
It will require changes in existing statutes, viz. Coal Mines (Nationalization) Act 1973, in order to
avoid the restriction of captive consumption/mining (Status Report on Underground Coal Gasification, 2007). Under this act coal mines were brought under the control of Government except in case
of captive coal mines of private steel plants. Therefore, it would be more practical to consider development of this resource under the legal & regulatory framework as applicable to Coal Bed Methane
(CBM) exploration and production operation wherein there is no restriction of captive consumption/mining and the operator is free to sell the gas in the market at market driven prices.
REGULATORY FRAMEWORK FOR OPERATION, PRODUCT AND PROCESS OF UCG
i)
UCG process has no similarity with the coal mining operation and the product is also different.
For coal mining operation the product is coal and for UCG it is syngas. Therefore it will not be
practical to consider this activity as supplementary activity to underground coal mining operation.
ii)
The product gases from the gasification process are recovered from the production well. The
gasification process is somewhat similar to that utilized in surface gasification plants and the
product gases are mixture of hydrogen, carbon monoxide, methane, higher hydrocarbons and
carbon dioxide. The produced gas has low calorific value, ranging between 800 kCal/m3 and
3000 kCal/m3 and is primarily derived from hydrocarbons. Therefore, it would be prudent to
consider development of this resource under the Petroleum & Natural Gas Rules, 1959, with
minor modification in the definition of Petroleum. "Petroleum" as per section 3 (k) of the above
Rules, means naturally occurring hydrocarbons in a free state, whether in the form of natural
gas or in a liquid, viscous or solid form, but does not include helium occurring in association
with petroleum, or coal, or shale, or any substance which may be extracted from coal, shale or
other rock by application of heat or by a chemical process.
iii) Similar terms & conditions framed for the development of CBM resources can be made applicable for the development of UCG resources also. The financial and regulatory regime for UCG
could be developed on the similar lines of CBM policy, jointly by the Ministry of Coal (MoC) and
the Ministry of Petroleum and Natural Gas (MoPNG).
iv) The legal and regulatory framework for commercialization of UCG, prepared by the MoC for the
development and commercialization of UCG, has been examined keeping in view the above
mentioned process of UCG as well as composition of UCG and the present legal position as
contained under the Oil Fields (Regulation and Development) Act, 1948 read with the Petroleum & Natural Gas Rules, 1959 (as amended from time to time) (Status Report on Underground Coal Gasification, 2007).
v)
It has been observed that UCG, as a product, is compatible to the definition of Hydrocarbon
as contained in section 3 (ga) as well as to the definition of Natural Gas as contained in section 3 (i) of Petroleum & Natural Gas Rules, 1959 (as amended from time to time). Hydrocarbon means any organic compound of hydrogen and carbon. Natural Gas or gas means gas
obtained from bore-holes and consisting primarily of hydrocarbons but does not include helium
occurring in association with such hydrocarbons.
vi) Further, UCG as a product is compatible to the definition of mineral oils as per section 3 (c) of
the Oil Fields (Regulation and Development) Act 1948 where it is stated that mineral oils include natural gas and petroleum.
vii)
UCG is not covered by the Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act, 1957,
since section 3 of the said Act defines minerals as including all minerals except mineral oils
and further stating that mineral oils include natural gas and petroleum.
viii) It is found that the definition of hydrocarbon as contained in the Petroleum and Natural Gas
Rules, 1959 fits the chemical composition of UCG (hydrogen, carbon monoxide, methane,
higher hydrocarbons and carbon dioxide etc.) and thus the development and commercialization
of the said mineral oil would be in terms of the strict definition of both the Oil Fields (Regulation
and Development) Act, 1948 as well as the Petroleum & Natural Gas rules, 1959 (as amended
from time to time). However, since UCG is a substance extracted from coal by the application
of heat or by a chemical process, it is evident that section 3 (k) of the Petroleum & Natural Gas
178
POSTALE 2008
ix)
x)
Rules, 1959 should be amended to bring the process of UCG within the domain of Oil Fields
(Regulation and Development) Act, 1948.
UCG operation involves well drilling, coal/lignite gasification, production, processing, transportation and its use. These steps are similar to natural gas and CBM production operations. The
mining plan for UCG would be entirely different from conventional mining plan for underground
mining operation. Instead of conventional mine planning, the UCG operation would require the
incorporation of well spacing, year wise coal/lignite burning, production of UCG gas and hydrocarbons, gas processing instrumentation system, power block etc. Planning for UCG activity
should also include environmental studies viz., a) Air Quality Monitoring, b) Water Quality Monitoring and c) Subsidence.
In exercise of the powers conferred by Section 8 of the Oil Fields (Regulation and Development) Act, 1948 (53 of 1948) read with rule 32 of the Petroleum and Natural Gas Rules, 1959,
the Central Government hereby designates Directorate General of Hydrocarbons as the authority or agency, with effect from the date of publication (New Delhi, the 1st September, 2006) of
this notification in the Official Gazette, to exercise the powers and functions of the Central
Government with a view to promoting sound management of the hydrocarbon resources in the
country having balanced regard for environmental safety, technological and economic aspects
(The Gazette of India, 2006). UCG product also contains hydrocarbon. The policy & regulatory
mechanism to govern the exploitation of UCG (whether similar to the existing CBM or otherwise) as deemed fit can be framed after effecting the amendment suggested above to the Petroleum & Natural Gas Rules, 1959. Development and commercialization of UCG would require
Petroleum Licenses and Mining Lease to be granted under the Petroleum & Natural Gas Rules,
1959 as is the case with other petroleum products.
ISSUES OF SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT

UCG operation requires: a.
b.
Drilling of wells to access the coal seams.

Handling large volumes of toxic and high pressure gas which has to be treated before transmission by pipelines.
For drilling wells, latest directional drilling and injection control technology is required. The use of
directional drilling could help to minimize the surface area of land required. Drilling and borehole
technology is available with oil companies. Under the present statute, drilling operations are covered
by Oil Mines Regulations, 1984. Under this regulation Chapter IV deals with Drilling and Workover.
Locating the equipment at the surface UCG station and protecting the local environment from gas
escape, equipment failure emergency procedure, blow offs and spillages is a significant challenging
operation. The equipment at surface will include the drilling rigs, wellheads, connecting pipework,
and process plant for handling the injection/production gases. A commercial UCG scheme will require a permanent site for the power plant and access, on a temporary basis, to the network of wellheads and connecting pipework above the area of coal under gasification. Land restoration programmes should be undertaken as the underlying coal is used up, but the disruption, unlike open
cast mining, would be minimal. The plant will need to meet all the necessary environmental requirements of process and power plant. Detailed environmental impact assessments will also be required.
Oil industry already deals with high pressure gas and oil processing in group gathering stations.
Regulation 51 of the Oil Mines Regulations, 1984 deals with these issues.
Regulation 51 of the Oil Mines Regulations, 1984 - Group Gathering Station
(1) When it is intended to construct any new group gathering station or carryout material alterations
at any group gathering station the owner, agent or manager shall, give notice of not less than
ninety days before such construction or alteration commences, of such intention in Form VI of
179
POSTALE 2008
the First Schedule to the Chief Inspector, Regional Inspector and District Magistrate, and every
such notice shall be accompanied by two copies of an up to date plan of the proposed site of the
group gathering station showing the name and location of the installation, the name and location
of any other group gathering station and all pipe lines lying within a radius of 500 m therefrom,
the name of each well connected to the station, the extent of the land over which right of use has
been established and any railway, public road, public works, building or any other surface feature lying within 60 m of such installation:
Provided that where it is essential to carryout immediate alterations at any group gathering station in
the interest of safety of the mine or of the persons employed therein, the provisions of this regulation
shall be deemed to have been complied with if the said notice is given to the Regional Inspector as
soon as the work for such alteration is commenced:
Provided further that in respect of group gathering station where the quantity of petroleum gases or
liquid stored or handled exceeds 300 tones and 1,00,000 tones respectively, the notice under this
sub-regulation shall also be accompanied by a Safety Report in Form VII of the First Schedule and
once at least every three years thereafter, or earlier if any material alternations are proposed, to new
technical knowledge or the likely consequences of proposed alterations which might have affected or
might affect the particulars in the previous report relating to safety and hazard assessment and a
copy thereof submitted to the Chief Inspector, Regional Inspector and District Magistrate:
Provided also that in case of an existing group gathering stations,-(a) the aforementioned copies of the plan and the details required to be furnished in the notice and
wherever applicable, in the Safety Report shall be submitted within six months and five years respectively, of the coming into force of this regulation to the Chief Inspector, Regional Inspector
and District Magistrate.
(2) If the Regional Inspector, by an order in writing so requires, such additions or alterations shall be
made to the installations, as he may specify in the order.
(3) When the group gathering station has commissioned, the owner, agent or manager shall forthwith communicate the actual date or commissioning to the Chief Inspector, Regional Inspector
and District Magistrate.
Regulation 51A of the Oil Mines Regulations, 1984 - A Preparation of Emergency Plan for
group gathering station
a. The manager of every mine in which any group gathering station is in operation shall, within
ninety days of the coming into force of these regulations and in the case of a new station, ninety
days before the anticipated date of commissioning thereof, prepare emergency plan and submit
a copy thereof to the Regional Inspector and District Magistrate and also put into effect the
emergency plan specifying-i.
the action to be taken in the event of any major accident including when and how the said
action is to be taken;
ii.
duties and responsibilities of each key personnel including measures to be adopted to avert
or minimize the consequences of the emergency;
iii.
alarm and communication system including the system of notifying the concerned authorities;
iv.
equipment plan viz., make, type, capacity, location, field of operation, and operating procedure in respect of every equipment; and
v.
plan for training of personnel and for mockdrills
b. The manager shall review and if considered necessary modify the emergency plan periodically,
and in particular before any material alterations is carried out, and submit a copy thereof to the
Regional Inspector and District Magistrate. in the emergency plan.
c. The Regional Inspector may, by an order in writing require, to any time any alteration to be carried out in the emergency plan.
180
POSTALE 2008
INVESTMENT FRIENDLY APPROACH FOR UCG PROGRAM

Lot of ground work is required before venturing into pilot studies of UCG activities in a particular
seam. Potentiality of a seam for UCG is the foremost one. Various criterions include:
Ground water problem
Topography survey
Geological and hydro-geological data collection
Geochemical data of coal/lignite characteristics and overburden
Proximate and ultimate analysis of coal/lignite
Lithological and section maps
After executing all the above parameters the data are analyzed and if the results are encouraging
then only it is suggested to go for pilot studies. Pilot study itself is a costly proposition. All the above
mentioned processes require a considerable period. Therefore, incentives may be considered, viz.
tax-free regime for UCG for next 7 years similar to the CBM policy and the New Exploration Licensing Policy (NELP), to encourage public private partnership. If successful, large resources of deepseated and isolated lignite & coal deposits, which may not be amenable to conventional physical
extraction economically, can be exploited through UCG process. Moreover, there should not be any
restriction of captive consumption/mining and the operator should be free to sell the gas in the market at market driven prices.
CONCLUSION
UCG operations require technical knowledge of various disciplines viz., Mining, Chemical, Fuel, Mechanical, Electrical, Environmental Engineering etc. Due to diverse and mixed nature of technologies
of coal and oil applicable for UCG operations, perhaps a separate set of regulations may have to be
developed for UCG operations. Safety features would be needed for:
Hydro-geological regime in the area to avoid possible groundwater contamination.
Effect of subsidence due to cavity generated as a result of UCG.
The technology for terminating underground fire, if so required.
The future of this technology depends on promulgation of appropriate investor friendly and separate
regulation from the Government and facilitating to sell the processed product gas at market driven
price.
REFERENCES
E. Burton, J. Friedmann and R. Upadhye, Best Practices in underground coal gasification, Best Practices in UCG-Draft.pdf, 2006,
p.119.
M. S. Blinderman and R. M. Jones, Gasification Technologies Conference, San Franciso, USA, Oct 27-30, 2002, The Chinchilla
IGCC Project to date: UCG and Environment
Coal Mines (Nationalization) Act 1973
Status Report on Underground Coal Gasification, 2007
Petroleum & Natural Gas Rules, 1959
Oil Fields (Regulation and Development) Act, 1948
Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act, 1957
The Gazette of India, 1st September 2006
Oil Mines Regulations, 1984
181
POSTALE 2008
OBJECTIVE OF NO SUBSIDENCE DAMAGE TO FOREST AREAS:

MULTISEAM COAL EXTRACTION STRATEGIES
AND A CASE-STUDY APPLICATION
S.K. SINGH, R. BHATTACHARJEE, A. KUSHWAHA, A.K. SINGH AND R. SINGH
Central Institute of Mining and Fuel Research, Dhanbad.
INTRODUCTION
Based on the earlier subsidence studies and the three Grant-in-aid projects completed with extensive scientific subsidence monitoring by CMRI (now CIMFR), Dhanbad in the past decades, it was
possible to suggest norms and relationships between subsidence parameters and predictive models
for single seam and multi-seam workings. These formulations are:
For single seam cases,
S
= 0.33[1 + 1.1 tanh (1.4(x 1.8))]
h.e
-------------- (1)
For multi-seam cases
S
= 0.12[1 + 5.9 tanh (0.38( x 1.45))]
h.e
Where,
S
x
W
NEW
h
e
a
-------------- (2)
= Max. subsidence
= W/H divided by NEW
= width of the panel
= Non-effective width of the seam for the overlying strata
= height of extraction
= percentage of extraction, taken as the ratio
= Subsidence factor = S/h.e
= 0.69 (maximum) for caving and
0.05 (maximum observed), but taken 0.1 for design purpose for stowing.
It is to be noted that the subsidence trough over coal measures is asymmetrical, but the general
world trend is to fit a symmetrical equation to the trough. Keeping this in mind, the equations (1) &
(2) is chosen as mentioned above. A non-linear regression analysis was therefore programmed employing the search method of solution, which would satisfy the law of least squares. This led to the
above relations for single seam and multi-seam extraction-propositions, which fit the general trend of
subsidence-trough occurrences, as determined by extensive scientific subsidence monitoring over
more than 200 study panels by CIMFR (erstwhile CMRI).
NEW is defined as the maximum width of extraction up to which no significant symptom of subsidence (i.e. 5mm or more) takes place on the surface or on the plane of reference [1]. NEW is expressed as W/H ratio, where W = width of extraction-span and H = depth of cover. To have no subsidence effect on the floor of the overlying seam (in case of sub-surface properties), `H is taken as
the rock-parting between seams. An important observation in subsidence engineering is that harder
strata (of all types, not only sandstones) overlying the proposed extraction will give a higher value of
NEW [4]. The concept of NEW is simplified to be two-dimensional, although subsidence is associated with three-dimensional (rock) movements. Besides its wide application in selecting a feasible
pattern of extraction with objectives of subsidence control on the plane of the reference the surface
or the sub-surface, it is an important parameter in the subsidence prediction norms developed for
Indian coalfields [2, 3, 5, 6 and 7].
POSTALE 2008
There are two types of mining subsidence, depending on its extension:

Localized subsidence or potholing, which is concentrated in areas in the proximity of the excavated
area and takes the form of a highly localized abrupt depression, that is limited in extension, e.g. plugin or pot-hole over the junctions in shallow workings
Extensive or trough subsidence, which results in the formation of a topographic depression on the
surface (subsidence trough) that is more or less regular in shape and which is directly related to the
width to depth ratio of the excavated areas belowground. In these cases, the subsidence is large in
the central area and decreases progressively towards the sides, the said subsidence being accompanied by horizontal displacement.
The first type of subsidence can only be predicted using numerical modelling techniques, need to be
undertaken on case-by-case basis, as done in this paper in a case study related to Monnet Ispat
Coal Project for depth of extraction less than 70m. Discontinuities in a subsidence trough may occur
in the second case also. A methodology to predict discontinuous or continuous subsidence may be
used empirically [5, 6 & 7].
RELATIONSHIPS AMONG SUBSIDENCE, STRAINS AND SLOPE
Standard relationship for maximum slope and strains in relation to the maximum subsidence, as
given in Subsidence Engineers Handbook [8] and as developed in the earlier grant-in-aid project [3]
should be used, which are as follows :
Max Slope
G = K1
S
H
mm / m
-------------- (3)
Max compressive strain
E( ) = K 2
S
H
mm / m
-------------- (4)
Max Tensile strain
E(+ ) = K 3
S
H
mm / m
-------------- (5)
It is suggested to use nomograms as developed to know the value of K1, K2 & K3 [2, 3, 5, 6, 7]. It is to
be noted that S should be calculated using equation (1) or (2), as the case may be.
EXTRACTION STRATEGIES A CASE STUDY APPLICATION
At Monet Ispat coal Project, Milupara, Raigarh, there are two seams, namely Seam III and Seam II,
being developed in bord and pillar pattern. The thickness of the seams are 1-6m and 4.5-5m respectively, III seam being the top seam. The depth of cover of III seam varies 31m to 163m approximately. The rock parting between III seam and underlying II seam varies from 45m to 55m. The gallery width is average 4.5m in both the seams. The height of the development workings is about
2.5m, leaving rest of the coal in the roof. The average pillar sizes are 26m x 26m and 48m x 26m in
seam III and seam II respectively.
On surface, there lies forest land, which need to be protected while coal extraction is planned in III
and II seams. Two options, caving or full stowing, as goaf-treatment approaches, are to be considered with due regard to safety, conservation and feasibility of coal production and productivity. Keeping above aspects in view, this paper scans through all the feasible method of extraction (including
183
POSTALE 2008
partial extraction methods) with an aim to suggest a feasible method in each geo-mining variations
like:
Seam III depth of cover < 70m, the aspects of pot-holing were analysed by extensive numerical modeling and also the long-term stability of left-out stooks
Seam III depth of cover > 70m
Seam II such that no subsidence effect on the floor of seam III
It is to be noted that between two extraction spans, the left-out pillars (also the barrier pillars) must
be long-term stable in all the above 3 cases, if no stowing, by ensuring their factors of safety (FOS)
more than 2. This paper takes this consideration into account. Alternatively, this paper describes the
subsidence calculations when full stowing is to practiced, the panel width; the long-term stability criteria in this case will be FOS > 1, instead of 2 in caving cases above.
In all the above case, the subsidence strain values are to be less than 10 mm/m, although the prescribed limit for no subsidence impact on the forest land being 20mm/m. The extraction strategies
are therefore accordingly designed so that the Net Present Value (NPV) of the area affected because of subsidence strain values between 10mm/m and 20mm/m is not necessary to be submitted
by the mine management to the Central Govt. Sometimes, the NPV becomes significant making the
mining propositions uneconomical.
In a geo-mining situation, if the calculation yields subsidence value more than 10mm/m, either the
panel width (in other words, Extraction Span) or, the extraction height is to be reduced such that the
subsidence strain value in every case is brought below the prescribed 10mm/m. In panels, over
which there is no forest land above i.e. within the area bounded by the panel area (in plan) plus angle of draw (taken as 40o), the conventional depillaring method with no restriction of panel width or
extraction height, from subsidence point of view, may be recommended. This paper also gives calculation-detail for rock load calculation during depillaring and based on that, support patterns in splits,
slices and goaf edges were suggested. Obviously, for a subsidence engineering exercise two important factors need to be considered :
(a) extraction span : to be restricted based on steps provided in this paper.
(b) the barrier pillars or other left-out pillars/stooks between two extraction spans (as per a) should
be long term stable, i.e. the factor of safety is more than 2.0 in case of caving and should be more
than 1.0 in case of full stowing. Factor of safety is defined as the ratio of strength and the redistributed load, on the left-out pillars/stooks, taking combined effects of extraction in nearby panels[9].
Limited Span /Non-Effective Width Extraction
In this method, row(s) of pillars are extracted in such a way that the width of extraction L is less than
the NEW and the pillars left between two extraction spans should have long-term stability i.e. a factor
of safety of 2 or more. Two typical patterns of extraction by this method are shown in Fig.1. For the
design of this method, load on left-out pillars is estimated using the following formulae. Several examples of non-effective extraction exist in Indian coalfields.
Estimation Of Load On Left Out Pillars For Limited Span Method
For calculation of factor of safety, the strength of pillars/ stooks is to be calculated using equation (8),
as described in item 3.3. However, estimation of load on the pillars is often tricky and calculation by
use of tributary area method may give inaccurate value, if the pillars are irregular, involving extraction nearby. It is almost impossible to estimate this factor when the geo-mining conditions involved
are complex. Under these circumstances, the designer often resorts to numerical modelling for this
purpose. The combined effect due to extraction in neighbouring panels on the left out pillars of the
proposed panels an therefore be estimated only by 3-Dimensional numerical modelling approach,
using BESOL (Boundary Element Solution) or FLAC3D, case-by-case basis.
184
POSTALE 2008
It is to be noted that load on these left-out pillars may also be calculated alternatively by empirical
formulae developed by Wilson [10], and with application of proper engineering judgements. This latter approach was adopted here while evaluating the long-term stability of left-out pillars (with goaves
on both sides) i.e. factor of safety calculation.
Load on left-out pillars with goafs on both sides and when single row of pillars is left between two
extraction span is given by (refer Fig. 1)
L1 < 2fH, L2 <2fH
P=
( w1 + B )
where
P
H
w
w1
L1, L2
f
ww1
H w +

L1 + L2
2
1
2
2
L1 + L2
8f
------------- (6)
= load on chain pillars, MPa

= unit rock pressure (0.025 MPa/m)
= depth of cover, m
= solid pillar width at right angles to chain pillar axis, m
= solid pillar width along chain pillar axis, m
= extracted widths, m [as clear in fig. 1, L1 = L2 < NEW]
= 0.3 for caving
Pillar Thinning And Heightening Method

The pillar thinning and heightening method consists of widening and heightening, if seam thickness
permits, of the existing roadways to such an extent that the reduced pillars have a minimum safety
factor of 2. However, under shallow covers, it may be noted that the extent of pillar reduction is not
governed by the pillar strength alone. In such situations the chances of occurrence of potholing become the deciding factor. This is generally examined by three-dimensional numerical modelling. The
reduction and heightening of pillars is done in an L-shaped pattern as shown in Fig.2.The load on the
reduced pillars is estimated using the tributary area concept.
LL
P = 0.025H 1 2 Mpa
w1 w2
------------------- (7)
Estimation Of Pillar/Stook Strength

The estimation of pillar/stook strength was done using CMRI pillar strength formula [2], which is
W
H
S t = 0 . 27 c h 0 . 36 +
+ 1 e 1 MPa ----------- (8)
h
250
where
St = strength of pillar, MPa
H = depth of cover, m
c = strength of 25mm cube coal sample, 42.46 MPa (tested in CIMFR lab)
We = equivalent width of pillar, m
= 2w1w2/(w1+w2) for rectangular pillars
w1, w2= length and width of the rectangular pillar, m
h = working height, m
Safety Factor Of The Left Out Pillars
Safety factor of the left out pillars/ reduced pillars or stooks an extraction-proposition may be calculated using the above equations (6, 7 & 8) and as given below:
185
POSTALE 2008
Safety Factor,
S .F . =
S
Strength of the pillar
= t
Load on Pillar
P
--------------(9)
EXTRACTION IN SEAM III FOR H < 70 M: ASPECTS OF POTHOLING

In case of H < 70m i.e. shallow depth of cover, the chance of potholing, specially at junctions, may
affect the surface properties, here the forest land by way of localized subsidence as discussed in
item 2.2 of this report.
The L-shaped (pillar thinning) extraction is recommended in III seam (Fig. 2) and the factor of safety
of the left-out representative (worst-situation) pillar-remnants of panels (Fig. 3) after widening the
galleries for 9m and 7m are given in Appendix I and II respectively. The pattern of extraction with not
more than 7m widened gallery is finally recommended because of the consideration of pot-holing as
described below. As understandable from Appendix I and II, in both cases and also for 8m widened
galleries (latter not listed in this report), the stable pillar-remnants are formed as FOS > 2 in every
case.
Pot Hole Studies
For this purpose, numerical modelling studies were conducted using three-dimensional finite difference software FLAC3D developed by ITASCA Consultant Group of USA.
Numerical modelling has been done for the assessment of roof stability and chances of pot-holing
due to collapse of the roof at junctions or galleries and its progressive failure up to the surface. It has
been found from past experience that pot-holing is a time dependant phenomenon. Further, if the
overlying strata have a safety factor of 2.0 or above, even the collapse of the immediate roof will not
proceed to the surface on long-term time basis.
Due to the symmetry of bord and pillar development, numerical modelling enables us to use planes
of symmetry to model the pillars and galleries by modelling a quarter pillar with half-width of the gallery, as in Figs. 4 & 5.
Numerical modelling was done for 4.5m as the development roadways and thereafter the roadways
were widened upto 7m, 8m and 9m in L-shaped fashion and the respective models were run. The
results of numerical modelling are given in the form of safety factor block contours for 8m and 7m
wide galleries in Figs.4 & 5 respectively. From the modelling, it was found that the widening of galley
upto only 7m is feasible as there is likely chances of pot-holing in case of 8m and 9m of widening of
roadways. From the Fig. 5, it can be seen that the roof of seam III has a safety factor of more than
1.5 up to a height of about 2.5m. This rock height (hr) is used for support design as detailed below.
Support Design
Numerical modelling results are used for estimating the rock load for the junctions and for 7m wide
galleries.
Support design for III Seam
As seen from Fig. 5, the safety factor contours of the element in the model having value less than
1.5 goes up to the 2.5 m height at the junctions and upto 1.5m in the roadways. The rock load has
been evaluated for the roadways and junctions are given below.
(10)
Ps = p hr
186
POSTALE 2008
Where,
Ps = rock load to be supported, t/m2
p = density of the roof to be supported, 2.24 t/m3
hr = height of the contour value for safety factor 1.5 which is 2.5m above the junctions and 1.5m
above the galleries in the roof of III seam.
From this,
Ps = 5.6 t/m2 at junctions and 3.36 t/m2 above galleries
On the basis of the above rock load and by taking a support safety factor of more than 1.0, support
for all roadways and junctions for 7m widening operation has been designed as shown in Fig.6. As
clear from the figure, it has been planned to install six full column grouted bolts of 1.8m length with
w-strap/steel channels additionally in junctions. At junctions the spacing between two bolts within a
row is 1.2m keeping the spacing between two rows 1.2m as shown in Fig.6.
The applied support resistance (SR) with the above pattern can be calculated using the equation
given below:
SR =
nxL
B x Sp
where, n is the number of roof bolts, 6

L is the load bearing capacity of the bolts, 8 t
B is the width of the roadways, 7m
Sp spacing between two consecutive bolts, 1.2m
SR =
6x 8
= 5.7 t 2
m
7 x 1.2
Therefore support safety factor =5.7/3.36 = 1.7

Similarly, calculations were made for the support resistance for junction area, formed after 7m widening at final stage, simulating the worst-situation possibility. It may be noted that support safety factor is well above the prescribed/recommended value of 1.0. This is because:
(i) W-straps/steel channels in small pieces increase the anchorage strength by 20% of the strength
as calculated for bolts without w-strap/steel channel. This means, SR =6.84 t/m2. Thus, support
safety factor in junction during depillaring = 6.84/ 5.6 = 1.22.
(ii) Goaf edge cogs increase the support resistance in comparison and also help in effecting breakerlines requirements.
PATTERN OF EXTRACTION IN SEAM III (H>70M) AND IN SEAM II
Limited span method
From subsidence point of view, the objectives of extraction in Seam III & Seam II are:
-
no subsidence effect on the forest lands

no subsidence effect due to extraction of Seam II on the floor of Seam III.
Applying the subsidence engineering approach and formulae (1) to (6) and (8) to (9), the recommended pattern of extraction will be one row of pillars extraction, one row of pillars left alternatively
in both the seams [Fig.1(a)]. It was found that two rows extraction instead of 1 row of pillars to be
187
POSTALE 2008
extracted is not feasible because of the fact that factor of safety reduces less than 2.0 i.e. left-out
pillars are likely to be not long-term stable.
Over the panels, where there is no forest land (determined by taking angle of draw 40o from the
panel boundary), it is suggested to adopt the rib-and-slice depillaring method, the most commonly
practiced pillar liquidation method in India. It consists of dividing a pillar in two stooks by driving a
split roadway (maximum 4.5 m) along the level in the center of the pillar and taking slices not more
than 4.5 m wide. The rib is judiciously robbed while retreating within the slice. The 3m rib width is
suggested to ensure additional safety against the goaf, recently formed. The support design was
done based on which support pattern is recommended as in Fig. 7.
Slicing operation in different pillar rows should be carried out such that the diagonal face line abutting the goaf has an angle of 450-600. Depillaring in this fashion may be carried out in a rise ward
direction.
PATTERN OF EXTRACTION USING SAND STOWING
As elaborated, all the above recommended methods of coal extraction are with caving. It is suggested that wherever possible, stowing may alternatively be adopted as subsidence strain calculations suggest that it is feasible since strain value is less than 10 mm/m [Env.Cir. MOEF, F.C.Division,
F.No.2-2/2000-FC)]. This means there will be no adverse subsidence impact on the forest land.
It is to be noted that subsidence (S) over stowing panels (based on over 100 extraction panels study
[1]) is about 5% of the extraction height. However, for prediction purpose, 10% as subsidence factor
was taken. The subsidence strains for Seam III and Seam II combinedly were added taking the worst
situations into consideration. Thus,
Seam II,
Seam III,
S
= 0.10
m.e
S = 0.10 4.5 0.75 = 0.34m
S 1 0.34 1000
E+ = K 3 =
= 2.73mm / m
H
124.5
S
= 0.10
m.e
S = 0.10 4.5 0.75 = 0.34m
S 1 0.34 1000
E+ = K 3 =
= 6.8mm / m
H
50
Combined tensile strain = 2.73 + 6.8=9.53mm/m.

The subsidence strain is less than the prescribed maximum strain of 10 mm/m for no subsidence
impact on forest land.
CONCLUSIONS
It may be noted that in all cases of method of extraction as discussed above, the panels should be
sectionalized depending on the requirement of ventilation, rate of retreat or face advance and related
geotechnical issues. Except for extraction span as suggested in pillar thining method and also suggested in limited span method, there will be no restriction of panel width (or boundary of panel) from
subsidence point of view i.e. so long the effect of mining on forest land is considered.
188
POSTALE 2008
It is to be noted that percentage of extraction of pillar thinning method will be about 20% of the developed pillars. The percentage of extraction (with full seam thickness recommended) will be more in
case of limited span method i.e. about 50%. In case of stowing, it will be about 75% or so. Since the
subsidence strain calculation (pl. refer item 6.0) has been done for super-critical width, and found to
be less than the prescribed 10mm/m, any restriction in panel width or boundary or the extraction
height is therefore not recommended from subsidence point of view.
Because of the extraction strategies so recommended, the mine management could save huge
money in terms of NPV payment. The coal extraction is in progress and the reserve forest over the
seams is protected from subsidence point of view.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The authors are indebted to the Director, CIMFR for allowing this paper to be published. The views
expressed in this paper are those of the authors, and not necessarily of the organisation they belong.
The authors are grateful to Ministry of Coal S&T for providing research grants for conducting scientific subsidence monitoring used for development of empirical formulae or nomograms mentioned in
this paper. Acknowledgements are due to the scientists and staffs of Mine Surveying and Subsidence Department of CIMFR for direct and indirect contributions in scientific subsidence monitorings.
REFERENCES
Anon (1991) Surface subsidence in Mining Areas, Grant-in-aid Ministry of Coal S&T project, submitted by Central Mining Research Institute, Dhanbad, 435p.
Sheorey, P.R. and Singh, S.K. (1997) Estimation of subsidence over single seam workings in coal mining areas, Reanalysis of
Grant-in-aid Ministry of coal S&T project submitted in 1991 by CMRI, 34p.
Anon (1998) Subsidence studies for development of models with special reference to multi-seam mining in India, Grant-in-aid
Ministry of Coal S&T project, submitted by Central Mining Research Institute, Dhanbad, 126p.
Sheorey PR, Singh S.K. (1996) Non-effective width extraction and goaf pillar method for subsidence control. Proceedings of
Second National Conference on Ground Control in Mining, Kolkata, India; 49-56p.
Anon (2005) Development of suitable subsidence prediction model for single seam workings in SECL Areas, Grant-in-aid Ministry of Coal S&T project, submitted by Central Mining Research Institute, Dhanbad, 91p.
Sheorey, P.R., Loui, J.P., Singh, K.B. and Singh, S.K. (2000) Ground subsidence observations and a modified influence function
method for complete subsidence prediction, Int.J.of Rock Mechanics and Mining Sciences, Vol.37, pp.801-818.
Sheorey,P.R., Loui, J.P., Singh, K.B. and Singh, S.K. (2000) Development of models of single and multi-seam subsidence,
Minetech, May-Aug., vol 21, No. 3&4, pp. 55-63.
NCB (National Coal Board) (1975) Subsidence engineers handbook, Hobard House, London: NCB, 1996 Rev.1975.
Singh S.K., Kushwaha A., Singh R., Loui J.P., and Bhattacharyya R. (2003) Proposition of
Coal-Extraction below Important Surface or Sub-surface Properties with No Subsidence
Damage: Recent Safety Approach Minetech, vol 24, no.5, pp. 67-78
Wilson, A.H. (1972). Research into the determination of pillar size. Min. Eng. 131, 409- 416.
189
POSTALE 2008
Fig. 2: Working scheme for extraction by pillar thinning,

recommended in seam III for depth of cover
less than 70m
Fig. 1: Two typical patterns of NEW extraction method, the pattern (a) recommended in Seam III & Seam II
Fig. 3: Part plan of Seam III (H< 70m) workings

below forest land (Not to the scale)
190
POSTALE 2008
Fig. 4: Gallery widening up to 8m resulting into pot-holing; hence not recommended
Fig. 6: Recommended pattern of support

design in Seam III (for H<70m), final gallery widened width not more than 7.0m
Fig. 5: Gallery widening up to 7m with no potholing predicted; hence recommended
Fig. 7: Recommended support pattern for

depillaring other than as described in item 4.2
191
POSTALE 2008
Appendix-I
III Seam
Pillar size(cent to cent) = 26m X 26m
Gallery width = 4.5m,
Method of extraction: Pillar thining and heightening
Final gallery width after widening = 9m
Safety Factor calculation of stooks in III seam below forest cover
Stook size after widenPanel
Seam
DOC
Ext. ht
ing
thickness,
w2, (m)
(m)
(m)
(m)
w1, (m)
A1
4.5
70.5
17
17
4.5
A2
4.5
65.5
17
17
4.5
A
4.5
45.5
17
17
4.5
B
4.5
35.5
17
17
4.5
C
4
31
17
17
4
D
3.5
36.5
17
17
3.5
E
3
37
17
17
3
F
3
52
17
17
3
G
3
57
17
17
3
SF
Mpa
10.23
10.18
9.95
9.84
10.61
11.72
13.08
13.36
13.45
Mpa
4.12
3.83
2.66
2.08
1.81
2.13
2.16
3.04
3.33
2.48
2.66
3.74
4.74
5.85
5.49
6.04
4.39
4.04
SF
Mpa
10.80
10.74
10.48
10.35
11.17
12.38
13.84
14.16
14.27
Mpa
3.83
3.56
2.47
1.93
1.68
1.98
2.01
2.82
3.09
2.82
3.02
4.24
5.37
6.64
6.25
6.89
5.02
4.61
Appendix-II
III Seam
Pillar size(cent to cent) = 26m X 26m
Gallery width = 4.5m,
Method of extraction: Pillar thining and heightening
Final gallery width after widening = 7m
Safety Factor calculation of stooks in III seam below forest cover
Stook size after widenPanel
Seam
DOC
ing
Ext. ht
thickw2, (m)
(m)
ness(m)
(m)
w1,(m)
A1
4.5
70.5
19
19
4.5
A2
4.5
65.5
19
19
4.5
A
4.5
45.5
19
19
4.5
B
4.5
35.5
19
19
4.5
C
4
31
19
19
4
D
3.5
36.5
19
19
3.5
E
3
37
19
19
3
F
3
52
19
19
3
G
3
57
19
19
3
192
POSTALE 2008
EXPERIENCE OF AN ATTEMPT OF DEPILLARING OF A COAL SEAM

STANDING ON PILLARS BELOW AND ABOVE CAVED GOAVES OF TWO
DEPILLARED COAL SEAMS
ARUN KR. SINGH, AMIT KR. SINGH AND SAHENDRA RAM
Central Institute of Mining and Fuel Research, Dhanbad,
A. K. SUR,
Directorate General of Mines Safety, Central Zone, Dhanbad,
INTRODUCTION
Underground coal production in the country is coming, mainly, by way of formation of pillars due to
different techno-economical reasons. At moment, industry is looking towards the huge amount of
coal locked up in pillars. Efficient depillaring of a developed coal seam under difficult geo-mining
conditions is a challenge task before the industry. Further, the productivity of underground coal mining in India needs an improvement. In fact, today, the productivity competition is Global. Our coal
mining industry is eager to have a suitable technology [1] to counter the productivity and safety problems of a depillaring face. But meeting the demand of coal by way of formation pillars has resulted
development of a number seam for a multi-seam mining condition. Here, proper sequence of working is also an important factor for safe extraction of coal. Conventionally depillaring of an underlying
seam/panel with caving can be started only after completion of the depillaring operation in overlying
seam/panel. If this sequence is not followed, the possibility of strata control problem increases.
Due to broken nature of the mining activity during pillar extraction, depillaring of a coal seam/panel
under intact roof rock condition is safer in comparison to that under loose/fractured roof rock mass.
Pillar extraction activity does not occur under 100% supported roof strata and, therefore, it is always
difficult to conduct depillaring operation under a fractured roof stratum. Considering this issue for a
multi seam mining condition, the sequence of depillaring is generally adopted in Indian coal fields.
However, if a bottom seam in close vicinity of a developed top seam is depillared first then the overlying top seam will be disturbed [2]. Due to some unavoidable circumstances, such situations are
existing in some of our coalfield where depillaring of the disturbed overlying seam is a great challenge. Depillaring of such damaged/ fractured overlying seam will encounter strata control problems,
where application of a 100% supported face with high capacity chock-shields may be an interesting
option. However, in the absence of such support, an attempt of conventional depillaring is made on
experimental basis. This paper presents the case study, where an attempt is made to depillar a coal
seam even after a long gap of completion of depillaring in overlying and underlying coal seams.
SITE DETAILS
Panel 1A of 3.6m thick 1 seam of Bera colliery, BCCL was developed on pillars to an average height
of 2.9m. Depillaring in the panel adopted conventional splitting and slicing method to full height. The
overlying 2 and 3 seams, lying 21m and 35m (as per B.H. No. BKS-73) respectively above the panel
were already depillared with caving method. The panel M of underlying Zero seam of around 4m
thickness was also depillared with caving nearly 20 years back. The parting between 1 seam (panel
1A) and underlying depillared Zero seam (panel M) is around 21m, consisting mainly sandstone. The
experimental depillaring operation in the panel 1A started on 22.01.07 and completed on 31.05.08.
The boundary conditions of the panel are summarized in the Table 1.
During depillaring of the panel 1A of 1 seam, a roof fall of around 3m height was observed quite often, especially, slicing of the pillars encountered this problem of fall. The mine management referred
the problem to CIMFR for scientific study. Since the underlying Zero seam was depillared with caving around 20 years back and therefore it was apprehended the same may be the reason behind the
POSTALE 2008
observed roof falls. After a preliminary observations by CIMFR and discussions with DGMS and
Mine management, following studies were planned for visualization of the problem:
Floor RL of the panel as well as other areas of the same seam should be measured.
Breaking of some of the isolation-stoppings of the Zero seam of the goaved out panel below the
panel 1A to assess the goaf status.
Procurement of core samples from few boreholes should to be drilled using double tube core
barrel drilling technique in both roof and parting between the 1 and zero seam to ascertain the
nature of parting and condition of roof strata.
Table 1: Boundary Conditions Of The Panel 1A
Parameter
Seam thickness
Depth cover and gradient of seam
Incubation period of seam
No. of pillars
Development height
Size of pillar
Width & height of extraction
Nature of roof
Nature of floor
Status of overlying seams
Descriptions
3.6m
40 78m and 1 in 6.6
3 years
60
2.7 - 3.0m (Avg. - 2.9m)
25 x 25m (centre to centre)
3.6 - 4.8 & 3.6 m respectively
Massive sandstone (22.3m)
Massive sandstone (21.9m)
Overlying 2 and 3 seams depillared with caving
Zero seam caved goaf
Around 21m.
57.7
Status of underlying seams

Parting thickness between 1 and Zero seam
RMR
PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED DURING DEPILLARING

The panel 1A of I seam (Fig 1) was developed in the year 2005, nearly after 20 years of depillaring
of underlying panel M of Zero seam with caving. The thickness of parting between two seams is only
21m. The roof of developed galleries was supported with full column grouted roof bolts. During development, no major problem of roof fall or pillar instability was observed. Depillaring in the panel
followed conventional splitting and slicing method. Roof instability problem was experienced during
splitting of pillars but it was of local nature and could be tackled with the application of cogs and conventional wooden props. Once slice was driven and roof was heightened, the problem of roof fall
became severe. Roof bolts became ineffective and came down with the fall. The cracks along the
floor of the galleries were also observed at some places.
NATURE OF PARTING BETWEEN 1 AND ZERO SEAM
The panel 1A of 1 seam is depillared by conventional splitting and slicing method. The panel
M of Zero seam below the panel 1A was already depillared in the years 1981 to 1985. There is a
good possibility that the parting between these two seams might have been disturbed and destabilized during depillaring of panel M. To ascertain the exact condition of the parting, some fresh boreholes with double tube core barrel were drilled from floor of the seam in and outside the panel 1A.
However, drilling of these boreholes started late due to some unavoidable official formalities from
industry side. Therefore, the position of borehole (7D/9-10L) was not in the centre of the panel but it
was near the barrier of the panel. Another bore hole was drilled outside the panel (2D/10L), where
no caved goaf of underlying Zero seam was present. One bore hole was drilled at the location
14EL/2-3D, outside the panel 1A, where the underlying Zero seam was depillared with caving. Core
samples were collected and brought to CIMFR for testing of their physico-mechanical properties.
The parting formations were almost found to be intact. However, during drilling of boreholes at the
location 7D/9-10L (within the panel), the water loss was observed at the horizons of around 2.7m
and 6.0m from the floor of 1 seam, which indicated the presence of fracture/separation of strata
194
POSTALE 2008
along these horizons. Similar observation was also made during drilling of borehole at the location
14EL/2-3D, outside of the panel, where underlying zero seam was depillared with caving. But, no
water loss was observed during drilling of borehole at the location 2D/10L. The recovery and RQD of
parting formations are considerably high. The physico-mechanical properties of parting formations
are shown in Figs. 2, 3 and 4.
Dip, 1 in 6.6
18
L
16
L
Strike Line
14
L
12
L
10
L
11
D
8L
5D
6D
7D
8D 9D
12
D
13
D
10
D
Fig. 1: Working Plan Of Panel 1A Of 1 Seam

MEASUREMENT OF FLOOR RL
Floor RL of different locations in and outside the panel 1A of 1 seam is shown in Fig. 5. The panel
was developed in the year 2005 without much problem. The underlying panel M of Zero seam was
depillared with caving in the year 1985 which might have disturbed the roof i.e. inter-burden strata
between the two seams. This disturbance of the parting has occurred and the disturbed rock-mass is
settled/hanged before any working in 1 Seam. Thus, floor RL measured in the panel 1A during its
development may not encounter the exact effect of depillaring of underlying panel M. The floor RL in
the panel 1A was also measured during its depillaring and no major deviation in RL of galleries during development and depillaring was observed.
1Dip gallery of 1 seam working lied almost in the middle of the barriers of the two caved goaf of panels M and H of underlying Zero seam (Fig. 6) and it was nearly 80m (projected horizontal distance)
away from each barrier. Thus, the effect of caved goaf of the two panels of underlying Zero seam
195
POSTALE 2008
may not reach up to 1Dip gallery of 1 seam and the floor of this gallery may be considered as unsubsided/deformed zone. Taking the values of RL measured at different levels along 1Dip gallery as
reference, the difference of RL values taken at different points along corresponding level galleries in
panel 1A were calculated and presented in Fig. 7.
GOAF STATUS OF UNDERLYING ZERO SEAM (PANEL M)
To visualize the goaf status of underlying Zero seam, CIMFR team along with mine management
and rescue team visited the boundary of the panel M of Zero seam to assess the goaf status of
caved panel underneath 1A panel. The isolation stoppings at some locations mentioned in the Table
5 were found broken. From these points, the visiting team members could get an idea of caving and
status of goaf of the Zero seam. Details of locations with goaf status of Zero seam are given in Table
5. It was observed that goaf of Zero seam was fully packed by fallen roof strata.
Table 5: Status Of Goaf Of Zero Seam Below Depillaring Panel 1A Of 1 Seam
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Locations
13L/17-18D
14L/17-18D
15L/17-18D
17L/17-18D
18L/17-18D
21L/16-17D
22L/15-16D
25L/15-16D
29L/14D
30L/11-12D
Goaf status
Fully packed
Fully packed
Fully packed
Fully packed
Fully packed
Fully packed
Fully packed
Fully packed
Fully packed
Fully packed
INTERPRETATION OF OBSERVED RESULTS

During drilling of borehole above the caved goves of the Zero seam {at location 7D/9-10L (within the
panel) and 14EL/2-3D (outside the panel}, where underlying zero seam was depillared with caving,
the water loss at the horizon of 2.7 and 6m from the floor of 1 seam was observed. One more bore
hole was drilled outside the panel, where underlying zero seam was not depillared. At this location,
no water loss was observed. RQD values of immediate roof strata above caved goaf of underlying
Zero seam is relatively low, which indicates that the competency of the strata is diluted due to the
caving of underlying Zero seam. Also, the visual inspection of the caved goaf of underlying Zero
seam (panel M) found collapsed strata.
The floor RL values at different places of 1 seam working was measured during both development and depillaring stages. No considerable changes of floor RL was found in the two different
stages of workings. In fact, 1 seam was developed in the year 2005 and the underlying seam was
depillared in the years 1985 i.e., around 20 years back. Therefore, the roof of the underlying Zero
seam i.e., the parting between present 1 seam and underlying Zero seam was completely settled
even before commencement of development in panel 1A. Under this condition, the floor RL measurements inside the panel at these two stages did not give any indication of floor subsidence. However, comparison of this measurement with the floor RL measured outside the panel, where underlying zero seam is not caved, might give some idea about the movement of the floor. Fig. 7 depicts
that there are negligible change of the floor RLs of the 1 seam working up to 4D gallery while this
values increase continuously towards 13D gallery. During inspection of the panel it was also observed that the some of the level galleries of the 1 seam workings moved downward as observed
and shown in Fig. 7. These observations revealed that the floor of the 1 seam working is disturbed
and subsided due to depillaring of the underlying Zero seam.
Recovery (%)
RQD
196
POSTALE 2008
0 2
5
0
1
5
0
75 10
0
0 25 50 75 100
0
0.0
0.0
Recovery (%)
25 50 75 100
RQD (%)
25 50 75 100
2.45
1
0.13
0.47
0.08
0 25
1.4
0.
0.4
0.9
0.6
0.22
1.34
0.14
0.51
0.76
0.3
0.84
0.22
0.61
0.23
3.25
0.55
0.34
0.83
0.42
0.24
0.02
02
0.2
05
1
0.2
0.19
0.36
0.23
2.99
2
0.47
1.3
0.68
0.1
2.03
LEGEND
Shale
CGSST with shale
MGSST
FGSST Coal VCGSST
CGSST
Med. To
CGSST
Coal
Fig. 2: Physico-Mechanical Properties

Of Parting Between No. 1 And Zero
Seam
(As per B.H. No. CIMFR#3)
0
0.4
Recovery
25 50 75 100 0
RQD
25
50
0.34
All dimensions are in meter
75 100
2.6
8
LEGEND
CGSST with
Med. To CGSST
h l bFGSST
d
Med. To CGSST with
C to VCGSST with shale
Shale MGSST
VCGSST
C to VCGSST
VCGSST with intercalation
MGSST with shale band
1.2
0.
0.
Fig. 3: Physico-mechanical properties of parting between No. 1

and Zero seam
0.8
90.
0.9
33
0.4
1.3
1.4
7
0.7
9
00.5.3
.7
5
900.01
1
1.2
2
0.84
5.
0.7
All dimensions are in meter
LEGEND
CGSST
Shale
MGSST
FGSST
M to CGSST
Fig. 4: Physico-mechanical properties of parting between No. 1 and Zero seam

197
11
D
162. 185
162 180
162 .45 0
9D
8D
14W
198
5D
7D
6D
4D
5D 4D
3D
2D
2D
1D
12W
4D
3D
2D
1D
1D
13W
3D
2D
1D
154 21
1D
150 820
150 810
2D
153 81
3D
147 30
147 27
3D
150 135
150 025
1532 7
153 15
3D
2D
1D
M
D
156 31
156 75
156 91
156 38
9WL
4D
155 78
154 23
161 25
160 31
160 12
159 86
159 85
159 80
158 67
158 14
2D
144 585
144 560
6D
3D
146 70
5D
4D
149 415
149 300
5D
143 895
143 905
6D
4D
145 78
11W
149 495
149 580
152 88
5D
143 315
143 250
7D
5D
145 02
145 08
6D
4D
142 790
142 880
7D
5D
149 665
149 650
6D
151 18
6D
145 51
8D
158.420
158 00
157 78
157 85
6D
147 900
147 895
7D
144 26
8D
148 090
154 32
154 10
7D
148.030
10W
7D
151 17
151 23
153 71
7D
140 485
142 105
142 255
8D
8D
140.110
9D
8WL
143.835
9D
147 885
147 750
9D
147 030
146 825
151 30
9D
144 00
10
D
8D
140.120
146.000
10
D
146 570
149.715
9D
143 25
163 66 5
163. 680
162 97 5
1 62. 985
1 62 570
1 62 585
158.250
158.320
157.155
8D
140.100
162. 24 0
20
162. 4
65
162. 0
162. 185
162 180
162 .45 0
162 45 0
10
D
142.505
143 205
153.460
153.285
10D
140 620
140 580
163 66 5
163. 680
162 97 5
1 62. 985
1 62 570
1 62 585
162 45 0
150.465
152.695
157.300
156.300
156.105
9D
140 895
140 915
10
D
140 775
161.0 2
20
162. 4
162. 24 0
10
D
162. 10
5
11
D
65
162. 0
146.030
11
D
146.535
149.440
149.195
153.100
11D
162. 10
5
161.0 2
146.650
11
D
143.215
12
143.340
12
D
146.450
12D
143.330
152.575
152.695
10
D
140.880
11D
142.850
145.655
13
D
145.550
154.990
13D
142.785
151.8705
152.130
11
D
140.625
140.610
12
D
142.540
142.410
165 460
164 415
164.140
164 105
164.000
163 680
162 985
162 975
162 570
162 450
162 185
162.420
162.420
162.065
162.105
161.02
POSTALE 2008
1D
MD
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
Fig. 5: Floor RL Of Different Locations In And Outside The Panel 1A Of 1 Seam
POSTALE 2008
No. 21
Incline
12D
10D
No. 22
Incline
8D
8L
4L
6D
10L
6L
4D
12L
2D
14L
MD
16L
18L
Caved
panel H
of Zero
Caved
panel M
of Zero
seam
1 seam workBoundary of panel 1A of 1 seam

Boundary of caved goaf of underlying Zero seam
3 seam working
4 seam working
Crack observed along this line in the floor of 1
Fall of roof strata around 1.2m height in 1 seam
Disturbed during development of 1 seam
Fig. 6: Combined Working Plan Of No. Zero, 1, 2, 3 And 4 Seam
CONCLUSIONS
Conventional depillaring of overlying seam after a long gap of completion of depillaring of underlying
seam with around 20m thick parting should, generally, not be practiced. But, the depillaring of a
seam with similar situation at Bera colliery was attempted on experimental basis, which encountered
strata control problems. Since the panel 1A of 1 seam was developed after 20 years of depillaring of
underlying panel M of Zero seam, the inter-burden strata between the seams are fractured and settled. The goaf of underlying panel M of Zero seam was found to be fully packed during visual inspection. On the other hand, the floor of 1 seam in panel 1A was found, almost, intact. This observed fact
indicates that the immediate floor of 1 seam is in hanging condition in panel 1A. In fact, the core drilling, done near the barrier of the panel, did not provide clear indication of gap between the hanging
floor of 1 seam and portion of the settled goaf of Zero seam roof. During core drilling in the parting
inside and outside of the panel, where underlying Zero seam was caved, water loss at the horizon of
around 2.7 and 6m was observed. This observation indicated that the total parting is not settled.
199
POSTALE 2008
Comparison of RL values showed downward movement of the floor galleries in panel 1A. At the
edge of the caved out bottom panel of the Zero seam, there is a possibility of further subsidence of
the floor of 1 seam due to abutment loading of pillars, which may aggravate problem of the depillaring. Under this situation, the depillaring of 1 seam may prove to be very difficult and dangerous.
Difference of floor RL with reference to floor RL measured at 1Dip gallery (m)
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
0
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
8D
9D
10D 11D
12D
13D
8L
9L
10L
11L
1
2
3
4
5
12L
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
13L
14L
Fig. 7: Difference Of Floor RL At Different Locations With Reference To Floor RL

Measured At 1 Dip Gallery
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
200
POSTALE 2008
Authors are obliged to Director, CIMFR, for his permission to present this paper. The co-operation of
officials of mine and DGMS is thankfully acknowledged for conducting this study. The views expressed in this paper are those of the authors and not necessarily of the institute to which they belong.
REFERENCES
[Sinha A., Ghosh A. K. and Singh R., 2006. Underground mining of coal: Where are we and where are we heading?. Proceedings of XVIII
National Convention of Mining Engineers and National Seminar on Emerging Trends in the Mining Industry, October 27-28, Hyderabad;
26-34.
Singh T. N. and Singh, R., 1990. Investigation into stress and deformation around depillaring face - A case study. Proceedings of
MMIJ/IMM joint Symp. on Today's Technology for the Mining & Metallurgical Industries, Oct. 2-4, 1990, Kyoto, Japan: 229235.
201
POSTALE 2008
A PROGRESSIVE MINE CLOSURE PLAN FOR

AN OPENCAST LIME STONE MINE
RATNESH TRIVEDI, M.K.CHAKRABORTY, A.G. SANGODE AND B.K. TEWARY
INTRODUCTION
The main aim of closure planning is to return the mine site in an ecological sustainable and suitable
state for future land use. The excitement and fanfare that surrounds the opening of a new mine is
never present when it finally closes. Rapid growth of industrializations and expansion of population
leads to exploitation of natural resources to the greater extent, which has substantially reduced the
natural capacity of self sustainability of the environment. Since human have to live within their environment, the process of development should be sustainable, so that environmental quality is maintained within safe limits. This can be achieved by integrating industrial development with a systematically designed progressive mine closure plan. The reasons why mines close are diverse and include economic, geological, geotechnical, regulatory, community and other pressures.
In India, mineral deposits are located in remote and tribal areas of the country, where the primary
means of livelihood is agriculture and forest produce. It is therefore necessary for the mine management to consider that mine closure and rehabilitation of community that must be essential parts
of the overall project plan. (Dhar, 2005) Mine closure encompasses rehabilitation process as an ongoing program designed to restore physical, chemical and biological quality disturbed by the mining
to a level acceptable to all concerned. It aims at leaving the area in such a way that rehabilitation
does not become a burden to the society after mining operation is over. It also aims to create as selfsustained ecosystem.
The chief goal of closure planning is to return the mine site in an ecological sustainable and suitable
state for future land use (Kumar et al 2003). Keeping the essential considerations of the mine closure, it should be the goal of mining companies to integrate the closure plan with the mining plan in a
cohesive manner (Jayanthu and Gupta, 2005). Mineral Conservation and Development Rules, 2003
provide for two types of Mine Closure Plan namely a Progressive Mine Closure Plan; and a Final
Mine Closure Plan. Progressive mine closure plan as a component of mining plan is to be submitted
in case of fresh grant or renewal of mining lease (section 23B, MCDR, 2003) and Final Mine Closure
Plan as a component of mining plan is to be submitted one year prior to the proposed closure of the
mine (section 23C, MCDR, 2003). Bitley (2003) has outlined the following major objectives of a mine
closure plan.
To safeguard health and safety of the public
Land after closure shall not be affected and shall ensure sustainability in long term.
Environmental resources in the area shall not be degraded in any form.
Minimize adverse socio-economic impacts.
Develop potential for communities future prospect in respect of economic and social life.
Mine closure operation is a continuous series of activities starting from day one of the initiation of
mining project therefore mine closure plan is an additional chapter in the present Mine Plan and will
be reviewed every five years in the Scheme of Mining. (GSR 329 (E), 2003, GSR 330 (E), 2003)
Final mine closure plan as per statute, shall be considered to have its approval at least nine months
before the date of proposed closure of mine. This period of nine months is reckoned as preparatory
period for final mine closure operations. Fourie and Brent (2006) have proposed a project-based
Mine Closure Model (MCM) for sustainable asset life cycle management. Mine Closure Model
(MCM) is based on project management principles. The factors that must be considered with mine
rehabilitation are physical and chemical stability of mine waste dumps and open-pits, maintenance of
water quality, safe disposal of infrastructure, development of sustainable ecosystems, meeting
community expectations (Taylor, 2004).
POSTALE 2008
Ghosh et. al, 2003 have highlighted rehabilitation and revegetation strategy for mine closure. Dutta
et. al. (2003) have focused on challenges for post mine closure environment management in Kakum
coal field, Assam. Sengupta and Biswas (2003) have underlined the importance of Mine closure
planning in changing environmental arena. Hancock (2004) used landscape evolution models in mining rehabilitation design. Rathke and Brring (2005) have studied the rehabilitation and colonization
of post-mining landscapes and found that the relative abundance of all species is significantly higher
in undisturbed sites as compared to disturbed mining sites. Rao and Pathak (2005) have studied the
Socio-economic impacts of mine closure in Raniganj Coalfields using remote sensing and satellite
imagery.
Mine closure may be planned but most commonly, it is premature, occurring before ore reserves are
exhausted. The reasons why mines close are diverse and include economic, geological, geotechnical, regulatory, community and other pressures. Premature and unplanned mine closures results in
significant adverse impacts on the environment and community. There seems to be a misalignment
between the mining industry and the various government authorities pertaining to the issue of mine
closure, rehabilitation of implementation of environment management plan. The main reasons for
this are unclear and unformulated approaches to mine closures. This implies the successful implementation of Environmental Management Plan EMP is also necessary for operational mines to ensure that the best result is achieved, and that the communities and regulatory authorities are satisfied. This paper focuses on the various of a progressive mine closure planning as a part of mine plan
even before opening up of the deposit. The study outlines the progressive mine closure plan of the
Khatkurbahal lime stone opencast mine of Shiva Cement Ltd. The mine has been planned for 0.2
Million Tones per year and will be closed after depletion of the reserve keeping in view the present
market scenario.
FIELD SETTINGS AT LIME STONE OPENCAST MINE
Location And Extent Of The Lease Area
Khatkurbahal mining lease area over 72.439 hectares is located in village Khatkurbahal & Kulenbahal under sadar sub-division district Sundargarh, Orissa and is the part area of survey of India Toposheet bearing no. 73B/7 on a scale of 1:50,000 bounded by the latitudes 22015 to 22020 N and
longitudes 84025 to 84030E. Out of the total area of 72.439 hectares, 3.36 hectares is already degraded due to limestone quarries. Similarly, 2.5 hectares has been utilized as existing road and due
to development of new roads. Cumulatively, 7.580 hectares has been utilized till date. The general
topography of the area represents a plain undulating terrain covered with soil & alluvium to a great
extent & gently sloping from SSE to NNE direction. The highest elevation in the lease area in 251.6m
and lowest elevation is 244 m.
Geology & Reserves
Geologically, the limestone and dolomite occurring in the area represent the Biramitrapur stage of
Gangpur series. The stratigraphic succession of the deposit is presented below:
Recent
Middle Dharwars
:
:
Soil and Alluvium, Laterite

Phyllites, limestone, dolomitic limestone and dolomite
The M.L. area under reference for limestone discerns a fairly wide range of rock types such as soil
and alluvium, laterite, limestone, dolomitic limestone. Soil cover is present all over the lease hold
area having thickness very from 1.5m to 3.0m. Soil is mainly brown coloured. Laterite is exposed in
two small patch towards western part of the area. The average thickness is observed to be 1.5 m.
Limestone beds are exposed in a single quarry having very thin beds of dolomitic limestone at place.
Colour of limestone varies from light gray to deep grey. Due to affect of metamorphism, original
sedimentary features are destroyed except primary sedimentary bedding planes. Due to recrystallization, medium to coarse grained calcite crystals were developed and limestone are become
highly compact and hard. The thickness of limestone in the area varies from 8m to 49m as observed
203
POSTALE 2008
from 38 bore holes already dug in the area. The strike trend of the deposit is almost E-W having dip
600 to 700 towards north.
Table 1 : Total Available Geological Reserves
Quantity(in million tones)
Geological Reserve
Mineable Reserve
19.249
8.037
9.171
1.819
28.420
9.856
Type
Proved (A)
Probable (B)
Demonstrated (A+B)
Grade (CaO%)
47.05
47.05
47.05
Mine Description
Opencast mining method has been practiced in limestone mine on single shift basis. The depth of
the quarry has heen proposed up to a depth of 26m. Machines under deployment are jack hammer
drill, air compressor, tippers etc. Eight metres wide haul road have been developed between quarries, dump and stack upto a maximum gradient of 1:20. Height of the bench will be maintained at
3m. Individual benches will be kept nearly vertical. Strata is hard and compact. Overall quarry slope
will be maintained at around 450 with the horizontal. Transportation of limestone to various consuming industries will be effected through 12 tonne capacity tippers. Hard rock mass will be loosened by
drilling and blasting. Excavation and loading will be done manually. Transportation of ore and waste
will be effected through tippers. However, the following machines are proposed to be deployed.
Table 2 : List Of Heavy Earth Moving Machineries
Sl.
No.
Name of Machineries
1a
Compressor
CPT
c
2a
b
Tractor Mounted
Compressor
Compressor
Jack Hammer
Jack Hammer
3a
Water Pump
b
c
4
5
6
7
Holman
(Hindustan 50)
ATLAS Capco
ATLAS Capco
CPT
Kirloskar Engine /
SHM 100/320
Kirloskar
Kirloskar
Water Pump
Water Pump
Tippers
Water tanker
--Hammer, Crowbars, Baskets, Spades etc
Drilling rods
Make
Model
Proposed
in nest five
years
Capacity
Existing
CPT365 RO
2
365 cfm
1 nos.
---
TA 13
110 cfm
1 nos.
---
VT- 5
RH 568 5L
CP 32 F
275 cfm
1 nos.
5 nos.
2 nos.
-------
RB 44
35 HP
1 No.
---
Diesel engine
Diesel engine
10 HP
5 HP
12 t
---
---
3 Nos.
1 No.
----As per required
As per required
----26
01
Table 3 : Year-wise Production targets

Year
1st (2003 04)
2nd (2004 05)
3rd (2005 06)
4th (2006 07)
5th (2007-08)
Total
Limestone production (in metric tones

Yearly
Monthly
191,362.0
15,947
223,256.25
18,605
218,700
218,700
236,925
1088,943.75
18,225
18,225
19,744
90,746
204
Weekly
3,987
4,651
Daily
664
775
4,556
4,556
4,936
22,686
759
759
823
3780
POSTALE 2008
2.4
Mineral Processing
24
6.3
7
2200 W
300 N
2100 W
2000 W
1900 W
C/7
1800 W
1700 W
1600 W
1500 W
1300 W
1200 W
C/5
1100 W
1000 W
900 W
C/4
800 W
p
700 W
600 W
C/3
500 W
l
400 W
246
NA
300 W
200 W
h
C/2
100 W
C/1
100 E
200 E
BH 3
BH 16
250
BH 15
400 E
300 N
C
BH 25
DUMP
BH 22
249
POND
BH 17
245
BH 5
247
BH 36
300 E
250
BH 25
LA
HF
L
1400 W
C/6
KULENBAHAL
VILLAGE
BH 18
BH 12
BH 5
BH 10
BH 9
SUB STATION
PUMP SHED
200 N
245
249
248
245
251
BH 24
BH 37
245
AGRICULTURAL LAND
250
BH 2
BH 7
BH 6
PBH 7
246
LAP TANK
RL244m
PBH 3
PBH 2
BH 33
PBH 6
MALIHARA AREA
247
BH 8
PBH 5
BH 32
BH 30
BH-38
200 N
PUMP
BH 19
247
247
100 N
KHAKUR BAHAL VILLAGE
BH 34
BH 35
248
249
250
LAMP
TEMPLE
100 N
AIRTEL TOWER
U.P M.E HIGH SCHOOL
TANK
PBH 4
TUBE WELL
REST SELTER
MAGAZINE
OFFICE STORE
INDEX
PBH 1
DUMP
LEASE BOUNDARY
2200 W
BENCHES
2100 W
A/1
2000 W
1900 W
1800 W
1700 W
1600 W
1500 W
A/2
1400 W
A/3
1300 W
1200 W
1100 W
1000 W
A/4
900 W
800 W
m
700 W A/5
k
600 W
A/6
500 W
i
400 W
300 W
g
200 W
A/8
A/7
100 W
e
0
100 E
A/8
200 E
DUMP
a
B
300 E
400 E
CONTUORS
VILLAGE ROAD
MINE ROAD
PLATE TITLE
WATER BODY
BORE HOLE
MINE
0
117 30"
TANK
G T S 1159 359
ADDRESS
MINE INFRASTRUCTURE
MINING LEASE
WASTE DUMP
MINE FENCES
CROSS SECTION
SURFACE PLAN
PLATE NO
SARVEYAR AutoCAD DRAWN BY
GRID LINE
SWAMI N SINGH
KHATKURBAHAL LIMESTONE &

DOLOMITE MINES
SUNDERGARH,ORISSA
M/S SHIVA CEMENT (P) LTd
PREPAIRED BY
CMRI DHANBAD
RQP
Dr. M. K. Chakraborty
RQP NO
RQP/RNC/090/97/B
AREA
RQP SIGNATURE
72.439 Ha
SCALE
1 : 2000
Fig. 1 : Surface Plan Of Khatkurbahal Lime Stone Opencast Mine

There is no proposal to establish crushing plant in the applied M. L. area for up-gradation. High
grade limestone (47.05% CaO) available from the lease area will be directly utilized in Lessees own
cement plant of after resorting to manual breaking, sorting and sizing.
PROGRESSIVE MINE CLOSURE PLAN
Mined Out Land
Both the external and internal Dumps are designed in such a way that there are minimal chances of
slope failure. The final pit slopes are designed to avoid any slope failure. Technical study will be
conducted before deciding upon the final slope. The external Dump is sloped ultimately in the overall
range of 25 degree to 28 degrees. The internal dump slopes are designed at milder gradient so that
even with the percolation of water in the dip side of the quarry, the dumps remain stable. It is proposed that the internal and external dump must be provided with toe walls/ silt arrestors and garland
drains. Plantation will be done on the surface of these dumps as a final closing operation.
Air Quality Management
The air pollution sources in the opencast lime stone mine are Suspended Particulate Matters,
SRespirable Particulate Matters, SOX, NOX, Pb etc. sources of major air pollutants viz. SPM and
RPM are mining, processing and ore transportation. The sources of noxious fumes containing noxious gases emanated are blasting operations as well as transportation activity. Following control
measures are suggested to keep the level of dust in atmosphere at the lowest level possible during
mining operations.
Preventive measures include those measures that prevent or substantially reduce the injection of
particles into the surrounding air environment. Preventive measures are independent of whether the
particulate is emitted directly or indirectly into the ambient air. The major types of preventive measures include passive enclosures (full or partial), wet suppression, stabilization of unpaved surfaces,
paved surface cleaning, work practices, and housekeeping.
A common preventive technique for the control of fugitive particulate emissions is to enclose the
source either fully or partially. Enclosures preclude or inhibit particulate matter from becoming airborne as a result of the disturbance created by ambient winds or by mechanical entrainment resulting from the operation of the source itself. Enclosures also help contain those emissions that are
generated. Crushing sizing, grading and screening operations by dry methods should be carried out
in a close system of operation with adaptation of adequate dust suppression techniques.
A novel variation of the source enclosure method for the control of fugitive particulate emissions involves the application of porous wind fences (also referred to as windscreens). Porous wind fences
have been shown to significantly reduce emissions from active storage piles and exposed ground
areas. The principle employed by windscreens is to provide a sheltered region behind the fence line
where the mechanical turbulence generated by ambient winds is significantly reduced. The downwind extent of the protected area is many times the physical height of the fence. This sheltered re-
205
POSTALE 2008
gion provides for a reduction in the wind-erosion potential of the exposed surface, in addition to allowing the gravitational settling of the larger particles already airborne. The application of windscreens along the leading edge of active storage piles seems to be one of the few good control options available for this particular source. Hence, wherever possible feasible windscreens should be
installed along the storage pits.
Wet suppression systems apply either water, a water solution of a chemical agent, or micron-sized
foam to the surface of the particulate generating material. This measure prevents (or suppresses)
the fine particles contained in the material from leaving the surface and becoming airborne. Chemical agents used in wet suppression systems can be either surfactants or foaming agents for materials handling and processing operations (i.e. crushers, conveyors) or various types of dust palliatives
applied to unpaved roads.
Water Quality Management
Potentially, many adverse environmental impacts arise due to surface mining if no mitigation measures (reclamation practices) are adopted. During initial stages of mining activity, part of lease area is
cleared of vegetation, approach roads are prepared and the equipment for mining are transported
and the mining programme is worked out to proceed step by step either horizontally or vertically
downwards depending on the topography. Water pollution takes place due to soil erosion and sedimentation of fines in the nearby surface water bodies, which could be arrested by adopting appropriate measures.
Stabilization of Unpaved Surfaces
Release of particulate from unpaved surfaces can be reduced or prevented by stabilization of those
surfaces. Sources that have been controlled in this manner include unpaved roads and parking lots,
active and inactive storage piles, and open areas. Stabilizing mechanisms that have been employed
successfully include chemical, physical and vegetative controls. Vegetative stabilization involves the
use of various types of flora to control wind erosion from exposed surface.
Paved Surface Cleaning
Other than house keeping, the only method available to reduce the surface loading of fine particles
on paved roads is through some form of street cleaning practice. Street sweeping does remove
some debris from the pavement, thus preventing it from becoming airborne by the action of passing
vehicles, but it can also generate significant amounts of finer particulate by the mechanical action
used to collect the material. The three major methods of street cleaning are mechanical (broom)
cleaning, vacuum cleaning, and flushing. Mechanical street sweepers utilize large rotating brooms to
lift the material from the pavement and discharge it into a hopper for later disposal. Vacuum sweeper
removes the material from the street surface by drawing suction on a pickup head, which entrains
the particles in the moving air stream. The debris is then deposited in a hopper, and the air is exhausted to the atmosphere or regenerated back to the pickup head and reused. Street flushers hydraulically remove debris from the surface to the gutter and eventually to the storm sewer system
through the use of high-pressure water sprays. The pollution due to mining operations viz. drilling,
blasting, ore sorting can be reduced by application of proper technical and non-technical mitigation
measures. The tree and shrub vegetation around the mining area act as dust filters and sink to the
fumes coming from blasting, heavy machinery and heavy vehicles. These plant species should not
be cut. The surrounding area may be planted with diverse tree species having preponderance of
dust filtering trees.
Waste Management
Solid wastes that will be generated in course of rejection of waste. A series of open drains to be provided on dump body to arrest surface run-off and prevent siltation. Grasses are to be grown on dump
slopes to minimize soil erosion.
Top Soil Management
There is very meager top soil is available in mining area Topsoil will be used for spreading over the
back filled area or during reclaiming the dumpsites. Topsoil spreading will provide better conditions
206
POSTALE 2008
for plant growth. Due weight age will be given to restoration of specific root zone properties that were
disrupted during mining and reclamation process. Optimum minimum thickness for spreading of topsoil cover will be restricted to 5 cm
Decommissioning of Infrastructure etc.
The machineries which have crossed their life are to be removed from site and sold as scarp. Other
machinery will be shifted to other mining sites of the company. Adequate infrastructure is available at
site and present. The infrastructure will be dismantled and removed from site at the time of final closure of the mine.
Safety & Security
Rules and Regulations made under Mines-Acts-1952 will be observed and required safety measures
taken. Circulars issued time to time regarding safety to the personnel and equipment of the mine and
to improve the working conditions of the mine, the mining plan envisages:
Care and Maintenance
After the completion of the mining, an organization consisting of persons of different disciplines is
proposed to be maintained to undertake and implement the closure activities. The organization may
be provided with a vehicle for discharging day-to-day duties. Maintenance cost of this organization is
proposed from the retain earnings of the project. A small team consisting of 2-3 technical people
may be required to oversee the efficacy of the closure activities. This monitoring may be conducted
for 2 years after the mine closure activities.
Financial Assurance
The financial assurance under rule 23(F)(2) of Mineral Conservation and Development Rule, 2003 is
enclosed. Financial assurance, has to be furnished by every leaseholder. The amount of financial
assurance shall be rupees twenty five thousand for A category mines and rupees fifteen thousand
for B category mines, per hectare of the mining lease area put to use for mining and allied activities.
However, the minimum amount of financial assurance to be furnished in any of the forms referred to
in clause (2) shall be rupees two lakh for A category mines and rupees one lakh for B category
mines.
Table 4 : Break up of Mining Lease Areas for Calculation of Financial Assurance
SL.
No.
Head
Area put
in use at
start
of
plan (Ha)
Additional
requirement
during plan
(in Ha)
Total
(In
Ha)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Area under mining

Storage of top soil
Overburden dump
Mineral Storage
Infrastructure
Roads
Railway
Greenbelt
Tailing pond
Effluent treatment
Mineral separation/
conveyor
gallery/
power corridor
Township area
Other specify
Total
3.36
Nil
1.07
Nil
Nil
2.10
0.45
0.60
Nil
Nil
Nil
0.60
0.14
0.50
Nil
Nil
0.17
Nil
2.00
Nil
Nil
Nil
3.96
0.14
1.57
Nil
0.080
2.27
0.45
2.60
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
7.58
Nil
Nil
3.41
Nil
Nil
10.99
12
13
207
Area considered as reclaimed

&
rehabilitat-ed
(In Ha)
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Net
area
considered
for calculation (In Ha)
3.96
0.14
1.57
Nil
2.27
0.45
2.60
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
10.99
POSTALE 2008
CONCLUSIONS
Mine closure process takes 2-3 years after completion of mining activity and is on going process if it
is progressive mine closure. The process normally leaves an adverse impact on the environment
and society that, if left unattended, may last for years to come. The effects of mining on different
components of environment have been studied and the mitigative measures to reduce the adverse
impacts have been suggested. The progressive mine closure plan has been prepared as per the
guideline issued Indian Bureau of Mines. It can be safely concluded that no significant deterioration
in the eco-system is likely to occur due to the Khatkurbahal lime stone opencast mine of Shiva Cement Ltd. On the other hand, the project is to have several benefits like improvement in employment
generation and economic growth of the area, by way of improved infrastructure facilities and better
socio-economic conditions. Sustainable management of mining activities can contribute vastly to the
economy of the nation, and the livelihoods of society. The study has recommended various remedial
measures to overcome the adverse impacts of mine closure.
REFERENCES
Bitey V. D. and Murodiya P. J., Safety and Legislative Issues on Environment and Mine Closure in India, Proceedings of the National Seminar on strategies for mine closure, Dhanbad, 2003, pp 30-34.
Dhar B. B., Environmental road map for mining sector, Proceedings of National Seminar on Policies, Statutes & Legislation in
Mines, POSTALE 2005, Dhanbad, July 2005, pp 9-16.
Dutta S. K., Pathak K., Bhattacharya, A. K., Challenges for Post Mine Closure Environmental Management in Makum Coalfeild,
Assam., Proceedings of the National Seminar on strategies for Mine closure, Dhanbad, 2003, pp 109-114.
Fourie A. and Brent A.C., A project-based Mine Closure Model (MCM) for sustainable asset Life Cycle Management, Journal of
Cleaner Production, Volume 14, Issues 12-13, 2006, pp. 1085-1095
Ghosh M. K., Kumar, A., and Nand, S., Rehabilitation and Revegetation Stratigies for Mine Closure, Proceedings of the National
Seminar on strategies for mine closure, Dhanbad, 2003, pp 35
GSR 329 (E), Mineral Concession Rules, 1960 amended, The Central Government Notification No. GSR 329 (E),.2003, India.
GSR 330 (E), Mineral Conservation and Development Rules, 1988 amended, The Central Government Notification No. GSR 330
(E), 2003, India.
Hancock G. R. The use of landscape evolution models in mining rehabilitation design, Environmental Geology, 2004
Jayantu S. and Gupta R. N., Prospective Research Studies and Policies on Coal Mine Closure, Proceedings of National Seminar
on Policies, Statutes & Legislation in Mines, POSTALE 2005, Dhanbad, July 2005, pp 91-96.
Kumar N., Kumar R., Das S. K., and Ghosh A. K., Environmental Management through Planning for Mine Closure, Proceedings of
the National Seminar on strategies for mine closure, Dhanbad, 2003, pp. 74-82.
Rao P. M., and Pathak K., Socio-economic impacts of mine closure: a case study using satellite imagery International Journal of
Environmental Studies, Volume 62, Issue, 2005 , pages 555 - 570
Rathke D and Brring U, Colonization of post-mining landscapes by shrews and rodents Mammalia: Rodentia, Soricomorpha.
Ecological Engineering Volume 24, Issues 1-2, 30 2005, pp. 149-156
Sengupta M. and Biswas T., Importance of Mine Closure Plan in changing Environmental Arena, Proceedings of the National
Seminar on strategies for mine closure, Dhanbad, 2003, pp 189-198.
Taylor F.G., Pollution control and mine site rehabilitation in surface coal mining. SCIRO environmental projects office, Osmond,
Australia, March 2004.
208
POSTALE 2008
SUPPORT GUIDELINES FOR DEPILLARING CAVING FACES

IN INDIAN COAL MINES
A. KUSHWAHA, SUBHASHISH TEWARI AND S.K. SINGH
Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research, Dhanbad
INTRODUCTION
Bord and pillar system of coal mining is the most dominant underground method of extraction in India. Under this method of extraction, strata control is a major problem affecting safety and productivity of the mine. Central Mining Research Institute had completed a grant in-aid project on Geomechanical Classification of Coal Measure Roof Rocks Vis--Vis Roof Support in 1987 funded by the
Ministry of Coal (CMRI Report, 1987) [1-2]. A guide line has been evolved to estimate the RMR of
the immediate roof strata and to estimate the required support load density for developed workings
in Indian coal mines and their support patterns.
The lacuna in this report was that it is quantitatively silent about the effect of in situ stresses on
roadway stability and any guide lines for support design at depillaring faces. As per existing DGMS
guide lines, Systematic Support Rules (SSR) has to be followed at the depillaring faces irrespective
of the immediate roof rock type and competence (CMR, 1957). It was therefore imperatively felt that
a comprehensive guide line needed to be developed for depillaring caving faces considering split
and slice width, rock characterization, depth and in situ stresses. A grant-in-aid project on Development of Support Guidelines for Depillaring Panel in Indian Coal Mines [3] was undertaken with this
primary objective. Gist of the finding of the project for implementing at depillaring caving faces has
been discussed in this paper.
APPROACH OF THE STUDY
Investigations were carried out based on field data collected from 30 coal mines. Out of these, 18
mines have been chosen for numerical modeling spread over the major coalfields in the country. The
details of selected mines for modelling along with geomining parameters of the panel and weighted
roof rock properties based on laboratory and field study are given in Table 1. Finally, four mines of
different coal fields are selected for instrumentation and validation of the modeling results.
MODELING PROCEDURE
In any numerical modelling technique, all the geo-mining conditions pertaining to the basic problem
need to be clearly defined. These parameters mainly include geometry of the area to be studied,
rock properties for each stratum and in situ stress field. FLAC 3D software based on Finite Difference Method solves the problem iteratively and one needs to make sure the convergence of the solution before analysing the results.
Failure criterion used in this report
Sheorey (1997) has adopted Balmers criterion for intact rock (1952) after applying it to 201 triaxial
data sets for different rocks including coal. This criterion reads as

1 = c 1 + 3
t
(1)
This equation is changed for rock masses as

1 = cm 1 + 3
tm
bm
POSTALE 2008
where, c = intact rock compressive strength, MPa; t = intact rock tensile strength, MPa; ctm
uniaixial rock mass compressive strength, MPa; tm =rock mass tensile strength, MPa; bm= exponent
in failure criterion for rock mass.
Table 1 : Selected Mines For 3-D Modeling
Name of the colliery , seam &
panel
RMR
28
1.87
0.5
51
29
1.93
0.5
52
28
1.87
0.5
51
37
2.47
0.5
51
28
1.8
0.5
51
30
0.5
47
23
1.5
0.5
38
31
2.0
0.5
55
24
1.6
0.5
45
26.5
1.7
0.5
52
22.1
1.4
0.5
52
4x2
20 x 20
3.6
4.2
2.2
30
Mahanadi Coalfield Limited (MCL)
57
4.2 x
25 x 25
4.2
4.2
2.4
30
2.4
Bharat Coking Coalfields Limited (BCCL)
265
4.5 x
30 x 30
4.0
4.0
2.85
27.8
2.3
Singareni Collieries Company Limited (SCCL)
180
4.2 x
32 x 30
4
4
2.1
27
2.1
122
3.6 x
26 x 26
4
4
4.5
17.3
1.8
122
3 x 2.7
23 x 23
3
4
3
27
2.
0.5
49
0.5
50
1.7
0.5
52
1.8
0.5
51
1.15
0.5
53
1.8
0.5
55
1.3
0.5
57
71
Eastern Coalfield Limited (ECL)

4.5 x
21.3 x
4.2
4.5
3.6
2.4
21.3
4.2 x
21.2 x
4.0
4.8
3.6
2.4
21.2
4.5 x
21.3 x
4.2
4.5
4.2
2.4
21.3
4.5 x
20 x 24
4.5
4.5
2.4
2.4
Western Coalfield Limited (WCL)
4.2 x
30 x 30
3.6
3.6
4.5
2.6
3.6 x
30 x 24
4
4
4.4
2.4
4 x 2.8
24 x 24
4
4
4.8
104
4.8 x 3
Shyam Sunderpur, RVII, P24

Shankalp Khani,
RVII, P6
Satgram Inc., RIV seam, P9
131
Gorawari, 1Seam, P9C Ext.

Nandan Mine- 2
MECIII(T), T1
Saoner Mine1,
IV (M), P-E6A
Satpura II Mine,
UW, P-E2
243
Surakachhar, GIII, P-20L

Bhatgaon, Upp.
Patpahari, 3LN
Jainagar, Pasang
, P-85
Jhimar , 4A, P-7
63
GDK-5A, No.1
seam, P-24
KK- 5A, No 1A
seam, P-15
Kothagudem, 5B
Incline, P-18
GDK 8A Inc. P44
Weighted average roof

rock properties
t,
MPa
85
Muralidih,Mahuda Top, 17
c,
MPa
Bankola, RVII, P5
Orient Mine 3,
Lajkura, 12LN
1 - Depth, m; 2 - Dev. Gallery size, m; 3 - Pillar

*
*
size (c-c), m; 4 - Split width, m; 5 - Slice width, m;
*
6 - Extr. height, m
*
*
*
*
*
*
1
2
3
4
5
6
43
110
230
27
51
26 x 26
4.5
4.5
South Eastern Coalfields limited (SECL)

3.6 x
20 x 20
3.6
4
2.5
2.5
4.2 x
22.5 x
4.5
4.5
2.8
2.8
22.5
4 x 2.8
21 x 21
4.2
4.5
2.8
47.5
164
4x2.4
24 x 24
4.2
210
4.2
19.5
POSTALE 2008
These constants are related to RMR (1976 Rock Mass Rating of Bieniawski) as
RMR 100
cm = c exp
20
RMR 100
tm = t exp
27
RMR
bm = b 100
(2)
bm < 0.95
However for the purpose of using this criterion the CMRI RMR has been directly used instead of Bieniawski RMR, since this procedure has been found to be acceptable after application in many coal
mine cases.
Safety factor
Once a failure criterion is selected and the stresses 1i, 3i around an excavation are computed, the stability or otherwise can be assessed by estimating the safety factor at different points
and drawing the safety factor contours. The safety factor is estimated as
1 3i
when 3i < tm otherwise,

(3)
SF = tm
1i 3i
3i
where, 1i and 3i are the major and minor principal stresses obtained from numerical
models.
SF =
In the modeling, parametric changes in the following factors were made for all the 18 mines:
i)
horizontal to vertical in situ stress ratio, K
ii)
width of split/slice, Wsp or Wsl
iii)
rock mass rating, RMR
This gave rise to 612 models with as many output data sets. A three dimensional view of a model
showing grid pattern in and around the seam is shown in Fig.1. Similarly, plan view of the panel
simulated during modeling is shown in Fig. 2.
Fig. 1 : A 3-D View Of A Model Showing Grid Pattern
211
POSTALE 2008
An example of the contours of safety factor in and around a half portion of slice and junction for a
fixed split and slice width and estimated weighted RMR value of the immediate roof rock for three
different values of in situ stress ratio K during simulation of a depillaring panel of GDK5A incline,
SCCL at the time of main fall is shown in Fig. 3.
Fig.2 : Simulated Plan View Of A Panel

Effect of influencing factor on Rock Load Height (RLH) required to be supported
Before development of the formulae for estimating the required Support Load Density at the slice
junction, within the slice, in the split gallery and at the goaf edge, it became necessary to study the
effect of each factor for estimating the Rock Load Height (RLH) while keeping the others constant.
From the results of 612 models of 18 underground coal mines, it was realized that for the same parameters, the qualitative nature of variation in the Rock Load Height versus any one of the influencing factors for a mine did not vary much between the 18 cases. Therefore, for judging the qualitative
nature of variation, the model results was plotted to see the effect of any influencing factor over the
required Rock Load Height keeping others constant at different places of the depillaring face. This
study helps in choosing the best fit equation.
Effect of depth of cover, H on estimated RLH: As the rock mass rating RMR values of all 18 mines
were different, a direct relation between rock load height (RLH) and depth is not possible.
Effect of in situ stress ratio K on estimated RLH: From the analysis of model data it is clear that more
or less curvilinear rise in the required Rock Load Height (RLH) with in situ stress ratio K is found.
Effect of RMR on estimated RLH: From the analysis of model data more or less a curvilinear decline
in the Rock Load Height (RLH) with RMR is found.
Effect of split & slice width variation on RLH: From the analysis of model data more or less a curvilinear rise in the Rock Load Height (RLH) with split and slice width is seen.
212
POSTALE 2008
Estimation of Rock Load Height (RLH) require to be supported

The above analysis indicates that the effect of each factor can be expressed as simple continuous
functions for all the required places such as at slice junction, within the slice, in the split gallery and
goaf edge which may then be combined to give a relation for estimation of Rock Load Height (RLH).
A suitable formula is thus chosen as
RLH = C . H a1 . K a 2 . W a 3 . R a 4
(4)
where, RLH is the Rock Load Height, m; H is depth of cover, m; K is the ratio of horizontal to vertical
in situ stress; W is the width of split or slice, m; R is the weighted average RMR of the immediate
roof rock; C, a1, a2, a3 and a4 are constants.
Fig.3 : Safety Factor Contours In And Around Slice Junction And Slice For Panel No.31 Of
GDK5A Incline, SCCL For Different Horizontal To Vertical Stress Ratio, K
A) Lowest Value Of K B) Moderate Value Of K C) Highest Value Of K
Non linear regression of this equation for total 612 sets for estimating the Rock Load Height at slice
junction, within slice, in the split gallery and at goaf edge leads to the form:
213
POSTALE 2008
For slice junction
H 0.50 K 0.64 . W 1.17
RLH jn =
0.90
with the index of determination r2 = 0.90
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
For slice
H 0.67 . K 0.84 . W 1.74
RLH sl =
1.42
For split gallery
H 0.52 K 0.59 . W 1.12
RLH sp =
1.02
For goaf edge
H 0.54 K 0.49 . W 0.89
RLH ge =
0.79
where, RLHjn, RLHsl, RLHsp and RLHge are the rock load height in m, at the slice junction, within slice,
in the split gallery and at goaf edge respectively.
Equations 5 to 8 are the final predictive equations for estimating the Rock Load Height required to be
supported at different places of the depillaring face with reasonably good index of determination.
Estimation of support load density (SLD)
The support load density is simply obtained as SLD = .RLH. The final equations are:
For slice junction
SLD jn =
. H 0.50 . K 0.64 . W 1.17

R
Within slice
SLDsl =
(9)
0.90
. H 0.67 . K 0.84 . W 1.74

R
(10)
1.42
In the split gallery
SLDsp =
. H 0.52 . K 0.59 . W 1.12
For goaf edge
SLD ge =
(11)
1.02
. H 0.54 K 0.49 . W 0.89

R
(12)
0.79
where, is the weighted average density of the immediate roof rock strata, t/m3; SLDjn, SLDsl, SLDsp
and SLDge are the required support load density in t/m2, at the slice junction, within slice, in the split
gallery and at the goaf edge respectively.
While it is probable that the main fall area will influence the stresses in the working area, its inclusion
in the equations for SLD was not desirable because it is generally an unknown quantity, except when
214
POSTALE 2008
data are available from earlier depillaring nearby. It may be argued that a relation may be established between RMR and the main fall area, making the latter predictable. This however is clearly not
possible since the RMR values are measured in a limited portion of the roof (height equal to the
roadway width) while a sizable portion of the main roof participates in the main fall.
PROCEDURE FOR ESTIMATION OF DIFFERENT VARIABLES
Estimation procedures for the variables used in the above equations are described below except for
H and W which is directly obtainable.
Estimation of K: Measurement is the best method to determine the ratio of in situ horizontal stresses
to vertical stress K for any particular mine. In the absence of the in situ measurements of stress values, theoretical values can be used (Sheorey, 1993) [4].
h =
EG
(H + 1000)
v +
1
1
(13)
where, h and v are the horizontal and vertical in situ stress respectively in MPa; is the Poissons
ratio = 0.25; is the coefficient of thermal expansion, / 0C; E is the Youngs modulus of the rock,
MPa; G is the thermal gradient = 0.03 0C/m for coal measure rocks; H is the depth of cover, m
The in situ vertical stress can be written as:
v = H = 0.025 H
(14)
The value of for coal can be taken as 30 x 10-6 / 0C while for other type of the coal measure rocks 8
x 10-6 / 0C (Sheorey et al. 2001). On the other hand, Youngs modulus of each type of the rock lying
in the roof strata up to the height equal to gallery width can be tested in the laboratory and its
weighted average can be estimated.
Estimation of Rock Mass ratings, R: The value of RMR, which again should be weighted average,
can be readily determined from the CMRI classification tables. If the RMR of any layer lying between
immediate roof rocks of height equivalent to gallery width is more or equal to 70, it should be ignored
during estimation of weighted average of RMR.
Estimation of Rock Density, : The density can be measured by standard lab method and should
also be a weighted average.
SUPPORT DESIGN GUIDELINES
The load bearing capacities of different support items are given in Table 2.
To estimate the applied support load density by different support system used in the mine, below Eq.
15 can be used (Sheorey & Mukarjee, 1985).
Applied Support Load ( ASL) =
n. A + m .Q
W. a
t/m2
(15)
where, n is the number of bolts in a row; A is the anchorage strength of each bolt, t; Q is the load
bearing capacity of the additional support if done, t; m is the number of additional support at a spacing a, if it has been used; W is the width of split or slice, m; a is the spacing between two consecutive rows, m.
215
POSTALE 2008
Once we know the magnitude of applied support load density, we can easily determine the safety
factor of support system using the below equation:
Safety factor of supports = Applied Support Load / Support Load Density = ASL / SLD
While using the equations for SLD developed in this report, it should be realized that they have a
built-in safety factor of 1.5. As such ASL / SLD 1.0
Table 2 : Load bearing capacity of some support systems
Support item
Load bearing capacity ( t)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Roof bolt (full column grouted with quick setting cement capsules) (TMT ribbed bolt of 22 mm dia)
Roof bolt (full column grouted with resin capsule) (TMT ribbed
bolt of 22 mm dia)
Roof stitching
Rope dowel
Wooden prop and steel prop
Steel chock
Wooden chock
Pit prop ( 2.5m height) and (4.5m height)
Roof/rope truss
Brick walling (40 cm thick)
11
Rigid arches (vertical load) and (side loads)
1
2
6
12
8
4
10 and 30
30
20
15 & 12
10
10
7(/m length) & 2(/m
length)
FIELD STUDY
To supplement the modeling results, four mines were selected for the field instrumentation where
instrumented rock bolts were used to determine the axial load, bending moment etc developed along
the bolts along with stress meter observations for ribs stability. It was found that field results are very
much close to the modeling results. Here a case study of one mine of Singareni Collieries Company
Limited (GDK5A incline) is illustrated. The details of the geometrical parameters of the seam and
panel are given below:
Name of the seam and panel
Maximum depth of cover and seam thickness
Pillar size and height of extraction
Width & height of developed gallery
Width of split
& slice
Rib width against the goaf
: seam no.1 & P-24

: 180m & 2.1m
: 32 m x 30 m (c-c) & 2.1m
: 4.0m & 2.1m
: 4.0m
: 2m
The estimated geotechnical properties of the immediate roof rock strata up to 4.0m height equivalent
to width of split and slice galleries are given in below table:
Rock
type
Grey
Pyritic
Sst.
White
Sst.
Poissons
ratio
Compressive
strength,
MPa
Tensile
strength
MPa
0.2
0.25
18.4
1.85
2500
52
3.8
0.25
15
1.5
2500
58
Youngs
Modulus
MPa
Depth,
m
Thickness,m
15,000
179.8
10,000
176
216
Densitykg/
m3
RMR
POSTALE 2008
Weighted average of Youngs modulus E of grey pyretic sandstone and white sandstone can be estimated as = (15000 x 0.2 + 10,000 x 3.8) / (0.2 +3.8) = 10250 MPa, Weighted average of depth, H
and v = 4.4 MPa
will be = 176m and = 8 x 10-6 /0C. Therefore, h = 5.32 MPa
Weighted average of in situ stress ratio K = 5.32 / 4.4 = 1.21
Weighted average of rock mass ratings, R = (52 x 0.2 + 58 x 3.8) / 4 = 58
Weighted average of rock density, =2.5 t/m3
Required Support Load Density (SLD) for GDK5A Incline
Required Support Load Density (SLD) for GDK5A Incline, t/m2
(H=180m, K = 1.21, Rock mass ratings R = 58, Rock density =2.5 t/m3, W=4.0m)
At the slice Junction,
Within slice,
In the split gallery,
At the goaf edge,
(Eq.9)
(Eq.10)
(Eq. 11)
(Eq.12)
4.96
3.33
3.13
6.30
Support design for depillaring face at GDK5A Incline
At GDK-5A incline of SCCL, conventional split and slice method of extraction was being performed
manually for developed pillars. During depillaring operation, they were using three bolts in a row at
spacing of 1.2m in split galleries along with one row of wooden prop at spacing of 1.2m. In slice, they
have used one row of wooden prop and one row of pit prop (towards rib side) at an interval of 1.2m
as shown in Fig.4. In addition to that, a wooden cog was also erected at the centre of the slice junction. At goaf edge, three set of wooden cogs were erected skin to skin as shown in Fig.4. Induced
caving was performed at regular interval. Applied support load can be easily estimated using Eq. 15
and Table 2.
Applied support load (at the junction) ASLjn
Applied support load (within slice) ASLsl
Applied support load (in the split gallery) ASLsp
Applied support load (at the goaf edge) ASLge
= (5 x 6 + 20) / (4.0 x 2.4) = 5.20 t/m2

= (15+10) / (4.0 x 1.2) = 5.20 t/m2
= (3 x 6 +10) / 4 x 1.2 = 5.83 t/m2
= (3 x 20 +3x6) / (4.0 x 1.8) = 10.84 t/m2.
The safety factors of each support at different places of the depillaring face are given below:
At the slice junction
SLDjn, ASLjn S.F.
t/m2
t/m2
4.96
5.20
1.05
Within slice
SLDsl ASLsl
t/m2
t/m2
3.33
5.20
In the split gallery

SLDsp ASLsp S.F.
,t/m2
t/m2
3.13
5.83
1.86
S.F.
1.56
At the goaf edge

SLDge ASLge S.F.
t/m2
,t/m2
6.30
10.84 1.72
From the above results it is clear that the safety factor of each supports at depillaring face is more
than 1.0 and with this support system panel was extracted successfully.
Here point is to be noted that with only 3 bolts in a row at the interval of 1.2m between two consecutive rows at the slice junction, applied support load density comes to only 3.75 t/m2, which is less
than the required support load density calculated from developed Eq. 9 i.e. 4.96 t/m2. Practically in
the field also it has been realized that without putting additional chock supports at the center of the
slice junction, condition of the junction roof deteriorated very quickly. Keeping this view in mind an
additional wooden chock support was erected at the centre of slice junction as shown in Fig.4, which
improves the stability of that area. With this additional support, applied support density reached to
5.20 t/m2, which was found adequate with safety factor more than 1.0.
CONCLUSIONS
The proposed equations for the estimation of required Support Load Density at the slice junction,
within the slice, in the split gallery and goaf edge are given as per Equation nos. 9, 10, 11 and 12
217
POSTALE 2008
respectively. Sometimes it was found that required Support Load Density at the goaf edge comes
less than the slice junction value from the developed equations, in such cases, slice junction value
should be taken for the goaf edge also.
After knowing the required Support Load Density (SLD) at different places of the depillaring face,
design of support system can be readily planned as per requirement. For this purpose, Eq. 15 can
be used to estimate the Applied Support Load (ASL) using load bearing capacity of different type of
the supports (Table 2) generally being used in Indian coal mines. The safety factor of the support
system planned for different places can be calculated as the ratio of ASL to SLD which must be
more than 1 for all the places of the depillaring face.
Fig. 4 : Support Pattern For Depillaring Face At GDK-5A Incline, SCCL

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to express their sincere thanks to the Director CIMFR, Dhanbad for giving
permission to publish this paper. The opinions expressed are those of the authors and not necessarily of the organization to which they belong.
REFERENCES
CMRI Report (1987) on Geomechanical Classification of Coal Measure Roof Rocks vis--vis Roof Supports, Submitted to the
Ministry of Coal.
2Paul Committee (1990). Report of THE EXPERT GROUP on Guide lines for drawing up support plans in bord & pillar workings in coal mines 1-43.
CIMFR Report (2007) on Development of Support Guidelines for Depillaring Panel in Indian Coal Mines
Sheorey, P.R. (1993). Experience with the application of modern rock mass classifications in coal mine roadways. Comprehensive Rock Engineering (Ed. J.A. Hudson et al.). Pergamon, Oxford. 5, 411-431.
218
POSTALE 2008
STRATA MONITORING IN LONGWALL MINES STATUTORY

PROVISIONS AND TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE
G. BANERJEE, D. KUMBHAKAR AND K. P. YADAVA
INTRODUCTION
While giving permission to extract retreating longwall panels with caving method, under regulation
100A of Coal Mines Regulations, 1957, several conditions are imposed by DGMS for strata monitoring which should be strictly implemented by the mine management. Such exercise is necessary for
safe and efficient working of the longwall face and the main objectives are:
To assess the nature and adequacy of caving and to estimate the thickness of roof involved at
different stages of caving process.
To study the behaviour of strata and support during normal and weighting periods.
To investigate into the pattern of loading of overlying roof rocks on the powered supports and its
interaction and to estimate the adequacy of support provided at the face.
This paper discusses the strata movement and its behavior in longwall workings in accordance with
the statutory provisions.
STATUTORY PROVISIONS FOR STRATA MONITORING
The statutory provisions for strata monitoring includes formulation of strata management plan detailing proposed instrumentation, monitoring and assigning clear responsibilities of persons involved.
The measurements by strata monitoring instruments shall be done by the management / any scientific organization or other recognized institute and specific comments on variations in convergence
rate and adequacy of supports shall be reported. Possibility of periodic weighting is also to be investigated The specific provisions regarding strata monitoring are:
(a) Gate Roads Instrumentation and Monitoring
In order to monitor load and convergence in the gate roadways, load cells and convergence indicators shall be installed in both the gate roads.
Multi-point borehole extensometer (sonic probe type or equivalent type) into the roof of the gate
roads up to at least 10m height from the roof level shall be installed to know the deep seated
strata movement above the galleries.
Strain bars shall also be installed in the sides of the gate roads to measure deformation in coal
pillars due to abutment load.
(b) Longwall Face Instrumentation and Monitoring
Pressure gauges fitted with two indicator needles, one for on-line pressure and another for peak
pressure shall be installed in each leg circuit of every chock shield.
Continuous pressure recorder shall be provided in adequate number to powered supports in
order to know continuous pressure profile of the leg circuits.
Convergence in face shall be measured by monitoring leg closure or by using remote convergence indicators.
Bore hole extensometers with required number of anchor points shall be installed on surface to
assess the deformation of the overlying strata, potential of cyclic block caving, and the requirement of induce caving if any.
Condition of roof along face regarding cavity and fracture formation.
POSTALE 2008
Caving behaviour in goaf regarding nature and extent of caving including overhangs in the goaf.
Assessment of ground movement and its behaviour shall be done by the following:
(a) Load and convergence profile in the gate roads with reference to the face advance positions
(b) Pressure - Convergence profile
o Leg pressure and Leg closure / convergence profile of the powered supports separately for
front and rear legs along the face during periodic weighting and normal periods
o Leg pressure and Leg closure / convergence profile on the longwall face especially in the
central, top and bottom gate zones
(c) Overhangs and caving
o Nature and extent of caving including overhangs in the goaf behind Shield with reference to
powered support numbers shall be observed and plotted
o Nature and extent of caving including overhangs in the goaf behind Shield with reference to
face advance positions shall also be observed and plotted
(d) Details about percentage of healthy, partially functional and non-functional leg circuits
(e) Comments on adequacy of powered supports under the prevailing geo-mining condition
ROLE OF CIMFR IN STRATA AND SUPPORT BEHAVIOUR MONITORING
CIMFR as a scientific organization is often involved by the mine managements to conduct detailed
strata and support monitoring studies which include preparation of comprehensive monitoring
scheme and instrumentation plan, installation of strata and support monitoring instruments, data collection and analysis. The details are given below.
Monitoring Scheme
The following scheme is used for monitoring of longwall workings:
1. Load on supports at the face and at By means of regular observation of pressure in the leg
gate roads during normal and circuits with the help of pressure gauge fitted in each
weighting periods
leg circuits of powered supports and load cells in props
of gate roads.
2. Convergence during normal and By means of telescopic and remote type convergence
weighting periods at the face and in indicators
gate roads
3. Coal pillar stress/ Abutment stress
By means of stress meters
4. Pillar strain during normal and By means of strain bars
weighting periods
5. Bed separation in immediate roof at By means of wire type/tell-tale extensometers
gate roads
6. Measurement of roof flaking, cavity Conducted on the basis of visual observation
formation & spalling at the face during normal and weighting periods
Details of Strata Monitoring Instruments
Telescopic convergence indicator is used to measure roof to floor convergence when the area to
be measured is accessible. It consists of telescopic rods made of steel or brass having graduation in
the inner rod. The readings are taken between two reference points in roof and floor vertically located in the gate roads at specific interval.
Suspension type (mechanical spring) convergence indicator are used as strain bars and are
installed in coal pillar and barrier pillars in both main and tailgates. Two rods were grouted in the coal
seam horizontally up to a depth of 1.5 to 2.0 m with one rod vertically below the other at spacing of
around 1.5m. The compressional strain in the coal seam due to abutment loading is reflected by the
change in the vertical distance between the two rods. This change in distance is accurately measured with the vernier caliper.
220
POSTALE 2008
Remote convergence indicator is used to measure convergence between roof and floor in mines. In this system a resistance or a vibrating wire displacement sensor is used to measure the convergence in mm. It is specially used to get the information about the convergence of the inaccessible point i.e. when the observation
station moves inside the goaf and application of the telescopic convergence indicator becomes difficult. Convergence measurement during normal and weighting periods at the face is mainly done by RCI.
Load cells are used to estimate the load being experienced by the applied support in and around
the underground workings. In longwall panels, load on individual supports installed at the gate roads,
are monitored by using mechanical or vibrating wire type load cells.
Stress meters are quite valuable instrument to assess the mining induced stress over the natural
supports in and around the excavation. The instrument may be used to assess the front abutment
stress ahead of the face and side abutment in the barriers. It mainly consists of vibrating wire sensors.
Multipoint borehole extensometer is installed in overlying roof to measure the separation of layers
during extraction of coal. It is used to assess the horizon from where the bed separation is taking
place. It is always advisable to install this instrument in a downward hole because this instrument
faces extreme difficult situation if installed in a vertically upward bore hole. The bed separation starts
from the lower horizon so the sensor installed for the instrument gets disturbed only during first roof
fall. These instruments are mainly grouted rod type, magnetic ring type or wire type.
Wire type or tell-tale extensometers are available for use in a variety of hole sizes 27-55mm diameter. It continuously monitors roof movements and its readings differentiate between safe and
unsafe strata conditions. It monitors strata movement up to 6m above the gallery roof. It is installed
at every junction of roadways and at areas of known or suspected instability / geological abnormality.
Movement of each indicator relative to the reference (bottom of tube) represents the strata expansion between the roof and the relevant spring anchor.
Tentative Instrumentation Plan
The instrumentation plan adopted for strata monitoring in longwall panels is shown in figure1.
870mm
850mm
800m
750mm
Barrier Pillar
Tail Gate
F
A
C
E
R
E
T
R
E
A
T
Main Gate
Not to scale
Legends
Load cells
Telescopic convergence indicators
Fig. 1: Instrumentation Plan For
Tell tale extensometers
Strata Monitoring In Longwall Workings
Strain gauges
Stress capsules
CASE STUDY
221
G
O
A
F
POSTALE 2008
CIMFR has conducted a scientific study of strata behaviour while extracting longwall panel 3A at
GDK 10A Project, RG II area, Singareni Collieries Company Ltd. entrusted. The panel under study
lies in Seam I at an average depth of 323 m.
Panel Description
Table 1 shows a brief outline of the geo-mining condition prevailing at the longwall face under study
and also the specifications of the powered supports.
Table 1 : Geo-Mining Parameters Of The Longwall Panel
Length of the face
Length of the Panel
Depth of the Seam
Seam Thickness
Height of extraction
Gradient of the Seam
Degree of gassiness
Nature of the immediate
roof
Nature of immediate floor
Overlying & underlying
workings
160m
1020m
323m (average)
6.5m
3.3m
1 in 6
Degree-I
Coal with a clay band (30
cm)
Grey sand stone
not present
Support parameters
Makes
MECO International
Capacity & Type
4*800T IFS shield
Number
108
Yield pressure
400 bar
Setting Pressure
300 bar
Canopy Length
4.50 m
Open Height
3.60 m
Closed height
Web depth
1.65 m
0.85 m
Observations
(a) Pressure Survey in Leg Circuits
The pressure developed in the individual leg circuits of powered supports were monitored daily with
the help of pressure gauges fitted to leg circuits. There is one gauge each for the front legs and the
rear legs. For better understanding of the distribution of the load at the face, the longwall face has
been divided in the following five zones with powered support numbers-Zone1 - 1 to 21; Zone2 - 22
to 42; Zone3 - 43 to 66; Zone4 - 67 to 87 and Zone5 - 88 to 108.
Load on supports at different zones and average load on front and rear leg at mid zone are on different dates in the Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2. Some of the periodic falls as observed in the mines have
been correlated with the increase of the loads at zone2, zone3 and zone4. The bleeding of the supports was mostly observed in the zone3 i.e. the mid zone during the weighting periods, and it increases with the stoppages and idle face.
During most of the weighting periods, the face advance was sluggish and the intensity and duration
of the weighting increased. The average load on the front legs is more than that of the rear legs during most of the observed periodic weightings. This indicates that the load on the support is shifted
towards the face during the periodic weightings. This is mainly due to the presence of coal in the
immediate roof which gets fractured above the rear portion of the canopy. To overcome this situation, i.e. to shift the load behind the supports, it is recommended to give full setting to the front legs.
This will minimize exposed unsupported spans ahead of the supports. If the unsupported span increases, the cavity formation between the face and the support and spalling of coal increases during
the weighting periods.
(b) Local falls/Main fall/Periodic falls
The main fall was observed on 26th Feb 2007 in the goaf at face position of 62.7 m. Before the main
fall two major local falls were observed in the goaf at the face position of 41.7 m and 56.1 m. The
periodic falls as observed in the goaf are given in Table 2. Depending on the intensity of the falls
some of the periodic falls are classified as major e.g. 7th, 11th, 13th etc. The major periodic falls are
222
POSTALE 2008
caused by the upper main roof which is significantly thick compared to the immediate and main roof.
The majority of the periodic falls occurred after 10m to 22.5m face advance. The average periodic
fall span was 16m. The interval of major periodic fall was around 55m which occurred after every 3rd
or 4th periodic fall.
(c) Gate road convergence
The convergence with the advance of the face was monitored in tail gate with the help of telescopic
convergence indicator. The convergence stations were fixed at an interval of 5m. The cumulative
convergences for one of the stations in TG with distance from the face are plotted in figure 3.1. The
maximum cumulative convergence observed in TG, when convergence stations were just within 5m
from the face is plotted in figure 3.2. The maximum cumulative convergence recorded was 154 mm
when the face was approaching 725m. The average cumulative convergence within 5 m of the face
was 108.5mm.
(d) Strain bar in coal pillars
Strain bars were installed in coal pillar in both main and tail gates. Two rods were grouted in the coal
seam horizontally up to a depth of 1.5 to 2.0 m with one rod vertically below the other at spacing of
around 1.5m. The compressional strain in the coal seam due to abutment loading is reflected by the
change in the vertical distance between the two rods. This change in the distance is accurately
measured with the help of vernier caliper. The strain l/l (mm/m) for some of the strain bars was
determined for the coal pillar in MG and TG. The strain bar observations at one of the locations are
plotted in the figure 4.1. The maximum cumulative strain observed, when the strain bars were just
within 5m from the face is plotted in figure 4.2. The maximum cumulative strain recorded was 8.84
mm/m when the face was approaching 850m in TG. The average cumulative strain within 5m of the
face was 5.48 mm/m. When the strain bar approached near to the face, the observations showed
that the coal pillars upto a depth of 1.5m got fractured and the strain bars got disturbed.
(e) Stress in coal pillar ahead of face
To monitor the stress induced in the coal pillar, ahead of the face due to coal extraction, the capsules were installed in 38mm diameter borehole drilled at the mid height of the pillar upto depths of
5m and 10m. The observations of the stress capsules are plotted in figure 5.1. The maximum cumulative stress recorded was 108.42 kg/cm2 when the face was approaching 850.5m in the TG side.
The maximum cumulative stress observed in TG and MG, when the capsules were just within 5m
from the face is plotted in figure 5.2. The average cumulative stress within 5m of the face was 53.80
kg/cm2.
223
Fig. 2.2 : Variation Of Average Load In Front And Rear Legs At Zone 3, On Different Dates
Rear
330
310
290
270
250
1/25/2008
1/24/2008
1/23/2008
1/22/2008
1/28/2008
1/27/2008
350
1/28/2008
370
1/26/2008
Fig. 2.1 : Load On Supports At Zone 2, Zone 3, And Zone 4 On Different Dates
1/27/2008
1/26/2008
1/25/2008
1/24/2008
1/23/2008
1/21/2008
1/20/2008
1/19/2008
1/18/2008
1/17/2008
1/16/2008
1/15/2008
1/14/2008
1/13/2008
1/12/2008
Periodic fall 3
1/22/2008
1/21/2008
1/20/2008
1/19/2008
1/18/2008
1/17/2008
1/16/2008
Front
1/15/2008
1/14/2008
1/13/2008
1/11/2008
Periodic fall 2
1/12/2008
1/10/2008
1/9/2008
1/8/2008
1/7/2008
Zone2
1/11/2008
1/10/2008
1/9/2008
1/8/2008
1/6/2008
1/5/2008
1/4/2008
1/3/2008
Zone3
1/7/2008
1/6/2008
1/5/2008
1/4/2008
1/2/2008
750
1/3/2008
1/1/2008
12/31/2007
12/30/2007
12/29/2007
12/28/2007
12/27/2007
12/26/2007
12/25/2007
12/24/2007
Load, tons
Periodic fall 1
1/2/2008
1/1/2008
12/31/2007
12/30/2007
12/29/2007
12/28/2007
12/27/2007
12/26/2007
12/25/2007
12/24/2007
Load, tons

POSTALE 2008
Zone4
700
Periodic fall 4
650
600
550
500
POSTALE 2008
Table 2 : Fall details at different gate position on different dates

Date
6-Feb-07
7-Feb-07
20-Feb-07
24-Feb-07
26-Feb-07
3-Mar-07
6-Mar-07
13-Mar-07
18-Mar-07
25-Mar-07
3-Apr-07
11-Apr-07
19-Apr-07
25-Apr-07
5-May-07
10-May-07
13-May-07
22-May-07
30-May-07
3-Jun-07
12-Jun-07
18-Jun-07
24-Jun-07
25-Jun-07
28-Jun-07
4-Jul-07
9-Jul-07
15-Jul-07
18-Jul-07
29-Jul-07
3-Aug-07
7-Aug-07
18-Aug-07
31-Aug-07
7-Sep-07
12-Sep-07
22-Sep-07
26-Sep-07
1-Oct-07
7-Oct-07
11-Oct-07
18-Oct-07
28-Oct-07
3-Nov-07
8-Nov-07
17-Nov-07
22-Nov-07
26-Nov-07
27-Dec-07
3-Jan-08
13-Jan-08
22-Jan-08
1-Feb-08
12-Feb-08
23-Feb-08
2-Mar-08
MG Position, m
12.5
15.2
48.2
61
67.8
77.8
86.4
101.8
119.8
144.4
163.8
180
195.3
211
222.8
231.7
239.7
261
276
287.6
307
321.5
332.2
336.2
348
364.5
375.6
385.8
392.3
415.5
429
439.6
458.5
471.5
489
509
535.2
543
556.5
567.3
579.7
600.7
616
626.7
640.7
657.6
671
681
742.6
760
781.7
802.5
824.3
848
869
884.8
TG Position, m
9.5
11.4
35.2
51.2
57.6
70
77.7
92.4
109.9
128.1
145
163.7
179.8
196.5
209.2
217.9
226
247
259.7
272
292.7
306.5
316.5
320.5
331.6
347
359.5
370.8
379.3
395.1
411
424.1
447.2
460.5
476.5
493
522.5
533.5
547.8
558
564.2
582.9
600.5
615.2
628.4
649
661
671
728.1
746.8
769.8
789.4
811.4
829.2
848.5
863.8
Av. Face, m
11
13.3
41.7
56.1
62.7
73.9
82.05
97.1
114.85
136.25
154.4
171.85
187.55
203.75
216
224.8
232.85
254
267.85
279.8
299.85
314
324.35
328.35
339.8
355.75
367.55
378.3
385.8
405.3
420
431.85
452.85
466
482.75
501
528.85
538.25
552.15
562.65
571.95
591.8
608.5
620.95
634.55
653.3
666
676
735.35
753.4
775.75
795.95
817.85
838.6
858.75
874.3
Fall
Local fall
Local fall
Major Local fall
Major Local fall
Main weight
1-periodic weighting
4
5
6
7-Major
8
9
10
11-Major
12
13-major
14
15
16
17-Major
18
19
20
21
22-Major
23
24
25-Major
26
27
28-Major
29
30
31-Major
32
33-Major
34
35
36-Major
37
38
39
40-Major
41
42
43-Major
46
47
48-Major
49
50
51
52-Major
53
POSTALE 2008
Distance from face, m

30 25 20 15 10 5
Maximum convergence in TG within 5m from face
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Conv_TG_695m
Convergence, mm
35
Convergence, mm
40
55
50
45
40

35
30
25
20
max. conv., mm
805 785 775 765 755 745 735 725 715 705 695 675
Location of conv. station
Fig. 3.1: Variation In Cumulative Convergence

With Distance From Face
60
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
Fig. 3.2 : Maximum Convergence In TG Within

5m From The Face
Maxim um strain in TG and MG within 5m from face
15
10
10
9
Maximum strain, mm/m
0
2
3
4
5
Strain_TG_750m
S train, m m /m
max. strain, mm /m
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MG-800
MG-850
Fig. 4.1 : Variation In Cumulative Strain In Coal

Pillar With Distance From Face
150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50

40
30
20
10
TG-750
TG-800
TG-850
Maximum stress in MG and TG within 5m of face

120
Cummulative stress, kg/cm2
stress_MG_870.5m depth 10m
MG-870
Fig. 4.2 : Maximum Strain In Coal Pillar Within

5m From The Face
v e rtic a l s tre s s , k g /c m 2
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
MG-860
Location of strain bars
max. cum. stress, kg/cm2
100
80
60
40
20
0
TG-850
TG-850.5
TG-870
TG-870.5
MG-850
MG-850.5
MG-870
Location of stress capsule
Fig. 5.1 : Variation In Cumulative Stress In Coal

Pillar With Distance From Face
Fig. 5.2 : Maximum Stress In Coal Pillar

Within 5m From The Face
(f) Bed Separation in immediate roof at gate road

Three numbers of tell tale extensometers were installed at the tail gate and two in the main gate of
the panel. A convergence station was also installed adjacent to each tell tale to estimate the relative
movements of the overlying immediate rock beds. The details of the tell tales are given in the table 3.
The observation of the tell tale extensometer at 850m is plotted in figure 6. The results indicate that
there exist a major parting plane between 2m and 3m above the roof in both tail gate in which the
separation has been found to be maximum.
226
POSTALE 2008
Table 3 : Details of tell tale extensometers used at different locations in panel 3A

Identification
no.
TAIL GATE
TG-750
TG-800
TG-850
MAIN GATE
MG-753
MG-801
Location
from barrier, m
Date of installation
750
800
850
11-12-07
11-12-07
11-12-07
694.2
694.2
694.2
4.0
4.0
4.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
--1.0
753
801
19-12-07
11-12-07
726.2
705.4
3.6
4.0
2.5
2.5
1.0
1.0
---
Position of the anchors above the

roof, m
A1
A2
A3
A4
Face
Position
20 Feb,9.4m
18 Feb,11.8m
16 Feb,11.8m
14 Feb,15.3m
12 Feb,20.8m
10 Feb,25.6m
8 Feb,30.4m
6 Feb,31.8m
4 Feb,35.6m
2 Feb,38.6m
31 Jan,43.8m
29 Jan,50.2m
27 Jan,52.7m
25 Jan,55.3m
Date, Distance from face
5
10
15
Fall
Parting 4m-3m
Parting 3m-2m
Parting 2m-0m
20
Fall
25
Bed Separation, mm
30
Fig 6 : Bed Separation In The Immediate Roof With Distance From Face At 850m
CONCLUSIONS
Strata monitoring of the longwall face and at the gate roads provides an insight to the caving pattern
of the overlying strata and adequacy of the support at the face. It gives us the main fall and periodic
weighting span which determines the category of the roof and whether any hard roof management
programme has to be carried out or not. It provides detailed information regarding the caving height
and overhang of the strong beds responsible for the load on the supports during the weighting periods. Further, it gives the idea of the loading pattern on the supports and convergence rates to understand the intensity and dynamism of the weightings observed at the face. On the basis of this
type of study, if any abnormal strata behaviour at longwall face is observed, remedial measures can
be undertaken before any catastrophic failure occurs at the face. Such programme must be undertaken by the mine management with the help and guidance from experts from scientific organisation.
227
POSTALE 2008
ROCK MASS CLASSIFICATION APPLIED IN INDIAN UNDERGROUND

COAL MINES A LEGISLATIVE NEED AND SCOPE FOR UP-GRADATION
NIRAJ KUMAR, PRAMOD KUMAR, A. PAUL, AJOY KUMAR SINGH AND A. SINHA
INTRODUCTION
According to the D.G.M.S. (Tech.) (Sapicom) Circular No. 3/1993, the assessment of support requirement should be done on the basis of Geo-mechanics classification approach, as recommended
for particular geo-mining condition. Whenever changes are proposed in roadway dimensions or
methods of working, or where geo-technical conditions change, further design verification by fresh
RMR (Rock Mass Rating) studies needs to be carried out to assess the continued validity of the design. This circular is under the heading of Design of roof bolting system, which may or may not be
the sole support system in a coal mine but an important constituent of overall support as being primary support.
The geo-mechanics classifications or engineering classification which have developed on the basis
of experiences of past is one of the most applied design methodology all over the world instead of
two other methods like analytical method and observational method because of their limitations either complex stress investigation or much time taking process. So in compare to those the empirical
approach owes advantage as a few laboratory tests and simple geo-logical mapping is done in field.
Since its inception, CMRI-ISM classification is being applied in any roadways/panel/district opened in
underground coal mining by Bord-&-Pillar method and found reliable as there is a no system presently in our country to get a feed back of experiences gained by mining personnel to the research
industry and vice-versa. In this circumstance RMR only helps in framing of systematic support rule
(SSR) that too needed for a look to the cost effectiveness as it may be over-support to the immediate
roof. Moreover under the impression of DGMS circular every coal mines is opting for RMR determination without considering the actual purpose, which meant to a scientific input in designing of roof
support with cost effectiveness. However, the RMR gives the qualitative aspect of immediate roof in
quantitative numbers for the calculation of rock load and consequently the support design for safe
extraction of coal in development panel. Monitoring of performance of support during different stages
of mining is the next course of action, which is always not taken care of.
The effectiveness of any support design based on a geo-mechanics approach is measured with the
stability of immediate roof strata and if we look at the accident statistics of last two and half decades,
there is reduction in trend not very appreciable that is from 0.36 to 0.30 and further 0.27, but still revolves around this constant figure. More awakening facts is that fall of roof have 25% share out of
total accident in coal mines in India in last 10 years.
CMRI-ISM CLASSIFICATION
As Indian strata conditions are different from the other coal mining countries, a suitable engineering
classification was developed jointly by CIMFR (erstwhile CMRS/CMRI) and ISMU (erstwhile ISM). It
was recognised that in most of the Indian coal mines bedding planes, structural features and weathering of rocks, in that order, are the major causes of roof failure. Hence these three parameters are
taken in that very order and other two parameters unconfined compressive strength and ground water condition were covered up the maximum important features of immediate roof rock.
Rock Mass Rating (RMR) determined by CMRI Geomechanical Classification System is the
summation of the ratings of five individual parameters as listed below:
POSTALE 2008
Parameter
Layer Thickness
Structural Features
Weatherability (1st cycle slake durability index)
Compressive Strength
Groundwater Condition
Maximum Rating
30
25
20
15
10
RMR so determined is further adjusted for various geo-mining conditions, viz. depth, lateral stress,
influence of adjacent and overlying workings, and mode of drivage (solid blasting/blasting with undercut/mechanical drivage).
Adjusted RMR is used for estimation of Rock Load at galleries and junctions from the following equations:
Rock load in gallery (t/m2) = B.D.(1.7 - 0.037 RMR + 0.0002RMR2).......... (1)
Rock load at junction (t/m2) = 5.B0.3.D. (1 - RMR/100)2
.......... (2)
Where, RMR = Rock Mass Rating, B = Roadway width (m) and D = Dry density (t/m3).
Major gains
Experiences so far confirmed the application of the classification and the effectiveness of the support
system. In this way, this study has provided a sound base for support selection, thus fulfilling a long
felt need for a scientific approach to roof-support interaction.
Among the different support being practice earlier all were standing support lacking the properties of
active support and allows the movement of immediate roof. So in passive no load is applied but develops its loading strength as the rock mass deforms, consequently the deterioration of initial two
hours, which is maximum can not be arrested. With this understanding the expert group were very
emphatic to extended use of roof bolting as a method of support making it an integral part of mining
system.
Hence the roof bolting technology, which mobilize the inherent strength of the rock, become a regular practice as soon as opening is created catering the purpose of primary support. This practice got
further up gradation by replacement of quick set in-organic grouting material to the cement grout
material, reducing the setting time to half an hour from a day and at present many mines has applied
resin grout for a setting time of a few minutes.
Short-coming/Lacuna of CMRI-ISM Classification
In spite of adjustment to the lateral stresses and their classification on qualitative basis like small
(10%), moderate (20%) and high (30%) reduction of RMR is purely an idea of no scientific base. The
other geological important characteristic namely discontinuities with respect to orientation of the gallery are not considered in CMRI-ISM classification. The other important features that is clay bands
are not given proper recognition. Its vitality in spoiling the whole exercise of rock mass rating calculation can be understand by taking following case study of a running coal mine, where development
with bolts/conventional supports was done and roof falls occurred bringing down the entire clay layer
of 1.8m.
What rating can be given to clay bed? Zero would be the proper value whatever be the thickness of
clay bed. The rock load height without doing much of calculation can be taken up to the end of clay
horizon. Further the rock load calculated of to the end of clay horizon would not be of much help
mostly since there are certain properties associated with clay making difficult to mines since with
clay bed in the roof horizon. This is the situation particularly where blasting is done to win coal and
also when a hole is drilled into the clay bed. The clay horizon has been playing havoc in Godavari
valley coal field in securing stability of roadways.
229
POSTALE 2008
Para
meters
SDI
CS
Coal
Value
Rating
5cm
9
2 Jn sets (6),
7
Slips (7)
98%
16
2
250Kg/cm
6
Shale/Clay
Value
Rating
20cm
21
Minor slips
15
only
< 30%
0
2
30Kg/cm
0
GWC
Dry
10
Dry
CMRI-ISM RMR
48
LT
SI
10
46
2.4m
working
section
G.S.S
1.8m clay
0.2m carb. Shale
4.0m Coal
G.S.S.
LT = Layer thickness, SI = Structural index, SDI = Slake durability

Index, CS = Compressive strength, GWC=Ground Water Condition
Combined RMR = (1.6x48+2.0x 46)/(1.6+2.0) = 47. This means roof strata is fair but in reality its
outcome in the sense of stable roof after support is not observed.
Another parameter weathering is an important factor in roadway/drift support. When a mine roadway
is more or less dry, the slaking index becomes meaningless and introduces a bias in the classification of CMRI-RMR.
Apart from these considered parameters there is no consideration of cavability of immediate roof
particularly in case of incompetent strata.
Limitation of CMRI-ISM Classification
The CMRI-ISM classification hold great potential for use in Indian coal mines under a wide range of
conditions. However, its limitations are that 1) it has not been tried for virgin areas and 2) the rock
load estimations in presence of stresses of large magnitude are subjected to verification.
The other limitation of this classification is that it is applicable only in development districts in Indian
underground coal mines for maximum roadway width of 4.8 m. Therefore, during depillaring the Qsystem is being applied, which is meant for jointed rock giving a doubt of under-support design since
maximum roof fall occurs while depillaring of panel.
In the present scenario of gap between demand and supply of coal mineral, that is expected to reach
51mt in 2011-12 and to breach this gap, mass production technology, consisting continuous miners,
shuttle car etc. is on card, the roadway width is required to 6.0m for easy maneuverability of machine
making the CMRI-ISM classification inapplicable.
However, the DGMS circular for a roadway width ranging between 4.5-6.0m states that a reduction
of 10-20% to the final CMRI-ISM RMR can serve the purpose in designing of effective support but till
now it has not applied contrasting its practical validity.
Status Of The Strata Monitoring In India?
Safety, technical and economic advantages of supports formulated on the basis of engineering classification have led to the increasing use of monitoring technique worldwide in mines and civil engineering projects. But in India, monitoring is yet to take off. In the absence of monitoring, it is not
known wheather the roof is stable or unstable. The result of not monitoring is falls are taking place in
supported roadways with warning, sometime killing people.
230
POSTALE 2008
Roof bolting as a means of support requires a strong monitoring regime and this was also recommended by the Paul Committee. However, only sporadic anchorage testing has remained the sole
method of monitoring so far. Thus monitoring performance and effectiveness of roof bolts still remain a matter of serious concern.
Also, lack of instrumented case studies is one of the major causes for poor understanding of reinforcement action and its relationship with the rockmass behaviour. Our coal mining professional is
yet to open his mind to monitoring.
Futuristic Strategy
With the outcome of no application in the virgin area and the large stress regime it is proposed to
substantiate the classification results through observational and analytical methods of design. For
accurate estimation of rock loads at great depths and in variable stress situation observational methods can give reliable information about the extent of active stress field around the opening.
Instrumentation of the roof formations and the support systems, and their monitoring, would give a
good indication of the loads exerted by the rock mass. When this information is correlated with the
empirical estimates, more dependable design criteria for high stress conditions could be developed.
Now a days very reliable and sophisticated numerical modelling tools are available for simulation of
ground conditions and can be used to study the effect of uniformly stress field in bedded strata of
uniform thickness exhibiting somewhat homogeneous physical character over the support planned to
install.
CONCLUSION
The expert group did excellent work and gave purposeful suggestions. Keeping techno-economics
and present methods of underground exploitation, the factor of safety concept needs to be more
comprehensive so that a desirable value will constrain the cost factor during over-support.
The CMRI-ISM geomechanics system can be effectively applied only when adequate roof exposure
is available, in many cases mines have to proceed with an ad-hoc support system till adequate exposure is available for determination of RMR.
Different geological features are frequently associated with instability of strata in Indian coal mines.
CMRI-ISM rockmass classification systems discussed here is used for evaluation of ground condition and stability of strata. These systems provide guidelines for selection of suitable support and
precautionary measures. However, some site-specific situations may arise when very complex geological structures give rise to ground control problems which cannot be well defined by the classification systems. Under such conditions precautionary measures should be adopted using engineering
judgment
The research activities carried out by CMRI on support design and experimentation are significant
but there are still challenges and problems, which require intensive research work. Mutual cooperation is needed between CMRI and mining industry for further development of support system for improving safety and productivity.
REFERENCE
1. Report of the Expert Group (Paul Committee): Guidelines for drawing up support plans in Bord-&-Pillar working in coal mines
(May 1990).
2. Prasad S. D. & Rakesh, , Legislation in Indian mines: A Critical Appraisal 1992,Vol. 1, pp. 427-449.
3. Kaku, L.C., 2001, DGMS Circular.
4. CMRI Report on Geomechanical Classification of coal measure roof rocks vis--vis roof support (March 1987).
5. Murthy, N.B.K., Rock Bolting: Effective Tool for Strata Management, July 2002, pp. 54-59.
231
POSTALE 2008
DESIGN AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS OF FLAMEPROOF ELECTRICAL

EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN COALMINES OF INDIA
R.K. VISHWAKARMA, A.K. SINGH, B. AHIRWAL,
ARVIND KUMAR, NAVIN KUMAR AND H.K. MONDAL
INTRODUCTION
Methane emits while coal is extracted from a mine, and the mixture of methane with air is explosive
and has caused large number of explosions killing thousands of persons in underground mines.
Similarly, during drilling and subsequent refining, gases emit and form explosive mixture with air.
Therefore, in such explosive environment special type of electrical enclosures which are commonly
known as flameproof or explosion proof enclosures are employed.
The role of Flameproof or Explosion proof equipment (Ex Equipment) in safe operation of industries,
where explosive gases, dusts, chemicals, vapors and fumes are present, is well known. These
equipment are used in industries like oil refineries, petrochemical, underground coalmines, pharmaceuticals industries, gas-bottling plant etc. Testing and certification of such equipment are required to
conform their design to relevant standards.
PARAMETERS OF EXPLOSIONPROOF EQUIPMENT
(1) Gas Group
The gas present in the explosive area can be one of the four gas groups Gas Gr. I and Gas Gr. IIA,
IIB or IIC. Based on the gas group the equipment is tested for a particular gas-air mixture. Following
are the representative gases for all four gas groups:
Table 1 : Gas groups and percentage mixture of gas in air for flameproof tests in explosive
atmosphere
Gas
group
Representative
gas
Percentage in air for non- transmission of internal ignition test
Percentage in air for reference pressure test
I
IIA
Methane
Propane
Ethylene
Or Methane +
Hydrogen
Hydrogen &
Acetylene
12.50.5% [CH4:H2::58:42]
4.2% Propane OR 550.5% H2
9.80.5% CH4
4.60.3% Propane
37% Hydrogen
80.5% Ethylene OR
241% [CH4:H2::15:85]
27.51.5% H2 AND
7.51% Acetylene
311% H2 AND
141% Acetylene
IIB
IIC
(2) Flamepath And Gaps

The length between two meeting surfaces (e.g. body & cover) in a flameproof enclosure is known as
flamepath. The space left between these two surfaces after assembling is called gap. Unit of flamepath and gap is mm. The flamepath of a joint works as a heat sink for the hot combused gas (flame)
traveled through it.
Following are the flamepath and gap requirements for the explosionproof equipment designed as per
Gas Gr. I, IIA & IIB requirements as per Indian standard IS: 2148-2004 according to their volume and
gas group:
POSTALE 2008
Table 2 : Minimum width of joint and maximum gap for enclosures of Groups I, IIA & IIB
Cylindrical joints for shaft Flanged, cylinglands of rotating electri- drical or spigod
joints
Rolling ele- Sleeve bearment bearings
Type of
Joint
Mini. Width
of joint
L mm
Maximum Gap mm
3
6
9.5
12.5
25
6
9.5
12.5
25
40
6
9.5
12.5
25
40
For volume (cm )

V 100
I
IIA
IIB
For volume (cm )

100 < V 500
I
IIA
IIB
For volume (cm )

500 < V 2 000
I
IIA
IIB
For volume (cm )

V > 2 000
I
IIA
IIB
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.50
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.45
0.50
0.60
0.75
0.80
0.35
0.40
0.50
0.35
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.50
0.60
0.75
0.80
0.40
0.50
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.60
0.75
0.80
0.40
0.50
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.60
0.75
0.80
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.50
0.45
0.45
0.50
0.60
0.75
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.40
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.60
0.30
0.30
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.40
0.45
0.60
0.75
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.25
0.30
0.40
0.45
0.30
0.40
0.40
0.50
0.50
0.45
0.60
0.75
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.30
0.40
0.45
0.20
0.40
0.20
0.40
0.50
0.30
0.60
0.75
0.15
0.20
0.20
0.25
0.20
0.30
0.40
(3) Threaded Length

Threaded joint is commonly used for cable entries, enclosure with plain covers and small flameproof
boxes. The length of threaded flameproof joint is minimum 8 mm for enclosures having volume
greater than 100cc. The min. no. of threads engaged is 5nos. and pitch size may be between 0.7
mm & 2 mm for parallel threads and at least 0.9mm pitch size for tapered threads with provision of
min. 6no. full threads.
(4) Material Of Construction
The equipment used in Gr. II applications can be made of cast aluminium alloy material and LM6 is
the common light alloy due to its lightness, rust free properties. It is also cheaper than metals. But
coalmines restrict its use due to more mechanical abrupt conditions in the underground mines. In
Gas Gr. I, light aluminium alloy can only be permitted if Aluminium, Magnesium and Titanium in totality are not more than 15% by mass and Magnesium and Titanium in total are not more than 6% by
mass. Gr. II allows use of Light Aluminium Alloy if Magnesium does not exceed 7.5% in total composition by mass. The composition of LM6 is given here for reference (as per IS-617-1994):
Table 3 : Composition of Aluminium Alloy LM6
Copper
Titanium
Tin
Iron
Nickel
Silicon
0.1 % (max.)
0.2 % (max.)
Lead
0.06 % (max.)
Magnesium
0.6 % (max.)
Zinc
0.1 % (max.)
Manganese
Aluminium by difference 85% -88%
10 to 13 % (max.)
0.1 % (max.)
7.5% (max.)
0.1 % (max.)
0.5 % (max.)
(5) Mechanical Strength

Strength of enclosure: The flameproof enclosure which envelopes the electrical circuit or components should be able to sustain explosion pressure without transmission of flame through joints. It
should be hydraulically checked for 1.5 times pressure of reference explosion pressure or at 3.5 bar
pressure, whichever is higher for at least one minute. No swelling, damage, deformation or leakage
should be observed. In case of Cast Iron enclosures, the minimum quality of cast iron should be 150.
233
POSTALE 2008
It should be checked for impact energy by dropping a mass of 1kg from a height of 2 meter in case
of Gas Gr. I applications on the surface of cover, bolt heads, cable entries, etc.
Fasteners: The fasteners are used to maintain mechanical integrity of the enclosure and maintain
gap as per requirements. The fasteners or bolts are provided with plain & spring washers to prevent
loosening in service. The minimum yield stress required for these fasteners is 240N/mm2. To prevent
the bolt heads from any mechanical damage in service, shrouding of bolt heads is necessary. Indian
statutory rules does not allow any flameproof apparatus without shrouding provision. Fig. 1 shows a
bolt head shrouded from three sides.
Fig. 1 : A Bolt Head Shrouded From Three Sides

Inspection windows & light transmitting parts: Glass is used for inspection of internal component
like voltmeter, ammeter etc. Similarly round or dome shaped glass is used for Floodlight or Wellglass
lighting fittings. The glass part is to be fixed with cementing compound like epoxy resin from inside
only and further supported by the glass retaining ring or plate. The glass cement should not loose its
properties in the entire range of service temperature. The glass part should be heat and impact resistant and of toughened quality. It may be provided with wireguard of max. mess size 50x50 sq mm.
The minimum impact energy for use in coalmines is 7J for glass parts provided without guard.
Cable entries: The electrical wires / cables connected to the apparatus is fitted using double compression flameproof cable glands. A cable gland may be tested and certified flameproof separately. It
should sustain cable pullout test & torque test. The impact test is also required for the cable gland
after fitting to the enclosure.
Terminal box: Cables or wires are terminated separately into a separate enclosure known as Terminal box. The flameproof motors in additionally consists of a cable sealing box to seal the cable into
it before termination into terminal box. A typical diagram of a sealing box is given here in Fig. 2. The
face of the cable sealing box connected to the terminal box forms flameproof joint. The sealing box
does not allow flame transmission through it when it is sealed with sealing compound or epoxy resin
after passing cables. The cable sealing box is hydraulically tested for leakage at 20kg/cm2 pressure
for Gr. I applications and 30 kg/cm2 pressure for Gr. II applications. Indian statutory rules does not
allow a motor without cable sealing box for use in Gr.-I applications. The cable sealing gives more
mechanical strength to the cable.
TESTS FOR A FLAMEPROOF APPARATUS
(i) Design evaluation and Physical examination : A flameproof or Explosion proof enclosure is
strong enough to sustain explosion pressure developed inside and prevent flame transmission from
inside to outer explosive environment. Flame path requirement between metal to metal and metal to
non metal should comply to IS: 2148 2004. Non-metal to non-metal flame path is not permitted.
External connection to the apparatus should normally be indirect i.e. through an integral terminal box
or non integral terminal box. Cable entry devices like compression type of cable glands should be
234
POSTALE 2008
independently explosion proof. Flame should not travel through the gap between non metallic cable
sheath and neoprene ring being used for compression. The cable entry threaded flame path formed
between enclosure wall and the nipple of the gland should comply with the standard. The wall thickness should be adequate to withstand explosion pressure. Glass window and the glass cover in case
of light fittings should be toughened and adequately sealed to the metal housing to prevent the flame
to pass through. All separate housing pertaining to an apparatus should be independently flameproof
i.e. explosion should not travel from one enclosure to other through cable entry devices.
Fig. 2 : Cable Sealing Box Attached With Motor Terminal Enclosure

(ii) Determination of Explosion Pressure : The tests consist of igniting an explosive mixture inside
the enclosure and measure the pressure reference pressure caused by explosion. The enclosure
should be tested with all the internal apparatus.
The development of pressure during the explosion and the pressure rise time should be measured
and recorded during each test. The highest of the maximum smoothed pressure obtained in these
tests shall be taken as reference pressure. The test may be repeated with the point of ignition and
the point at which the pressure is recorded in different positions and if necessary, the composition of
the mixture may be varied to find the combination, which produces the maximum pressure. Motors
should be tested both in the running condition without load and in the stationery condition. Fig. 3
shows explosion pressure vs time graph for a junction box for IIB area.
6.3bar, 9.8ms
Fig. 3 : Explosion Pressure Vs Time Graph For A Junction Box For IIB Area
235
POSTALE 2008
(iii) Over Pressure Test: The enclosure should be submitted to a static pressure test, such that the
applied pressure is equal to 1.5 times the reference pressure or 3.5bar, whichever is maximum.
(iv) External Ignition Test: The enclosure should be placed in an explosion chamber. The test
should be made with the same flammable mixture inside the enclosure and in the explosion chamber. The mixture inside the enclosure should be ignited by spark plug. The test is considered to be
satisfactory, if the mixture present in the explosion chamber is not ignited. After the test, the mixture
in the chamber is deliberately ignited to confirm that outside atmosphere of the equipment is hazardous. At least five tests should be made. The mixture in the enclosure and if necessary, in the explosion chamber, being renewed for each.
(v) Surface temperature classification: The electrical equipment due to resistance of conductors
and light fittings due to radiation of intense light get heated. The surface temperature of the body or
glass part should not cross ignition temperature of the explosive atmosphere present in the surrounding. The temperature classification of a flameproof motor is conducted by running it at rated
voltage and rated current. The maximum surface temperature observed at any location after equilibrium is considered for T-classification. The temperature class and maximum respective temperature
is given here for reference.
Table 4 : Temperature Class And Corresponding Maximum Temperature
T-class
T6
T5
T4
T3
T2
T1
Maximum surface temperature in 0C

85
100
135
200
300
450
(vi) Test for Non-Incendivity of Light Alloy: The sample of light alloy (LM-6) is dropped vertically
along with a brass weight (16 Kg.) from a height of 4 m on the rusty steel plate inclined at an angle of
45o. At this angle the surface condition of target plate on which the impact is made has much influence on the incendivity of the sparking. The explosion chamber contains 21% hydrogen in air mixture for Gr. IIB atmosphere. A photograph of Frictional Incendivity Test Setup is shown in Fig. 4.
Fig. 4 : Frictional Incendivity Test Setup
236
POSTALE 2008
An alloy is called light alloy if it contains a light metal like aluminium, magnesium or titanium at least
5.0% in atomic proportions. When the light alloy strikes with an inclined rusty surface due to higher
friction the light metals can give exothermic reaction and can cause explosion of the gas-air mixture.
(vii) Impact test of electrical apparatus: The height of fall for various impact energy requirement
may be estimated from the relationship:
h = E/mg
Where, h = height in meter, E impact energy in Jule, m is mass in kg, and g = 10m/s2.
The impact energy required for Gr. I enclosure is 20J while for Gr. II enclosures it is 7J only. Similarly
for glass parts it is 7J and 4J respectively for use in Gas Gr. I and Gas Gr. II applications.
(vii) Thermal Shock Test: The maximum surface temperature at rated supply is considered for
thermal shock testing of a glass inspection window or well glass fitting. The glass is kept into the
oven at the maximum service temperature for 15 to 20 minutes, and then a water jet of 10 to 150C is
sprayed on it. The glass should not crack or damage during this test.
CONCLUSION
Flameproof or Explosionproof type of protection deals with confinement of explosion inside an enclosure. After harmonization of standards worldwide design parameters of a flameproof equipment does
not vary much. The application of a flameproof equipment in a particular area depends upon the
statutory authority of the country. The motors with sealing box, bolts with shrouding and frictional
incendivity test requirement are essential for coalmines and oil mines of India to avoid site-born accidents.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The authors are grateful to Dr. Amalendu Sinha, Acting Director, Central Institute of Mining and Fuel
Research, Dhanbad for giving his valuable suggestions/advice from time to time as well as for granting necessary permission to present this technical paper in the Seminar. Authors are also thankful to
Shri Manoj Kumar Singh of this department for his help in preparation of final manuscript of this paper.
REFERENCES
1. Singh, A. K. et al. Basics of Explosion, Construction, Testing and Certification of Flameproof Equipment Journal of Indian
Electrical & Electronics Manufacturers Association (IEEMA), Vol. XXVII, No. 2, pp. 110 114, February 2007.
2. Indian Standard - Specification for Dust tight Electric light fittings, IS: 4013 1967.
3. Indian Standard Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres General requirements (First Revision), IS 13346:
2004 [IEC 60079-0 (2000)].
4. Indian Standard Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres Flameproof enclosures Ex d (Third Revision), IS
2148 : 2004 [IEC 60079-1 (2001)].
5. Vishwakarma R.K. et al. Safety Requirements and Selection of Electrical Equipment for Petroleum Drilling Rigs, Proceedings
of International Conference on Present Status and Future Trends in Petroleum Industry (PEGJP 07), Theme: Exploration,
Exploitation & Processing, ISM, Dhanbad, 6-8 Dec. 2007.
237
POSTALE 2008
EVALUATION OF MINE WINDING ROPES AND

THEIR SAFETY USING NDT : A CASE STUDY
DEBASISH BASAK
INTRODUCTION
Magnetic nondestructive evaluation method is being used now-a-days to assess the condition of
stranded and full locked coil ropes used in Mine winders (cage and skip winders). Mine winders are
designed for installation in the vertical and sloping mine shafts. These are used to transfer the load
hoisting vessels with mineral resources and rocks, transportation of men, materials and equipment.
These also help in checking up and inspecting the shaft and handing up or changing the hoisting and
balance ropes. These winders are fitted with all the required protection devices and interlocks that
provide reliable and safe operation of hoisting facilities. They are usually considered the most significant piece of equipment at an underground mine and failure of the mine winder can lead to catastrophic results. Thus safety and maintenance of mine winders are critical to mines operation. At the
same time, it is also required to ensure the safety of the large number of mine workers who travel
through vertical shafts everyday to reach their place of work.
The mine winders may have full locked coil ropes or stranded ropes with independent wire rope core
(IWRC). The core of an IWRC rope is wire, i.e. a metal core. Metal core ropes exhibit better crushing
resistance than fibre core ropes. They have greater resistance to compression or crushing on small
drums and sheaves, have better resistance to operating conditions at high temperatures and greater
ability to withstand shock and impact loads. Besides, they stretch less under load. Ropes with independent wire rope cores (IWRC) have less constructional stretch than those with fibre core. The reason is that the steel cannot compress as much as the fibre core.
ROPE SELECTION
The following things are considered for choosing a winding rope:
Size the diameter of rope,
Type locked coil or stranded (round strand, triangular strand or multi-strand);
Strand construction fewer wires for resistance to wear and corrosion; more wires for
greater flexibility;
Direction and type of lay:

stranded ropes left or right hand; Langs or ordinary;
full locked coil ropes right hand or left hand;
Surface finish ungalvanised or galvanized.

DETERIORATION IN SHAFT ROPES
The main forms of deterioration in shaft ropes are:
Wear Both external and internal wear occurs in all ropes. External wear may take the form of abrasive wear or plastic wear. Internal wear occurs in the rope interior.
Corrosion Corrosion, a major cause of deterioration in shaft ropes, is caused by water spray,
steam, fumes, acids, unsuitable lubricants, chloride solutions etc. Common salt (sodium chloride) is
very corrosive and can appear in solution in strata water seeping into shafts. Corrosion aids the advance of wear by helping to remove steel, just as wear aids the advance of corrosion by removing
the corrosion scale and presenting a fresh surface for further corrosion. External corrosion is in the
form of mild rust or scale. Internal corrosion is dangerous and difficult to detect. Several internal
corrosion cause the loosening of wires by eroding their bearing surfaces in a similar manner to severe internal wear. When corrosion is so severe that the wires can no longer carry their intended
load, they break in tension and develop tension fractures.
POSTALE 2008
Fatigue Fatigue is the progressive deterioration of a rope subjected to repeated loading. If the
rope is repeatedly loaded to 25% of its breaking strength it will probably never break, because the
fatigue strength of rope wire under normal operating conditions is about one-quarter of the breaking
strength of the wire.
Corrosion-fatigue Corrosion fatigue occurs due to a combination of both corrosion and fatigue;
namely repeated loading under corrosive conditions with insufficient lubricant or galvanized coating
to prevent corrosion. There is no corrosion-fatigue limit or level of loading below which rope wire is
safe from corrosion-fatigue.
Surface embrittlement Some ropes may deteriorate as a result of surface embrittlement, either by
heavy pressure or by the rope rubbing heavily against metallic obstructions. Plastic wear will occur
on the outer wires if the rope bears too heavily on some hard surface.
Accidental damage and distortion, leading to local deterioration These are not really forms of
deterioration, but the rope tester/examiner realizes that they may lead to unexpectedly rapid deterioration at the affected part.
NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING (NDT) AND ITS IMPORTANCE
Nondestructive testing (NDT), also referred to as nondestructive examination (NDE) and nondestructive inspection (NDI), is a family of specialized technical inspection methods that provide information
about the condition of materials and components without destroying them. NDT examines actual
production pieces and reveals the presence of flaws, which can be evaluated against accept/reject
criteria. It is one of the major tools of quality control.
The electromagnetic nondestructive test (NDT) is defined to be any test or measurement method for
inspecting or evaluating materials or products which does not adversely affect their serviceability and
which use the effects of electromagnetic induction, electromagnetic fields or varying currents for
probing, measuring or inspecting. Because the tests are non-destructive, 100% inspection can be
made to assure uniform quality of products for critical use.
Evaluation of structural integrity of engineering components is assuming great importance in various
industries for the reasons of safety and economy. Failure of a component is an inherent feature that
depends on age and service environment. Defects, which are the prime-suspect for failures, may
show up earlier to installation stage or they may initiate and grow during normal working of the component. Nondestructive Evaluation (NDE) emphasizes on the detection and quantification of the defects with respect to their size, shape, orientation and location.
Rapid progress in NDT standardization is noted in many countries worldwide. Irrespective of the increasing costs and prices there has been considerable constant growth in NDT application.
The aim of NDE is to detect, characterize and classify the defects/discontinuities which could then be
analyzed further to predict the remaining life of a component and to make remedial and preventive
measures for further operations. Nondestructive examination of a material is analogous to medical
examination of the human body. The most obvious nondestructive test is visual examination and
many refined methods have been developed to give quantitative expression to such inspection.
The non-destructive testing (NDT) of ferromagnetic wire ropes is a specialized operation often involving the use of equipment purpose-designed for particular types of rope. This particularly apples
to locked coil and half locked coil ropes which have a greater density of wires than those in a
stranded rope of the same diameter.
Data are presented in graphical form and indicate the presence of broken wires, internal and external corrosion and wear in a rope. If a rope is severely corroded, the NDT instrument may not detect
internal broken wires.
239
POSTALE 2008
NDT is an aid to visual inspection, but it has the advantage of detecting internal or hidden defects. It
is there useful as a routine periodic condition monitoring test providing data to evaluate the condition
of the rope. Although evaluation of condition of rope can be ascertained from a single test, the main
advantage of NDT is the data collection in periodic monitoring. Comparing data from routine periodic
NDT allows any rope deterioration to be detected at an early stage, and the rate of deterioration can
be assessed during its service life.
It is recommended that an NDT be carried out on the winding rope when first installed in order to
reveal any manufacturing discrepancies, and to provide a database against which the findings of
other tests may be evaluated. The provision of such a condition monitored database is an essential
requirement for permission to use a rope beyond the end of its specified life.
OBJECTIVES OF ROPE EVALUATION USING NDT
Assessment of rope condition either by visual examination or drawing a specimen rope length and
subjecting it to destructive evaluation seldom speaks about integrity of the entire rope length in the
installation. Further, ropes, which are used on winders, cannot be assessed at any cost, due to nonavailability of rope length for destructive investigation. Under these situations, non-destructive
investigation is the only means for its evaluation to study the behavior.
Nondestructive study of ropes in mine winders is essential in promoting safer and more economical
use of steel wire ropes. The objective of the study is to enforce the discard criteria which allow
discarding a rope before its strength has been reduced by 10% from the original breaking strength. It
is necessary to evaluate the winder ropes using nondestructive testing techniques to ensure the
concentricity of the ropes within the test head of the instrument in a regular interval according to
design criteria, regardless of rope orientation and of rope size.
The main objectives for nondestructive evaluation of steel wire ropes used in mine winders are given
as follows:
study of the condition of ropes over a period of time at regular interval of three months/six
months/one year depending on age, condition of ropes etc. in the installation,
assessment of the suitability of ropes by non-destructive evaluation,
achievement of the optimum safety, economy and reliability during operation of the ropes in
current installations.
Degradation under service conditions takes place by reduction in thickness due to various forms of
corrosion and erosion, crack initiation and propagation due to various mechanisms like fatigue,
creep, creep-fatigue, corrosion-fatigue, stress corrosion, hydrogen damage, temper embrittlement,
sensitization in stainless steel, etc. and unacceptable microstructural changes. Nondestructive detection and assessment of deterioration is important for life extension.
The most conventional inspection method for wire ropes is the visual inspection in which the experts
observe the surface and assess the rope condition empirically. They cannot evaluate the inner
failure such as corrosion. However, the visual method produces a possibility for inadequate
inspection due to its subjectivity. Practically, it is hard and nearly impossible to review thoroughly a
rope covered by lubricant. Additionally, only surface faults of the rope can be detected and this is
insufficient to define its condition correctly.
Visual inspection alone is inadequate to provide a real definition of the rope degradation level, even
if the inspection is fulfilled conscientiously. Using electromagnetic method, a rope expert has a
possibility to estimate the rope condition. Electromagnetic nondestructive evaluation of wire ropes
has been in regular use in a number of countries for inspection of winding ropes in deep mines.
The LF (localised flaws) and LMA (loss of metallic cross-sectional area) signals of the nondestructive
evaluation instruments represent the electronic equivalent of the mechanical anomalies present in
240
POSTALE 2008
the wire rope. The saturating magnetic field of the instrument makes the anomalies visible to the
magnetic sensors placed around the rope. This process is somewhat similar to making nondestructive examination of a human body with X-rays, where density variations of the patient are
made visible by greater or lesser absorption of these rays.
The position of the Defectograph head in the case study mentioned below has been shown in Fig. 1.
Fig. 1 : Rope Position In The Defectograph.

CASE STUDY
A number of installations have been considered in mine winders (Cage and Skip). The ropes in different installations have been scanned through Wirerope Defectograph MD 120B of Polish origin
with its magnetic head 2-sh suitable for wire ropes with diameter ranging from 20 to 60 mm. All the
ropes have been calibrated first with metallic rod of known cross-sectional area of 80 sqmm/20
sqmm before actual scanning of ropes. The rope speed has varied from 0.6 to 1.5 meter/second.
One case study has been mentioned here. One number of winding rope, of 60 mm dia (nominal),
construction 6X49 Preformed (16-8+8-8-8-1), galvanized, IWRC, RHL, N113/Elaskon 2 Star lubrication, of W.E.F. 6 (Skip) winder shaft no. II of Moonidih Project of Bharat Coking Coal Limited
(BCCL), Dhanbad, has been subjected to nondestructive investigation, for the three consecutive
times for monitoring its suitability in the installation using MD 120B Magnetic Defectograph. The said
rope has been manufactured by M/s Usha Martin Industries Limited, India.
The internal and external (inner and outer) inductive sensor coils have registered the flaws developed due to localized flaws (broken wires) and the Hall Effect sensor has registered the relative
variation in metallic cross-sectional area with reference to healthy sector. This relative variation in
loss in cross-sectional area due to distributed flaws has been negligible since the portion of rope
scanned has been uniform. The Wirerope Defectograph has been calibrated by 20 sq.mm rod. For
calculation of relative loss in cross-sectional area, it has been taken into account that steel cross241
POSTALE 2008
sectional area for IWRC rope is about 60% of the full cross-sectional area. The number of flaws and
the laylength observed over the rope in the three investigations are tabulated in Table 1.
Table 1: In-Situ Observations For The Skip Rope
Diameters observed
(Max and Min)
(in mm)
Time of study
After 1 (one)
months
After 7 (seven)
months
After
11(eleven)
months
60.4 mm
60.0 mm
60.4 mm; 59.9 mm
0.17 % dia. reduction observed
60.3 mm; 59.8 mm
0.33 % dia. reduction observed
Laylength
measured
(in mm)
No. of
flaws
% loss in relative
cross-sectional
area
407 mm
Negligible.
417 mm
Negligible.
427 mm
Negligible.
The measured diameter of rope (off-tension) at the time of installation was 60.1 mm. The diameter
recorded in the investigation are as follows: (60.2, 60.2), (60.2, 60.2), (60.2, 60.2), (60.2, 60.3),
(60.3, 60.3), (60.3, 60.3), (60.3, 60.3), (60.3, 60.4), (60.3, 60.3), (60.3, 60.3), (60.3, 60.3), (60.2,
60.3), (60.3, 59.9), (60.3, 60.4), (60.3, 60.3), (60.0, 60.1), (60.2, 60.2), (60.2, 60.2), (60.2, 60.2),
(60.3, 60.3), (60.3, 60.2), (60.2, 60.2), (60.3, 60.3), (60.3, 60.3), (60.3, 59.9), (60.3, 60.3), (59.9,
60.0), (60.3, 60.3), (60.1, 59.8). The off-tension lay length as measured was 398 mm (6.63d where d
is the nominal diameter of the rope). The lay lengths [(Fig. 2 (a), (b), (c)] over a certain position of the
rope in the three investigations were 407 mm, 417 mm and 427 mm respectively.
MD 120B Wirerope Defectograph has scanned a rope length of 587 meters against total length of
610 meters (as stated). Two flaws have been detected at approx. distances of 80 meters and 198
meters respectively from Skip 1 end in the three investigations.
Keeping in view of the observations, condition of the above skip winder rope has been found to be
satisfactory and the rope was recommended for further continuance in the installation having close
visual watch of the portions of the rope (i.e. both cappel ends) which have not been covered under
this investigation.
This nondestructive investigation on winding (skip) rope does not include the aspect of fatigue which
may develop in rope in course of time.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Fig. 2(a), (b), (c) : Lay-Lengths Of The Skip Rope In 1st, 2nd And 3rd Investigations
242
POSTALE 2008
CONCLUSION
A complete documentation of gradual rope deterioration throughout ropes entire service life by periodic inspection right since the rope installation would enable the operator to arrive at a decision for
preventing premature rope failure under adverse conditions or extensions of rope life in deserving
cases.
The study depicts the present condition of ropes only. The measurements are intended to identify
rope wear and other deterioration so that a wire is removed from service before it becomes hazardous to use.
Application of nondestructive evaluation procedures makes it possible to improve the reliability of
detecting broken wires over the available rope length for evaluation. The reliability of electromagnetic
inspection has made it a universally accepted method for the inspection of wire ropes in mines.
The long term failure mechanism of steel wire rope in service is a complicated process which involves mechanical fatigue in combination with degradation. The effectiveness of rope inspection has
always depended upon the knowledge and experience of personnel performing the task. This effectiveness is vital in ensuring the safety of operations dependent upon rope. Rope NDT is an effective
means not only to ensure safety of rope but it assures also sufficient savings.
REFERENCES
A. Skordev, Standard-Technical Basis of the System for Non-destructive Testing, J.M. Farley and R.W. Nichols (eds), Nondestructive Testing, Proceedings of the 4th European Conference, London, UK, 13-17 Sept. 1987, Pergamon Press, Vol. 4, pp
2334-2338.
B.P.C. Rao and B. Raj, Potential Applications of Finite Element Modeling of Eddy Current Test Phenomena, 14th World Conference on Non Destructive Testing (14th WCNDT), New Delhi, India, 8-13 Dec., 1996, Vol. 1, pp 275-280.
CIMFR (erstwhile CMRI) Project Reports on Nondestructive investigation on Steel Wire Ropes, 2007-2008.
D. Basak, Nondestructive Evaluation of Drive Rope: A Case Study, Nondestructive Testing & Evaluation, Taylor & Francis, UK,
Vol. 20, No. 4, Dec. 2005, pp 221-229.
D. Basak, Periodic Nondestructive Evaluation of Steel Wire Ropes: Its Importance and Practical Relevance, NDT.netThe eJournal of Nondestructive Testing ISSN: 1435- 4934, June, 2006, Issue Vol. 11, No. 6.
D. Basak, S. Pal and D.C. Patranabis, In-situ Assessment of Independent Wire Rope Core Ropes in Cage Winders by a Nondestructive Method, Russian Journal of Nondestructive Testing, Vol. 44, No. 8, pp 585-588, @ Pleiades Publishing Ltd.,
2008.
D. Basak, S. Pal and D.C. Patranabis, Nondestructive Assessment of Full Locked Coil (FLC) Ropes in Cage and Skip Winders,
Journal of Failure Analysis and Prevention, Vol. 7, 2007, pp 255-259.
Guidance on the Selection, Installation, Maintenance and Use of Steel Wire Ropes in Vertical Mine Shafts, Health & Safety
Commission, Deep Mined Coal Industry Advisory Committee (micvertical.pdf) Crown copyright 2004.
H. L. Libby, Introduction to Electromagnetic Nondestructive Test Methods, Wiley-Interscience, USA, 1971.
H.R. Weischedel and C.R. Chaplin, The Inspection of Offshore Wire Ropes: The State of the Art, 24th Annual Offshore Technology Conference (OTC) Houston, Texas, 4-7 May, 1992, paper number OTC 6969, pp 227-239.
K. Zawada, Magnetic NDT of Steel Wire Ropes, NDT.net, August, 1999, Vol. 4, No. 8.
S. Fukuda, Nondestructive Evaluation and Its New Role in the Coming Century, 14th World Conference on Non Destructive
Testing (14th WCNDT), New Delhi, India, 8-13 Dec., 1996, Vol. 1, pp 15-24.
T. Moriya, A Magnetic Method for Evaluation of Deterioration of Large Diameter Wire Ropes, 15th World Conference on NonDestructive Testing, Rome (Italy), 2000.
243
POSTALE 2008
PERFORMANCE OF RFID DEVICES IN UNDERGROUND MINES

S. KUMARI, V. JHA, B. MAHATO, B. KUMAR, L.K. BANDYOPDHYAY,
S.K. CHAULYA AND P.K. MISHRA
INTRODUCTION
In case of disaster in an underground mine, it is very difficult for mine management to identify the
actual person trapped, his number and exact location. Therefore, identification and coding of miners
is a vital need for underground mine management in case of disaster as well as normal operating
conditions. Mining industry is generally capital intensive; cost of maintenance (35% of operating cost
of system) at mechanized mines goes as high as 50 60% when both direct and indirect costs are
taken into account (Bandyopadhyay et al., 2002). Sometimes, it constitutes 30% of total production
cost. In todays globally competitive market scenario, efforts to reduce production cost have awaken
mining industry for automation and optimum utilization of equipment by increasing its availability and
performance (Bandyopadhyay et al., 2008a, 2008b; Chaulya et al., 2008; Kumar and Guha, 2001;
Sen, 2001). Considering the importance of wireless communication system in underground mines,
Central Institute of Mining and Fuel Research (CIMFR), Dhanbad has developed a system named as
Wireless Information and Safety System (WISS) for mines, developed by CIMFR (Bandyopadhyay
et al., 2008).
The system consists of hardware devices and application software. Hardware module is ZigBeecompliant active radio frequency identification (RFID) devices/ transceivers, which can be programmed to act as end device (tag), router or coordinator that enables them to form an IEEE
802.15.4-based dynamic wireless mesh network. The setup of the device is shown in Fig.1. End devices are attached to the miners and moveable equipment, which wirelessly transmit data to the
nearest router. Routers are placed at strategic locations in underground mines to form wireless network which receives data from the nearest end device and router, and wirelessly transmit data to the
subsequent router and likewise data is transmitted through different routers within the network and
ultimately transmit all the data to the coordinator. The coordinator is placed in the pit top control
room and it is physically connected (RS232) with a computer. All the data received from coordinator
is stored and analyzed in the computer for different purposes.
Active Router
End
device
End
device
Active Router
Reader/
Coordinator
End
device
Fig. 1. Set Up Of Zigbee-Compliant (RFID) Devices
server
POSTALE 2008
The ZigBee technology is a wireless sensor networking solution for short and medium range communication, namely, unlicensed 2.4 GHz industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) band
(www.zigbee.org). The other features which make it efficient is ultra low power (ideal for battery operated system), operates for years on inexpensive batteries, large number of nodes/sensors, reliable
and secure links between network nodes, easy deployment and configuration, low cost system, very
fast transition time, digital battery monitor facility and smaller in size (system on chip). It uses a unified wireless mesh-networking infrastructure to locate, trace and manage mobile assets and people
as well as monitor different environmental conditions using sensors (Darji, 2004; Ergen, 2004; Lu,
2004).
Another core module is wireless sensor network (WSN) software, which is developed for tracking of
underground miners and moveable equipment by wireless sensor networking in mines. Software is
especially designed for tracking of miners and vehicles, route tracking in opencast mines, preventing
fatal accidents and vehicle collisions, environmental monitoring, observing miners unsafe practice,
sending alert message, message communication and preparing computerized miners duty hours
record. As RFID devices are ZigBee-compliant, however this technology is a new technique for wireless sensor networking in underground mine. Till date no significant field experiments have been
carried out regarding the performance of ZigBee technology in underground mine. Therefore, a detailed study has been done to evaluate the performance of ZigBee network in underground mine.
Experiments were carried out for: (i) measuring maximum operating distance (ODmax) among coordinator (C), router (R) and end device (E), (ii) analyzing data communication capability of a router to
remote coordinator, (iii) self-healing and self-forming capability of a mesh network and (iv) data
communication through L shaped or S shaped routing path. Experiments were carried out in two
ways, namely i) experiments for evaluating packet delivery ratio and ii) experiments for evaluating
beacon rate.
EXPERIMENTS FOR EVALUATING PACKET DELIVERY RATIO
Packet delivery ratio is defined as the number of data packet received by destination nodes divided
by number of data packets transmitted by source nodes. Whereas, packet delivery ratio of ZigBee
network topology can be defined as, it is the ratio of actual number of packet received by coordinator
to total number of packets sent by end device. Depending upon packet delivery ratio, efficiency of
ZigBee network topology, position of routers, and maximum operating distance among end device,
router and coordinator were determined.
During experiments, various parameters were measured, namely i) constant parameters and ii) variable parameters. Packet injection rate, packet size, and total number of packets sent by end device
were treated as constant parameters; while minimum operating distance, data communication from
end device to a remote coordinator, self healing and self forming capability of mesh network, treated
as variable parameters. Information regarding variable parameters and constant parameters are
given in Table 1. The packet injection rate and total number of packet send by end devices were
kept at 300 ms and 100, respectively for all the experiments. In order to evaluate the performance of
ZigBee network, the experiments were divided again in two categories: i) studies in underground
mine scenario and ii) studies in normal environment.
Studies in Underground Mine Scenario
Experiments were carried out at in a colliery of Bharat Coking Coal Limited, Dhanbad. At the time of
experiments in the underground mine, temperature and other parameters related to environment, i.e.
humidity, air velocity, and methane gas concentration were measured. The value of temperature
varied from 26 C to 40 C while methane gas concentration was ranged from 0 to 1% (Table 2).
Experiments in underground mines were carried out in different modes by changing the variable parameters while keeping the constant parameters fixed.
245
POSTALE 2008
Table 1 : Experimental Parameters And Their Specifications

Parameters
Specification
Constant parameter of
ZigBee network
i) Packet injection rate: 300 ms

ii) Total number of packets sent by end device: 100.
iii) User defined packet size: 16 bytes.
Variable parameter of ZigBee network.
i) Minimum operating distance.

ii) Data communication from end device to a remote coordinator.
iii) Self healing and self forming capability of mesh network.
iv) Data communication through L-shaped or S-shaped routing
path in underground mines.
Table 2 : Environmental Parameters Of The Underground Mine

Environmental parameters in mine
Temperature
Humidity
Air velocity
Methane gas concentration
Value
26 C 40 C
80 % 90 %
0.5 1.5 m/s
01%
Experimental Procedure
Mode-1:
Experiment was carried out twice to determine the maximum operating distance between router and
coordinator to determine the optimum placement distance of routers.
i) Distance between router and coordinator was increased gradually from 40 m to 60 m and 100 m
for finding out the maximum operating distance considering packet loss detection (Fig. 2).
ii) Communication among one coordinator and two routers was carried out simultaneously by rising
the intermediate distance gradually from 60 m to 80 m and 100 m (Fig. 3).
40 m
R
Fig. 2. Communication Between Router And Coordinator
E1
60 m
C
E2
40 m
Fig. 3 : Communication Among Two End Devices And Coordinator
246
POSTALE 2008
Mode-2:
Experiment was carried out to test data communication from end device to a remote coordinator in
multihop topology by placing one router (Fig. 4b) and two routers, respectively (Fig. 4c) in between
coordinator and end device.
40 m
E
C
(a)
40 m
40 m
(b)
20 m
40 m
60 m
(c)
Fig. 4 : Communication Between End Device And Coordinator Via Router

Mode-3:
Experiment was carried out to test the data transmission from a tag to a remote coordinator in multihop even if the routing path was not straight i.e., the routing path was L- shaped (Fig. 5a) or Sshaped (Fig. 5b) which are very common in underground mines.
20 m
R
60 m
80 m
(a)
40 m
(b)
40 m
Fig. 5 : Communication Between End Device And Coordinator Via Router In Bends And Tunnels
Results
Mode-1:
i) Number of packets received by coordinator from a single end device by gradually increasing intermediate distance is given in Table 3. The packet delivery ratio was 99 % at an intermediate distance of 40 m and it was gradually decreased to 86 % when the intermediate distance was 100 m.
ii) A single coordinator simultaneously received packets from two end devices at a time. At intermediate distance of 60 m, the packet delivery ratio was 97 %; whereas at intermediate distance of
100 m, the packet delivery ratio was 92 % (Table 4).
247
POSTALE 2008
Table 3 : Variation Of Packet Delivery Ratio With Increasing Intermediate Distance

Intermediate distance between C and E (m)
40
60
80
100
Packet received at coordinator

99
99
95
86
Packet delivery ratio (%)

99
99
95
86

60
80
100
Packets received at the coordinator (from 2 devices)

194
190
183

97
95
92
Mode-2: Absence of routers in between coordinator and end device is called single hop system;
whereas presence of one router and two routers will increase the hop-number from single to two (2)
and three (3), respectively. In case of single hop system the packet delivery ratio was 97 % while
increasing hops number by two and three there was a decrement in packet delivery ratio to 87 %
and 52 %, respectively (Table 5).
Table 5 : Variation Of Packet Delivery Ratio With Increasing Number Of Hops
Number of hops between
E and C
1
2
3
Packet received at the coordinator

(from 2 devices)
97
87
52
Packet delivery ratio

(%)
97
87
52
Mode-3: Packets were transmitted by end device to coordinator through L-shape or S-shape topology. In L-shape topology, there was one router in between end device and coordinator while in case
of S-shape topology there were two routers. Packet delivery ratio was 97 % for case of L-shape topology and 98 % for S-shape topology (Table 7).
Number of hops between E and C
1 router (Fig. 4a)
2 routers (Fig. 4b)

97
98
Discussion
It was observed that increment of intermediate distance in between coordinator and end device decreased packet delivery ratio. Therefore, it can be concluded that the intermediate distance between
coordinator and end device is inversely proportional to the packet delivery ratio. Again it was observed that lesser number of hops routers in between end device and coordinator increased the
packet delivery ratio. Therefore, the relation between number of hops and packet delivery ratio is
also inversely proportional. In underground mines near bends and tunnels, packets were transmitted
in either L-shape topology or S-shape topology and these types of topologies did not hamper the
rate of packet delivery ratio.
248
POSTALE 2008
Studies in Normal Environment (Outside of Mine)

Experiments were carried out in normal environment in different modes for comparative study with
experiments in underground mine to analyze the performance of ZigBee network. Temperature, air
velocity and humidity were measured during experiments in normal environment. Temperature was
varied from 30 C to 32 C whereas humidity and air velocities were varied from 24 % to 38 % and 1
to 3 m/s, respectively (Table 8).
Table 8. Environmental Parameters And Their Values
Environmental parameters
Temperature
Humidity
Air velocity
Value
30 C 32 C
24 % 38 %
1 3 m/s
.
Experimental Procedure
Mode-1: Experiments were done twice to determine the maximum operating distance between coordinator and end device.
i) Distance between router and coordinator was increased gradually from 40 m to 60 m and 100 m
(Fig. 2). When distance was increased more than 100 m, a significant packet loss was detected.
ii) Data communications to a single coordinator from two end device was carried out simultaneously
by varying the intermediate distance steadily from 60 m to 80 m and 100 m (Fig. 3).
Mode-2:
Experiment was carried out to test data communication from end devices to a remote coordinator in
multihop by positioning one or two routers in between coordinator and end device (Fig. 4).
Mode-3:
Experiment was carried out to test the data transmission from a tag to a remote coordinator in multihop even if the routing path was not straight i.e., the routing path was L-shaped (Fig. 5a) or Sshaped (Fig. 5b).
Mode-4:
Experiment was carried out to study the automatic self-healing networking feature of ZigBee devices
(Fig. 6).
If not working
OD
OD
C
R
Redundant
Fig. 6 : Communication Between End Device And Coordinator Via Redundant Router
249
POSTALE 2008
RESULTS
Mode-1:
i) Number of packets, received by the coordinator from a single end device by gradually increasing
intermediate distance is given in Table 9. Packet delivery ratio was decreased with the increment
of intermediate distance from 40 m to 100 m.
ii) The single coordinator simultaneously received packets from two end devices at a time. Packet
delivery ratio decreased from 100 % to 97 % when intermediate distance increased from 60 m to
100 m (Table 10).
Table 9 : Variation of packet delivery ratio with increasing intermediate distance
40
60
80
100
Packet received at coordinator

100
100
100
95

100
100
100
95

Intermediate distance
between C and E (m)
60
80
100
Packets received at the

coordinator
100
99
97

100
99
97
Mode-2:
For a single hop system the packet delivery ratio was 100 % whereas presence of one and two
routers in between coordinator and end device reduced the packet delivery ratio to 99 % and 98 %,
respectively (Table 11).
E and C
1
2
3
Packets received at the coordinator

100
99
98

100
99
98
Mode-3:
Packets were received by the coordinator through L-shape topology near bends in the gallery. Using
one router packet delivery ratio was 99 % where as introducing two routers packet delivery ratio was
97 % (Table 12).
Number of hops between E and C
1 router (Fig. 4a)
2 routers (Fig. 4b)

99
97
Mode-4:
Packets were received through R1 from end device to coordinator when R2 was at switch off state. If
both were kept at switch on state then packets were transmitted through R1. Packets were transmit250
POSTALE 2008
ted to coordinator through R2 when R1 was kept at switch off state. Therefore, it can be concluded
that change in routing path is determined as soon as any route path failure is detected (Table 13).
Table 13. Packet Delivery Ratio In Multihop Mode
E and C
E R1C
ER2C
Packets received at the coordinator

100
97

100
97
Discussion
It can be concluded from the above results that the packet delivery ratio reduces if routers are introduced in between end device and coordinator. It has been also observed that the positions of routers
in between end device and coordinator affect the packet delivery ratio. It can be also concluded that
packet delivery ratio is always better in normal environment (out side of mine) rather than under
ground mines. Besides that in out side of mine the L-shaped or S-shaped topology (above mentioned) does not hamper the packet delivery ratio and redundant routing path is detected when conventional route path is failed.
EXPERIMENTS FOR EVALUATING BEACON RATE
Probability of getting beacon () is defined as the number of beacons received by the destination
nodes divided by the number of beacons transmitted by the source nodes and depending upon its
performance, ZigBee network can be analyzed. In order to achieve the tracking performance of ZigBee technology, the effect of beaconing rate of tags was evaluated. Keeping beaconing rate at 2
second and 5 second, experiments were carried out twice by increasing the number of tags from 1 to
10.
Experimental procedure
Mode-1:
It is observed that for a single end device, at 2 second beacon interval was 0.90 while at 5 second beacon interval was 0.95. Taking 50 packets in 1 second, the total number of beacons that was
expected to reach the coordinator in 2 second was (500.9) 45. Similarly taking 20 packets in 1 second, the number of beacons expected to reach at coordinator in 5 second was (200.95) 19.
Mode-2:
It is observed that for three-end device at 2 second beacon interval was 0.87 while at 5 second
beacon interval was 0.91. The number of packets expected to reach the coordinator for 2 second
was (500.87) 44. Again the number packets expected to reach in 5 second towards the coordinator
was (200.91) 18.
Results
i) For the 1st case, high beaconing rate (2 second), coordinator was getting 45 packets with (1.00 0.90) 0.1 beacon loss probability. At lower beaconing rate (5 second), coordinator was getting 19
packets with (1.00-0.95) 0.05 beacon loss probability.
ii) For the 2nd case at high beaconing rate (2 second), coordinator was getting 44 packets with (1.00 0.87) 0.13 beacon loss probability. At lower beaconing rate (5 second), coordinator was getting 19
packets with (1.00 - 0.91) 0.09 beacon loss probability.
Performance Analysis
The probability of getting beacons in different scenarios is shown in Fig. 7. The graph shows the
probability of getting beacons decreases very slightly for high beaconing rate. Enhancement in bea-
251
POSTALE 2008
Probability of getting beacon
coning rate increases chance of beacon loss due to congestion caused by multiple beacons in the
system. As the beaconing rate decreases, the probability of getting beacons increases.
0.96
0.94
0.92
0.9
0.88
0.86
0.84
0.82
0.8
0.78
Beacon rate = 5 s
Beacon rate = 2 s
Number of devices
Fig. 7 : Variation Of Probability Of Getting Beacon With Increasing Number Of Devices Discussion
Higher beacon loss probability does not imply low number of received beacons. In a specified time
period, if the beaconing rate is high then total number of beacons received by the tag is high, even if
some beacons get lost due to congestion. Beacon received from a tag provides the up to date location information of the tag to the system. Therefore, it is also expected that if the frequency of beacon is high that imply system is getting location updates frequently and that will eventually improve
the tracking performance. The beaconing rate can also be adjusted depending on the frequency of
movement of tagged object and on the period within which the object is in the range of a particular
router. High beaconing rate is required where movement of tag is very frequent. But high beacon
rate increases the congestion in the system. On the other hand, in mine scenario, the walking speed
(assume approximately 7.2 km /hr) of the miners is not very fast and they do not change their position very frequently. So, speed of a tagged miner is (7200/3600) 2 m/s. Assuming that the distance
between two routers in miners tracking scenario is 40 m. So, a miner is staying under one router for
[(40 m) /2 m/s] 20 second before switching to another router. In this 20 second it can emit 10 beacons with 2 second beaconing rate or 4 beacons with 5 second beaconing rate. But all those beacons will contain same location information. Therefore, keeping into account the beacon loss probability at the coordinator from a tag is approximately (100.9) 9 or (40.95) 4 (with 5 second beaconing rate) approximately. Even with 50 % beacon loss probability coordinator will receive at least 2
beacons at 5 second beaconing rate. Thus, further increase in number of beacons received at coordinator will not be able to produce any further improvement in tracking performance. Therefore, this
analysis indicates that beacon loss has no significant effect on tracking performance.
CONCLUSIONS
Tracking and monitoring of miners and mining equipment are basic needs in underground mines.
Installation of RFID system in underground mines is viable and cost-effective. It can be concluded
from the experiments of evaluating packet delivery ratio that it is better to keep the intermediate distance at 40 m to 50 m in between the end device and coordinator. Some additional routers need to
be placed in the multihop system to combat sudden failure of some routers and to ensure reliable
data communication. For evaluating beacon rate, it may also be concluded that loss of beacon is not
that much alarming as it appears intuitively. It may be further concluded that reduction in range of
252
POSTALE 2008
end device and optimum placement of routers in between end devices and coordinator can significantly improve tracking performance.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Authors thank Department of Information Technology (DIT), Ministry of Communication and
Information Technology, Government of India, New Delhi for funding the work. Authors also thank
Director, CIMFR, Dhanbad for necessary help and support.
REFERENCES
Bandyopadhyay, L.K., Narayan, A, and Kumar, A. (2002) Mining automation requirements and worldwide implementations,
Indian Mining Eng, 41: 29-33.
Bandyopadhyay, L.K. Chaulya, S.K., Mishra, P.K. and Baveja, B.M., (2008a) Wireless information and safety system for mines,
Journal of Scientific & Industrial Research, In press.
Bandyopadhyay, L.K., Chaulya, S.K. and Mishra, P.K. (2008b) Development of tracking and monitoring system based on RFID
tags for disaster management in underground mines, Proceedings of 17th International Conference on Automation in Mining,
(eds. Foganek, B. and Miskiewicz, K.), 21st World Mining Congress, Cracow, Poland.
Bandyopadhyay, L.K., Chaulya, S.K. and Mishra, P.K. (2008) Wireless information and safety system for underground mines,
Proceedings of the International Union of Radio Science (URSI) General Assembly, August 9-16, 2008, Chicago, France.
Chaulya, S.K., Bandyopadhyay, L.K. and Mishra, P.K. (2008) Modernization of Indian coal mining industry: Vision 2025, Journal
of Scientific & Industrial Research, 67: 28-35.
Darji, A.D., (2004) ZigBee-wireless sensor networking for automation. M. Tech. Thesis, Electronic Systems Group, Electrical and
Electronics Department, Indian Institute of Technology, Mumbai, India.
Ergen, S.C. (2004) ZigBee/IEEE 802.15.4 summary. www.pages.cs.wisc.edu.
Kumar, V. and Guha, R. (2001) Computerisation of Indian mining industry quo Vadis?, Proceedings of Third Conference on
Computer Application in Mineral Industry, (eds. Bandyopadhyay, C. and Sheorey, P.R.), Oxford & IBH Publisher, New Delhi,
2001, pp.15-22.
Lu, G., Krishnamachari, B. and Raghavendra, C.S. (2004) Performance evolution of the IEEE802.15.4 MAC for low-rate lowpower wireless networks. Proc. IEEE, 4: 701-706.
Sen, S.K. (2001) Current status of mechanization and automation in mineral industry Indian scenario, Proceedings of
International Conference on Mechanization and Automation The Future of Mineral Industry (Mining, Geological and
Metallurgical Institute of India, Kolkata), 2001, pp.7-11.
www.zigbee.org: ZigBee Alliance.
253
POSTALE 2008
MINE CLOSURE OPERATION AND THE STATUTORY REQUIREMENT

FOR PREPARING A MINE PLAN
P. K. ARYA, A. K. GHOSH AND A. SINHA
INTRODUCTION
The Central Government vide Notification No. GSR 329 (E) dated 10.04.2003 and No. GSR 330 (E)
dated 10.04.2003 amended the Mineral Concession Rules, 1960 and Mineral Conservation and Development Rules, 1988 respectively. As per these amendments all the existing mining lessees are
required to submit the "Progressive Mine Closure Plan" along with prescribed financial sureties
within 180 days from date of notification. Further, the mining lessee is required to submit "Final
Mines Closure Plan" one year prior to the proposed closure of the mine. In the notification it has
been enumerated that the "Progressive Closure Plan" and "Final Closure Plan" should be in the format and as per the guidelines issued by the Indian Bureau of Mines.
Mine closure encompasses rehabilitation process as an ongoing programme designed to restore
physical, chemical and biological quality disturbed by the mining to a level acceptable to all the
stakeholders. It aims to close of operations in such a way that rehabilitation does not become a burden to the society post the mining operations. It also aims to create as self-sustained ecosystem.
Mine closure operation is a continuous series of activities starting from day one of the initiation of
mining project. Therefore, progressive mine closure plan will be an additional chapter in the present
mining plan and will be reviewed every five years in the Scheme of Mining. As progressive mine closure is a continuous series of activities, it is obvious that the proposals of scientific mining incorporates most of the activities to be included in the progressive mine closure plan. Therefore, reference
to relevant paragraphs and a gist of the same in progressive mine closure plan will be sufficient.
Final mine closure plan as per statute, shall be considered to have its approval at least nine months
before the date of proposed closure of mine. This period of nine months is reckoned as preparatory
period for final mine closure operations. Therefore, all proposals for activities which have to be carried out after production of mineral from the mine or mining is ceased, shall be included in the final
mine closure plan. The final mine closure plan will thus be a separate document with detailed chapters as per guidelines given below.
GUIDE LINES FOR PREPARING MINE CLOSURE PLAN
1. Introduction
The name of the lessee, the location and extent of lease area, the type of lease area (forest, nonforest etc), the present land use pattern, the method of mining and mineral-processing operations,
should be given.
1.1 Reasons for closure: The reasons for closure of mining operations in relation to exhaustion of
mineral, lack of demand, uneconomic operations, natural calamity, directives from statutory organization or court etc. should be specified.
1.2 Statutory obligations: The legal obligations, if any which the lessee is bound to implement like
special conditions imposed while execution of lease deed, approval of mining plan, directives issued
by the Indian Bureau of Mines, conditions imposed by the Ministry of Environment and Forests, State
of Central Pollution Control Board or by any other organization describing the nature of conditions
and compliance position thereof should be indicated here (the copies of relevant documents may be
attached as Annexure).
1.3 Closure plan preparation: The names and addresses of the applicant and recognized qualified
person who prepared the Mine Closure Plan and the name of the existing agency should be fur-
POSTALE 2008
nished. A copy of the resolution of the Board of Directors or any other appropriate administrative
authority as the case may be on the decision of closure of mine should be submitted.
2. Mine Description
2.1 Geology: Briefly describe the topography and general geology indicating rock types available, the
chemical constituents of the rocks / minerals including toxic elements if any, at the mine site.
2.2 Reserves: Indicate the mineral reserves available category wise in the lease area estimated in
the last mining plan / mining scheme approved along with the balance mineral reserves at the proposed mine closure including its quality available ( for final mine closure plan only).
2.3 Mining Method: Describe in brief the mining method followed to win the mineral, extent of
mechanisation , mining machinery deployed, production level etc.
2.4 Mineral Beneficiation: Describe in brief the mineral beneficiation practice if any indicating the
process description in short. Indicate discharge details of any tailings / middlings and their disposal /
utilisation practice followed.
3. Review of Implementation of Mining Plan / Scheme of Mining including five years Progressive Closure Plan upto final closure of mine
Indicate in detail the various proposals committed with special emphasis on the proposals for protection of environment in the approved Mining Plan / Scheme of Mining including five years Progressive
Closure Plan upto the closure of mine vis-a-vis their status of implementation. Highlight the areas,
which might have been contaminated by mining activities and type of contaminants that might be
found there. The reasons for deviation from the proposals if any with corrective measures taken
should also be given.
4. Closure Plan
4.1 Mined-Out Land: Describe the proposals to be implemented for reclamation and rehabilitation of
mined-out land including the manner in which the actual site of the pit will be restored for future use.
The proposals should be supported with relevant plans and sections depicting the method of land
restoration / reclamation / rehabilitation.
4.2 Water Quality Management: Describe in detail the existing surface and ground water bodies
available in the lease areas and the measures to be taken for protection of the same including control of erosion, sedimentation, siltation, water treatment, diversion of water courses, if any, measures
for protection of contamination of ground water from leaching etc. Quantity and quality of surface
water bodies should also be indicated and corrective measures proposed to meet the water quality
conforming the permissible limits should also be described. Report of hydrological study carried out
in the area may also be submitted. The water balance chart should be given. If there is potential of
Acid Mine Drainage the treatment method should be given.
4.3 Air Quality Management: Describe the existing air quality status. The corrective measures to be
taken for prevention of pollution of air should be described.
4.4. Waste Management: Describe the type, quality and quantity of overburden, mineral reject etc.
available and their disposal practice. If no utilisation of waste material is proposed, the manner in
which the waste material will be stabilised should be described. The protective measures to be taken
for prevention of siltation, erosion and dust generation from these waste materials should also be
described. If toxic and hazardous elements are present in the waste material the protective measures to be taken for prevention of their dispersal in the air environment, leaching in the surface and
ground water etc, should be described.
4.5 Top Soil Management: The top soil available at the site and its utilisation should be described.
4.6 Tailing Dam Management: The steps to be taken for protection and stability of tailing dam, stabilisation of tailing material and its utilisation, periodic desilting, measures to prevent water pollution
from tailings etc., arrangement for surplus water overflow alongwith detail design, structural stability
studies, the embankment seepage loss into the receiving environment and ground water contaminant if any should be given.
4.7 Infrastructure: The existing infrastructural facilities available such as roads, aerial ropeways,
conveyer belts, railways, power lines, buildings & structures, water treatment plant, transport, water
supply sources in the area etc. and their future utilisation should be evaluated on case to case basis.
255
POSTALE 2008
If retained, the measures to be taken for their physical stability and maintenance should be described. If decommissioning proposed, dismantling and disposal of building structures, support facilities and other infratructure like electric transmission line, water line, gas pipeline, water works, sewer
line, telephone cables, underground tanks, transportation infrastructure like roads, rails, bridges, culverts etc., electrical equipments and infrastructures like electric cables, transformers to be described
in connection with restoring land for further use.
4.8 Disposal of Mining Machinery: The decommissioning of mining machineries and their possible
post mining utilisation, if any, to be described.
4.9 Safety and Security: Explain the safety measures implemented to prevent access to surface
openings, excavations etc., and arrangements proposed during the mine abandonment plan and
upto the site being opened for general public should be described.
4.10 Disaster Management and Risk Assessment: This should deal with action plan for high risk accidents like landslides, subsidence flood, inundation in underground mines, fire, seismic activities,
tailing dam failure etc. and emergency plan proposed for quick evacuation, ameliorative measures to
be taken etc. The capability of lessee to meet such eventualities and the assistance to be required
from the local authority should also be described.
4.11 Care and maintenance during temporary discontinuance: For every five yearly review (as given
in the mining scheme), an emergency plan for the situation of temporary discontinuance or incomplete programme due to court order or due to statutory requirements or any other unforeseen circumstances, should include a plan indicating measures of care, maintenance and monitoring of
status of unplanned discontinued mining operations expected to re-open in near future. This should
detail item wise status monitoring and maintenance with periodicity and objective.
5. Economic Repercussions of closure of mine and manpower retrenchments
Manpower retrenchment, compensation to be given, socio-economic repercussions and remedial
measures consequent to the closure of mines should be described, specifically stating the following.
5.1 Number of local residents employed in the mine, status of the continuation of family occupation
and scope of joining the occupation back.
5.2 Compensation given or to be given to the employees connecting with sustenance of himself and
their family members.
5.3 Satellite occupations connected to the mining industry - number of persons engaged therein continuance of such business after mine closes.
5.4 Continued engagement of employees in the rehabilitated status of mining lease area and any
other remnant activities.
5.5 Envisaged repercussions on the expectation of the society around due to closure of mine.
6. Time Scheduling for abandonment
The details of time schedule of all abandonment operations as proposed in para 4 should be described here. The manpower and other resources required for completion of proposed job should be
described. The schedule of such operations should also be supplemented by PERT (Programme
Evaluation & Review Technique), Bar chart etc.
7. Abandonment Cost
Cost to be estimated based on the activities required for implementing the protective and rehabilitation measures including their maintenance and monitoring programme.
8. Financial Assurance
The financial assurance can be submitted in different forms as stated in Rule 23(F)(2) of Mineral
Conservation and Development (amendment) Rules, 2003. In the mine closure plan, the manner in
which financial assurance has been submitted and its particulars have to be indicated.
9. Certificate
The above-mentioned actions have been taken to be stated clearly in the mine closure plan. A certificate duly signed by the lessee to the effect that said closure plan complies all statutory rules, regulations, orders made by the Central or State Government, statutory organisations, court etc. have
256
POSTALE 2008
been taken into consideration and wherever any specific permission is required the lessee will approach the concerned authorities. The lessee should also give an undertaking to the effect that all
the measures proposed in this closure plan will be implemented in a time bound manner as proposed.
10. Plans, Sections etc
The chapter 1,2,3 and 4 should be supported with Plans and Sections. The Closure Plan may also
be submitted depicting photographs, satellite images on compact disc etc. wherever possible.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The details of the paper is a review of information collected from internet source.
257
POSTALE 2008
TECHNOLOGY DRIVEN CHANGE IN SUPERIMPOSED DEVELOPMENT

OF CONTIGUOUS SECTIONS OF A THICK SEAM FOR SINGLE LIFT
WORKING OF ITS TOTAL THICKNESS
RAJENDRA SINGH, P. K. MANDAL, A. K. SINGH AND RAKESH KUMAR
Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research, Dhanbad.
INTRODUCTION:
Efficient underground mining of thick coal seams is a challenge, which becomes even more challenging under Indian geo-mining conditions, mainly, due to competent nature of the coal measure
formations. Presence of competent overlying roof rock mass provides roof stability during development but poses strata control problems during final extraction. Generally, large overhangs of roof
strata inside goaf are experienced during final extraction. Fall of such overhang causes dynamic
loading (Fig. 1) over the pillars facing goaf line. Indian coalfields often encounter such difficult geomining conditions during underground mining. In the light of increased height of the void to be filled
during full-height extraction of a thick coal seam in single lift, the problems associated with the dynamic loading needs special attention. In fact, nature and amount of pillar loading is an important
point to consider for full height working of a thick coal seam in single lift because the increased
height of void may cause considerably large amount of strata disturbance and the efficacy of the
natural support is reduced. But the single lift working of complete thickness of a thick coal seam is
preferred due to its techno-economic superiority over the conventional multi sectional working.
Extraction of complete thickness of a thick coal seam in single lift by sub-level caving proved to be
advantageous for European and Chinese coalfields because major portion of the seam is won only
due to gravitational flow. The soft nature of coal mass and presence of easily caveable overlying roof
strata played crucial role for the single lift working of a thick coal seam. However, both the coal mass
and roof strata of Indian coalfields are relatively strong and massive. Field trial of a mechanized sub
level caving method did not succeed [1] mainly due to competency of the coal and roof rock mass.
18
-20
Bridging
350
Bridging beds
300
2
14
Induced stress (Kg/cm )
Induced stress (Kg/cm 2)
16
12
10
8
6
Weak roof strata
250
150
100
50
-10
0
10 20 30
Distance from the goaf edge (m)
40
50 -20
Massive roof
200
20
40
60
80
Distance from the goaf edge (m)
Fig. 1 : Mining Induced Stress (Vertical) Development At Two Different Conditions Of Overlying Roof Strata Caving During Depillaring
POSTALE 2008
THICK SEAM DEPILLARING

A simple and safe method of coal production through underground mines is formation of pillars. The
process of pillar formation receives favourable situation due to presence of the competent coal and
surrounding rock mass and the CMR is also quite liberal for the process. This strategy of coal production is suitable for the Indian coal mining industry because of low capital investment and involvement of moderate technical expertise. But, development of thick coal seams on pillars is bit complex
as the thickness provides, relatively, wider band width for the horizon of pillar formation. Generally,
thick seams of the country have been developed along floor but a number of such seams have also
been developed along roof horizon. Full height depillaring of a thick seam in one lift, developed along
floor, is generally done by blasting gallery [2] or cable bolting method [3]. But a thick seam developed along roof horizon needs to be developed along floor first for the single lift working of its complete thickness. If a thick seam is developed along the roof, then the development along floor, generally, falls under the case of contiguous coal sections so, as per CMR, the bottom section development has to be superimposed to that of the top section. Further, the regulations also impose a condition that the parting between the two superimposed developments must not be less than 3 m in
thickness. However, during final extraction of a thick seam, field observations and experiences found
that the superimposition of the two sections is not suitable for the BG method under massive/strong
roof strata conditions. Accordingly, an important change in bottom section development scheme
(called staggered development) was conceived and tested on simulated models, which was later,
successfully, validated in field also.
Blasting Gallery Method
To improve production, productivity and safety, increasing number of depillaring panels are adopting
machines for coal evacuation from face in conjunction with conventional drilling and blasting. In tune
with this approach, BG method of mining was introduced by the coal companies of the country, in
technical collaboration with CdF, France, to extract the full height of a thick and developed coal
seam in one lift. This semi-mechanised method of thick seam depillaring involves, more or less,
conventional machinery and the total capital investment is also not very high with a satisfactory daily
output. This method involved drilling of ring holes right through the entire thickness of the seam in a
systematic fan cut fashion to bring the roof/pillar coal down by blasting. Before blasting of the roof
coal, the developed pillars are split along the face line to increase the number of loading points and
to reduce the length of the ring holes to be drilled to win the roof and side coal. All the ring holes are
drilled in the same plane at 30o inclination towards the goaf from the vertical. Ring hole blasting
makes large amount of coal available at the face. Machines (LHDs/SDLs) are used for loading and
transportation of coal from the production face. Remote controlled coal evacuation machines are
used to lift the fallen coal piles lying inside the goaf.
Contiguous Sections Of A Thick Seam
A thick coal seam generates difficult geomining situation if it has already been developed on pillars
along the roof horizon. Here, again, seam thickness plays a crucial role for the selection of a suitable
mining method for pillar extraction and generates two different conditions:
1.
The seam, developed along the roof horizon, is thick enough to provide a 3m thick parting
for the lower horizon working of the seam. Here, bottom section can easily be developed as the
statutory requirement of 3m thick parting between the two sections is fulfilled.
2.
The seam, developed along the roof horizon, is not enough thick to provide a 3m thick parting for the lower horizon working of the seam. These coal seams are called critically thick
seams. Here, the extraction of lower portion of the seam by multi-sectional caving in descending
order may face a complex situation as the statutory requirement of the minimum parting thickness cannot be met.
For the second condition, conventionally, the developed top section is depillared first and after settlement of its goaf depillaring of the bottom section is done. However, there is no standard time and
259
POSTALE 2008
process to ensure the settlement of the top section goaf. Stress concentration over the stooks left
inside the goaf of the top section poses serious threat to the safety of the thin parting during bottom
section working. Further cause of concern during bottom section working is accumulation of gas and
spontaneous heating of coal left in side the top section goaf. CIMFR has developed [4] a method for
safe, efficient and economical depillaring by caving of whole thickness of a critically thick seam in
one lift and it has been patented. Basically, the concept of staggered bottom section development
has been used in this method to extract whole thickness of the critically thick seam in one lift.
For the above mentioned first condition, the formation of pillars along floor is trivial as per contiguity
conditions of the CMR. If the interburden/parting thickness between the two developments is 9 m or
less then they fall under the category of contiguity. As per CMR, developments of two contiguous
sections must be superimposed with at least 3m thick parting. The condition of superimposition is
ideal for pillar load transfer during conventional multi-sectional depillaring (caving) in descending
order. Once the top section is depillared, the area gets distressed and the bottom section working is
unlikely to face any adverse strata condition if the parting between the two sections is competent. A
chance of collapse of the parting to increase effective pillar height remains slim during the top section depillaring. Here, the height of void also remains short in comparison to that of the single lift
working. Further, the pillar height remains low and is confined from all sides. Even after all these
positive realities about the underground structures during multi-slice working of a thick coal seam,
full height working of a thick coal seam in single lift is generally preferred due to its technoeconomical superiority.
Techniques are available for single lift working of complete thickness of a thick coal seam developed
along floor. However, if the seam consists of superimposed top and bottom section developments,
side confinement of pillars around goaf line is considerably reduced and encounters a goaf of relatively large height during single lift working of complete thickness of the thick seam. In fact, during
under-winning of roof coal band of a thick coal seam for single lift extraction of complete thickness
under massive roof strata, the superimposed developments are found to be problematic. Parting
failure is observed under high value of mining induced stress over the pillars around the goaf edge.
This failure of parting resulted in increase in the height of the pillars facing goaf line, which, ultimately, lowered the value of width to height ratio (w/h) of the natural support. Decrease in w/h value
directly reduces stiffness/strength of a coal specimen (Fig. 2). Similarly, a pillar of lower w/h ratio
around a depillaring face under massive roof strata encounters the chance of failure, because the
natural support (pillar) is likely to offer poor support resistance. Actual field trial of the blasting gallery
face for a thick coal seam having superimposed development of contiguous sections of at a mine of
Singareni Collieries Company Limited (SCCL) experienced roof/pillar failure around face resulting in
closure of the panel.
Stress, MPa
80
120
W/h=13.5
W/h=9.0
W/h=7.7
W/h=2.0
40
W/h=1
0
160
W/h=0.5
W/h=4.5
W/h=3.2
50
100 150 200

Strain, 10-3
250
Fig. 2 : Influence Of W/H Ratio Over Post-Failure Behaviour Of Coal Samples (After [5] )
260
POSTALE 2008
Site Details
To extract nearly 10.5 m thick No. 3 seam in one lift at GDK-8 incline in RG-II area, SCCL adopted
the BG method. The seam was nearly flat with gradient 1 in 10. Prior to the planning of the BG
method, this seam was extensively developed on pillars along roof around seven years back. The
development was made along the roof horizon, mainly, due to presence of the competent overlying
sandstone roof strata. During this development, average width and height of the gallery were 4.2 and
2.5 m respectively. Average size of the pillars so formed was 39.5 x 39.5 m (center to center). A coal
band of 8 m thickness remained intact along the floor during the top section development. The planning of application of BG method in the panel BG-II/2 led to another superimposed bottom section
development along floor in this proposed panel. Average thickness of a coal parting between the two
developments was 5.5 m. Dimensions of pillars and galleries of bottom section were exactly same as
those of the top section. The panel BG-II/2 (Fig. 3) consisted of 12 pillars for the extraction at an average depth cover of 298 m.
Underlying No. 4 seam was virgin, while the overlying No. 1 seam was depillared and the caved
goaf, at nearly 90m height from the panel, was observed to be free from water. Other two overlying
coal seams (No. 2 & 3A) were found non-vendible. Generally, the coal seams of SCCL are observed
to be quite hard (Table 1) and laboratory compressive strength of the No. 3 seam was observed to
be 57.5 MPa. The rock mass column above this panel representing typical Barakar formation consisted of coarse grained sandstone, sandy shale and fine grained sandstone. Almost 85% cover
strata over the proposed panel consisted of sandstone indicating that the roof would cave with difficulty. Further, the 10.5m height of extraction by BG is supposed to create a considerably high void.
Up to certain extent, the effect of increase in void height over support performance for a longwall
face is investigated [6] and found to affect the performance of the support adversely. Here, the rating
of required support increases with the increase in working height but this norm may not suit for the
BG method under the geo-mining conditions of the GDK-8 incline. However, it can safely be assumed that the increase in the height of the void makes the goaf even more active and hostile for the
stability of supports (natural/artificial) around the extraction line.
78L
Table 1 : Compressive Strength Of Some Of

The Coal Seams Of SCCL
Bottom
79L
Pillar Split
Name of
Colliery
Seam
number/name
GDK-8
III (top)
III (bottom)
Ross
Salarjung
III
IV
I
80L
30
31D
32D
33D
34D GDK-8
Belampalli
Belampalli
Mandmari
Mandmari
GDK11
81L
82L
Lab. compressive
strength, MPa
(2.5 cm cube)
56
59
48
46
47
30.9
50
83L
84L
Fig. 3 : Offset Plan Of BG Panel No. II/2 Of No. 3 Seam Showing Top And Bottom Section Developments And Face Position At The Time Panel Closure Due To Face Collapse
261
POSTALE 2008
Even for superimposed development of contiguous sections of a thick coal seam, only bottom section is used for final extraction of pillars and underwinning of roof coal through ring hole blasting. A
sectional view of ring hole drilling through a split in No. 3 seam of GDK8 incline is shown in Fig. 4.
The coal parting of 5.5 m thickness was found competent during initial phase of the extraction. With
increase in dimension of the goaf the roof did not cave regularly, throwing considerable amount of
mining induced stress over the pillars facing goaf line. Although no stress meter was installed inside
the pillars of panel BG-II/2 to measure the stress change, heavy side spalling of the pillars was noticed and it indicated of high value of mining induced stress. It was difficult to measure depth of the
spalling all around the pillars but as per visual observations the depth of spalling varied from 1 to 2
m. The condition of junctions ahead of face line started deteriorating with the advance of face and
some junctions experienced localized fall of coal parting. Under hard roof management plan, stone
roof blasting was practiced for induced caving but the height of blasting was limited to 2-4 m inside
the stone roof only. The panel experienced major face collapse after a 12380 m2 area of goaf exposure, which led to closure of the panel. The face collapse was mainly due to dynamic loading of pillars during a major roof fall inside the goaf. The position of the face at the time of closure is shown in
Fig. 3. Here, the important point to be observed was the complete failure of junctions parting in the
middle of the face. There was a partial failure of associated pillars but exact configuration of the failure was difficult to map as the area was unapproachable.
BG method of coal mining follows conventional diagonal line of extraction, where the size of the pillars facing goaf line is also progressively reduced by ring hole blasting during the depillaring. This
reduction invites threat of overriding/violent failure due to drop in their strength and stiffness. As
shown in Fig. 2, the laboratory scale specimen becomes elasto-plastic when the w/h ratio approaches nearly 8.
Top
No.3 seam
of GDK8
2.5 m
Top
17.2m
4.2m
2.5 m
4.2m
10.5 m
4.2m
Bottom
4.2m
2.5 m
Developed
gallery
Split
2.5 m
Ring hole drilling from the split
Fig. 4 : Ring holes to win roof and side coal in the B G method (superimposed development)
Staggered Development
Laboratory study clearly indicated [7] the significance of eccentricity between lower and upper pillar
workings for the stability of the parting between the two close developments. The word eccentricity
indicates the horizontal centre-to-centre distance between the two nearest roadways in top and bottom sections. It is observed that if the parting is thin then eccentricity becomes even more important
parameter and maximum eccentricity provides best safety for the parting. This finding contradicts the
conventional approach that the superimposed developments of contiguous sections are safer. In
fact, the superimposed development provides ideal condition for pillar load transfer but such workings are not possible if the parting between the two developments is not stable. Even the pillar load
transfer phenomenon remains a trivial factor during development of the seam as very little amount of
stress redistribution takes place at this juncture of working. Depillaring of contiguous sections in descending order makes the pillar load transfer phenomenon significant mainly due to high value of
mining induced stresses over the pillars. But the underwinning during BG method makes the top section redundant and total mining activity is confined to bottom section only. Here, it is interesting to
262
POSTALE 2008
note that the staggered development creates a condition of single section from strata control point of
view.
Results of investigations on simulated models showed that maximum eccentricity of both i.e. dip-rise
and level roadways was the best option from safety point of view. But, keeping final operation of the
BG method in mind, a different pattern of staggering (Fig. 5) was attempted. For this, the bottom diprise galleries were proposed with maximum eccentricity while the level galleries were staggered in
such a way that the split galleries for ring hole blasting encountered maximum eccentricity.
15.5m
35.3
25.7m
L
5.4m
35.3m
L
Top:
Bottom:
Fig. 5 : Appropriate strategy of staggered bottom section development (plan & section) for
the BG method for no. 3 seam of GDK-8 incline.
With above mentioned amount of staggering, the existing top section development is unlikely to play
any role in diluting the strength of the parting between the two contiguous sections. Relatively, stiffer
natural support was created by the staggered development due to improvement in side confinement
of the pillars facing goaf line (Fig. 6) during single lift working of whole thickness in one lift by BG
method. Superimposed development of contiguous sections of a thick coal seam provides better
condition for the safety of underground structures during conventional multi-sectional depillaring in
descending order. Goaf of full height lowers the strength of the pillars facing goaf line, as the height
of the pillar is inversely proportional to its strength. In comparison to staggered development of the
contiguous sections of a thick seam, the superimposed development further dilutes strength of the
pillars as side confinement towards face side is also reduced due to presence of the openings along
roof and floor horizons.
Field trial
Application of staggered bottom section development based on Blasting Gallery method for full
thickness extraction in single lift was planned in another panel of the same coal seam of GDK-8 incline because the No. 3 seam of 10.5 m thickness was already developed along roof horizon at this
mine. For this purpose BG panel no. II/3 was selected and staggered development along floor was
263
POSTALE 2008
made exactly as per the strategy shown in Fig. 5. Underground instrumentation was done to monitor
the performance of the trial in the panel. A number of selected observation stations were equipped
with different types of instruments to record parameters like roof to floor closure, mining induced
stress over pillars, load on support and bed separation in overlying roof strata. Here, the size of the
top section pillars was 39.5 x 39.5 m (center to center) while that of staggered bottom section was 66
x 40 m (center to center). Roadway dimensions in the two sections were same as those of the panel
II/2. Cover over the panel varied from 313 to 330 m and the pattern of depillaring was similar to that
of the panel II/2. Again in this panel, 2-4 m thick stone roof was blasted down inside the goaf but the
panel experienced a major roof fall inside the goaf after a 13382 m2 area of goaf exposure. This fall
was quite intensive in nature as some air push was also experienced during the fall. However, this
fall did not dilute the face condition and working remained problem free. Probably, this was experienced mainly due to the competency of the natural support under the condition of staggered bottom
section development.
Pillar under high value

of mining induced
35.3 m
Goaf of normal height
4.2m 2.5m
10 m
10.5
4.2m 2.5m
Goaf of full
height

of mining induced
35.3 m
10 m
4.2m 2.5m
10.5
4.2m 2.5m
Goaf of full
height

of mining induced
4.2m 2.5m
10 m
10.5 m
17.2
35.3 m
4.2m 2.5m
NOT TO SCALE
Fig. 6: Three different goaf conditions for three different approaches for mining of a thick coal seam
developed along roof: A) Top section depillaring for conventional multi-sectional working with superimposed development of contiguous sections, B) Complete thickness extraction with superimposed
bottom section development and C) Full height working with staggered bottom section development.
264
POSTALE 2008
In addition to the study of strata control parameters with respect to face advance, visual observation
of response of the underground structures was also made for different face positions during the depillaring in the panel. It was observed that the dynamic loading during major roof fall also failed to
cause any pillar/roof instability ahead of the face. Monitoring of mining induced stresses was done
using vibrating wire sensors. Remote indicating convergence indicators (RCIs) were installed at the
top section roadways to monitor roof to floor closure while that of the bottom section development
was measured by telescopic rod only. The readout units and cables of the stress sensors and RCIs
were taken out of the working to get information even after the area became inaccessible. Results of
all these measurements with face advance did not show any serious strata control problem during
the depillaring.
CONCLUSIONS
Massiveness of our coal measure formations makes it bit difficult to extract complete thickness of a
thick seam in single lift. This problem becomes even more difficult if the thick seam is already developed on pillars along roof horizon. Superimposed development of bottom section of the coal seam
for single lift working may create instability problems. It may become more problematic during working below a competent roof stratum difficult to cave in. The method of staggered development of the
bottom section for under winning of roof coal is found to be effective for single lift working of a thick
coal seam, already developed along the roof horizon. Different laboratory investigations supported
this idea. Successful field trial in BG panel II/3 of GDK-8 incline followed by adoption of this approach for whole property has proved the efficacy of the method showing maximum pillar stability
without any strata control problem.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Authors are obliged to Director, CIMFR, for his permission to present this paper. The results of this
paper are partially based on an industry sponsored project funded by the Singareni Collieries Company Limited (SCCL), Kothagudem. Author is indebted to the General Manager, RG-II area, SCCL
for providing help during the field study. Thanks are due to the mine management of GDK-8 incline
and Directorate General of Mines Safety (DGMS) for their valuable co-operation during the field observation.
REFERENCES
Singh, R., and Singh T. N. Investigation into the behaviour of a support system and roof strata during sublevel caving of a thick
coal seam. Geological and geo-technical engineering an international journal, 1999; 17(1): 21-35.
Singh, R., 1999. Mining methods to overcome geo-technical problems during underground winning of thick coal seams case
studies. Transactions of Institute of Mining and Metallurgy (IMM), UK, 108:A121-A131.
Verma, B. P., Prasad, S. and Dhar, B. B. Blasting gallery method and its support design a critical analysis. Proceedings of International Symposium on Thick Seam Mining (Editors: T. N. Singh and B. B. Dhar), CMRI, Dhanbad, India, 1992. p. 471492.
Singh, R., Singh, A. K., Mandal, P. K., Singh O. P. & Buragohain, J. A novel method for underground extraction of a critically thick
coal seam standing on pillars and the development made along the roof horizon. Minetech, Ranchi, 2002; 23(1&2): 3-11.
Das M. N. Influence of width/height ratio on post failure behaviour of coal. International Journal of Mining and Geological Engineering, 1986. 4: 79-87.
Sarkar, S. K and Chatterjee, T. K. Single lift extraction of thick seam by longwall mining under Indian geo-mining conditions, Proceedings of International Symposium on Thick Seam Mining (Editors: T. N. Singh and B. B. Dhar), CMRI, Dhanbad, India,
1992. p. 213-224.
CMRI Report. Parting stability and support requirement in Queen seam for extraction by Blasting Gallery method at 21 incline,
Yellandu Area, SCCL. Unpublished Report of a project, 2001. p. 21.
265
POSTALE 2008
TESTING OF PERMITTED EXPLOSIVES SOME UNRESOLVED ISSUES

S. K. ROY, R. R. SINGH AND R. KUMAR
INTRODUCTION
Explosives meant for use in underground coalmines i.e. permitted explosives, should meet the statutory requirements of incendivity characteristics in gassy and coal dust atmospheres when checked
under conditions specified in IS 6609 (Part II / Sec 2)1 for different groups of permitted explosives.
Permitted explosives should possess adequate initiation sensitivity exhibited by their cap sensitivity,
air gap sensitivity and continuity of detonation properties. They should also exhibit satisfactory shelf
life and the toxic fume generated by the explosives should be within the stipulated ranges. Additionally, P5 group of permitted explosive should be of non-deflagrating type.
Only permitted explosives approved by Directorate General of Mines Safety (DGMS), statutory authority for mines safety in India, can be used in Indian underground coal mines. In India, three types
of permitted explosives, namely (i) Permitted (ordinary) or P1 explosive, (ii) Permitted (equivalent to
sheathed) or P3 explosive, & (iii) Permitted (for solid blasting) or P5 explosive, are commonly manufactured and approved for use in underground coal mines. Incendivity test described in IS 6609 (Part
II/Sec 2) for categorisation of permitted explosives into P1, P3 & P5 groups in India is similar to Testing Memorandum (TM 2) of U.K. 2 Apart from P1, P3 & P5 permitted explosives, there is a specially
designed explosive-cord system approved for use only in Blasting Gallery (BG) method in India.3
Breaking of coal using explosives in Bord & Pillar method in Indian underground mines is done with
(i) P3 / P1 explosives in cut face blasting & depillaring operation, and (ii) P5 explosives in solid blasting
in development faces. Use of P1 explosive is restricted to only degree I mines with charge limitation
of maximum 800 g per hole. P3 explosives can be used in degree II & III mines with maximum
charge weight of 1000 g per hole. Maximum charge per hole allowed for P5 explosives are 1000 g
and 565g in degree-I and higher degree gassy mines respectively. Out of three permitted types used
in India, P5 explosives are the safest. Only P5 explosives can be used in solid blasting with permitted
delay detonators.4
Out of the total production from underground coal mines, around 95% comes from Bord and Pillar
method and 1% from Blasting Gallery method through drilling and blasting techniques using permitted explosives. Total demand of permitted explosives in India exists presently at around 25000
tonne, out of which 60% of the total is for only P5 type5 which are much higher than that in any other
country. This trend is likely to continue in near future. Possibly, quantity of permitted explosives used
in India will increase due to higher projected growth of production from underground coal mines.
Thus, some issues related to testing of permitted explosive needs to be resolved to maintain high
level of safety standard observed over last 50 years of usage of permitted explosive in India, as well
as to meet expectation of the user industries in increasing production and productivity of underground coal mines.
UNRESOLVED ISSUES
With advancement in the explosive technology and mining methods, Indian explosive industry and
concerned government organisations e.g. CIMFR, DGMS, PESO, BIS etc. need to resolve the following issues related to testing of permitted explosives for maintaining safety & quality aiming at
higher production and productivity in Indian underground coal mines:Incendivity Studies With 32mm Diameter Cartridges
Permitted explosives are commercially marketed in 32mm diameter cartridges. Most of the tests related to sensitivity, performance, post detonation fumes, deflagration etc. applicable for permitted
POSTALE 2008
explosives in India are specified and carried out using commercially available cartridge sizes i.e. with
32mm diameter cartridges. Only incendivity test in cannon gallery set-up, which is the most important test related to safety of permitted explosives, is carried out with specially made 37mm diameter
cartridges as per IS IS:6609 (Part II/Sec2). There is no method and passing criteria for incendivity
test with 32mm diameter cartridges of permitted explosives. Therefore, surprise check of most important safety property of permitted explosive i.e. incendivity characteristics, is not possible with
commercially supplied batches of permitted explosives. Even in case of the untoward incidence involving explosives in mines, investigations with incendivity studies of 32mm diameter cartridges remain inconclusive.
Field incidences while using permitted explosives had been reported from time to time where explosives have misbehaved leading to causality /fatality of the working personnel. In Bhatdeeh Colliery of
ECL while using ICI make Soligex (P5) explosives, there was a methane/ coaldust explosion. To
check the incendivity characteristics of the explosives, 32 mm diameter commercial cartridges had to
be re-cartridged in 37 mm diameter which showed ignition in the cannon-gallery setup at CMRI (now
CIMFR). But the result was objected by ICI with the words that re-cartridging of the explosives has
lost its characteristics and that is why it has caused ignition in cannon gallery set-up. Similarly, in
Swang Colliery of CCL, while using Colex (P5) slurry explosives there was an explosion. On request
from DGMS, investigations were carried out with only 32 mm diameter cartridges (available from the
field magazine) and it was found that the explosive do not meet the specified criteria of no ignition
out of 20 shots in cut-off condition in inflammable methane-air mixture in cannon gallery set-up. But
due to lack of established standards for tests with 32 mm diameter cartridges, the investigations remained inconclusive. Similarly, after firedamp explosion in Nagda Mine (17 Incline) of Bhatdih Colliery, BCCL on 06.09.2006, 32mm diameter cartridges of Solarcoal-5 being used in the mine was
seized and was sent for incendivity studies at CIMFR. Incendivity studies were carried out with
32mm diameter cartridges of Solarcoal-5 under same conditions as specified in IS 6609 (Part II / Sec
2) for 37mm diameter cartridges. Although, no ignition were observed in incendivity studies, but it
was difficult to conclude the studies because there is no existing standard for incendivity studies with
32mm diameter cartridges in India.6
Therefore, it is necessary to develop a test method and passing criteria for incendivity characteristics
of permitted explosives using 32mm diameter cartridges, which is equivalent to existing standard.
This has become more necessary because of coming up of large number of explosive manufacturers
in the field of permitted explosive without adequate R&D set-up. Necessity for development of standard methodology for assessment of incendivity characteristics of 32mm diameter permitted explosives was emphasized in the recommendations of the workshop on "Testing of Permitted Explosives", held at DGMS, Dhanbad in Feb., 1994.7 Moreover, during the review meeting on Testing of
Permitted Explosives on 27.11.2003 at DGMS, Dhanbad, it was suggested that CMRI (now CIMFR)
should take an S&T project on the subject for generating sufficient data towards development of
standard method for assessment of incendivity characteristics with 32 mm diameter cartridges.8 One
S&T project on this topic has been granted by Ministry of Coal and work is under progress.9 But, it
has not yet been concluded due to unexpected delay in purchase / fabrication of suitable cannon
and liners.
Source Of Supply For Cannons
Cannon-gallery set-up for incendivity tests in India is at Explosive & Explosion Laboratory of Central
Institute of Mining and Fuel Research (CIMFR). Cannon gallery set-up at CIMFR, shown in figure 1,
was established in 1960s with technical guidance and supply from U.K and is similar to Buxton test
set-up. The cannon used for firing of explosives during incendivity test has diameter of 45cm and it is
made up of special steel using three members as shown in figure 2. Specifications of different members of cannon are given in Table 1. There is an axial bore of 55m diameter and 120cm length in the
innermost member (liner) of the cannon for firing the explosive.
267
POSTALE 2008
Can-
Gal-
Fig. 1 : Cannon gallery set-up at CIMFR
Outer Mem-
Intermediate
Innermost Mem-
Fig. 1 : Schematic Diagram Of Cannon

Table 1 : Specifications Of Cannon
Specifications
Outside diameter
Inside diameter
Length
Material
Outer Member
18 inch 1/32 inch
8 inch / 12 inch taper
1/32 inch
5 feet 1/32 inch
1.5% Chrome, 0.75%
Nickel, 0.35% Molybdenum Forged Steel, Oil
Hardened & Tempered
condition having Brinell
Hardness of 280/320.
Intermediate Member
8 inch / 12 inch taper 1/32
inch
4.5 inch / 7.5 inch taper
1/32 inch
5 feet 1/32 inch
Innermost Member
4.5 inch / 7.5 inch taper
1/32 inch
55 mm inside diameter for
a length of 4.0 feet
5 feet 1/32 inch
1.5% Chrome, 0.75% Nickel,

0.35% Molybdenum Forged
Steel, Oil Hardened & Tempered condition having Brinell
Hardness of 280/320.
2.5%
Chrome,
0.75%
Nickel, 0.35% Molybdenum
Forged Steel, Oil Hardened
& Tempered condition having Brinell Hardness of
340/360.
268
POSTALE 2008
Every shot of explosives fired inside the cannon produces some indentations in the innermost member (liner) of the cannon. After firing sufficient number of shots, the indentation produced in the liner
may become large enough. Increase in the volume of the bore in the cannon may adversely affect
the result of incendivity studies. Therefore, old liner of the cannon needs to be replaced with a new
liner periodically. Existing stock of liners at CIMFR purchased initially from UK has exhausted and
now new liners need to be purchased urgently. Unfortunately, M/s Dunford Hadfields Limited, UK
from where these initial liners were purchased previously has closed their factory. Officials related to
testing of permitted explosives in UK and Australia also could not suggest any reliable source of
supply in their countries.
CIMFR floated global press tenders thrice for purchase of new cannons and liners. But, there were
no response from any party. Later, on our persuasion two indigenous parties namely (i) M/s Heavy
Engineering Corporation (HEC) Limited, Ranchi and (ii) M/S Shakticast Private Limited, Dhanbad
quoted for liners and were issued purchase orders. M/s HEC have so far not supplied the liner even
after two years from date of issue of purchase order and have requested for further extension. M/s
Shakticast supplied a liner and that was fitted to our existing cannon, but, that liner ruptured in three
shots.
As liner of the cannon is not a regular product of any company and its demand is also occasional
with CIMFR being the only probable customer, no big companies take interest in this type of work.
On the other hand, small fabricators do not want to invest as well as venture into this type of risky
one time job. Therefore, this issue of finding a reliable source of supply for liner has to be resolved
for continuation of incendivity testing facilities at CIMFR, Dhanbad
No Ignition Passing Criteria For P5 Explosive
Test conditions in cannon-gallery set-up for permitted explosives were designed in such a way that
with minimum possible number of trials, an explosive sample can be assessed for its suitability for
use in underground coal mines. As test conditions are much severer than the practical conditions of
usage, 50% ignitions (i.e. 13 ignitions out of 26 trials), when checked under inverse initiation condition in most inflammable methane-air mixture are permissible P1 & P3 explosives. But, the passing
criteria of permitted P5 explosives require that there should be no ignition in cannon gallery setup
under all three series of testing. Ramsay and Seager10 explained based on statistical analysis that
No Ignition Tests are poor discriminators. Thus, more discriminatory test conditions needs to be
devised for P5 explosives in which a certain proportion of ignition may be allowed. This would help in
ranking the P5 explosives with respect to incendivity in terms of number of ignitions observed. This
may be helpful in categorizing P5 explosives as per their safety standard so that selected P5 explosives with highest safety characteristics can be approved for highly gassy degree-III coal mines.
Concept Of Repeat Incendivity Test
A new permitted explosive can be commercially marketed by the manufacturer only after it has gone
through following processes:
Approval of formulation for manufacture at pilot scale from Petroleum and Explosive Safety
Organisation (PESO) based on satisfactory results of checks carried out by Controller of Explosives,
Satisfactory results of evaluation of safety, sensitivity, shelf life, post detonation fumes, performance etc. characteristics at CIMFR,
Approval of DGMS for field trial, and
Submission of satisfactory results of field trials in proper format from mine management and
DGMS officials who witnessed the field trials.
After approval of new explosive/ accessories, it becomes the responsibility of the respective manufacturers to maintain the quality and safety of these explosive products same as that was checked
and approved. It has been felt by the concerned governmental bodies that there should be a concept
269
POSTALE 2008
of periodic check of safety and quality of the explosives and accessories in general and permitted
explosives in particular, drawn from the field magazines, but so far no such practise are there in existence.
Nowadays, user industries have introduced a concept of random quality check of the explosive
products supplied by different manufacturers. These random checks for permitted explosives cover
mostly performance related parameters (e.g. velocity of detonation, density etc.) and air gap sensitivity. Unfortunately, incendivity test, which is the most important test related to safety of permitted explosive, has not been included amongst them. It is a known fact that any effort to improve velocity of
detonation, density, air gap sensitivity etc. can influence the incendivity characteristics of permitted
explosives. Therefore, the concept of repeat incendivity test is necessary to ensure safety of permitted explosives. This has become more imperative because of the fact that many explosives manufacturers have come up in the country with little or no R&D backed quality control concepts in practice.
Moreover, with cut-throat competition amongst the Indian manufactures to become or match the
lowest quoting (LQ1) firm to get order for supply of permitted explosives in major user industries like
CIL, SCCL etc., they sometimes may have to resort to alternate ingredients or alternate source of
supply for major, vital and costly ingredients used in manufacture of permitted explosives. As even
minor change in percentage of any ingredient or even change of source of supply for ingredients
used in permitted explosives can influence their incendivity characteristics, repeat incendivity test of
approved permitted explosives should be carried out after any such changes and periodically also to
verify their safety for use in underground coal mines.
This issue of repeat incendivity test was discussed in detail in a meeting held at DGMS, Dhanbad on
27.11.2003 and a committee was constituted, with DGMS (MSE) being the convener, to look into this
matter and decide periodicity of repeat incendivity test for different group of permitted explosives. So
far, no meeting of this committee has been held in last five years.
Direction Of Research On Permitted Explosive
The explosive industry in India has come a long way from a stage of total import dependency to the
stage of self-sufficiency and now poised to become one of the largest exporter.11 The first plant for
manufacture of high explosives in India was inaugurated by the then President of India Dr. Rajendra
Prasad at Gomia, Bihar (now Jharkhand) in year 1958 under the ownership of ICI India Ltd., a fully
owned subsidiary of ICI, UK. Presently there are 64 explosive manufacturing companies in the country both in medium and SSI scale having installed capacity of 1703MT of Gun Powder, 17,70,550MT
of high explosives, 216 million metres of safety fuse, 467 million meters of detonating fuse and 883
million nos. of detonators.12 Out of these, fifteen manufacturers were producing permitted explosives.
Some of the leading Indian manufactures producing permitted explosives were having well established in-house R&D establishments and were actively working for innovation and improvement of
permitted explosives. However, during recent years it has been observed that most of them have
drastically reduced manpower in R&D set-up and squeezed their R&D expenditure in order to reduce
overheads to compete in the market where LQ1 only matters. Direction of present R&D in most of
the Indian explosive manufactures has concentred mostly on cost-reduction rather than innovation.
There was a time when Indian School of Mines (ISM), Department of Explosive and National Institute
of Rock Mechanics (NIRM) considered setting up of a parallel facility for incendivity studies of permitted explosive similar to CIMFR. However, it might not have seemed economically feasible and thus
probably ideas were dropped. On the other hand, in the recent years number of permitted explosives
evaluated at CIMFR has reduced to such a low level that maintaining such infra-structure may be
unviable for long period. Thus, all concerned organisation have to give a look into this issue so that
one and only facility in India for incendivity studies at CIMFR can continue its services.
270
POSTALE 2008
Passing Criteria For Special Type Of Explosives

Out of three series of tests carried out in cannon gallery set-up to assess the incendivity characteristics of P1, P3 and P5 explosives as per conditions specified in IS 6609 (Part II / Sec 2), two series of
tests are conducted in inflammable gassy atmosphere containing 8.0 0.25% methane in natural
gas air mixture and one in inflammable coal dust atmosphere. In terms of number of trial to assess
the incendivity characteristics of P1, P3 and P5 explosives, 31 shots for P1 & P3 and 25 shots for P5
explosives are carried out in inflammable gassy atmosphere and only 5 trials for all three permitted
explosives in coal dust atmosphere. Thus, present system of evaluation of permitted explosives for
its safety in inflammable atmosphere emphasises more on tests in highly inflammable gassy atmosphere. In contrast, some of the degree I mines in India are practically nongassy and thus there are
negligible chance of occurrence of methane. Checking permitted explosives in severer condition before its approval may guarantee us highest level of safety. But, the explosives which are finally approved after such tests may not be of adequate strength to meet the user expectations in terms of
performance at the face. An average pull of 0.9-1.1m and yield of 10-16 tonnes per blast in solid
blasting with gallery dimensions of 3.5 - 4.5m width and 2.0 3.0m height in different geo-mining
conditions have never been considered satisfactory for optimum utilisation of men and machines at
faces and more so after semi-mechanisation of underground coal mines with introduction of SDL and
LHDs.
The question remains do we require such high level of safety even for non-gassy mines of degree I
category at the cost of low productivity which is plaguing our underground coal mining Industry? This
question may be partially answered by the practical approach adopted for expeditious development
of non-NG explosive-cord system. Highly productive Blasting Gallery (BG) method of mining thick
seams suffered a setback NG explosives were banned by Govt. of India because one and only explosive-cord system approved for use in BG method was of NG-based. Therefore, it had become
imperative to develop non-NG explosive & cord system by March, 2006 for continuation of production from BG panels of Indian coal mines.
Indian manufactures were trying to develop slurry or emulsion explosive-cord system for use in
Blasting Gallery method. About 85 different slurry / emulsion explosive compositions were tried but
none of them could meet the initial requirement in inflammable gassy atmosphere containing 8.0
0.25% methane in natural gas air mixture. As BG method is applied only in degree-I mines where
the desorbable gas content of the seam and the adjoining strata should not exceed 0.1m3/ tonne of
coal, it was decided in a meeting at DGMS office on 26.03.2004 to study promising explosive samples in hybrid atmosphere containing 3.0% methane in natural gas air mixture + pre-dispersed coal
dust in the gallery and dispense with test series in inflammable gassy atmosphere. This relaxation in
use of only hybrid atmosphere along with some innovative thinking of use of FRP tube, reduction in
diameter of explosive cartridges etc. helped in successful development of first and only emulsion
based Powerring Powercord system for use in Blasting Gallery method just before the deadline of
March, 2006 and thus helped in continuation of production from BG panels in India. This newly developed Powerring-Powercord system is being used successfully for last three years.
Thus, a more practical approach for designing test conditions and approval criteria for permitted explosives meant for use in degree-I mines with low or negligible methane content may provide us a
way for awaited improvement in production and productivity of Indian underground coalmines. This
issue needs to be given proper attention by all concerned agencies.
CONCLUSION
Permitted explosives are those explosives, which are approved by the statutory authority for use in
underground coal mines. Incendivity test is the most important test for permitted explosives, which is
deigned to assess their safety in inflammable atmospheres likely to be present in the underground
coal mines. In order to implement random / surprised checking of incendivity characteristics of commercially marketed permitted explosives, a standard method for evaluation of incendivity characteris-
271
POSTALE 2008
tics with 32mm diameter cartridges needs to be finalised. This will also help in investigations of accidents involving permitted explosives. A more discriminatory method and passing criteria for approval
of P5 explosives may also have to be evolved. Successful development and implementation of newly
developed first and only non-NG explosive cord system, namely Powerring Powercord, for use in
Blasting Gallery panels in degree-I mines after judicious reduction in severity of testing conditions
may be extended for development of special permitted explosive products suitable for nearly nongassy Degree-I mines aiming at much awaited improvement production and productivity of underground coal mines.
Present trend of reducing R&D expenditure by even established manufacturers and coming up of
new manufacturers with bare minimum R&D establishment, possibly because of LQ1 policy adopted
by major user industries in purchase of explosive products, are serious issues and need immediate
attention by all concerned. Difficulties in finding reliable source of supplier for new liners of the cannon and drastic reduction in R&D or testing activities related to permitted explosive products by Indian explosive manufactures in recent years have posed a serious threat on survival of one and only
facility in India at CIMFR for evaluation of incendivity characteristics of permitted explosives.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Authors are grateful to Director, Central Institute of Mining and Fuel Research for his kind permission for submission of this paper in POSTALE, 2008. Thanks are extended to the colleagues and
staff members of Explosive & Explosion Laboratory for their co-operation. The views expressed in
this paper are that of authors and not necessarily the organisation to which they belong.
REFERENCES
1. Indian Standard IS: 6609 (Part II / Sec 2): Methods of Test for Commercial Blasting Explosives and Accessories, Part II : Explosives, Section 2: Explosives, Permitted, Indian Standard Institutions, Manak Bhawan, New Delhi, India, 1974, pp 3-14.
2. TM 2 Testing Memorandum: Test and approval of explosives for use in coal mines and other mines in which flammable gas
may be a hazard, Health and Safety Executives, U.K., October 1988, pp 1-6.
3. Sawmliana, C. and Pal Roy, P. : Improving fragmentation during ringhole balsting in coal in Blasting Gallery panels. Proceedings of 29th Annual Conference on Explosives and Blasting Techniques, International Society of Explosive Engineers, February 2-5, 2003, Nashville, Tennessee, USA, Vol. II, pp 411-243.
4. S.K. Roy, R.R. Singh , R. Kumar & U.K. Dey, Studies into the Possible Use of Air Decking in Solid Blasting in Underground
Coal Mines, Accepted for publication in Institution of Mining & Metallurgy (Section A: Mining Technology), U.K., Vol 117, No. 2,
2008, pp 83-92.
5. Mohan, K. (1999) - Recent Developments in Explosives National Seminar on Explosives: Safety & Technology, Visfotak98,
Nagpur, India, Nov. 1998, pp-1-7.
6. Unpublished CIMFR Report on Evaluation of incendivity behaviour and other properties of explosive and detonators supplied
by BCCL Project No.- GC/MS/125/2006-07.
7. Directorate General of Mines Safety Recommendations of the Workshop on Testing of Permitted Explosives held on 7-8 February, 1994 at Directorate General of Mines Safety, Dhanbad, India, 4p.
8. Minutes of meeting Testing of Permitted Explosives held at DGMS Dhanbad on 27.11.200, 2p.
9. CMRI report of GAP project on Optimisation of production from underground coal mines by achieving longer pull Phase I,
submitted to Department of Coal, Ministry of Coal & Mines, Govt. of India, 2005.
10. Ramsay, H.T. and Seager, J.S. (1961) - On the Influence of the Permitted Ignition Rate in the Assessment of Explosives,
Safety in Mines Research Establishment Report No. 209, Sept. 1961.
11. Vakil, R.D., 1998. Issues & Concerns Explosives Industry. Keynote address in National Seminar on Explosives: Safety &
Technology, Visfotak98, Nagpur, India, Nov. 1998, pp. 11-14.
12. Annual report of Petroleum & Safety Organisation of 2006-07.
272
National Seminar on Policies, Statutes & Legislation in Mine
POSTALE 2008
POST-MINING SUBSIDENCE IMPACTS SOIL FERTILITY IN DRY

DECIDUOUS TROPICAL FOREST, INDIA
N. TRIPATHI, R. S. SINGH, K. B. SINGH AND B. K. TEWARY
Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research, Dhanbad.
INTRODUCTION
India has the worlds third-largest hard coal reserves, after the United States and China, with an output
of 328 million tonnes in 2001-02. Public sector coal companies contribute 95% of Indias coal production, of which Coal India Limited accounts for 80% and Singareni Collieries Company Limited for 10%.
Other companies like TISCO & captive mining firms make up the balance
(http://www.iea.org/textbase/nppdf/free /2000/coalindia2002.pdf.accessed 30/08/2008).
As a consequence of increased demand for energy, more and more coal is being mined and processed. Underground coal mining has been considered environmentally safe and becoming more wide
spread, but it has caused a large amount of land subsidence leading to damage of surface features,
structures, losses of farmland and undulation of land surface (Hu and Gu, 1995). The problem of surface subsidence is rapidly becoming an important environmental consideration of active as well as
abandoned mining operations in the USA and other countries. The damages attributed to this phenomenon range from simple land settlement to severe structural damage and have been experienced
in both rural and urban areas spreading across thirty states (Karmis, et al. 1982).
Subsidence impact on agriculture land have been studied in United Kingdom, Illinois, Australia, South
Africa, and China (Hu and Gu, 1995). These effects include soil erosion, disruption of surface and
subsurface drainage, wet or ponded areas, and reduction of crop yields. Development of large cracks
at the soil surface after subsidence can pose a hazard and may alter soil hydrology. Landscapes with
erosive soils on long slopes may be subject to increased erosion potential because of slope increase
or displacement of erosion control structures (Tripathi et al, 2008). The disturbances due to subsidence can also alter nitrogen availability in the soil.
Root biomass is the largest fraction of the biological material in most arable soils. They comprise a
substantial portion of forest ecosystems, generally accounting for 15 to 25 percent of total biomass.
Roots can return nutrients to the soil in several ways: death and decay, exudation and leaching, and,
indirectly, when consumed by grazers (Tripathi et al, 2008). Microbial biomass is considered a labile
reservoir of plant-available nutrients (Brookes, 2001) and is an important live, dynamic component of
soil organic C. Soil microbial biomass constitutes a transformation matrix for all the natural organic
materials in the soil and is responsible for the associated mineralization of important nutrients that
regulate plant productivity (Cleveland et al., 2004).
There is no information available for changes in soil nitrogen transformation rates, soil microbial biomass and fine root biomass along the mine subsidence gradient from the Indian dry tropical forest
ecosystem. According to Ministry of Environment and Forest, Govt. of India guidelines issued on 27th
March, 2000, all the underground coal mining industry situated below forest land will have to quantify
the impact of subsidence due to mining under the forest land with respect to changes in soil fertility
and forest cover.
Therefore, the present study was aimed towards the assessment of the impact of underground mining
subsidence gradient on the land soil characteristics with particular reference to nitrogen transformation, microbial biomass N, fine root biomass and root tips counts. We hypothesize that the land subsidence after coal extraction has profound effects on soil microbial biomass and nitrogen transformation
rates in dry tropical soils due to damage of plant root biomass and depression of land surface.
POSTALE 2008
MATERIALS AND METHODS

The study site (5B incline Mine spread over an area of 2.85 km2) is located in Singareni Coalfields of
Singareni Collieries Company Ltd. (SCCL), Kothagudem (Andhra Pradesh, India) at 17030 N latitude
and 80040 E longitude. The topography is almost undulating plain terrain to gently sloping towards the
river Godavari in the southeast with the average elevation varying from 119m to 157m above mean
sea level. There is no effective drainage developed in this area due to sandy soil cover and number of
faults and fractures.
The climate is seasonally tropical and divisible into 3 distinct seasons, namely, rainy (mid June to October), winter (November to February) and hot summer (March to mid June). According to the mean
monthly rainfall data (1996-2006) of Kothagudem, the annual rainfall of the area is 1084 mm, being
maximum in July (300.31 mm) and minimum in January (7.82 mm). The study site receives about
86.8% of rainfall during S-W monsoon and 7.4% during N-E monsoon season. The mean air temperature varies from as low as 11.42C in December to as high as 46.6C during May. The predominant
wind direction is southeast to west. The relative humidity of the area fluctuates from 49% during February to 73.21% during April (CIMFR, 2007).
Vegetation of this region has been classified as Southern Tropical Dry Deciduous Forest (Champion
and Seth, 1968). The total forest area is spread over an area of 748,882 ha, constituting nearly
46.72% of the total geographical area. The density of forest ranges from 45-65 stems 100m2. The forest is dominated by Tectona grandis. The other co-dominant species are Holarrhena antidysentrica,
Hardwikia binata, Chloroxylon swietenia, etc. The ground flora is dominated with Andrographis paniculata, Gymnema sylvestris, etc (ICFRE, 2004).
The coal of Godavari Valley Coalfields belongs to Lower and Upper Gondwana. Lower Gondwana
consists of the Talchir, Barakar, and Kamthi series and the Upper Gondwana are classified into Maleri,
Kota and Chikiala formations. The average thickness of Barakar formation is about 100-200 m. The
average thickness of soil in the area is about 1.5 m. Alluvium soil layer is of recent origin, underlain by
Kamthis, Barakars and Talchirs boulder bed (CIMFR, 2007). The texture of the soil is mostly sandy
loam. The pH of the soil extract varies from 6.0 to 7.9. In terms of soil pH, the soil characteristics vary
from slightly acidic to moderately alkaline nature.
A panel is an area demarcated for the excavation of coal. The surface subsidence investigation was
conducted over the selected panels MK-4 A-19, 5B N-31, 5B N-18 and MK4 Y-12. Formation of cracks
occurred in tensile strain zone at the edge of panel. The angle of break varied from about 50 -100 from
the vertical (Fig.1) (CIMFR, 2007). All the trees lying at the edge of the subsided sites were lying down
with broken roots.
One plot, 100 100 m in size, in undamaged forest (undisturbed microsite) and one plot, 1010 m in
size, and in the subsided panel area, were selected for the study. Each soil sample was divided into
two parts. One part in the field-moist condition was used for the measurement of available nutrients
(NO3-N, NH4-N and PO4-P). The other part was used for the determination of dry weight, total organic
C, total N and total P, pH, water holding capacity (WHC) and bulk density (BD) by standard methods.
Soil pH was measured by Orion Ion Analyzer.
Organic C of soil was determined by Walkley Blacks method and total N by modified Kjeldahl method
(Jackson, 1958), total P was determined by Mehta, et al. (1954), fine root and root tips by Tripathi et
al (2008). Microbial biomass and N-transformation rate by (Brookes et al., 1985) and (Eno, 1960 and
Singh et al 1991), inorganic N (NO3-N and NH4-N) by Jackson, (1958), respectively.
RESULTS
The details of physico-chemical characteristics are given in Table 1. The mean values of bulk density
in undisturbed and subsided microsites were 1.14 and 1.02 gm-3, with minimum value in subsided and
274
POSTALE 2008
maximum values unsubsided site. Mean organic C content were 18,500 and 19,300 g g-1, with maximum values in subsided and minimum in unsubsided micro sites. Unsubsided microsites had the
higher percentage of coarse fraction of soil, while finer fraction percentage was maximum in subsided
microsites (Table 1). Mean total nitrogen and phosphorus contents were 1,530g g-1, and 17,894g g1
, respectively, with maximum values in depression microsites and minimum in unsubsided microsites.
Mean maximum soil moisture varied across the sites, being maximum (22.04%) in the subsided and
minimum (19.20%) in the unsubsided microsite. Soils of all the microsites were acidic in nature (pH
5.93-6.17).
Mean fine root biomass was maximum (102 g m-2) in subsided microsite and minimum (87.5 g m-2) in
unsubsided microsite. Compared to undisturbed microsites, the fine root biomass was higher in the
subsided microsites by 16.6%. Like fine root biomass, root tip count was also higher in subsided microsite (by 15% compared to forest).
The mean annual concentrations of nitrate and ammonia-N and phosphate-P were higher in subsided
microsite as compared to the undisturbed microsites. The values of nitrate-N across the sites ranged
from 6.0-7.8 g g-1, ammonia-N from 5.2-7.0 g g-1and phosphate-P from 4.4-6.5g g-1- respectively.
The higher inorganic nutrient contents in the subsided microsite are attributable to the higher organic
matter in subsided microsite.
There was a marked mean annual variation in soil microbial biomass N, The mean seasonal microbial
biomass N across the sites ranged from 28.17-48.55 g g-1 mo-1, respectively. The contribution of MBN
to total N across the sites ranged from 2.14-2.4%.
The mean annual values of net nitrification and net N-mineralization ranged from 4.8-5.8 g g-1 mo-1
and 7.6-9.6 g g-1 mo-1, respectively. Net nitrification and net N-mineralization rates were respectively
15% and 16% greater in depression microsite, when compared to the undisturbed microsite.
DISCUSSION
Our study indicated substantial changes in important soil physico-chemical characters due to subsidence, as demonstrated by differences among undisturbed and the subsided microsites. For example,
as compared to the undisturbed microsite, soil moisture, WHC, proportion of finer soil particles (silt +
clay), soil organic C, total N and P were higher in depression microsite, and the bulk density was
higher in undisturbed micro site. in the results have been discussed with reference to linkages between major resource pools and processes involved in N-cycling in terrestrial ecosystems as affected
by the soil environment. Figure 2 depicts a conceptual framework for these linkages.
Formation of cracks along the panel edge allows surface water to infiltrate more easily and increase
the hydraulic conductivity of soil horizon (Tripathi et al., 2008). The subsided panel contains maximum
moisture content in the center of the panel compared to undisturbed microsite (CMLR, 2001). The
greater C and N contents in the subsided microsites could be partly attributed to accumulation of surface run off organic matter, fall of leaf and other plant litter from the drying trees tilted towards depression microsite.
The reason for higher fine root biomass in subsided depression microsite may be the greater proliferation of roots due to higher soil moisture and greater accumulation of organic organic matter runoff from
the undisturbed microsite. Gordon and Jackson (2000) suggested that nutrient release from decomposing roots is a pathway of significant nutrient flux in terrestrial ecosystems and it is known that root
biomass provides a direct input of organic matter and mineral nutrients through exudation and upon
mortality. Root tips in subsided microsite were substantially higher than undisturbed micro sites presumably due to higher soil moisture and belowground biomass. Further, we observed a higher density
of ground vegetation on depression micro site which could also contribute to higher density of root tips.
In the present study, microbial biomass N was lower in unsubsided microsite due to slow growth of
plant roots, as shown by lesser number of root tips and lower fine root biomass. According to Garbeva
275
POSTALE 2008
et al. (2004), the main sources of easily accessible substrates for microbial growth are sites at root tips
and young roots. Several studies have found a positive correlation between clay content and MBC
(Poret-Peterson et al., 2007), presumably resulting from the capacity of clay to retain organic matter as
a substrate for microbial growth. Soil moisture strongly correlates with soil microbial biomass. In our
study, MBN was positively related to soil moisture, organic C, fine root biomass and root tips (Table 2).
The reasons for higher rates of nitrification and N-mineralization in subsided micro site, as found in our
study, appear to be high organic C, fine root biomass, total N, microbial biomass and moisture content.
Roots make a continuous contribution to soil organic matter through decay and their annual contribution to the organic pool can be as high as that from above-ground litter (Nadelhoffer et al., 1985). In
our study, there was a positive relationship of N-mineralization with soil moisture, organic C, total N
and microbial biomass.
Higher rates of N-mineralization and nitrification in the subsided depression microsite due to factors
discussed above, result in an increase in the inorganic (plant-available) nutrient concentration of the
soil in subsided microsite. Further, there is also a run-off of available nutrients from the slope microsite
towards the depression micro site.
LEGAL ASPECTS OF SUBSIDENCE
Coal companies anticipating subsidence as a consequence of mining need to contol the legal rights to
subside the surface. Subsidence rights were sometimes purchased by coal companies when the mineral rights were originally sold by the landowner. In other instances, if the coal company does not own
the surface, subsidence rights are included in negotiations with landowners before the actual mining.
Prior to the passage of Surface Mining Control and Reclamation Act) SMCRA there were no federal
regulations to control surface imapacts of subsidence. SMCRA addressed subsidence mitigation, but
deferred enforcement of that portion of the act to the states. Regulations were developed in Illinois by
1983 requiring coal companies to mitigate damage caused by subsidence. Coal companies were required to compentsate landowners or repair damage to structures and to restoe land use capability to
pre-mining conditions. This if different from regulations for surface minig of agricultural land that require restoration of agricultural productivity (Darmody http://www.mcrcc. osmre.gov/PDF/ Forums/
Prime % 20 Farmland % 201998/ 4d .pdf.). Ministry of Environment and Forests, Government of India has issued a guidelines in 2000 for submission of proposals under Forest Conservation Act, 1980
to different Indian mining companies for working below forest land. According to the guidelines, the
maximum permissible tensile strain and width of cracks for working below forest land are 20 mm/m
and upto 300 mm for environmental safe guard of forest area.
CONCLUSION
The land subsidence due to underground mine alters the soil physico-chemical characteristics, fine
root biomass, nitrogen transformation rates and the microbial biomass on land surface. Although several reports show the negative impact of underground mine subsidence on soil fertility status, microbial
populations and also plant biomass, a positive impact with respect to soil physico-chemical characteristics, plant available nutrients, fine root biomass and root tips count was found in the present study.
An increase in soil moisture enhances the production of fine root biomass, root tips and soil microbial
biomass in subsided micro sites, which resulted into an increased nutrient supply rate through enhanced nitrification and N-mineralization. These positive changes in soil and plant characteristics directly reflect the impact of subsidence on dry tropical forest ecosystems. Therefore, there is need of
further investigation in different forest ecosystems located in different phytogeographical regions of the
country to generalize the finding of this study.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Authors thank Prof, J.S. Singh, Department of Botany, BHU, Varanasi for giving the critical comments
and advice during the tenure of study. CMPDIL, Ranchi, Jharkhand is gratefully acknowledged for the
276
POSTALE 2008
financial support to this project. Thanks are also due to SCCL, Andhra Pradesh, India for rendering the
cooperation during studies.
REFERENCES
Aerts, R., 1990. Nutrient use efficiency in evergreen and deciduous species from heathlands. Oecologia 83, 391-397.
Brookes, P. 2001. The soil microbial biomass: concept, measurement and applications in soil ecosystem research. Microbes and
the Environments 16(3), 131-140.
Brookes, P.C., Landman, A., Pruden, G., Jenkinson, D.S., 1985. Chloroform fumigation and release of soil N: A rapid direct extraction method to measure microbial biomass N in soil. Soil Biology & Biochemistry 17, 837-842.
Cleveland, C. C., Townsend, A.R., Constance, B.C., Ley, R. E., Schmidt, S. K., 2004. Soil Microbial Dynamics in Costa Rica: Seasonal and Biogeochemical Constraints. Biotropica 36 (2), 184-195.
CIMFR, 2007. Environmental impact of subsidence movements caused due to caving on ground water and forest cover in Godavari
Valley Coalfields: Final Technical Report, submitted to CMPDIL, Ranchi (India).
CMLR, 2001. Impact of mine subsidence. ACARP Project C 8018: Effect of Longwall mine subsidence on plant production on cropping land. Black & Green 7, Australia.
Darmody, R.G. file http://www.mcrcc.osmre.gov/PDF/Forums/Prime%20Farmland% 201998/4d.pdf.
Eno, C.F., 1960 Nitrate production in the field by incubating the soil in polyethylene bags. Soil Science Society of America Proceedings, 24, 277-279.
Garbeva, P., van Veen, J.A., van Elsas, J.D., 2004. Microbial diversity in soil: selection of microbial populations by plant and soil
type and implications for disease suppressiveness. Annu. Rev. Phytopathol 42, 24370.
Gordon, W.S. and Jackson, R.B., 2000. Nutrient concentrations in fine roots. Ecology 81 (1), 275-280.
Hu, Z., Gu. H., 1995. Reclamation planning for abandoned mining subsidence lands in Eastern China: A case study. Internat. J.
Surface Mining and Environment 9, 129-132.
ICFRE Repot, 2004. Evaluation of changes likely to occur with the diversion of Reserve Forest on Flora and Fauna for realignment
of Tella-Vagu nallah at SCCL mine lease area, Kothagudem. By Environmental Impact Assessment Division, Directorate of Research, Indian Council of Forestry Research & Education, New Forest, Dehradun, India.
Jackson, M.L. 1958. Soil Chemical Analysis. Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs.
Karmis, N.Chen, C.Y. Jones, D.E. and Triplett, T. (1982). Some aspect of mine subsidence and its control in the US Coalfields.
Environmental Geochemistry and Health. 4(4). 116-130.
Mehta, N.C., Leg, J.O., Goring, C.A.I., Black, C.A., 1954. Determination of Organic Phosphorus in Soil. I. Extraction method. Proceedings of the Soil Science Society of America 18,: 443-449.
Nadelhoffer, K. J., Aber, J. D. & Melillo, J. M., 1985. Fine roots, net primary production, and soil nitrogen availability: A new hypothesis. Ecology 66, 1377-1390.
Persson, H., Fahey, T.J., 2006. Tree species and mycorrhizal associations influence the magnitude of rhizosphere effects. Ecology
87 (5), 1302-1313.
Piper, C.S., 1994. Soil and Plant Analysis, Inter Science, Adelaide.
Poret- Peterson A. T., Baoming Ji, Engelhaupt E., Gulledge J., 2007. Soil microbial biomass along a hydrologic gradient in a subsiding coastal bottomland forest: Implications for future subsidence and sea-level rise. Soil Biology and Biochemistry 39(2), 641645.
Singh, J. S., Singh, L., 1993. Importance of Short-Lived Components of a Dry Tropical Forest for Biomass Production and Nutrient
Cycling Journal of Vegetation Science, 4 (5), 681-686.
Singh, R.S., Srivastava, S.C., Raghubanshi, A.S., Singh, J.S., Singh, S.P., 1991. Microbial C, N and P in dry tropical savanna:
Effects of burning and grazing. Journal of Applied Ecology 28, 869-878.
SPSS, 1997. SPSS Base 7.5 Application Guide. SPSS Inc., Chicago.
Tripathi, N., Singh, R.S. and Singh, J.S. (2008). Impact of post-mining subsidence on nitrogen transformation in Southern Tropical
Dry Deciduous Forest, India. Environmental Research, Elsevier (in press).
277
POSTALE 2008
Table 1 : Physico-chemical and Biological characteristics of unsubsided forest and, subsided forest microsite
Sl.
Parameters
1
2
pH
>0.2 mm (%)
0.2-0.1 mm (%)
<0.1 mm (%)
Texture
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
WHC (%)
BD (g m-3)
Organic C (g g-1)
Total N (g g-1)
Inorganic N (g g-1)
Organic N (g g-1)
Total P (g g-1)
Nitrate-N
Ammonium-N
Phosphate - P(g g-1)
Nitrification (g g-1mo-1)
N-mineralization (g g-1mo-1)
Microbial N (g g-1)
Fine root biomass (g m-2)
Root Tip (Nos.)
Unsubsided site
Subsided site
6.170.4
671.0
212.4
121.8
32.242.6
1.140.35
1850022
153014
11.52
1518.512
4328
6.20.4
5.60.3
4.60.3
4.90.3
7.80.5
37.34
87.56
405
5.940.4
661.4
20.82.2
13.21.4
33.52.4
1.020.4
1930025
1789516
13.783
1775.64
5314
7.030.5
6.770.4
4.680.4
5.650.4
9.130.4
41.254
1028
466
Table 2 : Correlation coefficients (r) between various selected soil parameters

1
10
1
.991
.986
.947
.959
.963
.978
.993
.964
.922
.992
.926
.987
.925
.979
.935
.932
11
.998
.955
.996
.992
.935
.961
.982
.981
.996
.956
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
.963
.909
.946
.990
.953
.950
.954
*
*
*
*
*
*
.998
.953
.996
.983
.984
.998
.936
.990
.975
Moisture - 1, Organic C - 2, Total N - 3, Total P - 4, Fine root biomass - 5, Root tips count - 6, Nitrification - 7, N-mineralization - 8, NO3- - 9, NH4+ - 10, MBN - 11
* P < 0.01level
278
POSTALE 2008
Fig.
NU
LFR
D
E
M
D FR
SO C
NBO
NM
MB
NI
AN
ST , B D , p H , S W , W H C
Fig. 2 : Box and arrow diagram representing major pools (boxes) and processes (arrows) involved in nitrogen cycling. V=
vegetation, L= litter, LFR= live fine roots, DFR= dead fine roots, SOC= soil organic carbon, NBO= nitrogen bound to organic
matter, MB= microbial biomass, AN= available (inorganic) nitrogen, M= mortality affected by subsidence here, D= early decomposition phase incorporating organic C and organically bound nutrients into soil, E= exudation, NI= nitrogen immobilization, NM= nitrogen mineralization (including nitrification), NU= nitrogen uptake. Major soil physio-chemical variables which affect the processes are ST= soil texture, BD= bulk density, pH, WHC= water holding capacity and SW= soil water (Tripathi et
al., 2008)
279
POSTALE 2008
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT AN INTEGRATIVE APPROACH

TOWARDS CONSERVATION OF BIODIVERSITY
R. S. SINGH, D. PAL, M. K. CHAKRABORTY AND B. K. TEWARY
INTRODUCTION
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is the main tool used nowadays to identify the potential environmental effects of any proposed developmental activity and the possible measures to mitigate these
effects (Glasson et al., 1999). It is usually required by decision makers before allowing certain projects to
proceed (Sutherland, 2000). Generally, an EIA involves a three-step procedure, starting with a screening
process for identifying projects that require an EIA. Then a scoping process is performed to identify the
main issues that need to be addressed. The last step is preparing the EIA and presenting its findings in
an environmental impact statement (EIS) (Glasson et al. 1999).
First EIA implemented in the United States in 1969, EIA has gradually become an integral feature of
planning systems in more than 100 countries (Glasson et al 1999 and Mandelik et al 2005). In India the
EIA based environmental clearance was initially adopted as an administrative measure in 1978-79, for
river valley projects. This was later extended to industrial, thermal power, mining and nuclear projects.
On 27th January, 1994 the MOEF, Govt. of India, New Delhi issued the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) notification making environmental clearance mandatory for 29 categories of developmental
projects.
Projects involving diversion of forest land for any non-forest purpose requires prior approval under the
provisions of the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980. Any mining activity whether opencast or underground
is considered a non-forestry activity and hence prior approval from the Central Government, is required
under the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980. Any renewal of existing mine lease or resumption of mining
also requires a prior approval from the Central Government. All said and done the various statutes remain merely so to a great extent, because most of the time the conservation efforts do not follow the
statute in letter and spirit but merely is an attempt to avoid contravention of the rules.
Consequently, the practice of EIA, has encountered considerable criticism. Reviews of EIAs conducted
in Australia (Warken & Buckley, 1998), Canada (Dickman, 1991), Mexico (Bojorquez-Tapia & Garcia,
1998), The United Kingdom (Lee &Brown, 1992), Ireland (Lee & Dancey, 1993), other European states
(EC, 1996) and even in India, has often demonstrated poor quality, low impact prediction, and weak scientific rigor, although some improvement has been recorded with time (Barker & Wood, 1999). In India,
today the EIA document is prepared based on an elaborate Terms of Reference (TOR) prescribed by
Ministry of Environment and Forest (MOEF) and is project specific. But the biological study is usually
limited to details of Flora & Fauna and list of schedule-I species (if present), along with the plans for their
conservation. There is no requirement for even basic bio-diversity study in terms of species diversity,
genetic diversity or ecosystem diversity.
The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD) comprises of article 14 which requires parties to apply
environmental impact assessment to projects that potentially negatively impact on biodiversity and to
apply appropriate procedures for programmes and polices that potentially negatively impact biodiversity.
Subsequent decisions of the conferences of the Parties to the convention on biological diversity have
recognized that in order to adequately implement this article, further consideration should be given on
how biodiversity can be integrated with impact assessments (CBD, 2001).
POSTALE 2008
A comprehensive conceptual frame work designed to provide an understanding of the causal chains by
which activities lead to impacts, through biophysical and social pathways. The frame work is intended to
accommodate all conceivable biophysical and social impacts. The framework is intended to accommodate all conceivable biophysical and social pathways. The frame work is intended to accommodate all
conceivable biophysical and social impacts (Slootweg et al, 2001).
According to Treweek (1999 the inconsistency of methodologies and of reporting on methodologies and
results has, among other reasons, seriously hampered the accumulation of one body of relevant experience and knowledge in the prediction of impacts on biodiversity. It is hoped that this frame work can provide a tool to promote greater consistency in addressing issues related to biodiversity in EIA. All countries have their own biological, social, legal, and administrative characteristics; it is up to the countries to
take up the challenge to adapt their EIA systems for better conservation and use of biodiversity (Slootweg and Kolhoff, 2003). The framework has been elaborated in detail for the identification of biodiversityrelated impacts. The use of an all-encompassing framework is deliberate, so as to make sure that biodiversity is an integral part of existing impact assessment procedures and legislation. In other words, neither new instrument nor procedure is proposed; the proposed approach can be accommodated within
existing procedures.
In this paper an attempt has been made to study the EIA (Environmental impact assessment) approach
with the intention to improve the performance of the EIA instrument with respect to biodiversity and how
biodiversity can be better embedded in existing EIA systems.
THE GENERAL CONCEPT
The sequence of steps to determine the impacts that may result from a proposed activity. The starting
point of analysis is an activity that can be a biophysical or a social intervention. Slootweg et al (2001) has
proposed the following steps.
A. Biophysical interventions lead to biophysical changes being defined as changes in the characteristics of the recipient media soil, water, air, flora and fauna (e.g. a dam changes river hydrology).
B. Each direct biophysical change can result in a chain of second-order and higher-order biophysical
changes (e.g., a reduction in river flow will result in reduced submersion of downstream floodplains,
which may in turn influence the recharge of groundwater aquifers under these plains, etc.)
C. Projects can also carry out social (Vanclay, 2001) interventions that lead to social change processes being defined as changes in the characteristics of social components (individuals, families,
functional groups, or a society as a whole); the nature of these characteristics can be demographic,
economic, socio-cultural, emancipatory, institutional, land use, etc. (e.g., the construction and operation of a dam can attract migrant workers.)
D. Higher-order social change processes. Each direct social change process can lead to second-order
and higher-order social change processes (e.g., immigration of foreign workers may lead to segregation, which in turn may lead to marginalization).
E. Social change processes lead to biophysical changes. A change in the social characteristics of a
community can lead to biophysical changes (e.g., population growth can lead to occupation and
conversion of new land).
F. Most biophysical changes will only affect the area where the activity is carried out; these are socalled onsite changes. However, a number of biophysical changes will have a wider area of influence and will cause offsite changes. A knowledgeable expert will be capable of determining the
geographical range of influence of these changes. Knowing the potential area of influence, one can
identify the ecosystems land, land-use types that lie within the boundaries of the area of influence.
Different biophysical change, one has to define the area of influence and determine the ecosystems
and land-use types that may potentially be influenced.
281
POSTALE 2008
Project
Interventions
2nd Order
2nd Order
Bio-physical
changes
Social change
processes
F
G
Bio-physical
Impacts
(functions)
Human
Impacts
(values)
Fig. 1 : General Framework (Slootweg et al., 2001)

G.
H.
I.
J.
Each ecosystem or land-use type provides a unique set of functions that are valued by nature. Under the influence of biophysical changes, these functions may change. Impacts are defined as the
changes in the quality or quantity of the goods and services (=functions) provided by an ecosystem
or land-use type (including both biotic and abiotic environment).3
A change in the functions provided by the natural environment will lead to a change in their value
for human society. The function concept is principally anthropocentric, translating nature into functions for human society. Society puts a value on these functions. Biodiversity provides functions
that are converted into use and nonuse values to human society. Values can be expressed in economic or ecological terms.
Social change processes cause impacts (not within the scope of this paper; see van Schooten et
all., 2003).
As human beings or society as a whole are able to respond to impacts, the experience of social
impacts, in some cases, leads to so-called invoked social change processes (e.g., people may decide to move elsewhere after the emergence of social tensions, or when productivity of natural resources diminished).
In this framework, a rigid distinction is being made between changes or change processes and impacts. Biophysical changes and social change processes are defined as being independent of the context in which they occur. If an intervention is known to cause certain changes. These changes will always
occur if a suitable recipient is present. Magnitude and direction of change are determined by the combined characteristics of the intervention and the recipient involved. Biophysical and social change processes can-if the state of technology allows so- be predicted, measured, and quantified by external experts. Outside experts will be capable of defining most functions of known ecosystems or land-use types.
Yet, whether these functions are actually valued by society, and thus should be included in EIA studies,
282
POSTALE 2008
is completely dependent on the societal context. This relates to the norms and value system of a society,
represented by its laws and regulations (customary rules or formalized legislation).
Contrary to changes or change processes, impacts (biophysical as well as social) are considered to be
context-dependent. Functions of the natural environment are determined by the type of ecosystem or
land-use type, where biophysical changes occur, and by the level of recognition of these functions by
society (i.e., their occurrence depends on the context in which one works).One has to know the exact
nature of the ecosystem or land-use type, where biophysical changes occurs, and one has to know the
use that society makes use of these functions (including peoples perception of these functions).
The important consequence of this notion of context dependency is that impacts cannot be determined
by external experts only, but that stakeholders have to be consulted. For the purpose of conservation of
biodiversity, this is of extreme importance because if one does not know the perception of biodiversity
among a society, it will be very difficult to take into account and explain matters related to nature conservation in EIA studies and, even more difficult so, during project implementation. Furthermore, groups in
society may assign different values to biodiversity, which potentially leads to conflicting interests. EIA is
the tool designed to provide insight in these potential conflicts in an early stage, so that alternative, mitigative, or compensatory measures can be taken.
SCOPE OF BIODIVERSITY
A fundamental question is What exactly is considered to be biodiversity and, consequently, what needs
to be put under the heading biodiversity in EIA Procedures and studies?
However, Article 10 of the convention, referring to sustainable use of components of biodiversity, would
require a much wider view on biodiversity. In order to protect and encourage customary use of biological
resources in accordance with traditional cultural practices that are compatible with conservation or sustainable use requirements, many of the functions of nature to which society assigns use values would
fall under the notion of biodiversity. Examples of such functions are:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Production functions that relate to harvestable products such as fish, wood, bush meat, medicinal plants, wild fruits and nuts, etc.
Processing and regulation functions that depend on, for example, organisms that act as pollinators; biological control organisms in fruit plantations; the decomposition of organic material/waste by many species of relatively unknown invertebrates; etc.
Carrying functions provided by local ecosystems that determine the quality, health, and safety of
the environment in which people live (mangroves protect coastal villages against storm surges,
wetlands provide clean water, etc.)
Significant functions such as nature-based leisure and tourism activities, or sites of religious or
scientific interest, etc.
With respect to possible impacts on biodiversity, two questions thus have to be answered in EIA
studies,
For nonuse values related to biodiversity: Does the intended activity affect the physical environment in such a manner or cause such biological losses that it influences the chance of
extinction of cultivars, varieties, and populations of species, or that it changes the quality of
habitats or ecosystems?
For use values derived from biodiversityrelated functions:
283
POSTALE 2008
For production functions: Does the intended activity surpass the maximal sustainable
yield of a resource, population, or ecosystem?
For processing and regulation functions, carrying function, and signification functions:
Does the intended activity surpass the maximum allowable level of disturbance?
How To Define Impacts On Biodiversity

It has already been described how a proposed activity leads to a number of biophysical changes (either
directly, or through social change processes). It has furthermore been demonstrated that, having identified these changes, one can define the geographical area where these changes occur, and thus one can
make an inventory of types of landscapes (natural and semi natural ecosystems and land-use types) that
could be influenced by the proposed activity. Having identified the landscapes, the last step that remains
is to describe these landscapes and identify the possible impacts on biodiversity in these landscapes.
In order to be able to describe potential impacts on biodiversity, one other concept of diversity has to be
introduced- the components of biodiversity. Biophysical changes may affect diversity at genetic, species,
or ecosystem level. The problem, of course, is to identify the mechanism through which the maintenance
of diversity works, and how biophysical changes can be of influence. Based on various sources in the
scientific literature, it is argued here that three essential features of biodiversity provide this missing link.
The approach is based on Noss (1990) classification of biodiversity, elaborated by Le Maitre and
Gelderblom (1998), and further operationalised by Koning and Slootweg (unpublished document). Each
of the three levels of diversity (i.e., genetic, species, and ecosystem level) can be characterized and described in detail by answering three questions that refer to the components of biodiversity.
What is the composition?
How is it organized in space and time?
What are the mechanisms for its creation and maintenance?
Applying The Concept To Practice: Scoping
According to Treweek (2000), in situation where biodiversity information is lacking, terms of reference for
EIA are more likely to omit biodiversity considerations. There is an obvious need for a scoping procedure
that accommodates uncertainties and creates a functional database.
Scoping is the process aimed at determining the kind of information that should be obtained in an EIA
study. Scoping enables the competent authority in the following way:
Guide the study team on significant issues and alternatives to be assessed, how they should be
examined (methods of prediction and analysis, depth of analysis), and according to which guidelines and criteria:
Provide an opportunity for stakeholders to have their interests taken into account in the EIA;
Ensure that the resulting EIS is useful to the decision maker and is understandable to the public.
After all, the main challenge with good scoping is to provide optimum information for informed decision
making.
The following sequence provides an iterative mechanism for scoping, impact assessment, and consideration of mitigation measures, which should be informed by existing information and the available
knowledge among stakeholders (a reference to the steps in Fig. 1):
(a)
(b)
Describe the type of project, its nature, magnitude, location, timing, duration and frequency.
Describe the expected biophysical changes in soil, water, air, flora and fauna (A and B).
284
POSTALE 2008
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
Describe biophysical changes that result from social change processes as a result of the proposed
project (C-E).
Determine the spatial and temporal scale of influence of each biophysical change (F).
Describe ecosystems and land-use types potentially influenced by the biophysical changes identified (F).
Determine for each ecosystem or land-use type if the biophysical changes affect one of the following components of biodiversity: the composition (What is there?) (G).
Identify in consultation with stakeholders the current and potential use functions nonuse functions,
and other longer-term, less tangible benefits of biodiversity provided by the ecosystems or land-use
types and determine the values these functions represent for society (G and H).
Determine which of these functions will be significantly affected by the proposed project, taking into
account mitigation measures.
For each alternative, define mitigation and/or compensation measures to avoid, minimize, or compensate the expected impacts.
With the help of the biodiversity checklist on scoping (Table 1), determine which issues will provide
information relevant to decision making and can realistically be studied.
Provide information on the severity of impacts (i.e., apply weights to the expected impacts for the
alternatives considered). Weigh expected impacts to a reference situation (baseline), which may be
the existing situation, a historical situation, or an external reference situation.
Identify necessary surveys to gather comprehensive information about the biodiversity in the affected area, where appropriate.
The checklist presented in Table 1 provides an overview of all the aspects of biodiversity that may be of
relevance to EIA studies. The table is not intended to expand the required workload, but rather to provide
a selection mechanism to determine which issues are most relevant to study.
The scoping steps a to e have provided information on the type of activities, the biophysical changes
that can realistically be expected, the area under the influence of these biophysical changes, and, consequently, the ecosystems and/or land-use types affected. The combination of the information on expected biophysical changes and the affected ecosystems or land-use types provided insight on the affected components of biodiversity and whether these impacts would occur at genetic, species, or ecosystem level. With the help of the checklist, one now can define the issues to be studied at genetic, species, or ecosystem level. Table 1 is an example of what the checklist on scoping could look like. It has to
be stressed that this is a first preliminary version; the community of ecologists has to take up the challenge to elaborate on this table for the various biomes in the world. Another main challenge is to describe the structuring process(es) of key importance for the maintenance of an ecosystem. An example
of a list of key processes for a number of broadly defined ecosystems is provided in Table 2.
285
POSTALE 2008
Table 1: Issues for scoping on biodiversity

Components of biological diversity
Composition
Structure (temporal)
Levels of
biological
diversity
Genetic
diversity
Minimal
viable
population
(avoid reduction by inbreeding/
gene erosion)
Local cultivars
Cycles with high and low

genetic diversity within a
population
Structural (Spatial : horizontal and Vertical)

Dispersal of natural genetic
variability
Dispersal of agricultural cultivars
Genetically modified organisms

Species
diversity
Species composition, rarity /

abundance, endemism / exotics
Key processes
Exchange of genetic material between populations
(gene flow)
Mutagenic influences
Intra-specific competition
Seasonal, lunar, tidal, diurnal rhythms

(migration,
breeding, flowering, leaf
development, etc.)
Population size
Minimal areas for species to

survive
Regulation
mechanisms
such as predation, herbivory, parasitism, fertility,
mortality, growth rate, reproductive strategy
Essential areas (stepping

stones) for migrating species
Niche requirements within
ecosystem (substrate preference, layer within ecosystem)
Known key species (essential

role)
Conservation status
Ecosystem
diversity
Types and surface area of

eco(sub)systems
Adaptations to/dependency
of regular rhythms: seasonal
Spatial relations between

landscape elements (local
and remote)
Uniqueness/abundance
Adaptations to/dependency
of
irregular
events:
droughts, floods, frost, fire,
wind
Spatial distribution (continuous or discontinuous/patchy)
Succession stadium, existing

disturbances
and
trends
(=autonomous development)
Minimal area for ecosystem

to survive
Vertical structure (layered,
horizontal stratified)
286
Structuring process(es) of
key importance for the
maintenance of the ecosystem itself or for other ecosystems (see Table 2)
POSTALE 2008
Table 2 : Examples of key processes in the formation and /or maintenance of ecosystems (adapted
from de Koning and Slootweg, 1999 unpublished)
Key Ecological Processes
Soil surface stability and soil processes
Soil erosion patterns due to wind
Soil erosion patterns due to water
Erosion patterns of upland area and riverbed
Erosion patterns of soil and vegetation due to wave action
Sedimentation patterns
Replenishment of sand due to up drift sources
Topography and elevation due to wind erosion
Local climate (temperatures) determining plant available
moisture
Seasonal drought/desiccation patterns determining plant
available moisture
Seasonal hydrological situation (evaporation, water
quantity, and current / velocity)
Tidal influence (tidal rhythms, tidal range, and tidal prism)
Permanent waterlogged condition of the soil
Salinity levels and/or brackish water gradient
Water depth, availability of sunlight, and/or thermocline
stability
Regional groundwater flow and groundwater table
(source or sink function of landscape)
Flooding patterns (frequency, duration)
Hydrological processes (vertical convection, currents and
drifts, transverse circulation)
Biological processes in the root system
Protection of soil humus layer by vegetation cover
Canopy density determining light intensity and humidity
Plant-dependent animal reproduction
Animal-dependent plant reproduction
Grazing patterns by herbivorous mammals
Grazing patterns by herbivorous birds
Grazing patterns by herbivorous fish
Grazing patterns by herbivorous marine mammals
Seed dispersal due to water
Seed dispersal by animals (birds, primates)
Pollination due to environmental factors (e.g. wind)
Pollination by animals (insects, birds, mammals)
Production of pelagic and benthic organisms
Primary production by phytoplankton
Nutrient inflow due to environmental factors (i.e., water
runoff, drainage)
Nutrient input by animals
Nutrient cycling due to water movement / rainfall
Nutrient cycling due to fire
Nutrient cycling by juvenile fish
Nutrient cycling by arthropods/insects
Nutrient cycling by invertebrates (earthworms, bivalves,
starfish, crabs, shrimps)
Nutrient cycling by fungi and bacteria
Nutrient cycling by filter feeders
Gallery forest structure providing shade and nutrient
input
Disruption of vegetation structure due to fire
Disruption of vegetation structure due to storms / hurri-
Relevant for Ecosystems

Lowland dryland rainforest, montane tropical forest, coniferous montane forest, coastal dunes
Coastal dunes, degraded land
Desert, coastal dunes, degraded land
Upper, middle, land lower course of rivers and streams
Rocky coastlines and beaches, freshwater lakes, mangroves, and sea
grass beds
Middle and lower course of rivers, floodplains, estuary, tidal flats,
mangrove
Beaches, tidal flats, mangroves
Desert
Desert, rocky coastline
Deciduous forest, non-forested mountains, savannah, steppe, desert
Beach, rivers and streams, freshwater, saline or alkaline lakes, reservoirs
All coastlines, estuary, lagoon, tidal flat, mangrove, sea grass beds
Peat swamp
Lowland river, saline lakes, estuary, mangrove, sea grass beds, coral
reef
Freshwater lake and reservoirs, coral reef, costal sea
Freshwater marsh or swamp, saline or alkaline lakes
Tropical flooded forest, floodplain, freshwater swamp or marsh, mangrove
Coral reef, coastal sea, open (deep) sea
All dryland forests
Lowland tropical rainforest
Lowland tropical rainforest, deciduous forest
Savannah, steppe (grasslands), tropical flooded forest, floodplain,
freshwater swamps or marsh
Freshwater lake, floodplain, tidal flat
Freshwater lake, floodplain
Seagrass beds
Mangrove
Lowland tropical rainforest, tropical flooded forest, freshwater swamp
or marsh
Deciduous forest, mangrove
Lowland tropical rainforest, montane tropical forest, deciduous forest,
mangrove
Saline or alkaline lake or marsh, estuary
Saline or alkaline lake or marsh, coastal sea, open sea
Upper and middle course of rivers, freshwater lake, tropical flooded
forest, tidal flat, sea grass bed
Non-forested mountains, lagoon
Savannah, steppe
Tidal flat, mangrove
Lowland tropical rainforest, savannah, steppe
Montane tropical forest, deciduous forest, coniferous montane forest,
rocky coastline, lagoons, tidal flat, mangrove, coastal sea, open sea
Deciduous forest, savannah, steppe
Coral reef
Upper course of river
Lowland tropical rainforest, montane tropical forest, deciduous forest,
savannah, steppe, tropical forest, floodplain
Lowland tropical rainforest, deciduous forest, coniferous montane
287
POSTALE 2008
canes/ cyclones
Disruption of vegetation structure due to wave action
Disruption of vegetation structure due to land slides/mud
flows
Disruption of vegetation structure by animals (herbivores)
Peat building by decaying vegetation (accumulation rates
versus decomposition rates)
Dynamics of sedimentation, accretion, and grazing of the
coral skeleton
Predation of coral polyps by starfish and fish (parrotfish,
butterfly fish), and smothering of coral polyps
forest, (coconut) beaches, mangrove

(Coconut) beaches, mangrove
Montane tropical forest, coniferous montane forest, nonforested
mountains,
Savannah, range land, sylvi-pastoral associations
Peat swamp
Coral reefs
Coral reefs
DETERMINATION OF ECOLOGICAL QUALITY

Mandelik et al (2005) has assessed the ecological quality of each EIS and its corresponding guidelines with a
simple and straightforward scoring technique. They choose a subset of 28 core criteria used as indicators of
ecological quality (Table 3). For each criterion they examined whether the required information was presented
and scored it accordingly: 1 for adequate reference, 0.5 in cases of serious omissions, and 0 for no reference.
This analysis emphasized four major components of the EIA process: baseline information, impact assessment, mitigation measure, and ecosystem perspective.
Table 3 : The categories and 28 detailed criteria used for determining the quality score of environmental impact statements and guidelines (Mandelik et al 2005).
Category
Baseline information
Ecosystem perspective
Ecological impacts
Mitigation measures
Ecological monitoring
Field survey
Scientific literature referred to
Ecological aspects in the alternatives
Communicating the information
Detailed criteria
Fauna and flora
Species of special concern (rare, endangered, endemic)
Habitats
Nature reserves, critical habitats
Ecosystem structure and function
Biotic and abiotic interactions*
Biodiversity
Regional and National perspective
Habitat loss
Habitat fragmentation
Habitat deterioration
Direct death or removal of species
Species introduction
Indirect effects
Cumulative effects
Landscaping and planting
Design alterations
Animal passages
Transplantations or translocations*
Habitat rehabilitation or recreation
Is there clear reference to ecological Monitoring?
Was a filed survey preformed?
Were any references made to the relevant literature, data bases?
Were any ecological aspects taken into consideration in the alternative
discussion?
Are clear illustration measures presented?
*Two separate criteria presented together.

DISCUSSION
Results of our review of ecological impact assessments show that despite of 3 decades of experience and the
expectations for growing professionalism, major flaws in the identification and analysis of ecological impacts
abound, thereby limiting the value of the EIA process for conservation. It raises two questions: To what extent
do our findings reflect the potential of EIA to advance bio-diversity conservation?
288
POSTALE 2008
What should be done to improve the assessment of ecological impacts of development at the project level? To
address these questions we first discuss the conservation implications and the ways in which the ecological
practice in EISs could be improved and the reasons for the evident failure to use the best practices available.
Baseline information comprised mainly descriptive, non-quantitative data on vascular plants and vertebrates
expected to inhabit the project area and its immediate vicinity. The value of these taxa as biodiversity or disturbance indicators is questionable (Caro and ODoherty, 1999; Hilty and Merenlender, 2000). Similar results have
also emerged in the United Kingdom (Thompson et al, 1997; Byron et al. 2000) and the United States (Atkinson
et al 2000), suggesting that reference to fauna, especially to potential indicator taxa, is a weakness in most
EISs.
Recent development in the field of rapid biodiversity assessment could be beneficial to the EIA process. Standardized inventories based on indicator taxa, higher-level taxa, and morphological feature reduce the time and
expertise needed Kerr et al 2000) and put these inventories within reach of most EISs. At the broad spatial
scale, biodiversity assessments can be based on landscape parameters such as habitat diversity, rarity, and
connectivity (Duelli 1997), readily accessible in the GIS (Geographical Information System) era (Haklay, 1998).
Most EIAs, however, did not refer to these methods or try to systematically evaluate species and ecosystem
diversity. Field surveys exhibited low ecological stands, disregarded spatial and temporal variations, and failed
to apply scientifically based sampling technique (Sutherland, 2000). Therefore, data collected in the EISs are
not useful for long-term monitoring or for local capacity building. Ecosystem and landscape perspective in conservation planning are critical for the long-term protection of biodiversity (Simberloff, 1998)
We rarely found reference to the major threats to biodiversity with respect to habitat loss, fragmentation, and
alien invasive species.
CONCLUSION
The most noteworthy observation of the study is that the major shortcomings of ecological impact assessment
are mainly rooted in the scoping process of the EIA. To improve the standards of ecological guidelines, quality
might be the most potent tool in upgrading the ecological impact assessment. Although scoping is by essence
a value judgment because it is based on societal norms and is inherently political in nature, there are many
ways to improve this process including greater use of remote sensing and GIS.
In the recent past the faculty of conservation biology has improved in leaps and bounds as a quickly growing,
rigorous scientific discipline. But the ecological impact assessment study remains a laggard till date. The impact of development in the field of conservation biology is rarely reflected (if at all) in the scoping process of
EIA. The need of the hour is well crafted and specific guidelines, indicating a set of limited but critical parameters that need to be assessed and monitored to create a state of the art EIS.
The objective is not to create impediments in the path of speedy implementation of the projects but to create a
database for future reference and long term conservation efforts through EIA.
REFERENCE
Atkinson, S.F, S. Bhatia, F.A. Schoolmaster, and W.T. Waller. 2000. Treatment of biodiversity impacts in a sample of US environmental impact
statements. Impact Assessment and project Appraisal 18:271-284
Barker, A. and Wood, C. (1999). An evaluation of EIA systems performance in eight EU countries. Environmental Impact Assessment Review
19:387-404.
Bojorquez-Tapia, L.A. and Garcia, O. (1998). An approach for evaluating EIAs- deficiencies of EIA in Mexico. Environmental Impact Assessment Review 18:217-240.
Byron, H.J. Treweek, J.R. Sheate, W.R. and Thompson, S. (2000). Road developments in the UK: an analysis of ecological assessment in
environmental impact statements produced between 1993 and 1997. Journal of Environmental planning and Management 43:71-97.
Caro, T.M., and G. O Doherty. 1999. On the use of surrogate species in conservation biology. Conservation Biology 13:805-814
De Koning, P.C. Sootweg, R. (1999). Key ecological processes in the assessment of impacts on biodiversity. Leiden: Mekon Ecology. Unpublished document; available from corresponding author.
IUCN (2001). Red list categories: version 3.1 Prepared by IUCN Species Survival Commission. Gland, Switzerland, Cambridge, UK.
Dickman, M. (1991). Failure of an environmental impact assessment to predict the impact of mine tailings on Canadas most northerly hypersaline lake. Environmental Impact Assessment Review 11:171-180.
Duelli, P.1997. Biodiversity evaluation in agricultural landscapes: an approach at two different scales. Agriculture Ecosystems & Environment
62:81-91.
289
POSTALE 2008
EC (European Commission), (1996). Evaluation of the performance of the EIA process. EC, Brussels.
Glasson, J., Therivel, R. and Chadwick, A. (1999). Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment, 2nd Edition, UCL Press, London.
Haklay, M., E. Feitelson, and Y. Doytsher. 1998. The potential of a GIS-based scoping system: an Israeli proposal and case study. Environmental Impact assessment Review 18:439-459.
Hilty, J., and A. Merenlender. 2000. Faunal indicator taxa selection for monitoring ecosystem health. Biological Conservation 92:185-197.
Kerr, J.T. Sugar, A. and Packer, L. (2000). Indicator taxa, rapid biodiversity assessment, and nestedness in an endangered ecosystem. Conservation Biology 14: 1726-1734.
Lee N. and Dancey, R. (1993). The quality of environmental impact statements in Ireland and the United Kingdom: a comparative analysis.
Project appraisal 8:31-36.
Lee, N. and Brown, D. (1992). Quality control in environmental assessments. Project Applications 6:31-36
Le Maitre, D.C. Gelgerblom, C.M. (1998). Biodiversity impact assessment: putting theory into practice. IAIA Paper. New Zealand: Christchurch.
Mandelik, Y. Dayan, T. and Geitelson, E. (2005). Planning for biodiversity: the role of ecological impact assessment. Conservation Biology.
19:(4)1254-1261
Noss, R..F. (1990). Indicators for monitoring biodiversity. Conserv Biol; 355-64.
Simberloff, D. 1998. Flagships, umbrellas, and keystones: is single species management pass in the landscape area? Biological conservation
83:247-257
Stootweg, R. and Kolhoff, A. (2003). A generic approach to integrate biodiversity considerations in screening and scoping for EIA. Environmental Impact Assessment Review. 657-681
Sutherland, W.J. (2000). The conservation handbook: research, management and policy. Blackwell Science. Oxford, U.K.
Thompson, S. Treweek, J.R. and Thurling, D.J. (1997). The ecological component of environmental impact assessment: a critical review of
British environmental statements. Journal of Environmental Planning and Management 40:157-171.
Treweek, J. (2000). Biodiversity in development. Biodiversity and EIA for development cooperation: workshop conclusions. EC/EU Tropical
Biodiversity Advisors Group (TBAG), EC/ DFID/IUCN.
Vanclay, F. (2001) Conceptualizing social impacts. Environmental Impact Assessment Review 22:1-29
van Schooten, M.L.F. Vanclay, F and Slootweg, R. (2003). Conceptualizing social change processes and social impacts. In: Becker, H.A.
Vanclay, F. (eds.) International handbook of social impact assessment: conceptual and methodological advances. Cheltenham: Edward
Elgar. (In press)
Warken, J. and Buckley, R. (1998). Scientific quality of tourism environmental impact assessment. Journal of applied Ecology. 35: 1-8.
290
POSTALE 2008
PROBLEMS ON VARIOUS ASPECTS OF PLACER MINING IN INDIA AND

SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT STRATEGIES TO OVERCOME
VIJETA JHA AND M. SUNDARARAJAN
INTRODUCTION
Beach placer mining is, in fact, not a mining but it simply collects beach minerals from on-shores as
well as off-shores. Heavy mineral placers are important economic deposits of resistant and high
specific gravity minerals formed by the process of mechanical concentration due to weathering,
transportation and deposition in suitable locations. Important concentrations of these minerals occur
in beaches, sand dunes, buried channels, shallow offshore areas, back-waters and also in the relict
sand bodies. Commonly occurring placer minerals are magnetite, ilminite, monazite, zircon, columbite, cassterite, scheelite, wolframite etc. These deposits occur in the form of lenses, stringers, and
beds up to 3m thick. Minerals separated from the basin by weathering and erosion are transported
by rivers and deposited in suitable environments. Sorting takes place during transportation according
to size, shape, and specific gravity of the minerals and controlled by processes as currents, waves,
sea level changes etc. The jigging action of waves and surf tends to concentrate the heavy minerals
in certain zones in the beaches and also in the submerged areas formed during the Pleistocene
when the sea level was much below the present level. The economic potential of the placers have
been proved beyond doubt. It is just like any other agricultural activities and it is only seasonal. The
Government has declared these activities as mining activity in order to enhance the revenue. Central
Institute of Mining & Fuel Research (CIMFR), which is one of the most prominent R&D institute of
CSIR, having expertise in the field of mining technology and mine environment has taken an initiative
to streamline the R&D activities useful to the placer mining industries. Consecutively, many other
research organizations and scientific bodies also had special sessions in the seminars to discuss
about various issues of placer mining. The main motive of all the seminars was to pack together the
efforts and experience of other organizations, having expertise in various aspects of placer mining to
improve the exploration, instrument design and mineral separation techniques in order to promote
the placer mining industries in India. The paper comprises the thrust of the seminars, special sessions and brain storm meetings organized in the last few years by various organizations in order to
have a vision for the forthcoming years with special focus on important aspects of placer mining
along with the complex problems and go-ahead solutions.
IMPORTANT ASPECTS OF PLACER MINING
The activities such as exploration, exploitation, enrichment, environment, economy & market, education, empowerment & policy and establishment of R&D are the important aspects of placer mineral
mining. The exploration involves evaluation of the placer deposit using different methods such as
visual evaluation, reserve estimation through sampling and characterization studies and quantification of minerals using GPR modeling studies. The exploitation involves selection of suitable equipments or modifying the existing equipments for Indian coastal and geo-mining conditions. The enrichment involves development of suitable flow sheets depending upon the physiochemical characteristics of placer deposits, designing of effective processing units and development technology to
produce value added products. The aspect environment has to ensure the air quality and groundwater quality in the mining zone and its surrounding. It also involves need for reclamation of flora and
fauna lost in the coastal area when deposits would be exploited in dune areas and other ecosensitive areas. The econometric analysis and market survey are essential during the mining of
placer mineral deposits in order to understand the demand of the international market and accordingly to develop new technology for value added products. In many cases of placer mining, the industries are facing problems from the local communities. Lessons on placer mining and the available
advanced technology to control environmental impacts should be introduced in school level in order
to avoid local interference due to unawareness. Public awareness programme among the local in-
POSTALE 2008
habitants about the benefits of placer mining may be made. The existing legislation and policy may
be revised suitably tuned to the placer mining industry to avoid the time delay in getting lease. The
research and academic institutions may be empowered to regularly monitor the placer deposits of
the country and to issue the necessary certificates of testing of minerals and the mine plan etc to
apply for mine lease. More R&D activities may be encouraged by the concerned ministries of State
and Central Government. The important aspects of placer mining are given in Fig 1.
Fig. 1: The Aspects Of Placer Mining

SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT STRATEGIES
Exploration: As a few institutions are overseeing the placer deposits in the country, it limits the progress of the placer mining activities as the institutions face constraints in prospecting placer deposits
in the widespread areas. There is a need for introducing and supporting selected institutions, new
exploration techniques such as application of Ground Penetrating Radar, developing modeling approach to make use of the the GPR data, to initiate and encourage wider application of GIS based
decision making system etc.
Exploitation: Placer mining is usually desirable in dune areas adequately away from the coastline
due to its dry condition. Therefore, the impact of placer mining on coastal & marine flora and fauna
and other potential sites of the country should be assessed.
Enrichment: Characterization and Pilot Plant studies are to be carried out for low grade placer deposits in the country. Appropriate and suitable flow-sheets for different types of placer deposits in
non-mining areas may be developed or updated with newer equipments to indicate the scope and
possibilities of placer mineral development in virgin areas. New and innovative processing equipments have to be developed in order to process the offshore deposits. User friendly database on
physiochemical characteristics of various placer deposits, recommended processing equipments and
suitable processing sheets should be developed and made available for industry. Value addition to
raw minerals should be maximized with up gradation of process technologies to international standards. The innovative materials and value added products, out of the placer minerals are one of the
highly sought after areas of interest for which lots of R&D efforts are necessary. Adequate funding
and encouragement is necessary to attain and propagate the resources. A state-of art KnowledgeBase on the subject should also be created in this regard.
292
POSTALE 2008
Environment: Most of the beach mineral operations involve handling of radio-active mineral Monazite. The beach mineral industry is subject to far more challenging areas of environmental protection
and stringent regulatory control. Being mostly on eco-fragile coastal areas, this sector attracts the
restrictions for Coastal Regulatory Zones (CRZ) also. Thus there is a need for support from the scientific community to make our beach mining operations really eco-friendly and to prevent from affecting the environment adversely.
Economy and Market: India is considered as a risky country for making investment and it is necessary to bring awareness about the possibility of much higher financial returns in this country and the
faster growing opportunity for marketing the products to attract more investors. Econometric modeling of placer mineral products and marketing analysis needs a data-base consisting the details of
type of mineral products, quantity, price rate and the market demand etc. and techno-economic feasibility analysis. Development of home-made know-how and amenities to provide cost effective services through the laboratories dedicated for R&D activities of placer mineral mining must be given
confidence for which, the concerned Ministries may like to invest more in the selected laboratories to
encourage development of Indian expertise and widen the network of indigenous services required
for accelerated growth of this industry.
Education and Awareness Programme: Since the placer mining has an important role in the economic development of the country, the techno-academic programs have to be made more comprehensive by the authorities of the State Educational Boards and councils. Interest has to be generated
in the study and application of geosciences and geostatistics with special focus on coastal placer
mineral products and their beneficiations. Special programmes for linking the students with scientists
may be introduced. General public must be taught through awareness programmes on scientifically
oriented exploration, exploitation, possible environmental impacts and available mitigative measures
to prevent or restore the coastal environment along with the anticipated socio-economical benefits to
the society due to the placer mining activities. This may help to mitigate prevalent misconceptions of
the local community and gain cooperation for successful mining activity.
Empowerment and Policy: The Government of India has to recognize some of the research institutions or universities for carrying out necessary analytical and testing work and issuing certificates
prior to obtaining mining leases, mining plan and environmental clearances. The reorganized institutions must be brought to the knowledge of the placer mining Industries through Gazette of the Indian
Government. The panorama of beach sand mining in most of the leases, say for garnet sands, is no
more complicated than mining of construction sands from riverbeds. At the same time it is recognized that where the deposits contain radioactive minerals like monazite, lot more precautions have
to be taken. The Govt. is therefore urged to take necessary action for rubbing all unnecessary rules
and regulations for providing statutory permits and the requirement for Environmental Impact Assessment & Environmental Management Plan (EIA & EMP) may be decided accordingly, so as not
to impose statutory controls where they are not necessary.
The coastal states would be more benefited from the placer mineral industrial activities. The respective State Govt. should thus, show long term interest to promote exploration of minerals in the state
to introduce best technologies to ensure higher efficiencies of operation, mineral conservation etc.
The state Govt. may allocate a portion of royalty for supporting R&D in placer mineral development
and rehabilitation programs for the local communities as a legislative measure. The Industries desire
the need of rationalizing and moderating the royalty rates for beach minerals to improve their competitiveness in the international markets and to make value added products affordable by the downstream industries. After the liberalization of beach sand minerals from the lease area, it is necessary
to review the relevant provisions of Mineral Concession Rules (MCR) and other legislative measures
on the preparation of geological reserve evaluation report, carrying out analytical works and issue of
certificate on mineral composition etc. and make them broad based. In addition to the traditional
Geological Survey of India (GSI), AMD and IBM, other specialized and competent national laboratories and marine research centers, which have been contributing considerably in the evaluation and
exploration of placer deposits could be considered for inclusion in section of 2A (MCR) and to be
293
POSTALE 2008
authorized to issue necessary certificates to entrepreneurs for placer mineral industry. Such a provision, besides being a supplementary support for evaluation and analytical work for the post placer
mining lease areas, may also stimulate the research institutions, universities and the industries to be
mutually supportive.
As the applications for mine leases are increasing in number, there is a need for streamlining the
processing of the applications in a time bound manner. The state Govts of the coastal mineral rich
states and the concerned central Govt departments are requested to ensure that the mining lease,
environmental and forest clearance applications are disposed off within a maximum period of one
year. The time limit should strictly be held on. Approval of Mine Plan from IBM and NOC from AMD
require precise area certificate from the state Govt. This should be within a period of six months from
the date of application. Many coastal placer mineral deposits fall under the notified areas of either
social forestry or reserve forest or aquaculture development. The state Govts must look into the
value and benefits of these rich deposits and appropriate strategy should be worked out to lease
these areas for placer mineral development with a rider to restore the land for other economic activities after the one time mining activity is over. It is felt that the present prohibitions and restrictions
imposed on mining of beach minerals need to be further rationalized. The criteria of exempting only
rare minerals not available outside CRZ area often creates interpretational confusion and leads to
delay. It would be more rational if the criteria for permission is based on economically mineable reserves of required concentration and industrial demand as compared to similar mineral occurrences
in the hinterland. Similarly, there is a need to review the present minimum lease sizes for seeking
environmental clearance related to mining of coastal sands and enhance the ceilings to a minimum
of 50.0 hectares.
Under the Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) Notification, the area within 200 meters from High Tide
Line (HTL) in CRZ III is classified as no development area, which needs a relook. Instead of imposing a total ban, the ground realities in each area/ District/ State may be carefully examined and if
need be, suitable sub zones created or suitable safety provisions introduced by the local authorities.
Such pragmatic zoning would lead to better utilization of the local resources, without sacrificing ecological needs of the coastal stretches. Definitely, the reclamation of the mined out areas and simultaneous green belt development to completely eliminate the effects of mining should be insisted
upon. The MOEF in consultation with the State Directorate of Environment / Pollution Control Boards
and the AMD, may bring out a clear list of environmentally fragile areas/ localities in the CRZ which
are considered out of bounds for any mining. While doing so, the reserves potential, long term benefits vis--vis the local environmental conditions may be reckoned. This is an urgent need. The Industry feels that the present level of charges levied for measurement of radiation and issue of monazite
test certificate to proceed with the clearance of the export consignments is very high and needs to be
reviewed favorably. Mineral Industry representatives feel that the introduction of royalty on advalorem basis instead of per tonne basis and the method of reckoning the value of minerals sold
have affected the producers adversely and some of their claims for review and refunds have been
pending for long. While the individual mines have been advised to seek redressal of their grievances
with the Authorities concerned, it is generally recommended that during the next round of royalty
fixation by the Central Govt. in consultation with the State Governments and Industry representatives, the constraints faced by the Beach Mineral Mines may be viewed sympathetically so that their
competitiveness is not eroded. The ceilings on areas for grant of Prospecting License (PL) and Mining Leases (ML) at 25 sq. kms are too small for placer minerals, which occur in the form of thin layers spread over long stretches of the beach or hinterland. The lease areas may be enhanced to ensure minimum 50 years of life for value addition projects and minimum 30 years for recoverable reserves for mining projects. It is suggested that value addition projects be granted a minimum 100 sq
kms and only mineral producing projects a minimum 50 sq kms of lease-holds for mining the beach
minerals.
Establishment of Research & Development: Placer mineral research & development may be recognized as a thrust area in view of the abundant untapped resources in our country. Govt should
come forward to allocate more funds for the creation of R&D facilities and also for commissioning
294
POSTALE 2008
more R&D studies, especially in the field of developing value addition technology suited for the type
of minerals available in our country. Continued emphasis may be given for value addition studies
and development of futuristic products by inviting research proposals, from related CSIR laboratories
and academic institutions. It is recommended that the central and state Govts should extend necessary support to R&D institutions through concerned Ministries of Beach Placer Mineral Development
to strengthen the infrastructure facilities towards placer mining beneficiation and value addition to
coastal placer minerals. The mining industry should also support the concerned R&D institutions and
universities by sponsoring projects for field investigations, technology development for mining, mineral beneficiation and value addition besides studies on mineral economics, environmental and social impact etc.
There is a substantial need for R&D projects in the exploration and exploitation aspects of beach
placers. These efforts should emphasize on mineral conservation, economic and eco-friendly exploitation, while ensuring tuneful development of the densely populated habitations. Towards greater
interaction between the Mining industry and R&D institutes, periodic Brain Storming Sessions are to
be organized. They should be oriented to encourage transfer of modern eco-friendly technologies to
solve existing problems of the placer mining industry. The studies related to coastal dynamics and
near shore oceanographic processes, EIA, demarcation of high water line etc., the mining companies should consult National Institute of Oceanography, National Institute of Ocean Technology,
OSTCs (DOD), or Marine Geology Departments of different Universities which will be helpful to the
State Governments to protect the coastal areas. Efforts should be made to bridge the gap between
scientists and technocrats of industry by arranging periodic meets. In this connection, a network can
also be established with foreign companies for technology transfer.
CONCLUSION
In many countries, the placer mineral mining, especially, off-shore mining is successfully being carried out. In our country, such efforts are limited due to lack of ample knowledge on complex marine
geo-mining conditions and also due to lots of hurdles in getting lease area for mining and clearing
EIA/EMP. Moreover, as there is no separate legislation for placer mining at present, the government
considers the placer mining as a kind of the mining activities, whereas the placer mining is entirely
different from the normal mining operations. Therefore, there is a need for either separate legislation
or exceptions from existing superfluous rules, which are not found feasible to apply for placer mineral
mining industries. Despite the fact that our country has expertise to carryout offshore mineral exploration for placers by adopting advance technologies, mining of these placers in different areas under
varied marine geo-mining conditions is yet to be developed. Compared to the technologies adopted
in other countries, no technology may yield optimum efficiency, as our marine geo-mining condition
is entirely different from them. Acquiring knowledge in coastal mining both on onshore and offshore
areas would benefit the scientific community in the country to develop new technologies in mining
and mineral processing fields.
Through the development of marine mineral mining and advanced technologies of allied value-added
products, the existing policy may be restructured to attract huge investments to the tune of about
4000 crores by the multi-nationals. Even if they are not encouraged, half of the amount can be anticipated to be achieved as cash flow through placer mineral marketing per year. Policies, legislations and strategies must be modified and new guidelines must be worked out to ease the ecofriendly coastal marine activities. In such condition, coastal mineral production would dominate the
cash flow of the country in the next decades.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The Authors are thankful to Dr.Amalendu Sinha, Director [Acting], Central Institute of Mining & Fuel
Research, Dhanbad, for his kind permission to present this paper. Thanks are also due to
Dr.V.J.Loveson, Scientist & Head, Beach Placer Mining Department for his valuable support for preparing the article.
295
POSTALE 2008
REFERENCES
Proceedings of seminar on Beach Placer Minerals, Kanyakumari during 25th and 26th Aug., 2001.
Proceedings of National Workshop and Sem. on Sustainable Development of Coastal Placer Minerals (PLACER-2004), during
Jan. 31st Jan to 2nd Feb., 2004.
Proceedings of National Sem. on Development Planning of Coastal Placer Minerals (PLACER-2005), during 26th & 27th Oct.,
2005.
Proceedings of National Sem. on Exploration, Exploitation, Enrichment and Environment of Coastal Placer Minerals (PLACER2007), during Jan 25 & 26 Mar., 2007.
Proceedings of Intl. Sem. on Mineral Processing Technology (MPT-2008), Jointly organized by Indian Institute of Mineral Engineers, Jamshedpur and Interdisciplinary Science & Technology (Formerly RRL), Trivandrum during April 22-24, 2008.
296

POSTALE 2008 Proceedings

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

POSTALE 2008 Proceedings

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Policies, Statutes &

National Seminar on Policies, Statutes & Legislation in Mines

National Seminar on Policies, Statutes & Legislation in Mines

Proceedings of the NATIONAL SEMINAR held on Dec 20-21 2008

POLICIES, STATUTES &

CENTRAL INSTITUTE OF MINING & FUEL RESEARCH

Mr. M. M. Sharma, Chairman

Dr. Amalendu Sinha

Mr. Achyuta Krishna Ghosh

Dr. (Mrs.) Arati Nandi

Dr. Mohan Prasad

Mr. Santosh Kumar Ray

Dr. Aditya Kumar Patra

Mr. S. L. Chakraborty, Chairman

Mr. Ch. Divaker

Mr. Arun Kumar

Mr. S. Narasing Rao, IAS

Dr. Amalendu Sinha

Mr. Achyuta Krishna Ghosh

Dr. (Mrs.) Arati Nandi

Dr. Mohan Prasad

Dr. Pramod Kumar Arya

Mr. Santosh Kumar Singh

Mr. Subhasis Biswas

Dr. Aditya Kumar Patra

Mr. Dilip Kumbhakar

Mr. Prabhat Kumar Mondal

Ms. Joyitta Banerjee1

Mr. Vikas Kumar Sinha1

Mr. Vivek Kumar1

Mr. Kumar Kunal Nanbetiya1

Mrs. Twisha Adhikary**

Mr. Ranjit Chaurasia1

Mr. Debjit Pal**

Mr. Anand Prakash1

Ms. Anjali Kumari**

Research Fellow, CIMFR, Dhanbad

** Research Fellow, NISM, Dhanbad

National Seminar on Policies, Statutes & Legislation in Mines

POLICIES, STATUTES & LEGISLATION IN MINES SOME POINTS TO

ISSUES OF SAFETY IN OPEN-PIT MINES - QUO VADIS?

SAFETY STATUTE FOR EXPANDING MINING INDUSTRY OF INDIA

R&R FOR MINING INDUSTRY NEEDS A SEPARATE NATIONAL POLICY

IMPACT OF CHANGING SOCIO-LEGAL SCENARIO ON LAND

LEGISLATION & PROCEDURE FOR THE COMMENCEMENT OF A CAPTIVE

POLICIES, LEGISLATIONS AND STATUTES FOR OPENCAST MINES OF

INNOVATIVE CONCEPT OF ENERGY SAVING BY USING FRP BLADES IN

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT STRATEGY

ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MINES CASE STUDY OF MALANJKHAND

FORMULATION OF GUIDELINES ON INSTUMENTATION VIS--VIS

THROTTLES TO SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT OF SMALL-SCALE

RESETTLEMENT AND REHABILITATION A SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY

MINERALOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PARTICULATE MATTER A

LEGISLATIVE STATUS FOR VIABLE AND EQUITABLE BALANCE

DUST MANAGEMENT PLAN IN MINES

REMOTE SENSING A REVIEW OF ITS APPLICATION IN MINING AND

POLICY REQUIREMENTS FOR CLOSURE OF (ABANDONED) MINES

CLOSURE PLANNING FOR MINES -- AN APPRAISAL

DESIGN OF LIGHTING SYSTEM IN SURFACE MINES A NEW STRATEGY

MINE SAFETY MEASURES IN INDIA WITH SPECIFIC REFERENCE TO

LEADERSHIP AND CULTURE THE KEY TO SAFETY PERFORMANCE

A PROACTIVE MASTER PLAN FOR SUSTAINABLE AND ECO-FRIENDLY